JP2012034928A - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a Pachinko game machine capable of detecting a fraud using a magnet.SOLUTION: This Pachinko game machine can detect a magnet approaching four general winning holes 2101 of a side winning hole member 2100 in an area RA, or a first detecting area of a magnetic sensor 3345, and also detect a magnet approaching an upper-stage rolling surface 2334b and a lower-stage rolling surface 2335a of a center generator 2300, and a first operation-start hole 2001, a second operation-start-hole 2002, and a large winning hole 2003 of an attacker unit 2000 in an area RB, or a second detecting area of the magnetic sensor 3345.

Description

  The present invention relates to a pachinko gaming machine to which fraud countermeasures are taken.

  Conventionally, pachinko machines (pachinko gaming machines) have been proposed in which a center case (center accessory device) having a liquid crystal display is disposed at a substantially central position of a game area defined on the game board (for example, a pachinko game machine). Patent Document 1). The center case of the pachinko machine described in Patent Document 1 is provided with a warp entrance that receives a game ball flowing down the game area, and the game ball received at the warp entrance is a ball guide surface (shelf). A warp passage is provided for rolling and guiding the ball, and when the game ball rolling on the ball guide surface flows out of the ball guide surface into the game area, the symbol start means (start prize opening) disposed below the center case It is configured so that it can be easily dropped into the symbol starting means by falling to the vicinity of the upper end.

JP 2002-346075 A (paragraph [0017] and paragraphs [0027] to [0030])

  However, in the pachinko machine described in Patent Document 1, when a game ball flowing down the game area is received at a warp entrance provided in the center case, it is guided to a ball guide surface that makes it easier to enter the symbol starting means. Therefore, there is a possibility that an illegal act (so-called “magnet goto”) is performed in which a game ball flowing down the game area is guided to the warp entrance by a magnet and passed through the warp passage.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a situation, The place made into the objective is to provide the pachinko game machine which can detect the misconduct by a magnet goto.

  Effective solutions for achieving the above-described object will be described below. In addition, the effect | action etc. are demonstrated as needed. In addition, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the embodiment of the invention is also shown as appropriate, but is not limited at all.

(Solution 1)
A pachinko gaming machine in which a plurality of receiving ports capable of receiving game balls that are launched by a ball hitting device and flow down a game area defined by a game board are arranged at predetermined positions in the game area, and are rectangular boxes And detecting the magnetism in the first detection region having a directivity that is more sensitive in the vertical direction than the horizontal direction with respect to the one detection side surface of the rectangular box shape, and the one detection side surface Magnetic detection means for detecting magnetism in a second detection region having a directivity that is more sensitive in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction with respect to the other detection side surface opposite to the first detection side; A position at which the first specific reception port is located in the first detection region, and a position at which the first specific reception port is disposed among the plurality of reception ports; Placed in different positions A magnet that is disposed at a predetermined position on the back side of the game board so as to be a position where the second specific reception port enters the second detection area, and approaches the first specific reception port; A pachinko machine characterized by detecting a magnet approaching a specific receiving port.

  In this pachinko gaming machine, a plurality of receiving ports that can receive game balls that are launched by a ball striking device and flow down a game area that is partitioned into a game board are arranged at predetermined positions in the game area.

  The pachinko gaming machine further includes magnetic detection means. This magnetic detection means has a rectangular box shape, and detects magnetism in a first detection region having a directivity having a higher sensitivity in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction with respect to one detection side of the rectangular box shape. In addition, it is possible to detect magnetism in the second detection region having a directivity that is more sensitive in the vertical direction than the horizontal direction with respect to the other detection side opposite to the one detection side. .

  The magnetic detection means is arranged such that the first specific reception port of the plurality of reception ports is located within the first detection region, and the first specific reception port among the plurality of reception ports is arranged. A magnet that is disposed at a predetermined position on the back side of the game board and approaches the first specific reception port so that the second specific reception port that is disposed at a position different from the position is within the second detection area. And a magnet approaching the second specific receiving port can be detected.

  As described above, the magnet that approaches the first specific receiving port can be detected in the first detection region of the magnetic detection unit, and the second specific receiving port approaches in the second detection region of the magnetic detection unit. A magnet can be detected. Therefore, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts caused by magnet goto.

  In this embodiment, for example, the hit ball launching device 650 in FIG. 68 corresponds to the hit ball launching device, the game board 4 in FIG. 97 corresponds to the game board, the game area 605 in FIG. 97 corresponds to the game area, and FIG. 105, the general winning port 2101 in FIG. 105, the first starting port 2001, the second starting port 2002, and the big winning port 2003 in FIG. 104 correspond to the receiving port, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 in FIG. 1 is the pachinko gaming machine. 163, the left side surface 3345a in FIG. 163 corresponds to one detection side surface, the region RA in FIG. 215 corresponds to the first detection region, and the right side surface 3345b in FIG. 163 corresponds to the other detection side surface. A region RB 215 corresponds to a second detection region, and a magnetic sensor 3345 in FIG. 163 corresponds to a magnetic detection unit.

(Solution 2)
The pachinko gaming machine according to Solution 1, wherein a magnetic detection signal is input to notify that the magnetism detection unit has detected a magnet approaching the first specific receiving port and / or a magnet approaching the second specific receiving port. A control board having an input circuit, wherein the input circuit of the control board is disconnected from or disconnected from the wiring for electrical connection with the magnetic detection means. A pachinko gaming machine configured to maintain a logic state when the magnetic detection signal is input when the detection signal is not input to the control board. In this way, even if the wiring that electrically connects the control board and the magnetic detection means is disconnected or removed so that the person who performs the magnet operation does not detect the action, the input circuit includes the first This is because the logic state is maintained when the magnetic detection signal indicating that the magnet approaching the specific receiving port of the magnet and / or the magnet approaching the second specific receiving port is detected is input. Can be reliably detected.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the ON signal from the magnetic sensor 3345 in FIG. 216 corresponds to the magnetic detection signal, the main control board 4100 in FIG. 172 corresponds to the control board, and the magnetic sensor input circuit 4100z in FIG. It corresponds to.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts caused by a magnet.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a side view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a top view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko game machine. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main part frame, game board, and door frame which constitute a pachinko gaming machine. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit, (B) is a rear perspective view of a door frame base unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left unit of the side speaker electrical decoration unit in a door frame base unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 17 from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right unit of the side speaker electrical decoration unit in a door frame base unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 19 from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the ball | bowl feeding unit in a door frame base unit. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the part of the joint unit in a door frame base unit, (B) is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows a joint unit. (A) is a front perspective view of a top lamp illumination unit, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit. It is a perspective view which shows a top lamp electrical decoration unit from diagonally lower front. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles a top lamp electric decoration unit for every main structure, and shows from the front, (B) is an exploded perspective view which shows (A) after. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles the top lamp reflector unit in a top lamp electrical decoration unit, and shows from the front with a top lamp base. FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 26 later. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the left rotation lamp in a top lamp electrical decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the right rotation lamp in a top lamp electrical decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the center rotary lamp in a top lamp electrical decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of a plate unit. It is a back perspective view of a plate unit. It is a top view of a dish unit. It is AA sectional drawing in FIG. It is a rear view in the state which removed the plate back plate of the plate unit. It is a perspective view shown later in the state which removed the plate back plate and ball rental unit of a plate unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a tray unit for every main component, and shows from the front. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 37 from the rear. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles the dish unit main body in a dish unit, and shows from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows FIG. 39 from back. It is a rear view which shows the 1st ball removal mechanism in a dish unit. It is a perspective view which shows the 2nd ball removal mechanism in a dish unit later. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the operation button unit in a plate unit. It is a bottom view of the state which removed the operation button unit board | substrate of the operation button unit in a plate unit. It is a bottom perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the dish unit from below. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the main button of the operation button unit in a plate unit. It is sectional drawing of the handle apparatus attached to the door frame. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between the operation handle part which comprises a handle apparatus, and a joint unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of the operation handle part in a handle device. It is an operation | movement figure for demonstrating operation | movement of an operation handle part and a joint unit. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and the hit ball | bowl launching apparatus provided in a main body frame. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and a hit ball | bowl launcher. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a tray unit, (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the 2nd ball extraction port in a tray unit, and the flow of game ball. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the horizontal ball | bowl inflow port in a dish unit, and a storage tray. It is a front perspective view of a glass unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a glass unit and shows from the front. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 56 later. It is a front view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a rear view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a side view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which pivotally supported the main body frame which attached components to the outer frame from the front. It is a rear view of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame which attached components. It is the cross-sectional top view of the pachinko gaming machine cut | disconnected by the horizontal line of the middle (main control board box part) of the pachinko gaming machine. It is the perspective view (A) of the whole hitting ball | bowl launcher, and the perspective view (B) of the state which removed the firing motor part. It is a disassembled perspective view of a hit ball launching device. It is the front view (A) which shows the relationship between a hit ball | bowl launcher and a firing rail, and a perspective view (B) of a launch motor part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is not operating the operation handle | steering-wheel part, and a firing rail. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is operating the operation handle | steering-wheel part, and a firing rail. They are a top view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C), and a front view (B) AA sectional view (D) of the slide member provided in the ball striking device. FIG. 3 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of a prize ball tank. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of pachinko game machine 1 which shows the relation of a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball passage unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the relationship between a main body frame, a ball path unit, and a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of a prize ball unit. It is a rear view for demonstrating the relationship between the payout motor and the sprocket as a payout member. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a prize ball unit and a full tank unit. It is a perspective view of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a full tank unit. It is a partially broken perspective view which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of the substrate unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the board | substrate unit. It is the front view seen from the front side of the frame substrate holder which makes the main body of a substrate unit. It is a rear view of the board | substrate holder for frames. It is a rear view of a substrate unit. It is a rear view of the board | substrate unit in the state which removed the delivery control board box and the terminal board box. It is a top view which shows the connection relation of each board | substrate provided in a board | substrate unit. It is the schematic which shows the electrical connection of a board | substrate unit and a game board. It is a part of rear view of the pachinko gaming machine showing the wiring and the like between the payout control board and the board unit. FIG. 99 is a front view of a game board for explaining a cross-sectional portion of the cross-sectional view of FIG. It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the state which opened the bar body. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left rear. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structural member and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at what was decomposed | disassembled from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled every apparatus with which a game panel is mounted | worn for each member, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the side winning opening member from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center accessory for every main member and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the center unit of the center accessory and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the movable shelf unit of the center accessory and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the shelf drive unit of a movable shelf unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower right decoration unit of the center accessory and was seen from diagonally forward. It is sectional drawing which shows the structure of the principal part of a lower right decoration unit. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right decoration unit of the center accessory and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from diagonally forward. It is a front view of the game board showing the production state by the first character combination unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the 1st character accessory unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 1st character accessory unit and was seen from diagonally forward. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the left arm unit of the first character combination unit as seen from an oblique front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right arm unit of the 1st character accessory unit, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the arm drive unit of the 1st character accessory unit from diagonally back. It is the perspective view which looked at the face slide unit of the 1st character accessory unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the face slide unit into the face slide mechanism part and the face moving part, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the face slide mechanism part and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the drive part of the face slide mechanism part from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the drive part from back diagonally. It is the perspective view which looked at the face moving part and the face type unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the face moving part into the mouth mechanism unit and the face base part, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the mouth mechanism unit from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the mouth mechanism unit and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the face base part and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which made the face type unit of the 1st character actor unit transparent, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is a front view of the game board which shows the production | presentation state by a signboard type accessory unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the signboard type accessory unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the signboard type accessory unit and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the signboard movable part of the signboard type accessory unit, and was seen from the diagonal front. It is a front view of the game board which shows the production | presentation state by a 2nd character accessory unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd character accessory unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the character unit of the 2nd character combination object unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the character unit and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at what was decomposed | disassembled from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view (a) which looked at the mechanism part of the character unit from diagonally forward, and the front view (b) of the state which removed the cover member. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the mechanism part of a character unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the door unit of the 2nd character accessory unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the door unit from diagonally behind. It is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the viewing window in the game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the character unit and the member arrange | positioned on the back side from diagonally back. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the character unit and the member arrange | positioned at the back side, and was seen from diagonally back. It is a front view of the game board which shows the production | presentation state by a saddle type accessory unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the saddle type accessory unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the saddle type accessory unit and was seen from diagonally forward. It is a front view which shows the state in which the saddle-shaped ornament in a saddle-shaped accessory unit is an initial position. It is a front view which shows the state which the scissors type decorative body moved to the intermediate position. It is a front view which shows the state which the scissors type decorative body moved to the terminal position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the production | presentation state by a complex accessory unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the compound accessory unit from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the compound accessory unit from back obliquely. It is the perspective view which removed the cover member of the composite accessory unit and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the composite accessory unit and was seen from the diagonal front. It is a perspective view which shows the operation state of a composite accessory unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the trap type accessory unit from diagonally forward. It is a perspective view which shows the operation state of a trap type | mold accessory unit. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the trap type | mold accessory unit and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the bulb | ball guide path and the star light emission light-guide plate from diagonally forward. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a spherical guide path and a star light-emitting light guide plate. It is the perspective view which looked at the liquid crystal display device and its surrounding decoration part from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which looked at the back box, the drive substrate, etc. from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled it and was seen from diagonally forward. It is a front view of a game board at the time of making all the actors move to a production position. It is the schematic of the disassembled perspective view of the function display unit in a game board. It is the schematic of a function display sticker. It is a table which shows an example of the calculating method for determining the special symbol stopped and displayed on a segment display. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 173 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 172. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 174 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 174. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical connection ranging from the periphery control board | substrate with which a game board is equipped to the door decoration drive board | substrate with which a door frame is equipped. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical connection ranging from a door decoration drive board | substrate to a dish unit, a left side speaker electrical decoration unit, and a glass unit. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical connection ranging from a glass unit to a top lamp electrical decoration unit and a right side speaker electrical decoration unit. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to the payout control board from the main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a peripheral control board from a main control board. 181 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 181. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the payout control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side power-on process. 184 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 184. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. 187 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process of FIG. 187. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of a start opening prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a memory prefetch process. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the storage prefetching process of FIG. 190. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol fluctuation waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a payout control part. 195 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the power-on process of the payout control unit in FIG. 194. FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing following FIG. 195; It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a periphery control part 2ms steady process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part base timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part command reception end interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a liquid crystal serial command control process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a transmission buffer empty interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a DSP-ACK signal interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start opening prize abnormality notification determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start opening prize abnormality alerting | reporting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a liquid crystal control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a drawing control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a liquid crystal control part command reception interruption process. It is a timing chart which shows transmission and reception confirmation of liquid crystal serial data. This is a pre-reading effect showing an example of one variation drawn in the display area of the liquid crystal display device. It is an effect showing an example of a television effect. This is an effect showing the continuation of FIG. It is the schematic explaining the detection area | region of a magnetic sensor. It is an input circuit to which a detection signal from a magnetic sensor is input.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. 3 is a side view of the pachinko gaming machine, FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko gaming machine, FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine, FIG. 6 is an outer frame constituting the pachinko gaming machine, FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame constituting the pachinko gaming machine.

  1 to 7, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is openable and closable to an outer frame 2 installed on an island (also referred to as pachinko island equipment, not shown) of a game hall (hall). A game in which a player can visually recognize a main body frame 3 that can be pivotally supported and can be mounted with a game board 4, and a game area 605 that is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 and that is formed on the game board 4 and into which a ball is driven. The door frame 5 includes a window 101 and a tray unit 300 that is disposed below the gaming window 101 and stores a ball to be paid out as a result of the game.

  A cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 that reinforces the decorative cover plate 15 is fixed to the outer frame 2 at the lower front side thereof. Although not shown in detail, the outer frame 2 has upper and lower wooden upper and lower frame plates 10 and 11 and left and right light alloy (aluminum) side frame plates 12 and 13 at their respective ends. It is assembled in a square shape by connecting with a connecting member 19 for connection. The shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support bracket 503 of the main body frame 3 is detachably engaged with the support hole 47 of the upper support bracket 45 provided on the upper portion of the outer frame 2. A support hole (not shown) formed in the frame support plate 506 of the main body frame 3 is inserted into the support protrusion 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66 provided on one upper surface of the cover plate 15. In addition, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the upper portion of the open side frame section 13 is engaged with the hook portion 1054 of the lock device 1000 attached along the open side of the main body frame 3. The closing projection 38 is attached, and is attached to the lower portion of the open side frame portion 13 along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. A hook portion 1065 of the locking device 1000 is attached. By inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it to one side, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are disengaged from the closing projections 38 and 41, and the main body frame 3 is pulled to the front side, thereby pulling the main body frame 3 forward. The frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

  Further, as described above, the game board 4 can be detachably attached to the main body frame 3, and the ball hitting device 650 and the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the main body frame 3 are provided at the lower back of the main body frame 3. A board unit 1100 on which various control boards and power boards for controlling electrical components are collectively provided is attached, and a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580 (see FIG. 6) of the main body frame 3 is attached and detached. It is provided freely.

  Furthermore, in addition to the above-described dish unit 300, the door frame 5 is provided with a glass unit 450 and a handle device 400 so as to close the gaming window 101. The feature of the present embodiment is that there is one dish unit 300 provided on the door frame 5, and the handle device 400 conventionally provided on the main body frame 3 is provided on the door frame 5. Since the frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same square size when viewed from the front, the main body frame 3 is not visible from the front. Hereinafter, among the members constituting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the door frame 5, the main body frame 3, the hit ball launching device 650, the board unit 1100, and the game board 4 will be described in detail.

[2. Overall structure of door frame]
First, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 13. FIG. 8 is a front view of the door frame, and FIG. 9 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, and FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame, and FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the door frame.

  As shown in FIGS. 8, 9, 12 and 13, the door frame 5 is a door frame base unit having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a vertically long polygonal shape. 100, a horizontally long top lamp lighting unit 200 attached to the upper part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, a tray unit 300 attached to the lower part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, A glass unit 450 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the gaming window 101, and a security cover 470 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear side of the glass unit 450. And. The door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 is provided with side speaker lighting units 120 on both the left and right sides of the gaming window 101, which will be described in detail later. The outer periphery of the game window 101 is surrounded by the decoration unit 200 and the dish unit 300. Further, the door frame 5 is provided with a handle device 400 for performing a game ball driving operation on the left side (open side) of the dish unit 300 when viewed from the front.

[2-1. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 to 22. FIG. 14A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 14B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the back. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of the left unit of the side speaker electric decoration unit in the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 17 as seen from the back. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the right unit of the side speaker lighting unit in the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 19 as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view showing the ball feeding unit in the door frame base unit in an exploded manner. 22A is an enlarged perspective view showing a joint unit portion in the door frame base unit, and FIG. 22B is an exploded perspective view showing the joint unit in an exploded manner.

  As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base body having a gaming window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a vertically long inner periphery and a polygonal shape. 110, a side speaker lighting unit 120 fixed to the left and right sides of the gaming window 101 on the front side of the door frame base body 110, and a metal frame-shaped reinforcing sheet metal 140 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110. A horizontally long mounting base 160 fixed to the rear side of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and a ball feeding unit 170 that sends game balls, which are fixed to the mounting base 160 and supplied from the dish unit 300, one by one to the ball hitting device 650, An operation handle in the handle device 400 is disposed on the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and substantially below the ball feed unit 170 fixed via the reinforcing sheet metal 140 and the mounting base 160. And a joint unit 180 to transmit the rotation operation 410 to hitting the firing device 650 mainly includes.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a ball path cover 191 that closes a ball path opening 112 formed at a position corresponding to the ball path 393 of the dish unit 300 in the door frame base body 110, and a door frame base body. 110, a door decoration driving board 192 fixed below the gaming window 101 on the rear side, a door decoration driving board cover 193 that covers the door decoration driving board 192 from the rear, and a joint on the rear side of the door frame base body 110. A handle relay terminal plate 194 fixed immediately above the unit 180, a wiring cover 195 that closes the wiring receiving groove 110 b that can store wiring from the handle relay terminal plate 194, and the upper left and right sides of the game window 101. Stop levers 196 that are respectively arranged and pivotally supported on the rear side of the door frame base body 110 are provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 according to the present embodiment is fixed to a reinforcing sheet metal 140 in which a metal sheet metal is assembled with rivets or the like on the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition to being enhanced, it has a strength capable of sufficiently supporting the top lamp illumination unit 200, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  Further, the door decoration drive board 192 is connected to the wiring from the electric decoration parts and the electric parts provided on the door frame 5, and the wiring from the door decoration drive board 192 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. It is connected to a peripheral control board 4139 (see FIG. 173) of the peripheral board box 622 attached to the payout control board 1186 and the game board 4 through the door relay board 1102 incorporated in the unit 1100 and the like.

[2-1-1. Door frame base body]
First, the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a vertically long frame shape with synthetic resin, as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, and the like. The game window 101 having a shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. The door frame base body 110 has an upper side formed by the gaming window 101 and widths on the left and right sides of an upper side reinforcing sheet metal 141, a shaft side reinforcing sheet metal 142, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 of a reinforcing sheet metal 140 described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in a front view. Accordingly, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be viewed from the player side, and a wider game area than the conventional pachinko gaming machine can be easily formed. It is like that.

  Also, below the gaming window 101 in the door frame base body 110, a prize ball passing port 111 through which the prize ball contact rod 343 of the dish unit 300 penetrates at the upper part of the shaft support side (left side in front view), and a prize ball A ball removal path opening 112 formed at a position corresponding to the ball removal path 393 in the dish unit 300 below the passage opening 111, and a ball for mounting the ball feeding unit 170 on the upper side of the open side (right side in front view). A feed opening 113, a lock hole 114 through which a cylinder lock 1010, which will be described later, is inserted further toward the opening side of the ball feed opening 113, and a cam insertion opening 115 through which the cam 416 of the handle device 400 can be inserted below the ball feed opening 113. Are formed so as to penetrate the door frame base body 110, respectively.

  Further, the door frame base body 110 has a mounting opening 116 for mounting a mounting elastic piece 473 of the crime prevention cover 470 and a left and right of the mounting opening 116, as will be described in detail later on the left and right sides of the lower end of the gaming window 101. Speaker openings 117 are formed so as to penetrate the rear ends of the left and right side speakers 121 in the side speaker lighting unit 120, which will be described later.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, a glass unit support step 110 a that is recessed forward along substantially the inner periphery of the gaming window 101 and the front outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 450 can contact, and the gaming window 101. On the lower side, a wiring receiving groove 110b that is recessed forward and is formed at a position substantially corresponding to the front surface of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144, and can accommodate the wiring, and a cam insertion opening 115 is opened to attach the recessed joint unit 180 toward the front side. And a joint unit mounting recess 110c.

  Furthermore, door frame protrusions 110d and 110e are formed on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 so as to protrude from the lower side to the rear by a predetermined amount. The door frame 5 is positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3 by being inserted into the engagement grooves 584 and 585. In addition, the protrusion amount to the rear of the door frame protrusion 110d is formed to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 110e.

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the door frame base body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110h projecting forward for fixing the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 on the front upper portion thereof, and on the rear surface thereof. A stop lever mounting portion 110i for rotatably supporting the stop lever 196 is provided. In addition, the door frame base body 110 is formed with a large number of mounting bosses and mounting holes for fixing the side speaker lighting unit 120, the reinforcing sheet metal 140, the mounting base 160, the dish unit 300, etc. at appropriate positions. ing.

[2-1-2. Side speaker lighting unit]
Subsequently, the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100 illuminates the left and right sides of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame 5 (light-emitting decoration), and the four arranged at the four corners of the gaming window 101. The left speaker lighting unit 120L that can emit predetermined music, sound effects, and the like to the player by the side speaker 121 and is disposed on the pivotal side of the gaming window 101 (left side in front view). And a right side speaker illumination unit 120R disposed on the open side (right side in front view) of the gaming window 101. The side speaker illumination unit 120 includes a vertically elongated illumination part 122 and an acoustic part 130 having a side speaker 121 disposed above and below the illumination part 122 in each of the left and right units. It has a configuration.

  More specifically, as shown in an exploded view of FIGS. 17 to 20, the lighting unit 122 of the side speaker lighting unit 120 is a vertically long semi-cylindrical transparent side lighting lens 123, and the side lighting lens 123. A transparent side illumination reflector 124 disposed on the rear side and constituting a cylinder with the side illumination lens 123; a side illumination base 125 disposed on the rear side of the side illumination reflector 124; and a side illumination base 125 The side decoration board 126 fixed to the rear side, and the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 are formed so as to enclose the upper end and the lower end from the front side, respectively, and are attached to the side illumination base 125 so that the side illumination lens is attached. 123 and the side electric decoration flash cover 127 which supports the side electric decoration reflector 124, and the side electric decoration flash cover 1 7 has a light-transmitting flash lens 128 that closes the flash opening 127a from the rear side, and a flash substrate 129 that is disposed on the rear side of the flash lens 128 and supported on the front surface of the side electric decoration base 125. .

  The illumination unit 122 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 has a plurality of color LEDs 126a that can emit light in various colors at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction on the front surface of the side decoration substrate 126, and a high luminance above and below the plurality of LEDs 126a. A white LED 126b is mounted. In addition, openings 124a and 125a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 126a and 126b of the side decoration board 126 in the side decoration reflector 124 and the side decoration base 125, respectively. The light from the LEDs 126a and 126b mounted on the side can be irradiated forward through the opening 125a of the side electric decoration base 125 and the opening 124a of the side electric decoration reflector 124.

  Moreover, in the electrical decoration part 122, in the inner side in the transparent cylinder of the side electrical decoration lens 123 and the side electrical decoration reflector 124, in the whole inner periphery of the side electrical decoration lens 123, and a part of inner periphery of the side electrical decoration reflector 124 In this way, the side lens sheet 123a having a substantially U-shaped cross section is disposed. The side lens sheet 123a is formed of a known optical sheet that displays transmitted light or reflected light in a pearl shape or a chromatic shape. When viewed from the player side, the side lens sheet 123a allows the side illumination lens 123a to be seen. In addition, an appearance as if a fluorescent tube (fluorescent tube) is arranged in a transparent column (pipe) formed by the side electric reflector 124 can be exhibited.

  Furthermore, in the electrical decoration part 122, the dividing wall 124b which divides | segments the several opening part 124a formed corresponding to the several LED 126a of the side decoration board 126 into three groups in the up-down direction is provided in the side electrical decoration reflector 124. The partition wall 124b prevents light from a predetermined LED 126a from entering another group. That is, the dividing wall 124b can clearly divide the fluorescent tube formed by the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 into upper, middle, and lower three parts. Accordingly, by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 126a mounted on the side decorative board 126, the fluorescent tube is caused to emit light in whole or in part, or light is emitted in various colors for each of the upper, middle, and lower parts. Can be done.

  In addition, a lens concave portion 124c that is recessed from the front side is formed in the side electric decoration reflector 124 at a position corresponding to the upper and lower LEDs 126b on the side decorative substrate 126, and a semicircular sub lens is formed in the lens concave portion 124c from the front side. 122a (see FIGS. 19 and 20) is inserted. The electrical decoration unit 122 of the present embodiment causes the sub-lens 122a and the LED 126b to emit only the LED 126b strongly before the LED 126a emits light, thereby forming the fluorescent light formed by the side electrical decoration lens 123 and the side electrical decoration reflector 124. As if it were a real fluorescent lamp, it is possible to produce a light emission effect in which only the both ends illuminate the tube.

  Furthermore, the illumination part 122 has a flashlight 129a (for example, an ultra-bright white LED or the like) that can emit strong light on the front surface of the flash substrate 129 supported on the rear side of the side illumination flash cover 127. The flashlight 129a emits light so that the player can irradiate a flashlight.

  The acoustic part 130 of the side speaker electric decoration unit 120 includes a speaker decoration 131 having a substantially circular speaker opening 131a disposed at the foremost part, and a substantially disk made of punching metal that closes the speaker opening 131a of the speaker decoration 131 from the rear side. Speaker cover 132, a decorative spacer 133 disposed behind the speaker cover 132 and cooperating with the speaker decoration 131 to sandwich the speaker cover and have a circular speaker front support port 133 a, and the speaker of the decoration spacer 133 It mainly includes a side speaker 121 disposed so as to close the front support port 133a from the rear side, and a back pressing member 134 having a speaker fitting port 134a that is fitted to the outer periphery of the side speaker 121 from the rear side. .

  As shown in the figure, the acoustic unit 130 has different speaker decorations 131, decorative spacers 133, and back pressing members 134 in different shapes depending on the positions where they are attached. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the upper left acoustic unit 130 in front view has a decoration 131 b that is formed in a cylindrical shape and extends outward from the left side. The decorative spacer 133 has a cylindrical shape that can be inserted into the speaker decoration 131, and the back pressing member 134 is formed with a back pressing decoration part 134 b that is paired with the decoration part 131 b of the speaker decoration 131. The upper left acoustic part 130 is further provided with a hinge cover 135 that is disposed above the back press decoration part 134 b of the back press member 134 and covers the lower side of the shaft pin 145 of the upper shaft support part 146 in the reinforcing sheet metal 140. Yes. In the lower left acoustic part 130 in front view, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a plate shape having a decoration part 131 b, and the decoration spacer 133 includes a spacer decoration part 133 b that is paired with the decoration part 131 b of the speaker decoration 131. The back pressing member 134 is formed in a ring shape.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a cylindrical shape and the decoration spacer 133 and the back pressing member 134 are inserted into the speaker decoration 131 in the upper right acoustic unit 130 in front view. It is formed in a possible cylindrical shape. Further, in the lower right acoustic part 130 in front view, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in an annular shape, and the decoration spacer 133 is formed in a flat plate shape having a spacer decoration part 133b that contacts the rear surface of the speaker decoration 131. In addition, the back pressing member 134 is formed in a ring shape. Note that the lower right acoustic unit 130 further includes a decoration base 136 having a back presser member fixing port 136a through which the back presser member 134 can be inserted and fixed from the front side further on the rear side of the back presser member 134. .

  As shown in the drawing, the four side speakers 121 in the side speaker illumination unit 120 of the present embodiment are arranged at the four corners of the game window 101, and are, as a rule, against the head of the player who plays the game. However, since it is arranged at the top, bottom, left, and right positions, independent sound signals for each side speaker 121 (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch including a lower speaker 391 described later) By sending a surround signal or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound production) than before. Note that the side speaker 121 of the present embodiment is mainly responsible for the mid to high sound range, and the lower speaker 391 is responsible for the low sound range.

[2-1-3. Reinforced sheet metal]
Next, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 attached along the back of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110, and a door frame base main body, as mainly shown in FIGS. 110, a pivot-side reinforcement sheet metal 142 attached along the pivot-side side part back surface, an open-side reinforcement sheet metal 143 attached along the open-side side part back surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110. A lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 attached along the lower surface of the lower side of the gaming window 101 is fastened to each other with screws or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 includes an upper shaft supporting part 146 having shaft pins 145 provided on the upper surface and the lower end of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 142 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support portion 148 having a shaft pin 147 (see FIG. 9). The upper and lower shaft pins 145 and 147 are pivotally supported by an upper shaft bracket 503 and a lower shaft bracket 509 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. It can be opened and closed freely.

  Further, the lower reinforcing metal plate 144 of the reinforcing metal plate 140 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the horizontal width dimension of the door frame base main body 110. It is a lower bent protrusion piece 149 bent toward the rear (see FIG. 16), and both upper side edge edges are upper bent protrusion pieces 150 bent rearward. However, the portions sandwiched between the upper bent protrusions 150 on both sides are vertical bent protrusions 151 extending in the vertical direction. The amount of protrusion of the lower bent protruding piece 149 is not so large, and the lower bent protruding piece 149 does not engage with the groove portion or the concave portion to form the concave / convex engagement, but is formed to increase the strength. On the other hand, the amount of protrusion of the upper bent protrusion piece 150 on both sides is slightly larger than the amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusion piece 149, and somewhat prevents unauthorized tools from entering from below, but rather the lower reinforcement in this embodiment. The most characteristic configuration of the sheet metal 144 is a vertical bent protrusion piece 151.

  The vertical bent protrusion 151 is formed in a concave shape so that its upper edge shape matches the lower end shape of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450 described later, and when the glass unit 450 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5 Further, the upper end piece of the vertical bent protrusion piece 151 is engaged with an engagement groove 451c formed along the outer periphery of the substantially central portion in the width direction (front-rear direction) of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450. . The lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 is formed with a prize ball passage port covering portion 152 that protects the outer periphery excluding the bottom surface of the prize ball passage port 111 formed in the door frame base body 110.

  Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 includes open side outward bent protrusions 153 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 141 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 144, and Open side inner bent protrusions 154 are respectively formed, and the open side inner bent protrusions 154 are formed to extend rearward longer than the open side outer bent protrusions 153. The upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 is formed with bent protrusions 155 and 156 that are bent backward on both sides of the long side. Further, the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 142 is formed with a shaft-supporting side L-shaped bent protrusion 157 extending rearward at the outer end of the long side. In addition, hook covers 158 that engage with the door frame hooks 1041 of the lock device 1000 are attached to substantially the upper part, center part, and lower part on the rear side of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 143, respectively. In addition, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it to one side, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are disengaged from the closing projections 38 and 41 and the main body frame 3 is pulled to the front side. The main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating in the direction opposite to the one direction, thereby enabling the hook cover 158 of the door frame 5 and the sliding frame for the door frame to be opened. The door frame 5 can be opened with respect to the main body frame 3 by releasing the engagement with the door frame hook portion 1041 of 1040 and pulling the door frame 5 to the front side.

[2-1-4. Mounting base / ball feeding unit]
Next, the mounting table 160 and the ball feeding unit 170 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 9, 15, and 16, the mounting base 160 is attached so as to cover the upper half of the rear surface of the plate portion of the door frame base unit 100, and is a transparent synthetic resin similar to the security cover 470. Is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape whose front is opened. In order to smoothly guide the ball fired from the firing rail 515 to the game board 4, the mounting base 160 is formed by the rear surface of the mounting base 160 and the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed. The ball flying guide surface 161 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting table 160. By the way, the mounting base 160 according to the present embodiment has a prize ball passing port opening 162 through which the rear protruding portion of the prize ball passing port covering part 152 formed in the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 is penetrated at the upper part on the pivotal support side. A ball feed unit mounting recess 163 for attaching the ball feed unit 170 is formed in the lower part on the open side. A region in the oblique direction from the ball feed unit mounting recess 163 is a ball flight guide surface 161.

  Further, a lid notch 164 into which a finger can be put when removing a ball passage route cover 191, a door decoration drive board 192, and a door decoration drive board cover 193, which will be described later, is formed in the middle lower part of the mounting base 160. In addition, a vertical wall 165 is formed vertically on a part of the upper side of the mounting table 160. As shown in FIG. 9, the standing wall 165 is for abutting against the front surface of the crime prevention cover 470 and restricting the lower portion of the crime prevention cover 470 from moving forward when the crime prevention cover 470 is attached.

  Further, the mounting table 160 includes a crime prevention protrusion 166 that protrudes obliquely rearward from the above-described ball flight guide surface 161 to the prize ball passage opening 162. As described above, the security projecting piece 166 is provided between the security frame 586 formed in the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 and the inner ridges and the inner side ridges at the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The engaging portion is configured.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21, the ball feeding unit 170 includes a box-shaped main body 171 fixed to the ball feeding unit mounting recess 163 and a ball pivotally supported by a support shaft 171a of the main body 171. A feed member 172 and a weight 173 pivotally supported by the ball feed member 172 while rotating the ball receiving portion of the ball feed member 172 upward are provided. The ball feed unit 170 is located at the lower end of the third inclined surface 311c of the dish unit 300 by swinging the ball feed member 172 in response to the reciprocal movement difference of the ball striking rod 687 of the ball hitting device 650 described later. The balls are supplied one by one to the firing position of the firing rail 515 through the hitting ball supply port 171b formed in the main body 171.

  Reference numeral 174 in the figure denotes an E-ring that prevents the ball feed member 172 from coming off from the support shaft 171a of the main body 171 and prevents the weight 173 from coming off from the ball feed member 172. It is.

[2-1-5. Joint unit]
Next, the joint unit 180 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, the joint unit 180 is housed in the joint unit mounting recess 110 c of the door frame base body 110 and is slidable in the lateral direction. The cover body 184 covers the front surface of the unit mounting recess 110c.

  The joint unit mounting recess 110c of the door frame base body 110 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape with the front surface open, and a cam insertion opening 115 is formed on the rear surface. In addition, a pair of attachment holes 110f for fixing the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 is formed in one corner portion of the joint unit mounting recess 110c that is positioned substantially diagonally. Furthermore, the arcuate abutment convex portions for allowing the slide body 182 to move smoothly by abutting against the outer surfaces of the upper and lower sides of the slide body 182 on the upper side and the bottom side of the inner side surface of the joint unit mounting recess 110c. 110g (in FIG. 22B, only the lower-side abutting convex portion 110g is shown, and the upper-side abutting convex portion 110g is omitted in the drawing).

  On the other hand, the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 has a rear surface smaller than the joint unit mounting recess 110c so that the slide body 182 is housed in a space formed by the joint unit mounting recess 110c and the cover body 184 so as to be movable in the left-right direction. Formed in the shape of an open rectangular parallelepiped box, the rear face wall is provided with two guide protrusions 182a projecting a predetermined amount rearward and arranged in a substantially horizontal direction, and below the right guide protrusion 182a in the rear view. A plate-like slide protrusion 183 that protrudes rearward and a hole pierced between the two guide protrusions 182a so that a wiring through tube portion 428 of the handle device 400, which will be described later, penetrates on the left side of the slide protrusion 183 in rear view. And a rectangular cylindrical member through-opening 182b. The slide projecting piece 183 of the slide body 182 has an inclined side 183a in which the traveling direction during sliding (right direction in rear view) is cut obliquely. In addition, a cam engagement recess 182 c that houses a cam 416 that is fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 415 of the handle device 400 is formed in a U shape on the front wall of the slide body 182 by a rib. Then, a vertical part of a part of the rib forming the cam engagement recess 182c is formed as an arc-shaped rib so as to protrude into the cam engagement recess 182c, and that part is a cam contact part 182d that contacts the cam 416. It has become.

  Further, the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape with the front surface opened, and a cylindrical boss-shaped guide protrusion 182a protruding from the front surface of the slide body 182 is inserted into the front surface of the slide body 182. Two lateral guide holes 194a that guide the movement of the slide body, an insertion lateral hole 184b through which the slide protrusion 183 projecting from the front surface of the slide body 182 is inserted, and the rear grip member 413 of the operation handle 410 It protrudes outward from a position corresponding to the wiring opening 184c that is attached to the end and is inserted through the cam insertion opening 115 and facing the rear end of the wiring through cylinder 428 and the mounting hole 110f of the joint unit mounting recess 110c. And a mounting hole 184d formed. The cover body 184 can be attached to the joint unit mounting recess 110c by fixing a predetermined screw (not shown) to the mounting hole 110f of the joint unit mounting recess 110c through the mounting hole 184d. .

  In order to assemble the slide body 182 and the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 into the joint unit mounting recess 110c, the slide body 182 is housed in the joint unit mounting recess 110c, and in this state, the cover body 184 is covered from the front. When covering, the guide protrusion 182a is inserted into the guide lateral hole 194a, and the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion lateral hole 184b. Then, after the coating, by screwing into the mounting hole 110f with the screw through the mounting hole 184d, the slide body 182 is housed inside, and the assembly of the joint unit 180 is completed.

[2-2. Top lamp lighting unit]
Next, the top lamp illumination unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 23A is a front perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, FIG. 23B is a rear perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, and FIG. 24 is a perspective view showing the top lamp illumination unit obliquely from the lower front. It is. FIG. 25A is an exploded perspective view of the top lamp electrical decoration unit disassembled for each main configuration and shown from the front, and FIG. 25B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the top lamp reflector unit in the top lamp illumination unit disassembled and shown from the front together with the top lamp base, and FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. Further, FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view showing the left rotating lamp in the top lamp lighting unit in an exploded manner, FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view showing the right rotating lamp in the top lamp lighting unit in an exploded manner, FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view showing the center rotating lamp in the top lamp illumination unit in an exploded manner.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes three rotating lights 244, 264, and 284 (so-called Patlite (registered trademark)) arranged in the left-right direction. The sizes of the rotating lamps 244, 264, and 284 are arranged in order from the left in front view. The top lamp illumination unit 200 is fixed to the front side of the top lamp base 210 and the top lamp base 210 in a horizontally long box shape, and to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 with the top lamp base 210 interposed therebetween. Top lamp reflector unit 220, left rotating lamp unit 240, right rotating lamp unit 260, and central rotating lamp unit 280 attached to the front surface of top lamp reflector unit 220, left rotating lamp unit 240, right rotating lamp unit 260, and Rotating lamp covers 201, 202, 203 that cover the front surface of the central rotating lamp unit 280, respectively, and are attached to the top lamp reflector unit 220, and a reflector inner 204 that covers the substantially central lower surface of the top lamp reflector unit are mainly provided ( (See Figure 25)

  The top lamp illumination unit 200 further includes a top lamp power supply substrate 205 fixed to the front right side of the top lamp base 210 and two top lamp substrates 206 fixed to the rear side of the top lamp base 210. ing. The top lamp power supply substrate 205 is for supplying a reference voltage to various substrates such as the dish unit 300, the side speaker illumination unit 120, and a glass unit 450 described later, in addition to the top lamp illumination unit 200. . The top lamp substrate 206 emits light and drives the LEDs in the top lamp reflector unit 220, the LEDs in the central rotating lamp unit 280, and the motors 245, 265, and 285 of the rotating lamp units 240, 260, and 280. It is controlled by a peripheral control board 4139 described later.

[2-2-1. Top lamp base]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the top lamp base 210 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 has a shape in which the upper surface and the left and right side surfaces are substantially aligned with the upper side and the left and right side sides of the door frame base unit 100. At the same time, the lower surface is shaped substantially along the gaming window 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed in a box shape that is horizontally long and partitioned in the middle in the front-rear direction. The top lamp base 210 has a rear end of a mounting boss 221 i protruding from the front side to the rear from the top lamp reflector unit 220 while the mounting boss 110 h of the door frame base body 110 is inserted from the rear side at a position along the outer periphery. Are fitted and positioned, and a plurality of substantially cylindrical mounting boss portions 211 having insertion holes through which predetermined screws can be inserted are provided. The front end of the mounting boss 110h of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted into the mounting boss portion 211 from the rear, and the rear end of the mounting boss 221i of the top lamp reflector unit 220 is inserted from the front. By fixing a predetermined screw from the rear side to the mounting boss 221 i of the top lamp reflector unit 220, the top lamp base 210 (top lamp lighting unit 200) is attached and fixed to the door frame base unit 100. ing.

  Further, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a plurality of fixed boss portions 212 having insertion holes through which a rear end of a fixed boss 221j protruding rearward from the top lamp reflector unit 220 can be fitted and a predetermined screw can pass. ing. By fixing a predetermined screw to the fixed boss 221j of the top lamp reflector unit 220 from the rear side through the fixed boss portion 212, the top lamp base 210 and the top lamp reflector unit 220 can be assembled to each other. It has become.

  Further, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a connector opening 213 through which the connection connector 205a of the top lamp power supply board 205 can be inserted in the vicinity of the right end when viewed from the front. Is faced from the rear side of the top lamp base 210. In addition, on the left and right sides of the rear side of the top lamp base 210, substrate mounting portions 214 are provided, and the top lamp substrate 206 is mounted on the substrate mounting portion 214.

[2-2-2. Top lamp reflector unit]
Next, the top lamp reflector unit 220 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the top lamp reflector unit 220 of the present embodiment includes a box-shaped reflector base 221 that can cover the top lamp base 210 from the front side and that is open on the rear side. The reflector base 221 is a cylindrical cylinder that has three rotating lamps 244, 264, and 284 mounted side by side on its front surface, and projects between the central rotating lamp 284 and the left and right rotating lamps 244 and 264 greatly forward. It is partitioned by a portion 221a and an inclined portion 221b that hangs downward from the cylindrical portion 221a and inclines backward as it goes downward. In the reflector base 221, a substantially circular opening is formed in the cylindrical portion 221a, and three rectangular openings arranged in the vertical direction are formed in the inclined portion 221b (see FIG. 24). ). In addition, the reflector base 221 includes a vertically long bulging portion 221e that protrudes forward at both left and right ends, and a rectangular slit 221f that opens vertically is formed in front of the bulging portion 221e. As shown in the figure, the reflector base 221 has a shape in which the mounting positions of the three rotating lamps 244, 264, and 284 are recessed backward by two cylindrical portions 221a and inclined portions 221b and two bulging portions 221e. It has become.

  In addition, the reflector base 221 has a gently curved surface shape that is recessed rearward between the two cylindrical portions 221a and the inclined portion 221b (position where the central rotating lamp 284 is disposed). Between the cylindrical portion 221a and the inclined portion 221b, a lens opening portion 221g penetrating in a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view is formed on the left and right sides of the substantially horizontal center. Further, the reflector base 221 is mounted with a rotating lamp through which the front ends of the rotating lamp unit bases 241, 261, 281 of the rotating lamp units 240, 260, 280 having the rotating lamps 244, 264, 284 can pass from the rear side. A mouth 221h is formed. In addition, the reflector base 221 has a plurality of mounting bosses 221 i protruding rearward that fit with the mounting boss portions 211 of the top lamp base 210, and a plurality of mounting bosses 212 fitted to the fixed boss portion 212 of the top lamp base 210 and protruding rearward. And a fixed boss 221j. Although not shown in detail, the reflector base 221 is also provided with an attachment boss 221k that is directly attached to the door frame base unit 100 without using the top lamp base 210.

  By the way, the top lamp reflector unit 220 includes, in addition to the reflector base 221, a pair of top inner lenses 222 that are fixed to the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the reflector base 221, and the reflector base 221 on the rear side of the top inner lens 222. A pair of lens sheets 223 disposed at a position corresponding to the lens opening 221g, a pair of reflector decorative substrates 224 disposed on the rear side of the lens sheet 223 and having a plurality of color LEDs 224a mounted thereon, and a reflector base 221. A transparent round lens 225 that is inserted into the cylindrical portion 221a from the rear side and closes the opening 221c, and behind the cylindrical portion 221a and the inclined portion 221b of the reflector base 221 with the round lens 225 and the top inner lens 222 interposed therebetween. Color LED 2 is arranged on the front 6a is a pair of partition decorative board 226 is mounted.

  The top inner lens 222 is formed of a transparent resin. The top inner lens 222 includes a curved lens portion 222a having a substantially trapezoidal curved surface that closes the lens opening 221g of the reflector base 221, and an inclined portion 221b of the reflector base 221. A partition lens portion 222b that closes the opening 221d and a round lens support portion 222c that contacts the rear end of the round lens 225 are provided. In addition, saw-shaped diffusion lens portions 222d are formed on the upper and lower sides of the curved lens portion 222a, and can emit light in a mode different from that of the curved lens portion 222a, and light from the front side can be emitted even when light is not emitted. Can be irregularly reflected.

  Further, the top inner lens 222 supports a lens sheet 223 on the rear side of the curved lens portion 222a sandwiched between upper and lower protruding pieces, and a protruding piece 222e protruding rearward from the rear side of the diffusion lens portion 222d. A support recess 222f is formed. As shown in the figure, in the reflector decorative substrate 224, a plurality of LEDs 224a are arranged at positions corresponding to the protruding pieces 222e of the top inner lens 222, and correspond to the curved surface lens portion 222a of the top inner lens 222. The positions are also distributed. Accordingly, the curved lens portion 222a and the diffusing lens portion 222d of the top inner lens 222 can emit light in different modes.

  The lens sheet 223 is a known optical sheet that displays transmitted light from the LED 224a mounted on the reflector decorative substrate 224 or reflected light from other light sources in a pearl shape or a chromatic shape. Further, the color LED 226a mounted on the partition decorative board 226 is an ultra-bright LED and can emit a strong flash.

  Further, the top lamp reflector unit 220 includes a top side lens 227 that closes a longitudinal slit 221f formed in the left and right bulged portions 221e of the reflector base 221, and a top side that fixes the upper end of the top side lens 227 from the front side. A lens retainer 228, a lens sheet 229 disposed on the rear side of the top side lens 227 and the reflector base 221, and a top side substrate base 230 that holds the lens sheet 229 by being fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221. And a top side substrate 231 mounted on the front surface with a color LED 231a fixed to the top side substrate base 230 and capable of irradiating light to the front top side lens 227 via the lens sheet 229.

  The top side lens 227 is formed in a square shape in a plan view with a transparent resin, and locking pieces 227a and 227b are formed at upper and lower ends, respectively. The locking piece 227b at the lower end is formed on the reflector base. The upper end locking piece 227a is pressed by the top side lens presser 228 after being locked to the lower end of the slit 221f in the set 221 so that it can be attached to the reflector base 221. The lens sheet 229 disposed on the rear side of the top side lens 227 is formed of an optical sheet similar to the lens sheet 223 described above, and is formed in a curved shape as shown in the figure. By being attached to 221, an appearance as if a columnar fluorescent tube is arranged on the rear side of the top side lens 227 can be exhibited.

  Further, as shown in the drawing, the top side substrate base 230 is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and light from the LED 231a of the top side substrate 231 that is fixed to the rear side through the frame is converted into the lens sheet 229 and the top side. Light can be applied to the front surface via the lens 227.

[2-2-3. Revolving light unit]
Next, the three rotating lamp units 240, 260, and 280 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 28, the left rotating lamp unit 240 has a circular opening 241a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 241a projects forward from the rotating lamp mounting port 221h of the reflector base 221. A rotating lamp unit base 241 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 and a substantially annular rotation fixed on the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 241 disposed coaxially with the opening 241a of the rotating lamp unit base 241. A base part 242, a rotating lamp base gear 243 that is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 242, and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 242, and a lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 243. The rotating lamp mounting port 221 of the reflector base 221 is substantially parallel to the axis of the rotating lamp base 244 and the rotating lamp base gear 243. A left rotating lamp motor 245 disposed on the rear axis of the rotating lamp unit and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp unit base 241 so that the rotating shaft 245a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 241; A transmission gear 246 that is fixed to the rotating shaft 245a of the H.245 and meshes with the rotating lamp base gear 243, covers the entire rotating lamp base gear 243 and a part of the transmitting gear 246 from above, and covers the rotating lamp base gear 243 from the rotating portion base 242. The rotating unit holder 247 fixed to the rotating lamp unit base 241 and supported on the lower surface of the rotating unit holder 247 is coaxial with the rotating lamp base gear 243 and is directed to the lower rotating lamp 244. And a left rotating lamp substrate 248 having a high-luminance color LED 248a capable of emitting light.

  The left rotating lamp unit 240 is mounted with a rotating lamp unit cover 249 that covers the rotating part holder 247 from above, a left rotating position detection sensor 250 that detects the rotating position of the rotating lamp 244, and a left rotating position detection sensor 250. And a counterclockwise rotation position detection substrate 251.

  The rotating lamp unit base 241 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 hangs downward on the upper surface thereof at an attachment step 241b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 241a and at a position rearward of the opening 241a. An attachment portion 241c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 221 and a motor fixing portion 241d arranged on the rear side of the opening 241a for fixing the left rotating lamp motor 245 are provided. The attachment step portion 241b is rotated from above. The part base 242 is adapted to be fitted. In addition, the rotating part base 242 has a left rotation position detected at a predetermined position on the upper surface that is coaxial with the opening 241a of the rotating lamp unit base 241 and is smaller in diameter than the outer periphery of the rotating lamp base gear 243. A substrate support portion 242b that supports the lower end of the substrate 251; a wiring locking portion 242c that is disposed behind the substrate support portion 242b and that locks the wiring connected to the left rotation lamp substrate 248 and the left rotation position detection substrate 251; It has.

  The rotating lamp base gear 243 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 242a of the rotating portion base 242, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft supporting port 242a of the rotating portion base 242. A cylindrical gear shaft (not shown) that can be inserted into the shaft, a shaft support hole 243a that has a smaller diameter than the gear shaft and penetrates in the vertical direction, and a rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 243b. The outer diameter of the shaft tube of the rotating lamp base gear 243 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 242a of the rotating part base 242, and is inserted into the shaft support port 242a. 243 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 242a. In the left rotating lamp unit 240, the rotation position detecting piece 243b of the rotating lamp base gear 243 is detected by the left rotating position detection sensor 250, so that the rotating position of the rotating lamp 244 can be detected. Yes.

  Further, although not shown, the rotating portion holder 247 protrudes downward to a position coaxial with the shaft support opening 242a of the rotating portion base 242, and can be inserted into the shaft supporting hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of the holder shaft tube is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243. By inserting the holder shaft tube into the shaft support hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243, the rotating lamp The base gear 243 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder shaft cylinder. That is, in the left rotating lamp unit 240 of the present embodiment, the rotating lamp base 242 has a shaft support port 242a, the rotating shaft base gear 243 has a gear shaft tube and a shaft supporting hole 243a, and the rotating shaft holder 247 has a holder shaft tube. A base gear 243 is rotatably supported. The left rotating lamp substrate 248 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 247. Although not shown in the drawings, the rotation unit holder 247 has a substrate support unit that supports the upper end of the left rotation position detection substrate 251 at a position corresponding to the substrate support unit 242b of the rotation unit base 242 on the lower surface. The left rotation position detection substrate 251 is nipped and fixed between the rotation unit base 242 and the rotation unit holder 247.

  In addition, the rotating lamp 244 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 is disposed on the lower side of the rotating lamp lens 252 and the transparent disk-shaped rotating lamp lens 252 disposed on the lower side of the rotating lamp base gear 243 as shown in the figure. The reflector 253 is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 243, and the reflector cover 254 that covers the reflector 253. The reflector 253 of the rotating lamp 244 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-like base portion 253a, an opening 253b drilled in the center of the base portion 253a, and a base portion 253a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 253d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 253a and whose upper ends can come into contact with the rotating lamp base gear 243.

  The rotating lamp 244 has the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 252 facing the opening 253b of the reflector 253, and the rotating lamp lens 252 has an insertion hole 252a through which the mounting boss 253d of the reflector 253 can be inserted. The mounting boss 253d is inserted into the insertion hole 252a and the mounting boss 253d is fixed to the rotating lamp base gear 243, so that the rotating lamp lens 252 is narrowed between the rotating lamp base gear 243 and the reflector 253. It is designed to be held and fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 254 of the rotating lamp 244 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in plan view, has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an opening on the side surface of the reflector 253 facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 253c. 254a is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 29, the right rotating lamp unit 260 has a circular opening 261a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 261a projects forward from the left rotating lamp mounting port 221h of the reflector base 221. A rotating lamp unit base 261 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 so as to be in the position, and a substantially circular shape arranged coaxially with the opening 261a of the rotating lamp unit base 261 and fixed to the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261. An annular rotating part base 262, a rotating lamp base gear 263 that is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 262 and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 262, and hangs down from the rotating lamp base gear 263. The rotating lamp 264 fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base and the rotating lamp base gear 263 is mounted in parallel with the axis of the rotating lamp base gear 263. A right rotating lamp motor 265 that is disposed on the axis behind 221h and that is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261 so that the rotating shaft 265a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261; A transmission gear 266 fixed to the rotating shaft 265a of the motor 265 and meshing with the rotating lamp base gear 263, the entire rotating lamp base gear 263 and a part of the transmitting gear 266 are covered from above, and the rotating lamp base gear 263 is covered with the rotating part base. Rotating portion holder 267 which is pivotally supported in cooperation with 262 and fixed to rotating lamp unit base 261, and is fixed to the lower surface of rotating portion holder 267 coaxially with rotating lamp base gear 263, to lower rotating lamp 264. And a right rotating lamp substrate 268 having a high-intensity color LED 268a capable of emitting light.

  The right rotating lamp unit 260 includes a rotating lamp unit cover 269 that covers the rotating unit holder 267 from above, a right rotating position detection sensor 270 that detects the rotating position of the rotating lamp 264, and a right rotating position detection sensor 270. And a right rotation position detection board 271.

  The rotating lamp unit base 261 of the right rotating lamp unit 260 hangs downward at an upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 261a and at a position behind the opening 261a. An attachment portion 261c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 221 and a motor fixing portion 261d arranged on the rear side of the opening 261a for fixing the right rotating lamp motor 265 are provided. The attachment step portion 261b rotates from above. The part base 262 is fitted. In addition, the rotating portion base 262 detects the right rotation position at a predetermined position on the upper surface that is coaxial with the opening 261a of the rotating lamp unit base 261 and is smaller in diameter than the outer periphery of the rotating lamp base gear 263. A substrate support portion 262b that supports the lower end of the substrate 271; a wiring locking portion 262c that is disposed behind the substrate support portion 262b and that locks the wiring connected to the right rotation lamp substrate 268 and the right rotation position detection substrate 271; It has.

  The rotating lamp base gear 263 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 262a of the rotating unit base 262, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft supporting port 262a of the rotating unit base 262. A cylindrical gear shaft (not shown) that can be inserted into the shaft, a shaft support hole 263a that has a smaller diameter than the gear shaft and penetrates in the vertical direction, and a rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 263b. The outer diameter of the shaft tube of the rotating lamp base gear 263 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 262a of the rotating part base 262, and is inserted into the shaft support port 262a. 263 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 262a. In the right rotating lamp unit 260, the rotating position detection piece 263b of the rotating lamp base gear 263 is detected by the right rotating position detection sensor 270, so that the rotating position of the rotating lamp 264 can be detected. Yes.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the rotating part holder 267 protrudes downward to a position that is coaxial with the shaft support port 262a of the rotating part base 262, and can be inserted into the shaft support hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of this holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263. By inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft support hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263, the rotating lamp The base gear 263 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder shaft cylinder. That is, in the right rotating lamp unit 260 of the present embodiment, the rotating lamp base 262 has a shaft support port 262a, a rotating shaft base gear 263 and a shaft shaft hole 263a, and a rotating shaft holder 267 has a holder shaft tube. A base gear 263 is rotatably supported. The right rotating lamp substrate 268 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 267. Although not shown in the drawings, the rotation unit holder 267 is provided with a substrate support unit that supports the upper end of the right rotation position detection substrate 271 at a position corresponding to the substrate support unit 262b of the rotation unit base 262 on the lower surface. The right rotation position detection board 271 is nipped and fixed between the rotating part base 262 and the rotating part holder 267.

  In addition, the rotating lamp 264 of the right rotating lamp unit 260 is generally larger than the rotating lamp 244 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 as shown in the figure, and is a transparent disk-like shape disposed below the rotating lamp base gear 263. , A reflector 273 disposed below the rotating lamp lens 272 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 263, and a reflector cover 274 that covers the reflector 273. The reflector 273 of the rotating lamp 264 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-like base portion 273a, an opening portion 273b drilled in the center of the base portion 273a, and a base portion 273a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 273d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 273a and whose upper ends can come into contact with the rotating lamp base gear 263.

  The rotating lamp 264 has the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 272 facing the opening 273b of the reflector 273, and the rotating lamp lens 272 is formed with an insertion hole 272a through which the mounting boss 273d of the reflector 273 can be inserted. The mounting boss 273d is inserted into the insertion hole 272a, and the mounting boss 273d is fixed to the rotating lamp base gear 263, so that the rotating lamp lens 272 is narrowed between the rotating lamp base gear 263 and the reflector 273. It is designed to be held and fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 274 of the rotating lamp 264 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in a plan view, has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an opening portion on a side surface of the reflector 273 that faces the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 273c. 274a is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 30, the central rotary lamp unit 280 has a circular opening 281 a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 281 a is on the front side from the rotary lamp mounting port 221 h in the horizontal center of the reflector base 221. A rotating lamp unit base 281 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 so as to protrude to the rear, and an opening 281a of the rotating lamp unit base 281 are arranged coaxially and fixed to the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 281. A substantially annular rotating part base 282, a rotating lamp base gear 283 that is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 282 and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 282, and depends from the rotating lamp base gear 283. The rotating lamp 284 fixed to the lower surface thereof and the axis of the rotating lamp base gear 283 are substantially parallel to the rotation of the reflector base 221. A central rotating lamp motor 285 that is disposed on the axis behind the lamp mounting port 221h and that is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp unit base 281 so that the rotating shaft 285a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 281; A transmission gear 286 that is fixed to the rotation shaft 285a of the central rotary lamp motor 285 and meshes with the rotary lamp base gear 283, and the entire rotary lamp base gear 283 and a part of the transmission gear 286 are covered from above and the rotary lamp base gear 283 is covered. A rotating part holder 287 that is pivotally supported in cooperation with the rotating part base 282 and fixed to the rotating lamp unit base 281, and is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating part holder 287 coaxially with the rotating lamp base gear 283, and rotates downward. And a central rotating lamp substrate 288 having a high-luminance color LED 288a capable of emitting light toward the lamp 284.

  The central rotary lamp unit 280 is mounted with a rotary lamp unit cover 289 that covers the rotary unit holder 287 from above, a central rotational position detection sensor 290 that detects the rotational position of the rotary lamp 284, and a central rotational position detection sensor 290. And a central rotational position detection board 291.

  The rotating lamp unit base 281 of the central rotating lamp unit 280 hangs downward on the upper surface thereof at an attachment step 281b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 281a and at a position rearward of the opening 281a. An attachment portion 281c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 221 and a motor fixing portion 281d arranged on the rear side of the opening 281a to fix the central rotary lamp motor 285 are provided. The attachment step portion 281b is rotated from above. The part base 282 is fitted. In addition, the rotating portion base 282 has a center rotational position detected at a predetermined position on the upper surface that is coaxial with the opening 281a of the rotating lamp unit base 281 and is smaller in diameter than the outer periphery of the rotating lamp base gear 283. A substrate support portion 282b for supporting the lower end of the substrate 291; and a wire locking portion 282c that is disposed behind the substrate support portion 282b and that locks wires connected to the central rotary lamp substrate 288 and the central rotational position detection substrate 291; It has.

  The rotating lamp base gear 283 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 282a of the rotating unit base 282, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft support port 282a of the rotating unit base 282. A cylindrical gear shaft (not shown) that can be inserted into the shaft, a shaft support hole 283a having a smaller diameter than the gear shaft and penetrating in the vertical direction, and a rotational position detection projecting radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 283b. The outer diameter of the shaft tube of the rotating lamp base gear 283 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 282a of the rotating part base 282, and is inserted into the shaft support port 282a. 283 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 282a. In the central rotating lamp unit 280, the rotational position detection piece 283b of the rotating lamp base gear 283 is detected by the central rotational position detection sensor 290, so that the rotational position of the rotating lamp 284 can be detected. Yes.

  Further, although not shown in the drawings, the rotating part holder 287 has a cylindrical shape that protrudes downward to a position that is coaxial with the shaft supporting port 282a of the rotating part base 282 and can be inserted into the shaft supporting hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of the holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283. By inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft support hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283, the rotating lamp The base gear 283 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder shaft cylinder. That is, in the central rotating lamp unit 280 of this embodiment, the rotating lamp base 282 has a shaft support port 282a, a rotating shaft base gear 283 gear shaft tube and a shaft supporting hole 283a, and a rotating shaft holder 287 holder shaft tube. A base gear 283 is rotatably supported. The central rotating lamp substrate 288 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 287. Although not shown in the drawings, the rotation unit holder 287 is provided with a substrate support unit that supports the upper end of the center rotation position detection substrate 291 at a position corresponding to the substrate support unit 282b of the rotation unit base 282 on the lower surface. The central rotation position detection substrate 291 is nipped and fixed between the rotation unit base 282 and the rotation unit holder 287.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the rotating lamp 284 of the central rotating body unit 280 has an intermediate size between the rotating lamp 244 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 and the rotating lamp 264 of the right rotating lamp unit 260. A transparent disk-shaped rotating lamp lens 292 disposed below the rotating lamp base gear 283, a reflector 293 disposed below the rotating lamp lens 292 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 283, and the reflector 293 And a reflector cover 294 for covering. The reflector 293 of the rotating lamp 284 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-like base portion 293a, an opening portion 293b drilled in the center of the base portion 293a, and a base portion 293a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 293 d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 293 a and whose upper ends can contact the rotating lamp base gear 283.

  The rotating lamp 284 has the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 292 facing the opening 293b of the reflector 293, and the rotating lamp lens 292 has an insertion hole 292a through which the mounting boss 293d of the reflector 293 can be inserted. The mounting boss 293d is inserted into the insertion hole 292a, and the mounting boss 293d is fixed to the rotating lamp base gear 283, whereby the rotating lamp lens 292 is narrowed between the rotating lamp base gear 283 and the reflector 293. It is designed to be held and fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 294 of the rotating lamp 284 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in plan view, has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an opening on a side surface of the reflector 293 facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 293c. 294a is formed.

  By the way, the central rotating lamp unit 280 of the present embodiment includes a plurality of front side surfaces of the rotating lamp unit cover 289 formed between the rotating unit holder 287 and the rotating lamp unit cover 289 as shown in the drawing. A cover lens 295 having a plurality of protrusions 295a inserted into the notch 289a from the rear side, and a cover decorative substrate 296 disposed on the rear side of the cover lens 295 and having a plurality of color LEDs 296a mounted thereon. In addition. The cover lens 295 and the cover decoration substrate 296 are formed on the rotating lamp unit cover 289 while the lower ends thereof are supported by the groove-shaped lens support portion 287a and the substrate support portion 287b formed at the front end of the rotation portion holder 287, respectively. The upper end is supported by a groove-shaped lens support portion and a substrate support portion (not shown). In this embodiment, the front end of the rotating lamp unit cover 289 of the central rotating lamp unit 280 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LED of the cover decorative board 296 to emit light.

[2-3. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 is a front perspective view of the dish unit, FIG. 32 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit, and FIG. 33 is a plan view of the dish unit. 34 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. FIG. 35 is a rear view showing the plate unit with the plate back plate removed, and FIG. 36 is a perspective view showing the plate unit after the plate back plate and the lending unit are removed. FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view showing the plate unit disassembled for each main component from the front, and FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 37 from the back. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view showing the dish unit main body of the dish unit exploded from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 39 from the rear. FIG. 41 is a rear view showing the first ball removal mechanism in the dish unit, and FIG. 42 is a perspective view showing the second ball removal mechanism in the dish unit later. 43 is an exploded perspective view showing the operation button unit in the dish unit in an exploded state, FIG. 44 is a bottom view of the operation button unit in the dish unit with the operation button unit substrate removed, and FIG. FIG. 46 is a bottom perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the unit from below, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the dish unit in an exploded manner.

  47 is a sectional view of the handle device attached to the door frame, FIG. 48 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the operation handle portion constituting the handle device and the joint unit, and FIG. 49 is an operation in the handle device. It is a disassembled perspective view of a handle part. 50 is an operation diagram for explaining the operation of the operation handle portion and the joint unit. FIG. 51 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the handle device and the hitting ball launching device provided on the main body frame. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and a hit ball | bowl launcher. Further, FIG. 53A is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the dish unit, and FIG. 53B is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the second ball outlet and the flow of game balls in the dish unit. It is. FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the horizontally long sphere inlet and the storage tray in the dish unit.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment can store game balls that are paid out from a prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, and a ball hitting device 650, which will be described later, via the ball feeding unit 170. Can be supplied to. 37 and 38, the dish unit 300 covers a front surface of the dish body 310 and a dish body 310 having a storage tray 311 that is open upward and rearward and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. The dish unit main body 320, the plate-like dish back plate 340 that covers the rear surfaces of the dish unit main body 320 and the dish body 310, and the first ball removal mechanism that can discharge all the game balls stored in the storage dish 311 of the dish body 310 350, a second ball removing mechanism 360 that can discharge a part of the game balls stored in the storage plate of the plate 310, and a CR unit (not shown) installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are operated. A ball unit 301, an operation button unit 370 that is fixed to the upper surface of the dish body 310 and can be operated by the player according to a game state (game situation), and a dish unit main body 320 and a dish back plate 340 below the dish body 310. while A lower speaker unit 390 having a lower speaker 391 that is larger than the side speaker 121 of the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100 and a handle base 303 that is disposed in the lower right corner of the dish unit main body 320 when viewed from the front. And a handle device 400 that is supported by the handle base 303 and performs a game ball driving operation. As in this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is electrically connected to the CR unit is different from a ball lending machine that rents out a game ball used for a game by inserting cash, and has a high gambling game content ( So-called game content having a probability variation) can be adopted. Reference numeral 302 denotes a wiring cover that covers the electrical wiring connected to the dish illumination board 336 in the later-described dish unit main body 320. Further, as shown in the drawing, a tray relay board 190 that electrically connects the door decoration drive board 192 and the operation button unit 370 is disposed on the left side of the dish back plate 340 when viewed from the front. The saucer relay board 190 is also electrically connected to the side decoration board 126 of the left side speaker illumination unit 120L.

  As shown in the figure, the lending unit 301 in the dish unit 300 is fixed to the upper side of the dish back plate 340 at the approximate center in the left-right direction, and is disposed next to the lending button 301a and the lending button 301a. A return button 301b, and a remaining lending indicator (not shown) arranged between the lending button 301a and the return button 301b and displaying the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards on the CR unit are provided. When the ball rental unit 301 pushes a ball rental button 301a after inserting cash or a prepaid card into a CR unit provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined number of game balls are transferred to the dish unit 300. Can be rented (paid out) into the storage tray 311 and when the return button 301b is pushed, the balance of the loaned portion is drawn and the cash balance or prepaid card that has been inserted is returned. Yes.

  Further, the main button 371 and the two sub buttons 372 of the operation button unit 370 in the dish unit 300 are used when a player participates in game contents (game effects) performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 provided on the game board 4 or the like. To operate.

[2-3-1. Dish body]
First, as shown in the drawing, the plate body 310 in the plate unit 300 occupies approximately 2/3 of the whole from the left end in a plan view, and has a storage tray 311 having a predetermined depth opened upward and rearward, and a storage plate 311 A second ball outlet 312 which is arranged at a predetermined position on the bottom and penetrates in the vertical direction, and is arranged on the downstream side of the third inclined surface 311c from the right end of the storage plate 311 and is connected to the storage plate 311 and can flow game balls. The first ball extraction path 313 (see FIGS. 35 and 38) that can guide the game ball to a position just below the second ball extraction port 312 and the upper side of the storage dish 311 are opened in a substantially rhombus shape and operated. An operation button unit mounting recess 314 in which the button unit 370 can be mounted, and a first ball extraction button 351 of the first ball extraction mechanism 350 that opens in a substantially circular shape behind the operation button unit installation recess 314 is mounted. Ball removal A button mounting port 315, a first ball vent mechanism supporting portion 316 for supporting the first ball vent mechanism 350 is disposed substantially directly below the first ball vent button mounting port 315 is mainly provided with.

  The storage plate 311 in the plate body 310 is disposed on the front surface of the ball inlet 341 of the plate back plate 340, and has a first inclined surface 311a that is lowered toward the right side and the front side in plan view, and a right end of the first inclined surface 311a. A second inclined surface 311b that is continuous with the rear part of the plate and decreases toward the right and rear sides, and a third inclined surface that is continuous with the right end of the second inclined surface 311b and decreases toward the ball supply port 342 of the dish back plate 340. An inclined surface 311c, a fourth inclined surface 311d that is continuous with a front portion of the right end portion of the first inclined surface 311a and a front end portion of the second inclined surface 311b, and decreases toward the right and second inclined surfaces 311b; A fifth inclined surface 311e that is continuous with the right end portion of the four inclined surfaces 311d and decreases toward the fourth inclined surface 311d (see FIGS. 33 and 34).

  In addition, the storage tray 311 is disposed between a partition wall 311f where a rising game ball cannot be crossed from the rear end of the fifth inclined surface 311e, and between the partition wall 311f and the third inclined surface 311c. And a sixth inclined surface 311g that decreases toward the third inclined surface 311c. The second ball outlet 312 is arranged between the first inclined surface 311a and the second inclined surface 311b. The second ball removal port 312 is normally closed by the second ball removal shutter 364 of the second ball removal mechanism 360.

  In the storage tray 311 of this embodiment, the first inclined surface 311a has a quadrangular shape (trapezoidal shape) that occupies approximately half the size of the storage tray 311 in plan view as shown in the figure. The second inclined surface 311b has a variable pentagon shape in which the length in the left-right direction is about 1/4 of the length of the storage plate 311 and the depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrower toward the third inclined surface 311c. The third inclined surface 311c has a horizontally long rectangular shape whose depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. The fourth inclined surface 311d has a rectangular shape (trapezoidal shape) whose length in the left-right direction is substantially the same as that of the second inclined surface 311b and decreases in length toward the second inclined surface 311b. Further, the fifth inclined surface 311e has a rear end portion extending from the left end portion in the right direction by a predetermined distance substantially parallel to the third inclined surface 311c and then obliquely extending toward the rear third inclined surface 311c. While extending along the third inclined surface 311c across the partition wall 311f, the front end portion (right end portion) extends toward the right toward the right end portion of the rear end portion so as to extend rearward, and as a whole. The partition wall 311f is formed along the rear end of the fifth inclined surface 311e.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the storage plate 311 includes a left end portion and a front end portion of the first inclined surface 311a, a front end portion of the fourth inclined surface 311d, and a front end portion (right end portion of the fifth inclined surface). The outer peripheral wall 311h rising upward is provided, and the outer peripheral wall 311h has a shape in which the storage tray 311 is recessed downward from the upper surface of the dish body 310 by a predetermined amount. In addition, the outer peripheral wall 311h of the storage tray 311 is formed in a loose arc shape that goes forward as it goes rightward at the front end portions of the first inclined surface 311a, the fourth inclined surface 311d, and the fifth inclined surface 311e. When the game ball that has flowed into the first inclined surface 311a from the ball inlet 341 comes into contact with the position facing the ball inlet 341 in the outer peripheral wall 311h, it is reflected in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e and It distribute | circulates on the four inclined surfaces 311d. The fifth inclined surface 311e is a gentle slope that allows the game ball flowing into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 to climb up to the right end of the fifth inclined surface 311e, Is changed to flow downward (to the left) in the direction of the fourth inclined surface 311d. That is, the storage tray 311 of the present embodiment once diverts the game ball flowing in from the ball inflow port 341 to the fifth inclined surface 311e and then flows into the third inclined surface 311c serving as a supply path to the ball supply port 342. It is supposed to let you.

  In addition, the sixth inclined surface 311g in the storage tray 311 has a steeper inclination angle than the other inclined surfaces 311a to 311e, and a plurality of game balls are placed on the third inclined surface 311c on the downstream side. It is possible to facilitate alignment in a left-right direction toward the sphere supply port 342. Note that a stainless steel rail body 304 is attached to the third inclined surface 311c so as to improve the wear resistance of the circulating game balls and to prevent static electricity charged on the game balls. It can be removed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 38, the third inclined surface 311c of the storage tray 311 is formed in a groove shape in which the right end of the storage pan 311 sinks obliquely to the lower right and hangs downward and the rear side is opened. In addition, it is formed so as to be continuous with the first ball extraction path 313, and a flow path that is folded back with respect to the left-right direction by being continuous with the first ball extraction path 313 is formed. The boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313 is configured such that the flow path is closed by the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350. As desired for the slide 356, the ball supply port 342 of the dish back plate 340 is opened. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down the third inclined surface 311c is blocked from flowing by the first ball removal slide 356, so that it flows to the ball supply port 342 side.

  Note that the first sphere removal mechanism support 316 in the dish 310 has a first sphere beside the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first sphere removal path 313 (right side in front view, left side in FIG. 35). A slide groove 316a is inserted and arranged so that the slide slide 356 is slidable in the left-right direction. A flange portion 316b that locks the lower end portion of the extraction spring 357 is formed.

[2-3-2. Plate unit body]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the dish unit main body 320 in the dish unit 300 constitutes the front surface of the dish unit 300, covers the front surface of the dish body 310 and the lower speaker unit 390, and is opened upward and rearward. A box-shaped main body 321 is provided. The main body 321 is shaped such that about 3/4 of the left side bulges forward in front view, and the lower speaker unit 390 is accommodated inside (rear side) of the bulged portion. It has become. Further, the main body 321 includes a speaker opening 321a formed so as to penetrate to a position corresponding to the lower speaker 391 of the lower speaker unit 390 on the right side of the center of the front surface of the bulged portion, and a speaker opening 321a. A dummy opening 321b formed on the left side and a second ball removal button opening 321c formed on the left side of the dummy opening 321b are formed so as to penetrate therethrough. Further, the main body 321 has an elliptical handle base attachment port 321d for attaching the handle base 303 to the lower right corner, and a lock opening 321e disposed above the handle base attachment port 321d and facing a cylinder lock 1010 described later. A rectangular duct opening 321f that opens to the right side of the portion that bulges to the front on the left side of the handle base mounting port 321d, and a rectangular sphere discharge port 321g that opens to a substantially central lower portion in the left-right direction. I have.

  The dish unit main body 320 of the dish unit 300 has a front back plate 322 that covers the speaker opening 321a and the dummy opening 321b of the main body portion 321 from the front side, and a speaker of the main body portion 321 through the through hole 322a of the front back plate 322. A plate-shaped right cover 323 made of punching metal, which is disposed on the front surface corresponding to the opening 321a, and having four corners cut off, and disposed on the approximate center of the front surface of the right cover 323, which is smaller than the right cover 323 and has a metallic luster on the surface. A plate-shaped right decoration base 324 that has been plated, a right decoration 325 that is smaller than the right decoration base 324 and disposed in the approximate center of the front surface of the right decoration base 324, and a main body portion of the front back plate 322 A plate-shaped left cover made of punching metal and cut off at the four corners, disposed on the front surface corresponding to the dummy opening 321b of 321 26, a plate-like left decorative base 327 which is disposed in the approximate center of the front surface of the left cover 326 and is smaller than the left cover 326 and has a surface that is plated with a metallic luster, and the approximate center of the front surface of the left decorative base 327 The frame-shaped front surface that decorates the periphery of the speaker-shaped opening 321a, the dummy opening 321b, and the second ball-release button opening 321c of the main body 321 and the plate-shaped left decoration 328 that is smaller than the left decoration base 327. And a main body 329. A plurality of through holes 322a are formed in the front back plate 322 of the dish unit main body 320 so as to penetrate the speaker opening 321a of the main body 321 as desired. The punch holes of the through holes 322a and the right decoration base 324 are formed. The sound from the lower speaker 391 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the outside via (not shown).

  In addition, the tray unit main body 320 of the present embodiment has a main body left decorative base 330 fixed to the left end of the main body portion 321 on the front side of the tray relay board 190 and a front surface of the main body left decorative base 330 and has a metallic luster on the surface. And a main body left ornament 331 that has been plated. The main body left decoration base 330 has translucency.

  Furthermore, the plate unit main body 320 is formed with a plate-like duct cover made of punching metal that covers the duct opening 321f of the main body portion 321 and a duct cutout portion 333a such that the duct cover faces from the surface. And a main body right decoration 333 that covers the entire right side surface of the portion 321 that bulges to the front side and that has been subjected to metallic luster plating on the surface.

  The dish unit main body 320 has a plurality of horizontally long slits 334a arranged along the upper edge of the main body portion 321 and penetrating in the vertical direction, and a main body decoration 334 whose surface is plated with metallic luster, An upper decoration lens 335 having a light guide portion 335a disposed in the main body 321 below the main body upper decoration 334 and inserted into the slit 334a of the main body upper decoration 334, and an upper decoration lens 335 is disposed below the upper decoration lens 335. And a dish decoration board 336 having a plurality of color LEDs 336a mounted thereon. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 336a of the dish illumination board 336, the main body upper decoration 334, that is, the upper edge of the dish unit main body 320 can be illuminated and decorated via the upper decoration lens 335.

[2-3-3. Dish back plate]
Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the dish back plate 340 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a horizontally long plate shape, and is disposed in the upper left corner portion in a front view, and is a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front-rear direction. A sphere inlet 341 penetrating through the sphere, a sphere supply port 342 penetrating in a rectangular shape through which a game ball can be passed with a predetermined distance from the sphere inlet 341, and a rear side communicating with the sphere inlet 341. And a prismatic prize ball contact bar 343 extending to the main. As shown in FIG. 34 and the like, the ball inlet 341 of the dish back plate 340 opens into the storage dish 311 of the dish body 310, and the length in the left-right direction is the first inclined surface 311a of the storage dish 311. Is approximately the same length. Further, the sphere supply port 342 is disposed at a position corresponding to the first sphere removal slide 356 of the first sphere removal mechanism 350 at the right end of the third inclined surface 331 c in the storage tray 311. The prize ball contact bar 343 is disposed at a position biased to the left end in front view with respect to the ball inlet 341 and the length in the left-right direction is about half of the length of the ball inlet 341. The rear end penetrates the prize ball passing port 111 of the door frame base main body 110 and communicates with an outlet 921 at the lower end (front end) of the front guide passage 920 in the full tank unit 900 described later. .

  In addition, the dish back plate 340 is disposed at a position where the front end of the prize ball contact bar 343 is a predetermined amount behind the ball inlet 341 and between the ball inlet 341 and the prize ball contact bar 343. The ball inlet 341 further includes a shelf 344 that extends over the entire length in the left-right direction and allows game balls to circulate. The game balls distributed through the prize ball contact bar 343 by the shelf portion 344 can be made to flow downstream from the second ball outlet 312 of the storage tray 311.

  Further, the dish back plate 340 corresponds to a ball extraction path 393 of the lower speaker unit 390 described later, and has a ball extraction path opening 345 penetrating in a substantially L shape, and a ball flow in the upper left of the ball extraction path opening 345 when viewed from the front. A latch opening 346 that is disposed below the inlet 341 (the second ball outlet 312 in the dish 310) and penetrates in a rectangular shape through which a rear end of a latch unit 366 of a second ball outlet mechanism 360 described later is inserted. , A wiring insertion port 347 that is arranged in the upper right corner when viewed from the front and penetrates in a substantially rectangular shape, and a ball rental unit 301 that is arranged on the upper side of the dish back plate 340 between the ball inlet 341 and the wiring insertion port 347 And a ball rental unit mounting portion 348.

[2-3-4. First ball removal mechanism]
Next, the first ball removal mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 includes a first ball removal button 351 and a first ball removal button 351 that are pressed by the player, as shown in FIGS. A first ball release button base 352 that is slidably supported in the vertical direction and is inserted from the lower side with respect to the first ball release button mounting opening 315 of the plate body 310, The first ball removal button decoration body 353 fixed so that the first ball removal button 351 protrudes upward across the body 310, the first ball removal button decoration body 353, and the first ball removal button base 352 are supported. A rotation shaft 354 supported at the position of the first ball removal mechanism support portion 316 of the dish body 310 on the right side (left side in FIG. 41) in front view of the lower end of the first ball removal button 351, and a rotation shaft 354 times An inverted L-shaped first sphere extraction crank 355 whose one end is in contact with the lower end of the first sphere extraction button 351 and the other end extends downward, and the other end of the first sphere extraction crank 355. The third lower surface 311c of the dish 310 and the first ball removal path 313 are supported by the first ball removal mechanism support portion 316 of the dish 310 so as to be slidable substantially in the left-right direction. And a first ball removal spring 357 that urges the first ball removal crank 355 to rotate in a predetermined direction.

  The first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350 is inserted in the slide groove 316a of the first ball removal mechanism support 316 in the dish 310 so that it can slide in the left-right direction. In this state, the first sphere extraction crank 355 rotates and is slid in the left-right direction by the lower end on the other end side of the first sphere extraction crank 355. By sliding the first ball removal slide 356 in the left-right direction, the tip can move forward and backward with respect to the flow path at the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311 c of the dish body 310 and the first ball removal path 313. When the advancing to the boundary part and closing the flow path, the game ball that has circulated through the third inclined surface 311c can be supplied to the ball supply port 342, and the flow path is retreated from the boundary part. When opened, the game balls that have circulated through the third inclined surface 311c can be supplied (discharged) to the first ball removal path 313 side.

  Further, the upper end portion of the first ball removal spring 357 is locked to the first ball removal crank 355 on the opposite side to the one end side contacting the lower end portion of the first ball removal button 351 with the rotation shaft 354 interposed therebetween. A collar portion 355a is formed. The first ball removal spring 357 has its upper end engaged with the flange 355a of the first ball removal crank 355 and its lower end engaged with the flange 316b of the first ball removal mechanism support 316 in the dish 310. By stopping, the first ball removal crank 355 is moved to the position where the first ball removal slide 356 closes the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal passage 313, and the first ball removal button 351 is the most. It can be urged to rotate in the direction of the raised position.

  When the first ball removal button 351 is pressed by the player, the first ball removal mechanism 350 has a first ball removal crank 355 via a contact pin 355b that contacts the lower end of the first ball removal button 351. Is rotated in a direction in which one end thereof moves downward against the biasing force of the first ball extraction spring 357, and the other end side is away from the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball extraction path 313. Move to. Then, the first ball removal slide 356 moves in a direction away from the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal passage 313 together with the lower end of the first ball removal crank 355, and the tip of the first ball removal slide 356 is moved. The third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313 communicate with each other by retreating from the flow path at the boundary portion, and all the game balls in the third inclined surface 311c, that is, the storage dish 311 are transferred to the first ball. It can be discharged to the outside through the extraction path 313.

  When the pressing of the first ball removal button 351 is released, the first ball removal crank 355 is rotated by the urging force of the first ball removal spring 357 so that the first ball removal button 351 is raised and the first ball is released. The leading end of the pull slide 356 advances into the flow path at the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball discharge path 313, closes the flow path, and is on the third inclined surface 311c (in the storage tray 311). A game ball can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device 650 through the ball supply port 342.

[2-3-5. Second ball removal mechanism]
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 42 and the like, the second ball removal mechanism 360 in the dish unit 300 is a second ball that protrudes forward from the second ball removal button opening 321c of the main body portion 321 in the dish unit main body 320. A pull-out button 361, a second ball-extracting slide 362 fitted and fixed at the tip, and supported so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction by a lower speaker unit 390 described later, and the front and rear of the second ball-extracting slide 362 The second ball-extracting crank 363 that is pivotally supported by the lower speaker unit 390 so as to be able to rotate around an axis extending in the left-right direction, and the second ball-extracting crank 363 is rotated to rotate the plate 310 Rotation about an axis extending in the vertical direction between a closed position where the second ball outlet 312 is closed and an open position where the second ball outlet 312 is opened The second ball-extracting shutter 364, the second ball-extracting spring 365 that urges the second ball-extracting shutter 364 to the closed position where the second ball-extracting port 312 is closed, and the second ball-extracting spring 365 A latch unit 366 capable of holding the second ball removal shutter 364 in the open position against the biasing force, and an opening corresponding to the second ball removal port 312 while slidably supporting the lower surface of the second ball removal shutter 364. A second ball removal base 367 fixed to the lower side of the plate body 310 and a rear end of the second ball removal slide 362 slidably and supporting a latch unit 366, which will be described later. A second ball removal mechanism support 368 (see FIGS. 35 and 38) that pivotally supports the second ball removal crank 363 in cooperation with the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390; To have.

  The second ball removal slide 360 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 has a transmission groove 362a that is opened upward at the rear end portion thereof and into which the lower end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 is inserted, and protrudes rearward from the rear end portion. An engagement protrusion 362b that can be engaged with the engagement claw 366a of the latch unit 366 is provided. The second ball removal crank 363 is a rod-like member extending substantially in the vertical direction, and a lower end portion thereof is inserted into the transmission groove 362a of the second ball removal slide 362 from above, and substantially in the middle in the vertical direction. The portion is pivotally supported by the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390 so as to be rotatable. Thus, when the second ball removal slide 362 slides in the front-rear direction, the lower end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 moves along with the slide of the transmission groove 362a, and the second ball removal crank 363 rotates. The upper end of the second ball removal crank 363 moves in the direction opposite to the lower end.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the second ball removal shutter 364 is disposed above the second ball removal slide 362, and the second ball removal port 312 of the dish body 310 and the opening 367a of the second ball removal base 367 are provided. A substantially semicircular (D-shaped) plate-like closing portion 364a that can be closed, and a rod-like collar portion that extends from the closing portion 364a in one of the left and right directions (left direction in front view, right direction in FIG. 42). 364b, and is formed in a substantially P-shape as a whole. In addition, the second ball removal shutter 364 is pivotally supported by the plate body 310 and the second ball removal base 367 so that the tip of the flange portion 364b can rotate about an axis extending in the vertical direction, and the flange portion 364b. On the rear side, the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 comes into contact with a substantially middle portion in the left-right direction. Further, the front end portion of the second ball extraction spring 365 is locked to the rear base end portion of the flange portion 364b of the second ball extraction shutter 364. Although not shown, the rear end portion of the second ball release spring 365 is locked by a locking boss that hangs downward from the lower surface of the dish 310, and the second ball release spring 365 is provided. Accordingly, the closing portion 364a of the second ball removal shutter 364 is biased to a closed position (position shown in FIG. 42) for closing the second ball removal port 312.

  The second ball removal base 360 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 allows the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 to pass between the opening 367a and the position where the second ball removal shutter 364 is pivotally supported. A slit 367b extending in the front-rear direction is provided, and the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 supported on the lower side of the second ball removal base 367 through the slit 367b is the upper surface of the second ball removal base 367. It can contact | abut with the collar part 364b of the 2nd ball | bowl extraction shutter 364 arrange | positioned in this. In addition, the 2nd ball removal base 367 is formed in the shape of a shallow dish, as shown in the figure, and can form an accommodation space for accommodating the second ball removal shutter 364 with the dish body 310. Yes. Further, the height of the accommodation space for accommodating the second ball removal shutter 364 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the second ball removal shutter 364 rotates to turn the second ball removal port 312. Even if is opened, the game ball is prevented from entering between the dish body 310 and the second ball removal base 367.

  In the second ball removal mechanism 360 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the second ball removal button 361 that protrudes forward from the front surface of the dish unit main body 320, the second ball removal slide 362 slides backward, The second ball removal crank 363 rotates so that the lower end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 is guided rearwardly by the transmission groove 362a of the two ball removal slide 362. Then, as the second ball removal crank 363 rotates, the upper end portion thereof moves forward in the direction opposite to the lower end portion, and the second ball removal shutter 364 that contacts the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363. However, it rotates so that the closing portion 364a moves forward around the tip of the flange portion 364b against the urging force of the second ball release spring 365. Thus, when the closing part 364a moves forward and the second ball outlet 312 of the dish 310 and the opening 367a of the second ball base 367 are opened, the second ball outlet 312 in the storage dish 311 is opened. The game balls stored on the upstream side are discharged to the outside of the dish unit 300 through the second ball outlet 312.

  The second ball removal mechanism 360 of the present embodiment includes a latch unit 366, and the second ball removal button 361 is pushed so that the engagement protrusion 362b at the rear end of the second ball removal slide 362 is in the latch unit 366. When abutting between the pair of engaging claws 366a, the pair of engaging claws 366a are closed and engaged so as to sandwich the engaging projection 362b, and the second ball is resisted against the urging force of the second ball releasing spring 365. The second button 314 is held in the opened (opened) position when the button 361 is pressed, that is, by the closing portion 364a of the second ball shutter 364. In this state, when the second ball release button 361 is pressed, the pair of engagement claws 366a of the latch unit 366 are opened, and the engagement with the engagement protrusions 362b is released, and the biasing force of the second ball release spring 365 is used. The closing part 364a of the second ball extraction shutter 364 can be returned to a position where the second ball extraction port 312 is closed.

[2-3-6. Operation button unit]
Next, the operation button unit 370 in the dish unit 300 is mounted and fixed from above to the operation button unit mounting recess 314 of the dish body 310 in the dish unit 300, as shown in FIGS. A pair of an octagonal main button 371 obtained by cutting off four corners of a square in plan view, and a left base button 372L and a right subbutton 372R having a home base shape in plan view and arranged symmetrically on both the left and right sides of the main button 371. Sub-button 372, main button 371 and sub-button 372 are slidably held in the up-down direction, and operation button unit base 373 inserted into operation button unit mounting recess 314 of dish 310, and operation button unit base A plate-like operation button unit decoration member 374 for decorating the upper surface of 373; Includes a work key unit operation button unit substrate 375 color LED375a is to be fixed to the lower light emission decorated the operation button unit 370 has a plurality of mounted on the upper surface of the base 373, a.

  The operation button unit 370 includes a main button sensor 376 that detects an operation of the main button 371, a left sub button sensor 377L that detects an operation of the left sub button 372L, and a right sub that detects an operation of the right sub button 372R. A button sensor 377R. The main button sensor 376, the left sub button sensor 377L, and the right sub button sensor 377R are photosensors each having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion, and are fixed to predetermined positions on the operation button unit substrate 375, respectively. .

  As shown in the figure, the operation button unit base 373 in the operation button unit 370 has a substantially rhombus shape in plan view, and includes a main button housing recess 373a capable of housing the main button 371 from above, and a main button housing recess 373a. A plurality of guide grooves 373b that are formed on the inner peripheral surface and extend in the vertical direction to guide the main button 371 in the vertical direction, and a substantially circular opening formed in the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a. 373c, a plurality of light guide openings 373d that guide the light from the LED 375a of the operation button unit board 375 that opens at a predetermined width along the outer periphery of the main button housing recess 373a to the upper surface side, and the sub A pair of sub-button housing recesses 373e that can accommodate the button 372 from above, and a diagonal upper corner of the long axis The screw insertion hole 373f, the plate-like top plate portion 373g that forms the upper surface of the operation button unit base 373, and the plate-like shape that hangs downward from the lower surface along the outer periphery of the top plate portion 373g. Side wall part 373h.

  The operation button unit base 373 is formed in a box shape having a lower surface opened by a top plate portion 373g and a side wall portion 373h. A main button housing recess 373a and a plurality of ( Here, eight light guide openings 373d, two sub-button accommodating recesses 373e, and two screw insertion holes 373f are opened. In the operation button unit base 373, the main button receiving recess 373a is formed with a thickness where the guide groove 373b is not formed, and the strength and rigidity of the inner wall surface and the bottom surface are increased. In addition, each light guide opening 373d formed on the outer periphery of the main button housing recess 373a is formed in a cylindrical shape that is long in the vertical direction, and is also formed by the outer peripheral wall of the cylindrical light guide opening 373d. The main button accommodating recess 373a is reinforced (see FIG. 44).

  45 and 46, the main button 371 includes a main button lens 371a that forms the upper surface of the main button 371 and has translucency, and a cylinder that supports the main button lens 371a and is open at the top and bottom. Main button base 371b, a vibrating body 371c disposed below the main button base 371b, and a vibrating body holder that encloses the vibrating body 371c and is fixed to the lower side of the main button base 371b via mounting screws 371d. 371e. Although not shown, the main button 371 has an upper end that contacts the lower side surface of the main button base 371b and a lower end that contacts the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a in the operation button unit base 373. A main button spring is provided to bias the 371 so as to rise.

  The main button lens 371a in the main button 371 is formed in a box shape having an octagonal shape in plan view and an open bottom surface, and has a smooth shape on the front side, whereas a plurality of small lenses are provided on the back side. The light is emitted from the LEDs 375a of the operation button unit board 375 so that the entire surface of the main button 371 can be decorated with light emission substantially uniformly.

  As shown in the figure, the main button base 371b has an octagonal outer shape similar to that of the main button lens 371a. The lower end portion extends downward from an opening 373c formed in the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a in the operation button unit base 373 and directly above the LED 375a group disposed in the center of the operation button unit substrate 375. Can be located in. The main button base 371b includes a main locking claw 371f extending downward from two opposite sides and a plurality of guide protrusions extending in the vertical direction inserted into the guide groove 373b of the operation button unit base 373. 371g. The main button claw 371f of the main button base 371b is locked to a locking portion (not shown) in the main button receiving recess 373a in the operation button unit base 373, so that the main button 371 is moved to the main button spring. It is possible to prevent the main button accommodating recess 373a from being pulled out by the urging force.

  Further, the main button base 371b is configured such that the vibrating body 371c can be attached to the inside of the one main locking claw 371f via the vibrating body holder 371e and the mounting screw 371d, and a portion to which the vibrating body 371c is attached. A detection piece 371h (see FIG. 45) detected by the main button sensor 376 is formed inside.

  When the main button 371 of this embodiment pushes the main button 371 downward against the urging force of the main button spring, the detection piece 371 h of the main button base 371 b is located between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the main button sensor 376. The operation is detected by the main button sensor 376. The main button 371 is configured such that when an operation is detected by the main button sensor 376, the vibrating body 371c is activated, and the main button 371 is vibrated by the operation of the vibrating body 371c. Thus, it can be recognized that the operation of the main button 371 is accepted, and the player can be surprised by the vibration of the main button 371. The operation button unit board 375 is provided with a light shielding plate 375b for preventing the main button sensor 376 from malfunctioning due to light from the mounted LED 375a.

  In addition, the sub button 372 of the operation button unit 370 has a sub button lens 372a having a substantially isosceles right triangle shape in plan view and a light transmitting property, and a sub button lens 372a supported on an upper surface having a home base shape in plan view. The operation button unit base 373 is disposed below the sub button lens 372a between the sub button base 372b accommodated from above into the sub button accommodation recess 373e and the bottom surface of the sub button base 372b and the sub button accommodation recess 373e. And a sub button spring 372c that urges the button base 372b to move upward. The sub-button base 372b of the sub-button 372 includes a sub-locking claw 372d that hangs downward from the front and back with the sub-button spring 372c interposed therebetween, and a plate-shaped guide wall 372e that hangs downward from the long side of the home base. And a detection piece 372f extending further downward from the lower end of the guide wall portion 372e.

  This sub button 372 has a sub locking claw 372d that is locked to a locking portion (not shown) in the sub button receiving recess 373e of the operation button unit base 373. Since the 372d is locked to the locking portion, the sub button 372 can be prevented from coming out of the sub button accommodating recess 373e by the urging force of the sub button spring 372c. Further, when the sub button 372 is pushed downward against the urging force of the sub button spring 372c, the detection piece 372f of the sub button base 372b enters between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sub button sensor 377. The operation of the sub button 372 is detected by the sub button sensor 377.

  Further, the operation button unit decoration member 374 of the operation button unit 370 is formed in a plate shape with a substantially rhombus shape in plan view, as shown in the figure, and the main button lens 371 a of the main button 371 and the two sub buttons 372. An opening 374a through which the sub button lens 372a can pass is formed, and a decorative member lens 374b having translucency is provided at a position corresponding to the light guide opening 373d of the operation button unit base 373. . In addition, a mounting hole 374c through which a mounting screw (not shown) can be inserted from above is formed in the upper corner of the long axis diagonal line, and through this mounting hole 374c and the screw insertion hole 373f of the operation button unit base 373. The operation button unit 370 is fixedly attached to the dish body 310 by a predetermined mounting screw. In the present embodiment, a screw concealment 378 for concealing the two attachment holes 374 c is attached to the upper surface of the operation button unit decoration member 374.

  As described above, in the operation button unit 370 of the present embodiment, the operation button unit base 373 is formed in a triple cylindrical shape by the main button housing recess 373a, the light guide opening 373d, and the side wall 373h. Since the strength and rigidity are enhanced, the operation button unit 370 is not easily damaged even if the main button 371 or the like is hit and operated strongly. Further, the operation button unit 370 is mounted and fixed from above to the operation button unit mounting recess 314 of the plate 310, and in the unlikely event that the operation button unit 370 is damaged or malfunction occurs. However, it can be easily attached and detached from the top of the plate 310. Further, since the operation button unit 370 is supported (placed) on the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390 described below via the plate body 310, the shock resistance and load resistance from the main button 371 and the like. Therefore, not only the operation button unit 370 but also the entire dish unit 300 is hardly damaged.

[2-3-7. Lower speaker unit]
Subsequently, the lower speaker unit 390 in the dish unit 300 includes a lower speaker 391 having a diameter larger than that of the side speaker 121 of the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A box-like speaker box 392 that mainly holds the speaker 391 at a position to the rear of the speaker opening 321a of the main body 321 in the dish unit main body 320 at a position on the right side of the front face in a front view. The lower speaker unit 390 of the present embodiment is a bass-reflex type speaker in which the internal space of the speaker box 392 is opened to the outside through the open port 392a, and can produce a heavy bass with respect to the speaker diameter of the lower speaker 391. It can be done.

  The opening 392a of the speaker box 392 is formed at a desired position in the duct opening 321f of the main body 321 in the dish unit main body 320. It enters and exits through the duct opening 321f. Further, the flow of air entering and exiting through the duct opening 321f by driving (vibration) of the lower speaker 391 is formed so as to pass through the grip members 412 and 413 of the operation handle portion 410 in the handle device 400. The player can operate the unit 410 by applying the air flow (wind) from the lower speaker 391 to the player's hand, giving the player an unprecedented feel and having fun. Yes. Note that by sending an acoustic signal having a frequency lower than the human audible band to the lower speaker 391, only the wind can be applied to the player from the duct opening 321f, and combined with the vibrating body 371c of the main button 371. As a result, it is possible to entertain a tactile sensation that is not available in conventional gaming machines.

  The speaker box 392 is disposed on the rear surface thereof downstream of the first ball extraction path 313 and the second ball extraction opening 312 of the dish 310, and flows through the first ball extraction path 313 and the second ball extraction opening 312. A ball removal path 393 is provided for guiding the game ball that has been played to the lower portion of the speaker box 392 in the substantially horizontal direction. The ball extraction path 393 is formed in a substantially L shape with the rear open, and the door frame base main body in the door frame base unit 100 through the ball extraction path opening 345 of the dish back plate 340 in the dish unit 300. The rear side is closed by the 110 ball-out path cover 191. In addition, the game balls that have circulated through the ball removal path 393 are discharged from the ball discharge port 321 g of the main body 321 in the plate unit main body 320 to the lower side of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the speaker box 392 has a second ball removal slide holding hole 394 for holding the front end of the second ball removal slide 362 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 slidably in the front-rear direction at the upper left portion in front view, A second ball removal mechanism support portion 395 that is disposed on the rear side of the two-ball removal slide holding hole 394 and supports the second ball removal mechanism support 368 of the second ball removal mechanism 360. The second ball removal mechanism 360 can be supported at a predetermined position by the second ball removal slide holding hole 394 and the second ball removal mechanism support 395.

[2-3-8. Handle device]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the handle device 400 in the dish unit 300 includes an operation handle portion 410 provided on the lower front surface of the door frame 5 on the open side, and a door frame 5 corresponding to the operation handle portion 410. And a joint unit 180 that is linked to a rotation shaft 415 that rotates in response to a rotation operation of the operation handle portion 410 and changes the rotation motion of the rotation shaft 415 to a slide motion.

  First, the operation handle portion 410 is a handle support tube portion of a cylindrical handle base 303 attached so as to protrude forward from the handle base attachment port 321d of the main body portion 321 of the plate unit main body 320 of the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. Inserted and fixed to 303a. Since the handle support cylinder portion 303a is formed so as to be inclined outward (right side) when viewed from above the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation handle portion inserted and fixed to the handle support cylinder portion 303a. 410 is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined so as to be directed to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 5. Thus, by tilting the operation handle portion 410 outward in a plan view, there is an advantage that the player can easily grasp the operation handle portion 410 and can easily perform the rotation operation without feeling uncomfortable in the rotation operation. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, even if the operation handle portion 410 is installed at an inclination, the rotational motion of the rotation shaft 415 of the operation handle portion 410 is smoothly transmitted, and the resilience of the ball hitting device 650 is increased. A structure that can be adjusted is adopted. After the operation handle portion 410 is inserted into the handle support tube portion 303a, the handle support tube portion 303a and the operation handle portion 410 (more precisely, the rear grip member 413) are connected with a screw or the like so that the operation handle portion 410 is It cannot be pulled out from the handle support cylinder 303a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 49, the operation handle portion 410 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable between the front gripping member 412, the rear gripping member 413, and the front gripping member 412 and the rear gripping member 413. The operation member 414 includes a linear columnar rotation shaft 415 whose one end is fixed to the rotation operation member 414, and a cam 416 fixed to the other end of the rotation shaft 415. The rear grip member 413 is integrally formed with a small-diameter portion fitted to the handle support cylinder portion 303a and a large-diameter portion in front of the small-diameter portion, and a shaft through-hole 418 through which the rotation shaft 415 passes is formed at the center. Is formed. When the rotating shaft 415 is inserted into the shaft through hole 418, the bearing bush 417 is fitted into the rear end of the shaft through hole 418, and the rotating shaft 415 is inserted into the bearing bush 417. On the other hand, the rotating shaft 415 that is passed through the shaft through hole 418 via the bearing bush 417 passes through the bearing hole 424 of the fixed bearing member 423 that is fixed to the front surface side of the rear grip member 413, and the rotation operation member 414. It is fitted in a shaft fitting hole 426 formed at the center.

  Further, on the front side of the rear grip member 413, a projection and a mounting hole (both not shown) for fixing the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 are provided, and the single button 421 is supported in a swingable manner. A swing pin (not shown) is formed, and a touch sensor 420, a firing stop switch 422, and a single button 421 are attached to the protrusions, mounting holes, and swing pins. Then, the wiring through cylinder having the wiring through hole 419 formed in the side of the shaft through hole 418 of the rear grip member 413 by collecting the wiring from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 in a state where they are attached. It is led from the part 428 and the wiring opening 184c (see FIG. 22) to the back surface of the door frame 5, and is connected to the handle relay terminal plate 194 (see FIGS. 15 and 16). The wiring from the handle relay terminal plate 194 is attached along the lower reinforcing plate 36 described above, and is electrically connected to a payout control board 1186 described later. Further, an urging spring 425 is provided between the fixed bearing member 423 and the rotation operation member 414 so as to be provided around the rotation shaft 415, and the urging spring 425 always keeps the rotation operation member 414 from the original position. It is designed to return to the position. Further, a switch contact convex portion 427 protrudes outside the shaft fitting hole 426 of the rotation operation member 414. When the rotation operation member 414 is in the original position by the urging force of the urging spring 425, the switch contact is made. When the convex portion 427 contacts the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 to turn off the firing stop switch 422 and the rotation operation member 414 is rotated by the player, the switch contact convex portion 427 becomes the actuator of the firing stop switch 422. Turn away and turn on. Further, since the single button 421 can be swung while the firing stop switch 422 is ON, the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 can be turned off by pressing the single button 421. ing.

  Note that the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation member 414 is subjected to conductive plating, and the touch sensor 420 detects contact when the player contacts the rotation operation member 414. Then, when the player rotates the turning operation member 414, the firing stop switch 422 is turned on and the touch sensor 420 detects contact, a later-described firing motor 695 of the ball striking device 650 (see FIG. 68). ) Is driven to rotate.

  The cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 is formed in a slanted ball shape, and the cam contact of a slide body 182 (see FIGS. 22 and 50) of the joint unit 180 described later according to the rotation of the rotating shaft 415. The part 182d is pressed and slid in one direction. In this embodiment, the operation handle portion 410 is attached in an inclined manner in plan view as described above by the cooperative structure of the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 and the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180. It is possible.

  As described above, the operation handle portion 410 is inserted and supported from the front side of the door frame 5 into the handle support cylinder portion 303a of the handle base 303, and the joint unit 180 is attached to the joint unit mounting recess 110c from the back side of the door frame 5. Thus, as shown in FIG. 47, the cam 416 fixed to the tip end portion of the rotating shaft 415 is accommodated in the cam engaging recess 182 c of the slide body 182. In this case, the operation handle portion 410 is attached to be inclined in a plan view, so that the cam 416 is also inclined with respect to the vertical surface of the door frame 5, but the cam engaging recess 182c is predetermined in the front-rear direction. Since the space is wide, the entire inclined cam 416 can be accommodated in the space of the cam engaging recess 182c. Further, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), the storage state is such that the rotation center of the cam 416 is located on the side of the cam contact portion 182d, and the tip of the slanted cam 416 is below the cam engagement recess 182c. It is located in the space.

  When the player rotates the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 in the above-described state, the rotation shaft 415 rotates and the cam 416 rotates accordingly, as shown in FIG. The slide body 182 is moved in one direction (in the case of FIG. 50, in the right direction in the figure) by the contact between the cam contact portion 182d of the cam engagement recess 182c and the one outer surface of the cam 416 (the outer surface of the rotation front). Move to slide. That is, the rotational motion of the rotating shaft 415 is converted into the sliding motion of the slide body 182. For this reason, the distance S1 between the rotation center of the cam 416 and the end of the slide protrusion 183 in the moving direction of the slide body 182 in the initial state (before rotation) shown in FIG. The distance S2 is greater than the distance S1 due to the rotation. That is, the slide protrusion 183 of the slide body 182 slides by a distance of “S2-S1”. 48, 51, and 52, the slide movement of the slide piece 183 of the joint unit 180 is transmitted to the slide member 710 of the hitting ball launcher 650, and the biasing spring 684 ( The tension of the striking ball 687 can be adjusted by adjusting the tension (see FIG. 68) to obtain the ball striking force desired by the player. The relationship between the handle device 400 and the ball hitting device 650 will be described in detail after the ball hitting device 650 is described.

  In addition, the wiring led out from the inside of the operation handle 410 to the back surface of the door frame 5 through the wiring through hole 419, the wiring through tube portion 428, and the wiring opening 184c is supported on the shaft support side along the lower back side of the door frame 5. And then connected to the operation handle terminal 1194 (see FIG. 90) of the payout control board 1186 that is collectively attached to the board unit 1100 attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. .

[2-3-9. Effect of dish unit]
Next, the flow of game balls in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 of the present embodiment will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 53 and FIG. In the present embodiment, a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, flows from the ball inlet 341 into the storage dish 311 via the full tank unit 900 and the prize ball contact bar 343 of the dish back plate 340. The game ball that has flowed in from the ball inlet 341 first flows into the first inclined surface 311a. The first inclined surface 311a is formed so that the front side and the right side when viewed from the front are lowered, and the game balls that flow into the first inclined surface 311a from the ball inflow port 341 follow the inclination of the first inclined surface 311a. The outer peripheral wall 311h that surrounds the front outer periphery of the storage plate 311 comes into contact with a position substantially opposite to the ball inlet 341. This position of the outer peripheral wall 311h is inclined in a curved line with respect to the surface of the dish back plate 340 on which the ball inlet 341 is formed, and the game ball in contact with the outer peripheral wall 311h moves rightward in front view. It is designed to reflect.

  Then, the game ball that has flowed into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 and reflected rightward on the outer peripheral wall 311h enters the fifth inclined surface 311e beyond the fourth inclined surface 311d. The fifth inclined surface 311e is lower on the left side when viewed from the front, that is, on the fourth inclined surface 311d side, and the inclination angle is set to a gentle inclination that allows a game ball entering from the first inclined surface 311a to climb up. Thus, the game ball that has entered the first inclined surface 311a beyond the fourth inclined surface 311d circulates to the upper portion (right end portion in plan view) of the fifth inclined surface 311e while ascending the fifth inclined surface 311e. It will be. The fifth inclined surface 311e is partitioned from the front side to the rear side by the outer peripheral wall 311h and the partition wall 311f around the right end, and the game ball that has entered the fifth inclined surface 311e The outer peripheral wall 311h and the partition wall 311f are surrounded by the fifth inclined surface 311e so as to return to the fourth inclined surface 311d disposed on the left side of the fifth inclined surface 311e.

  The game balls that have entered the fourth inclined surface 311d from the fifth inclined surface 311e flow to the second inclined surface 311b on the rear side of the fourth inclined surface 311d according to the inclination of the fourth inclined surface 311d, and further It enters from the inclined surface 311b to the right third inclined surface 311c, and is supplied to the ball striking device 650 from the ball supply port 342 of the dish back plate 340 disposed at the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c. It has become. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 does not go directly from the first inclined surface 311a to the third inclined surface 311c via the second inclined surface 311b, but from the first inclined surface 311a. After entering the fifth inclined surface 311e via the fourth inclined surface 311d, the third inclined surface 311c is reached via the fourth inclined surface 311d and the second inclined surface 311b. The game ball flowing in from 341 can be detoured.

  As a result, the entire storage tray 311 can be used effectively to store a plurality of game balls, and the game balls are stored in a state of low storage as in conventional pachinko gaming machines, and the game balls block the ball inlet 341. As a result, the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900 is actuated to stop the payout of the game ball, or the game ball firing operation at the ball hitting device 650 is stopped and the game is interrupted. This can be prevented well.

  By the way, a large number of game balls are stored in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 of the present embodiment, whereby the ball inlet 341 is closed by the stored game balls, and the prize ball contact bar 343 of the tray back plate 340 When the game ball stays in the full tank unit 900 arranged between the prize ball unit 800, the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900 is operated to stop paying out the game balls from the prize ball unit 800. Or stopping the game ball launching operation in the hitting ball launching device 650, and especially when the launching operation of the hitting ball launching device 650 is stopped, the game cannot be interrupted. When the amount of game balls stored in the storage tray 311 reaches an appropriate amount, the first ball extraction button 351 and the second ball extraction button 361 are operated to remove the game balls from the storage tray 311 to the dish unit 300. Container disposed below (e.g., dollars boxes) it is necessary to discharge the. In the present embodiment, when the full tank switch 916 is activated, the player is informed that the inside of the storage tray 311 is full, and then the firing operation of the ball hitting device 650 is stopped.

  In order to discharge the game ball from the storage tray 311, the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350 is operated by operating (pushing) the first ball removal button 351 disposed on the upper surface of the dish unit 300. Slides to release the closure between the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313, and causes the game ball on the third inclined surface 311c to flow down to the first ball removal path 313. It can discharge | emit to the downward direction of the dish unit 300 from the ball | bowl discharge port 321g via the extraction path | route 393. FIG. By operating the first ball removal button 351, the game balls can be extracted from the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c which is the lowest position in the storage tray 311. Therefore, all the game balls are discharged from the storage tray 311. Be able to. However, in the ball removal by operating the first ball removal button 351, the game balls are aligned in a row on the third inclined surface 311c, so that there is a problem that it takes time to remove the ball.

  Therefore, when the second ball removal button 361 disposed on the left side of the front surface of the dish unit 300 is operated (pressed), the second ball removal shutter 364 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 moves to move the second ball removal shutter 364 in the storage tray 311. The ball outlet 312 is opened, and the game ball upstream of the second ball outlet 312 in the storage tray 311 passes through the second ball outlet 312 and passes from the ball outlet 321g through the ball outlet 393 to the dish unit. It can be discharged below 300 (see FIG. 53B). As shown in the drawing, the second ball outlet 312 has an opening that is several times larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that many game balls can be quickly discharged at once. Accordingly, the presence of the two buttons, the first ball removal button 351 and the second ball removal button 361, allows the player to select the length of time to remove the ball. In addition, when a big hit is made during the game, a large amount of balls are paid out to the dish unit 300, and if the game is continued with the ball left unattended, the full tank switch 916 provided on the upstream side of the dish unit 300 (see FIG. 80) is activated and the payout operation is stopped or the ballistic operation is stopped and the hitting operation of the game ball stops and the game cannot be continued even though it is a big hit. Yes, in such a case, by operating the second ball removal button 361, the ball being stored in the dish unit 300 is removed, and at the same time, the supply of the ball to the launch position is maintained and the game that is in big hit Can be continued.

  In the dish unit 300 of the present embodiment, when the second ball removal button 361 is operated, the second ball removal shutter 364 is held at the open position by the latch unit 366 of the second ball removal mechanism 360, and the second ball removal button 361 is held. The mouth 312 can be kept open. In this state, when the game balls on the upstream side of the second ball outlet 312 are discharged and there are almost no game balls on the first inclined surface 311a, the game balls flowing in from the ball inlet 341 are as described above. The second inclined surface 311b, which is reflected from the outer peripheral wall 311h and flows in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e, the fourth inclined surface 311d, the fifth inclined surface 311e, the second inclined surface 311b, A game ball is supplied on the third inclined surface 311c. Therefore, even if the game ball on the third inclined surface 311c is consumed by the launching operation of the hit ball launching device 650, as long as the game ball flows into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341, the second inclined surface 311b, If the game balls are supplied to the third inclined surface 311c via the fourth inclined surface 311d and the fifth inclined surface 311e, and the number of game balls that flow in by stopping the firing operation of the game balls increases, the second ball Since it will be produced from the outlet 312, a certain amount of game balls can always be secured in the storage tray 311 and the game can be continued even when the second ball outlet 312 remains open. ing. That is, the game can be continued without paying attention to the amount of game balls in the storage tray 311 even in a state where game balls are continuously paid out, such as during a big hit game.

  In the dish unit 300 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54 and the like, the storage tray 311 of the dish body 310 has a bottom surface continuously including a first inclined surface 311a, a second inclined surface 311b, and a third inclined surface 311c. In contrast, the sphere inlet 341 of the dish back plate 340 has a rectangular shape extending substantially horizontally in the left-right direction, while the height decreases toward the right (the sphere supply port 342) in a front view. Therefore, a step is formed between the bottom surface of the storage tray 311 and the bottom of the ball inlet 341, and the step is increased as it goes to the right in the front view. It has become. The step between the bottom surface of the storage tray 311 and the bottom of the ball inlet 341 has almost no step at the left end of the ball inlet 341. There is a slightly higher step. As a result, the game balls that have flowed substantially straight in the front-rear direction via the prize ball communication rod 343 flow into the storage tray 311 mainly through the left side portion of the ball inlet 341 with few steps. As a result, the potential energy (falling energy) of the game ball falling from the ball inlet 341 to the storage tray 311 is small due to the small level difference, and the load applied to the storage tray 311 is reduced and the storage tray 311 is damaged. Can be prevented.

  By the way, when the amount of game balls stored in the storage tray 311 increases and a large number of game balls are stored on the first inclined surface 311a, the ball inflow port 341 is connected via the prize ball contact hole 343. The game balls flowing into the storage tray 311 are shaped so as to push the game balls stored in the storage tray 311 from the side, and the game balls are pressed against each other by applying a lateral force to each game ball. It becomes a state. In this state, when the game balls in the storage tray 311 (third inclined surface 311c) are consumed via the ball supply port 342, the game balls are collected near the upstream side of the third inclined surface 311c (second inclined surface 311b). When the width of the flow path is narrowed, the game balls may be pressed against each other and the fluidity of the game balls may be reduced, resulting in clogging of the balls. In this embodiment, as described above, the ball inlet 341 is in the horizontal direction The game ball from the prize ball contact bar 343 directly flows into the second inclined surface 311b through the shelf 344, and the game ball is supplied to the third inclined surface 311c. This is possible (see FIG. 53B).

  In addition, in the portion on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the ball inlet 341, the lower side of the ball inlet 341 is higher than the outer diameter of the game ball with respect to the bottom surface of the storage dish 311. Thus, the game balls flowing into the storage tray 311 flow into the upper side of the game balls stored in the storage tray 311, and the fluidity of the game balls is suppressed by preventing the game balls from pushing sideways. In addition to being able to prevent the lowering, the game balls flowing in from the top promote the lateral movement of the lower game balls (especially the game balls in contact with the front surface of the dish back plate 340), and naturally Ball clogging can be eliminated (see FIG. 54).

  As described above, the tray unit 300 according to the present embodiment allows the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to be stored in the horizontally long ball inlet 341 even if the amount of game balls stored in the storage tray 311 increases. Since the game balls stored in the storage tray 311 are allowed to flow into the upper side of the storage tray 311 via the shelf 344, it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the game balls from clogging in the storage tray 311. The game can be continued without worrying about the game balls in the storage tray 311, and the player's interest can be prevented from decreasing.

[2-4. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 450 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 is a front perspective view of the glass unit, FIG. 56 is an exploded perspective view showing the glass unit exploded from the front, and FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 56 from the rear. As shown in the drawing, this glass unit 450 has an annular, vertically-long octagonal unit frame 451 that has a larger opening than the game window 101 and is molded of synthetic resin, and two front and rear ends of the unit frame 451 are closed. The transparent glass plate 452 of a sheet | seat, and the strip | belt-shaped glass decoration board | substrate 453 arrange | positioned along the inner periphery of the unit frame 451 between the two glass plates 452 are provided.

  The unit frame 451 in the glass unit 450 has a substrate insertion groove 451a into which the rear side is opened and the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted, and a plurality of openings 451b that open from the substrate insertion groove 451a toward the inner peripheral side of the unit frame 451. An engagement groove 451c formed in the outer periphery of the center of the unit frame 451 in the front-rear direction, a terminal plate support portion 451d protruding leftward from the upper left end in a front view, and an outer periphery that is higher than the center in the vertical direction Stop pieces 451e that respectively protrude in the left-right direction from the position, and locking protrusions 451f that protrude outward in the left-right direction from both ends of the lower side are provided.

  In addition, the glass decorative substrate 453 in the glass unit 450 is strip-like and flexible, and has a plurality of color LEDs 453a at positions corresponding to the openings 451b of the unit frame 451 on the front surface side (inner surface side of the unit frame 451). When the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted into the substrate insertion groove 451a of the unit frame 451, the LED 453a faces the inner surface side of the unit frame 451 through the opening 451b.

  Further, the glass unit 450 is connected to the glass decorative substrate and is supported by the terminal plate support portion 451d of the unit frame 451, and the substrate for fixing the end of the glass decorative substrate 453 to the glass decorative relay substrate 454. A press plate 455 and a terminal plate holder 456 that covers the terminal plate support portion 451d of the unit frame 451 that supports the glass decorative relay substrate 454 are further provided.

  In the glass unit 450, glass plates 452 are bonded and fixed to the front and rear of the unit frame 451 in a state where the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted into the substrate insertion groove 451 a of the unit frame 451. In the glass unit 450, the engaging groove 451c formed on the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 451 engages with the vertical bent protruding piece 151 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 451 and the stopper piece 451e The locking projection 451f is fitted in the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base body 110 from the rear side, and is detachably attached to the door frame 5 by the stop lever 196. .

  In addition, the glass unit 450 is configured to emit light between the two glass plates 452 by appropriately emitting light from the color LEDs 453a of the glass decoration substrate 453, which is different from conventional pachinko gaming machines. A pachinko gaming machine 1 having a gaming window 101 having an atmosphere (with a mood) can be provided.

[2-5. Security cover]
Next, the security cover 470 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. The security cover 470 is provided with a security function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 450 and prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4. Are formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 450 between the reinforcing metal plates 142 and 143, and the upper side portion thereof is an arc-shaped contact recess 471 along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 603 of the game board 4. And a post-crime prevention protruding piece 474 projecting rearward along the contact recess 471. Further, a crime prevention rear end protrusion 475 is formed in a slanting manner on the back surface of the shaft support side with the crime prevention cover 470 attached. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 470, a crime prevention pre-projection piece 472 along the lower shape of the unit frame 451 in the glass unit 450 is projected with the crime prevention cover 470 attached, and U-shaped at both lower ends. A mounting elastic piece 473 is formed so as to project forward.

  The security cover 470 configured as described above is detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5 by mounting the mounting elastic piece 473 on the mounting opening 116 formed in the door frame base unit 100. And in the attached state, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the protrusion piece 472 before crime prevention faces the back lower one side of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450. FIG. Further, the front end of the crime prevention front protrusion 472 is in contact with the vertical bent protrusion 151. In addition, the post-crime projecting piece 474 and the post-crime end end projecting piece 475 are in a state of projecting rearward, but when the door frame 5 is closed, The bottom side of the inner rail 603 fixed to the game board 4 enters and faces the lower side, but the half of the open side of the post-crime projection 474 is rail security formed on the inner rail 603 of the front component 601 The state is inserted into the groove 607, and the crime prevention rear end protrusion 475 is in a superposed position along the upper surface of the crime prevention projection 608 formed on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3.

  Thus, in the state in which the security cover 470 is attached and the door frame 5 is closed, the security structure by the door frame protrusion 110d and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 described above, and the security protrusion 166 and the security space 586 described later. In addition to the crime prevention structure by the above, even if it is attempted to intrude an unauthorized tool from below the glass unit 450, the unauthorized device enters from the front lower direction of the security cover 470 due to the polymerization of the pre-crime projection piece 472 and the unit frame 451. The anti-crime piece 474 and the inner rail 603 constituting the front component 601 are superposed to prevent unauthorized equipment from entering from the lower side of the rear face of the security cover 470. In particular, against the intrusion of unauthorized tools from the diagonally lower side of the door frame 5 on the shaft support side, the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the outer rail 602 is prevented by the superposed structure of the security projection 608 and the rear end projection 475. In addition, the overlapping structure of the inner rail 603 and the post-crime protrusion 474 can prevent unauthorized equipment from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4.

  Similarly, in addition to the crime prevention structure by the double bent projecting pieces 153 and 154 of the above-described opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 143, intrusion of unauthorized tools from obliquely below the opening side of the door frame 5, The uneven engagement between the rail crime prevention groove 607 and the post-crime projection piece 474 can further prevent the unauthorized tool from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4. Note that a vertical surface between the post-crime protrusion 474 and the rear-end protrusion 475 on the back side of the security cover 470 is formed by the outer rail 602 and the inner rail 603 with the door frame 5 closed. Since it covers the lower part of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball, it also has a function of preventing the hit ball that jumps or reverses the guide path part from colliding with the glass plate 452.

[3. Body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 is a front view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, FIG. 59 is a rear view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, and FIG. 60 is a main body frame main body before mounting the parts. FIG. 61 is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, and FIG. 62 is a perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. 63 is a perspective view of a state in which the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2, and FIG. 64 is a rear view of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. FIG. 66 is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame 3 to which the components are attached, and FIG. It is.

  The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment has a game board 4 that can be detachably mounted from the front side, a hitting ball launching device 650, a prize ball tank 720 for delivering a prize ball, a tank rail member 740, and a ball path unit. 770, a prize ball unit 800, a full tank unit 900, a locking device 1000 for locking the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and a door frame 5 to the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 and the main body frame excluding the game board 4 Various components such as a substrate unit 1100 in which various control boards for controlling electrical components provided in 3 and a power supply board 1136 are collectively provided, a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580, and the like are mounted. The main body frame main body 500 is provided.

  First, the main body frame main body 500 on which the above-described various components are mounted and the main body frame 3 on which the various components are mounted will be described. 58, an upper shaft support bracket 503 and a lower shaft support bracket 509 (both see FIG. 62) for opening and closing the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 are attached to the upper and lower sides of the main body frame main body 500. In the state where the upper shaft bracket 503 and the lower shaft bracket 509 are mounted on the shaft bracket mounting steps 501 and 502, the upper side and the side of the main body frame main body 500 are formed. The sides are substantially flush with the upper sides and sides of the upper shaft support 503, and the lower and sides of the main body frame main body 500 are substantially flush with the lower sides and sides of the lower shaft support 509 (see FIG. 64). Note that a wiring opening 537 that communicates with a wiring opening 1124 (see FIG. 86) formed in a frame substrate holder 1101 described below is provided below one side of the main body frame main body 500 (left side in FIG. 62). Is formed. Here, the upper shaft bracket 503 and the lower shaft bracket 509 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 and 64. The upper shaft support fitting 503 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and its upper end protrudes forward. A shaft support pin 504 is erected and fixed on the upper surface protruding forward, and the shaft support pin 504 A door shaft support hole 505 is formed on the side.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support 509 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and two support plates 506 and 507 are integrally projected on the lower end side and slightly on the upper side. The lower support plate 506 constitutes a frame support plate 506 for supporting the main body frame 3 on the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2, and the upper support plate 507 is provided on the door frame 5. A door support plate 507 for supporting the lower shaft support portion 148 on the main body frame 3 is configured. For this reason, a shaft support hole (not shown) for inserting the support protrusion 68 of the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2 is formed in the frame support plate 506, and the lower support portion 148 of the door frame 5 is formed in the door support plate 507. A shaft support hole 508 for inserting the projecting shaft pin 147 is formed.

  By the way, the main body frame main body 500 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the upper part thereof becomes a game board installation recess 510 (see FIG. 62) for installing the game board 4. A slightly recessed area below the game board installation recess 510 is a plate portion 511. In addition, the front upper side portion and the front open side portion on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are formed with a predetermined width so as to face the rear surface of the door frame 5, An upper crime prevention double groove 581 is formed by a protrusion protruding in parallel with the lateral direction, and a side crime prevention groove 582 is formed on the outer side and on the inner side of the front opening side edge on the right side when viewed from the front. A security recess 583 is formed which is formed by an inner wall having an inclined surface that is connected to the first side wall 540 at the rear end. Unlike the side part, it is not formed so as to have a predetermined width that faces the back surface of the door frame 5, but the front shaft support side part of the main body frame main body 500 is more forward than the front upper side part or the front open side part. The shaft support side portion 587 (see FIG. 79) has a large protrusion amount.

  More specifically, the upper crime prevention double groove 581 formed on the upper side of the front surface is bent toward the rear with both long side ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 attached and fixed to the back side of the upper side of the door frame 5. The bent projecting pieces 155 and 156 are inserted respectively. Further, the side security grooves 582 and the security recesses 583 formed on the front open side edges are folded back at the long side ends of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 attached and fixed to the open back of the door frame 5. The open-side outer bent protrusion 153 and the open-side inner bent protrusion 154 to be bent are respectively inserted. Further, on the shaft support side portion 587 of the front shaft support side portion, the tip end of the shaft support side L-shaped bent protruding piece 157 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 attached and fixed to the shaft support side rear surface of the door frame 5 is provided. The parts come into contact.

  Further, the above-described structure can prevent an illegal act of inserting a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire through the gap between the contact surfaces of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, and in particular, the open side where the fraudulent act is most likely to be performed. It has a structure that can prevent fraud at the side and then at the upper side where fraud is likely to be performed. Of course, the prevention of fraud by the contact between the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 142 on the support side and the support-side L-shaped bent protrusion 157 also works well, but in many cases the support side is sturdy. Since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are connected to each other by the support brackets 45 and 66 and the shaft support brackets 503 and 509, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is larger than that of the upper side and the open side. It is difficult to make a gap. For this reason, in this embodiment, not a double crime prevention structure but a single crime prevention structure. These points will be described in detail later.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the front upper side, front open side, and front pivot side on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are arranged on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the front open side. A door hook hole 549 is formed to pass through a door frame hook portion 1041 provided on a lock device 1000, which will be described later, attached to the open side rear surface of the main body frame 3, and to jump forward. A board positioning projection 576 for engaging with a positioning recess 611 formed in the game board 4 is provided on the inner side surface of the side part. Further, the pivot side L-shaped bent projection piece 157 of the pivot side reinforcement sheet metal 142 with the door frame 5 closed on the inner front surface of the lower side position of the panel positioning projection 576 on the front side pivot side side part. Two upper and lower restricting projections 577 into which the tip is inserted are provided. The operation of the restricting protrusion 577 is as described above. Also, as shown in FIG. 58, a board stopper insertion hole into which an end of a game board stopper 614 provided on the game board 4 is engaged above and below the boundary between the open-side plane portion and the game board installation recess 510. 578 is formed.

  Next, the configuration of the plate portion 511 will be described with reference to FIGS. The upper surface of the plate portion 511 is a game board placement section 512 for placing the game board 4, and when the game board 4 is placed at the approximate center of the game board placement section 512, the game board 4 is provided with a passage support protrusion 513 that supports the lower surface of the out port 606 (see FIG. 97) formed in the base 4. Further, as shown in FIG. 58, a rail mounting boss 514 protrudes from the central portion of the front surface of the plate portion 511 toward the opening side end portion at a predetermined interval, and the launch rail 515 ( 62) is fixed with screws. Further, a rail connection member 516 protrudes from the front surface of the plate portion 511 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 515, and when the game board 4 is installed in the game board installation recess 510, the inner rail of the game board 4 is provided. It is configured to be adjacent to the connection passage portion 609 which is the downstream end of 603.

  Further, an upper end portion of an elliptical game board fixture 519 (see FIG. 62) for fixing the lower part of the game board 4 to the side position of the rail connection member 516 (position opposite to the firing rail 515). A fixing tool mounting boss 517 for mounting is protruded, and a stopper 518 is protruded obliquely below. That is, the game board fixing tool 519 is provided so as to be rotatable about the fixing tool mounting boss 517, and rotates in the clockwise direction in a state where the game board 4 is placed on the game board mounting portion 512, thereby playing the game board. The fixture 519 is pressed against the front surface of the game board 4 to fix the game board 4. Further, when removing the game board, it can be easily performed by turning the game board fixture 519 counterclockwise and removing it. In this case, the game board fixture 519 is prevented from being rotated counterclockwise by the stopper 518.

  In addition, the lower part of the open side of the plate part 511 is formed with a rectangular parallelepiped launching device mounting portion 520 that projects in a bulging shape toward the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). A hitting ball launcher 650 is fixed to the mounting portion 520 from the back surface of the main body frame main body 500. This will be described in detail later. A handle connecting window 522 that houses a slide member 710 (see FIG. 72) that cooperates with the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 described above is formed on the front wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 520 described above. A shaft hole 523 is formed at the position adjacent to the handle connection window 522 so that the end face of the bearing 689 (see FIG. 68) of the ball striking rod 687 faces. In addition, the upper wall portion of the launching device mounting portion 520 is formed with a notch-shaped through hole opening 521 for projecting the hitting ball rod 687 of the hitting ball launching device 650 upward, and a plate portion 511 obliquely above the saddle through opening 521. Is formed with a cylinder lock through hole 526 through which the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 passes.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 59, on the back surface of the plate portion 511, a ball discharge passage 524 is formed that extends from the upper portion on the shaft support side toward the central portion of the plate portion 511 and then goes downward. . The ball discharge passage 524 is for discharging a ball discharged from a ball connection passage 880 (see FIG. 62), which will be described later, from below the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the inside of the island. Further, a cylindrical guide protrusion 525 protrudes rearward above the above-described launching device mounting portion 520, and a guide hole 1125 (see FIG. 87) of the substrate unit 1100 described later is provided in the guide protrusion 525. The board unit 1100 is easily attached by being inserted. Also, mounting holes 527 for mounting the board unit 1100 with screws are formed on the left and right and upper and lower sides of the plate part 511, and the mounting pieces 1122 of the board unit 1100 are made to correspond to the mounting holes 527 and fastened with screws. In addition, a launching device mounting boss 529 for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650 is projected rearwardly inside the concave shape of the launching device mounting portion 520, and further, the lowermost end portion on the open side is shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a guide protrusion with a tapered tip and a vertically long shape is provided to guide the closing operation of the main body frame 3 while contacting the upper surface of the decorative cover plate 15. 528 protrudes rearward.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the plate portion 511 has a ball removal connection opening 530 that is an opening at the upstream end of the ball removal discharge passage 524 on the upper surface of the end portion on the shaft support side, as shown in FIG. . The downstream end of the ball removal connection passage 880 is connected to the ball removal connection opening 530. Further, the portion adjacent to the ball-opening connection opening 530 is horizontal so that a full unit mounting portion 531 for mounting a full unit 900 (see FIG. 62), which will be described in detail later, is orthogonal to the plate portion 511. A unit engagement groove 532 that engages with an engagement piece 924 (see FIG. 80) of the full tank unit 900 is formed in the front portion of the full unit mounting portion 531. Further, as shown in FIG. 62, an exit for damming a prize ball discharged from the exit 921 of the full tank unit 900 when the door frame 5 is opened is provided on the front surface of the plate portion 511 in front of the full unit mounting portion 531. An opening / closing device 579 is provided.

  Although the outlet opening / closing device 579 is not described in detail, when the door frame 5 is closed, the opening / closing plate is lowered by a lever that contacts the back surface of the door frame 5, but the door plate 5 is opened. Then, the contact with the lever disappears, so that the opening / closing plate rises and closes the outlet 921. For this reason, even when the door frame 5 is opened, the prize balls stored in the full tank unit 900 do not fall down from the outlet 921. In addition, as shown in FIG. 62, a fastening hole penetrating vertically in a position corresponding to the upper part of the launching portion of the firing rail 515 in the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511. 533 is formed, and a fastening link 534 for holding the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533. The fastening linkage 534 is a mechanism for preventing the game board 4 from being detached from the main body frame 3.

  Next, the structure of the game board installation recessed part 510 is demonstrated. The game board installation recess 510 is provided around a first side wall 540 that is provided in a rearward direction from the inner side surface on the pivot support side, the above-described upper side portion, and the open side surface portion, and a rear side provided from the first side wall 540. The main body frame 3 includes a second side wall 541, a third side wall 542 that is provided rearward from the second side wall 541, and a fourth side wall 543 that is provided rearward from the third side wall 542. Are formed in a concave shape in which the left and right sides and the rear part of the upper side are surrounded.

  The first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 are formed such that the upper side and the right side (sides on the shaft support side) are straightly extended rearward with a step when viewed from the back, whereas the left side ( The open side) is formed in a stepped shape (see FIG. 66) that inwardly slopes from the first side wall 540 toward the fourth side wall 543. This is because the rear end of the fourth side wall 543 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened when the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the left side (side on the open side) are straightly formed rearward. May be in contact with the inner surface of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2 so that it cannot be opened smoothly. Therefore, the first side wall surface 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the open side can be smoothly opened by inclining inside. It is something that can be done.

  At the same time, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and the attachment is performed using the lock attachment hole 547 provided in the rear end side of the first side wall 540. In order to form the lock mounting hole 547, the fourth side wall 543 is formed in an inclined step shape from the first side wall 540 on the open side. Furthermore, as for the step size of the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543, the step between the first side wall 540 and the second side wall 541 needs to be in contact with the periphery of the back surface of the game board 4 described later. For this reason, it is formed with a somewhat large step, but the other steps are extremely small steps. Of course, the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 may be formed continuously without forming a step.

  The side walls 540 to 543 described above are formed to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3, and d4 as shown in FIG. 60. In the case of this embodiment, d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 = about 135 mm. . In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first side wall 540 corresponds to the thickness of the game board 4, and the game board is formed in the space formed by the remaining second side wall 541, third side wall 542, and fourth side wall 543. The rear projecting portions of various gaming devices provided in 4 are accommodated.

  That is, the first side wall 540 constitutes a front side wall having a depth dimension substantially the same as the thickness of the game board 4, and the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are in contact with the rear surface of the peripheral part of the game board 4. A rear side wall that has a stepped portion that contacts the rear side wall of the gaming device 4 that extends from the first side wall 540 in a rearward direction substantially parallel to the first side wall 540 and that is provided on the game board 4; It constitutes. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the rearward protruding amounts of all the parts of the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are fixed to the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. It is formed so as to be at substantially the same position as the rear wall 722 of the storage portion 728 for storing the balls of the prize ball tank 720.

  Thereby, since the size of the space formed by the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall 543 is secured up to a position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, for example, a game Even in the case where a gaming device is installed in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the board 4, the rearward protruding portion of such a gaming device can be easily stored.

  59 and 61, from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 to the left side (open side), the upper side and the right side (shaft support side) when viewed from the back side, the open side rear wall 544, An upper rear wall 545 and a pivot support side rear wall 546 as a rear wall are projected inward so as to be parallel to the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine. The shaft support side rear wall 546 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 58), and a ball path unit 770 (to be described later) and a prize ball unit 800 constituting a ball payout mechanism are detachably attached to the rear surface. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the width of the projecting width toward the inner side of the pivot support side rear wall 546 is sufficient if the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 are wide enough to be mounted.

  Further, the upper rear wall 545 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 58), and a tank rail member 740, which will be described later, is attached to the rear surface of the upper rear wall 545, and its lower end side is formed in an inclined shape. Therefore, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the upper rear wall 545 to have a height width dimension of the tank rail member 740 attached in an inclined manner. Furthermore, the front surface of the open-side rear wall 544 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 58), and a cover body support cylinder portion 575 that pivotally supports the shaft support pin 1251 of the cover body 1250 is formed on the rear surface. ing. Accordingly, it is sufficient that the width of the projecting width toward the inside of the open-side rear wall 544 is a width that forms the cover body support cylinder 575.

  As described above, the front surfaces of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot-side rear wall 546 that project inward from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are formed in a flat plate shape. Since the flat plate portion corresponds to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, as described above, the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4. Since the size of the space formed by 543 is ensured, for example, even when a gaming device is attached such that the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the gaming board 4, The rear projecting portion can be easily stored. Note that the insides of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot support-side rear wall 546 form a rear opening 580, and the rear opening 580 is closed by the cover body 1250 so as to be opened and closed. Yes.

  Next, a more detailed configuration of the game board mounting recess 510 will be described. As described above, the door hook hole 549 through which the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 passes is formed on the open side plane portion. There are three places in the middle and bottom, but a lock locking hole 548 (see FIG. 59) into which a locking projection 1004 (described later) of the lock device 1000 is engaged further above and below the upper and lower door hook holes 549. ) Is formed. Further, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side. A lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 59) for attaching the lock device 1000 with a screw is provided at the rear end of the first side wall 540. It is formed in the upper part and the middle. It should be noted that the locking device 1000 is attached not only at the upper and middle positions, but also at a screw mounting portion 543 formed in a lock mounting piece 1008 described later and a lock mounting hole 547 formed in the vicinity of the cylinder lock through hole 526. And the lower part of the locking device 1000 can be attached.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 61, on the left and right in front of the upper side of the first side wall 540, when the body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, A guide arc projection 552 that abuts is provided, and a relief recess 551 that communicates with a notch 729 of a prize ball tank 720, which will be described later, is formed at the center of the rear end side of the first side wall 540. A tank mounting groove 550 is formed on a vertical surface connected to the side wall 541. When the mounting flange 733 of the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the tank attachment groove 550, the notch 729 of the prize ball tank 720 communicates with the relief recess 551 as shown in FIG. When the ball pressure of the sphere stored in the tank increases, the pressure is released to prevent clogging. When the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rear side wall 722 on the back side and the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are substantially coincident when viewed from the front side of the prize ball tank 720 in plan view (FIG. 4). See). The guide arc projection 552 described above lifts the main body frame 3 by bringing the upper side of the main body frame 3 into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 and the decorative cover plate. 15 is formed to prevent a fraudulent act such as forming a gap with 15 and inserting a fraudulent instrument through the gap.

  Further, the above-described upper rear wall 545 is formed with a rail locking groove 553 for attaching the tank rail member 740 along the opening edge of the rear opening 580, and the fourth side wall 543 and the upper rear wall. A rail locking groove 554 is formed in the bent portion of 545. The tank rail member 740 can be attached to the main body frame 3 by locking the locking protrusions 749, 750 (see FIG. 75) of the tank rail member 740 in the rail locking grooves 553, 554. In addition, a rail latching elastic piece 555 is formed on the upper part of the upper rear wall 545 corresponding to the downstream side when the tank rail member 740 is attached, and the tank rail member 740 is locked in the rail locking grooves 553 and 554. When the projecting pieces 749 and 750 are locked and the tank rail member 740 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rail latching elastic piece 555 is arranged at the upper end on the downstream side of the tank rail member 740 so that the locked state is not released. It comes in contact with the top.

  When the tank rail member 740 is removed, the rail rail elastic member 555 is pressed backward, and then the tank rail is released to release the locking state between the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 and the locking protrusions 749 and 750. The member 740 may be lifted upward. Further, a relief hole 556 is formed on the side of the rail latching elastic piece 555, and a ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 79 and the like) is formed below the rail latching elastic piece 555. The escape hole 556 is formed to escape the end of the shaft pin 748 of the alignment gear 747 provided in the tank rail member 740, and the ground wire connector 557 is provided inside the tank rail member 740. In addition to being in contact with a metal conductive plate (not shown) to be attached, a wiring connected to a ground connector provided on the power supply board 1136 is connected.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 59 and 61, vertical standing walls 560 are erected on the left and right ends of the shaft support side rear wall 546 on the shaft support side rear wall 546, and a spherical passage unit is provided between the standing walls 560. 770 and a prize ball unit 800 are attached. In addition, a prize ball guide projection 561 is provided in a bent shape from the most upstream part between the left and right standing walls 560 to slightly above the middle stream part. The award ball guide protrusion 561 is protruded rearward on the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that the protrusion height gradually decreases toward the downstream side, and a ball passage unit 770 described later is attached. Corresponding to the ball drop passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770, the award balls are guided in a line. Further, a path unit mounting boss 562 for fixing the ball path unit 770 with screws and a positioning pin 574 for positioning are provided on the left and right sides of the prize ball guide projection 561, and a ball break switch described later. A switch-corresponding protrusion 563 is provided so as to face 778. The passage unit mounting boss 562 and the positioning pin 574 will be described in detail later.

  Furthermore, an engaging protrusion 565 as a locking portion that engages with a hook-like engaging portion 824 (see FIG. 77) as an engaging portion of the prize ball unit 800 from the midstream portion to the downstream portion of the left and right standing walls 560; The lock elastic claw 564 that engages with the button insertion engagement hole 821 (see FIG. 77) of the prize ball unit 800 is formed, and the rotation shaft 808 (see FIG. 77) of the sprocket 807 of the prize ball unit 800 is formed. A clearance hole 566 for receiving the end of the reference is formed. A payout motor escape opening 572 is formed below the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that the payout motor 815 as a drive motor of the prize ball unit 800 faces the payout motor escape opening 572. (See FIG. 62). Then, the prize ball unit 800 is engaged with the lower end of the locking groove 573 formed at the lowermost bottom surface of the rear surface of the shaft support side rear wall 546 and the rear of the shaft support side by the engaging protrusion 565 and the lock elastic claw 564. The face wall 546 is detachably attached. This detachable configuration will be described in detail later.

  In addition, a cover body contact groove 567 into which the open side end of the cover body 1250 enters is formed at the open end of the pivot support side rear wall 546 and below the cover body contact groove 567. A locking wall 569 is provided in a protruding manner. The cover body abutment groove 567 is formed with stop holes 568 corresponding to the stop holes 1253 (see FIG. 65) of the cover body 1250, and these stop holes 1253 and 568 are aligned with each other and fixed with screws (not shown). By wearing, the rear opening 580 of the main body frame 3 can be closed and fixed by the cover body 1250. The locking wall 569 is provided with a U-shaped locking protruding hook piece 570 in a plan view, and the locking protruding hook piece 570 is attached to the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Only the person having the key of the padlock can open the cover body 1250 by penetrating the formed through hole 1254 (see FIG. 65) and hooking a lock such as a padlock on the locking protrusion 570. Can not be. In addition, a connection operation opening 1255 is provided in the lower left portion of the cover body 1250, so that the RAM clear switch 624a (see FIG. 100) can be operated without performing the work of opening the cover body 1250, or for testing. The test equipment can be connected to the test terminals 624b and 624c (see FIG. 100).

  As mentioned above, although the structure of the main body frame main body 500 which consists of the game board installation recessed part 510 and the board part 511 was demonstrated, when the door frame 5 was closed to the lowest end side part of the board part 511 other than having demonstrated above. Further, engagement grooves 584 and 585 (see FIG. 58) are formed into which door frame protrusions 110d and 110e (see FIG. 16) bent downward with the lower side of the door frame base body 110 bent rearward. Yes. The engagement groove 584 is a groove formed below the firing device mounting portion 520 described above, and the engagement groove 585 is a groove formed from one end of the engagement groove 584 toward the shaft support side. Note that the door frame protrusion 110d corresponding to the engagement groove 585 protrudes rearward so as to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 110e corresponding to the engagement groove 584. However, a door frame protruding piece 110d having a large protruding amount is slightly formed at the lower end of the open end. The door frame protruding pieces 110d and 110e and the engaging grooves 584 and 585 constitute the outer protrusions and engaging portions on the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with the launch rail 515 and the outlet opening / closing device 579, and the rail connection member 516 and the launch device attachment portion 520 are formed to project, but the launch device attachment portion 520 and the launch rail 515 are provided. The position of the plate portion 511 is biased toward the open side, and they are formed so as to protrude from the surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, in a state where the door frame 5 is closed, the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 on which the launching device mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are arranged to the open side is the rear surface of the door frame 5 and the launching device mounting portion. 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 are in close contact with each other. It is extremely difficult to make the gap between the launcher mounting portion 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 even better and reach the front side of the game board 4 or the back side of the game board 4.

  On the other hand, since the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 where the launcher mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are not arranged to the shaft support side does not have a portion protruding on the surface of the plate portion 511, the door frame 5 is closed. In this case, a space 586 is generated between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protrusion 110d and the engagement groove 584 can easily open the space 586 between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. In order to prevent unauthorized tools from slipping through the space 586 upward, the mounting base 160 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 has a space 586 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed. Crime prevention protrusions 166 are formed to invade. The security protrusion 166 is formed on the mounting base 160 so as to extend from substantially the middle of the plate portion 511 to the end portion on the shaft support side. Therefore, the space below the outer rail 602 attached to the launch rail 515 and the game board 4 constitutes a crime prevention space 586 that receives the crime prevention protrusion 166 protruding from the mounting base 160. The security protrusion 166 and the security space 586 constitute the inner ridge and the engaging portion in the lower side part of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the main body frame 3 includes the game board 4, the hit ball launching device 650, the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, the full tank unit 900, the lock device 1000, and the board unit. 1100 and the cover body 1250 are attached. Of these, the hit ball launching device 650, the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball path unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, the full tank unit 900, and the substrate unit 1100 will be described below. Will be described sequentially.

[3-1. Hitting ball launcher]
Next, the hit ball launching device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 is a perspective view (A) of the entire hitting ball launcher 650, a perspective view (B) with the firing motor part removed, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the hitting ball launching device 650, FIG. These are the front view (A) which shows the relationship between the hit ball launcher 650 and the launch rail 515, and the perspective view (B) of the launch motor part, and FIG. 70 shows the hit ball in a state where the operation handle 410 is not operated. 71 is a rear view showing the relationship between the device 650 and the firing rail 515, and FIG. 71 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball hitting device 650 and the firing rail 515 in a state where the operation handle portion 410 is operated. 72 is a plan view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C), a front view (B) of the slide member 710 provided in the ball striking device 650, and a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A (D) in FIG. It is.

  The hitting ball launching device 650 pivotally supports a hitting ball rod 687 on the firing base frame 651 and attaches a shot motor 695 for reciprocating rotation to the hitting ball rod 687 to the firing base frame 651, and further hits the hitting ball rod 687. The firing base frame 651 is provided with a slide rod 677 and a slide member 710 that adjust the urging force of the urging spring 684 that imparts the urging force that returns to the position.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, the launch base frame 651 is molded into a horizontally long rectangular shape by a synthetic resin, and a bearing in which a bearing 689 of a ball striking rod 687 is fitted at substantially the center thereof. A cylinder 652 is formed, and rubber stopper members 653 and 654 for restricting the firing origin position of the hitting ball 687 are attached and fixed to the upper part and the side thereof. That is, the rubber stopper members 653 and 654 receive the impact of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 returns to the firing origin position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 684. In addition, a slide guide hole 655 having a horizontally elongated groove is formed on the rear side of the firing base frame 651 (on the opposite side of the portion corresponding to the lower side of the firing rail 515), and a slide member storage space is formed below the slide guide hole 655. 656 is formed.

  The slide guide hole 655 is configured to guide a slide movement of the slide rod 677 by inserting a guide locking piece 678 protruding from an upper rear end of a slide rod 677 described later. The slide member 710 is accommodated so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The slide guide of the front portion of the slide rod 677 is guided by a guide bush 681 fixed to a guide hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 in a stop hole 662 formed in the firing base frame 651 by a set screw 682. This is done by penetrating through. Further, a rectangular connection opening 664 is formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG.

  Further, a hook portion is formed on the front portion of the upper side of the firing base frame 651 with respect to the main body of the firing base frame 651, and an opening 657 for the operating piece is formed in the hook portion above the bearing cylinder 652. Yes. In the working piece opening 657, a weight 173 of a ball feeding member 172 (see FIG. 9) provided facing the hitting ball supply port 171b (see FIG. 9) on the downstream side of the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 is provided. Is provided on a mounting portion 660 that protrudes from the rear upper part of the opening edge of the working piece opening 657 by a stop pin 659. The operating piece 658 is formed in a “te” shape, the rear end portion of the upper side thereof is pivotally supported by a stop pin 659, and the base plate rotates integrally with the ball striking rod 687 from the pivotal support portion to the arc portion below. 690 is in contact with the operating piece abutting portion 693 provided in a projecting manner at 690, and the upper side portion swings the ball feeding member 172 in conjunction with the reciprocating motion of the hitting ball rod 687. One hit ball that flows out from 171b is supplied to the launch position of launch rail 515 one by one.

  Further, on the firing base frame 651, motor mounting bosses 661 for fixing a motor cover 694 containing the firing motor 695 are projected in a total of three locations, two at the rear lower part and one at the front upper part. At the same time, a swinging piece boss 663 into which a shaft hole 673 at the lower end of the swinging piece 672 connected to the slide member 710 is inserted in a protruding manner is provided at the lower rear of the slide member storage space 656. ing.

  A metal plate 665 is attached to the above-described launch base frame 651 so that the hit ball launcher 650 has high rigidity. Therefore, the metal plate 665 has through-holes 666, 667, 668, 669, which correspond to the bearing cylinder 652, the lower rubber stopper member 653, the slide guide hole 655, the guide bush 681, and the swing piece boss 663, respectively. A horizontal oblong through hole 670 through which the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 passes is also formed. In the metal plate 665 configured as described above, after the slide member 710 is stored in the slide member storage space 656, each of the through holes 666 to 671 has the corresponding members 652, 653, 655, 681, 712, 663. It is fixed to the firing base frame 651 by being brought into close contact with the firing base frame 651 so as to penetrate or match with the screws.

  The tip of the swing piece boss 663 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 671, and the shaft hole 673 of the swing piece 672 is inserted into the head portion. The swing piece 672 is pivotally supported so as to be swingable about the lower end. As shown in FIG. 68, the swing piece 672 is formed in a vertically long bowl shape, a shaft hole 673 is formed at the lower end thereof, and the connecting convex part 712 of the slide member 710 is inserted in the middle thereof. The connecting hole 674 is formed. The front surface above the connection hole 674 is an abutting portion 675 that abuts one end (rear end) of the slide rod 677. Accordingly, the rocking piece 672 is inserted into the rocking piece boss 663 and the connecting hole 674 is inserted into the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 protruding from the through hole 670 to connect the pin 676 with washer. The rocking piece 672 is attached to the firing base frame 651 by being fixed to the convex portion 712. The attached swinging piece 672 swings at the upper part around the lower end as the slide member 710 slides.

  Further, a horizontally long bowl-shaped slide bar 677 is attached to the upper front surface of the metal plate 665 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. That is, an L-shaped guide locking piece 678 projecting from the rear upper part of the slide rod 677 is engaged with the through hole 668 of the metal plate 665, and the guide elongated hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 is engaged. The guide bush 681 having the set screw 682 is passed through, and the set screw 682 is fixed to the set hole 662. The slide hook 677 is slidably mounted on the firing base frame 651 via the metal plate 665 by the guide locking piece 678 and the through hole 668, and the guide long hole 680 and the guide bush 681. The slide rod 677 is formed with a contacted portion 679 that contacts the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672 described above at one end (rear end), and one end of the biasing spring 684 at the other end (front end). A spring locking portion 683 for hooking the locking ring 685 is projected.

  A bearing cylinder 652 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 666, and the bearing cylinder 652 is fitted so that the bearing 689 of the hitting ball 687 does not fall off. The lower end portion of the hit ball 687 is fixed to the shaft of the bearing 689 and, at the same time, the base plate 690 is fixed. An operating piece abutting portion 693 that abuts against the operating piece 658 protrudes from the front back surface side of the base plate 690, and a spring for latching the locking ring 686 at the other end of the biasing spring 684 on the front front surface thereof. A locking portion 692 is projected, and a motor contact projection 691 that engages with and disengages from the motor cam 697 of the firing motor 695 is projected from the rear front surface thereof. A synthetic resin tip 688 is fixed to the upper end of the hitting ball 687, and the firing position formed by the lower end of the firing rail 515 and the firing position stopper 702 fixed above the tip 688. I am going to rush into.

  On the other hand, a firing motor 695 housed in a motor cover 694 is attached to the above-described motor mounting boss 661 of the firing base frame 651. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), the motor cover 694 includes a cylindrical portion formed so as to accommodate the firing motor 695 therein, and an enlarged motor mounting boss 661 that extends forward of the cylindrical portion. And an anti-rotation preventing cam 698 and a motor cam 697 at the tip of the rotating shaft 696 of the firing motor 695 which are integrally formed and are mounted in the cylindrical portion. Is fixed.

  A large number of reverse teeth are formed on the outer periphery of the reverse rotation prevention cam 698, which engages with a stopper piece 700 (see FIG. 70) that is fixed to the stopper piece mounting boss 701 so as to be swingable. The reverse rotation of 695 is prevented. This is to prevent the motor cam 697 from rotating in the reverse direction so that the motor cam 697 and the motor abutting protrusion 691 mesh with each other to prevent a failure in which the ball striking device 650 cannot be driven. The motor cam 697 is formed in a ball shape, and reciprocates the striking ball rod 687 while being engaged with and disengaged from the motor abutting protrusion 691 as the firing motor 695 rotates. When the motor cover 694 is attached to the motor attachment boss 661, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), the main structure of the hit ball launching device 650 is covered as seen from the rear surface.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 72, the slide member 710 housed in the slide member housing space 656 and slidably moving is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape with the rear open, and an elliptical oval convex portion 711 projects on the front surface thereof. Further, a circular connecting convex portion 712 is projected from the rear position of the elliptical convex portion 711. Further, on both the upper and lower surfaces, slide contact protrusions 713 having an arc cross section are provided at both ends so as to easily slide in the slide member storage space 656. On the other hand, the space of the slide member 710 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape is an insertion space 714 into which the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 provided at the lower back of the door frame 5 is inserted.

  The insertion space 714 has a first inclined surface 715 formed on the front side of the side wall in the sliding direction, and protrudes from the inside of the upper surface and the lower surface to the inside slightly behind the first inclined surface 715. In addition, a clamping piece 716 is formed in which a predetermined interval is formed between the tips of each other. A second inclined surface 717 is also formed on the front side of the sandwiching piece 716 so as to incline in a C shape when viewed from the side. Thus, in the state in which the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), one end of the slide protrusion 183 on the inclined side 183a side abuts against the side wall in the sliding direction. In this state, it is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716. In addition, although the space part 718 is formed in the side of the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, this space part 718 is not necessarily playing a function.

  Thus, the slide member 710 configured as described above is an ellipse formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG. The insertion space 714 is formed so as to face the connection opening 664 having a shape, and the slide member 710 is in contact with one inner wall of the slide member storage space 656 (in FIG. 69A, the left inner wall is Although it is illustrated as being in contact, in a normal state, it is in a state of being in contact with the inner wall of the right space.

  First, the relationship of adjusting the strength of the urging spring 684 of the slide member 710 and the ball striking device 650 will be described. The slide member 710 has a right position at the initial position inside the slide member storage space 656 (FIG. 69A). 70, the swinging piece 672 connected to the connecting projection 712 of the slide member 710 is in a substantially vertical state. For this reason, the slide rod 677 that is in contact with the swing piece 672 is also urged in one direction (left side in FIG. 70) by the biasing force of the bias spring 684 and the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672. The contacted portion 679 of the slide rod 677 is in contact. In this state, since the urging spring 684 is not tensioned, even if the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocally rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 is weak, and the hit ball at the firing position is not elastic. Even if issued, the game area 605 of the game board 4 is not reached.

  On the other hand, when the slide member 710 moves in the other direction from the initial position in the slide member storage space 656 (when it moves toward the left inner wall in FIG. 69A), as shown in FIG. Since the swing piece 672 swings and tilts about the shaft hole 673 at the lower end, the slide rod 677 is moved in the other direction (right side in FIG. 71) by the contact between the contact portion 675 and the contacted portion 679. Slide towards you. Then, the biasing spring 684 locked to the spring locking portion 683 of the slide rod 677 is also tensioned and extended. In this state, since the urging spring 684 is tensioned, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocally rotated following the rotation of the shooting motor 695 is increased, and the hit ball at the shooting position is The game area 605 of the game board 4 is reached by being strongly bulleted. The strength of the impact force of the hit ball can be adjusted according to the slide amount of the slide member 710 in the slide member storage space 656.

  As described above, by moving the slide member 710, it is possible to adjust the resilience by the hitting ball launching device 650. This is interlocked with the movement of the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 that moves in accordance with the turning operation of the moving operation member 414. This point will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, when the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 is rotated, the slanting cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 415 is also rotated, so that the slide body of the joint unit 180 182 slides in one direction inside the joint unit mounting recess 110c. For this reason, the slide protrusion 183 protruding from the front surface of the slide body 182 also slides in the same direction. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 of the slide body 182 passes through the connection opening 664 formed in the launching device mounting portion 520 of the main body frame 5 and inserts the slide member 710. It is inserted into the space 714. The insertion state in this case is a state where one end side on the inclined side 183a side of the slide projecting piece 183 is in contact with the side wall on the front side in the sliding direction and is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716 as described above. . Therefore, when the slide protrusion 183 slides in one direction, the slide member 710 also slides in the same direction. At this time, as described above, since the slide rod 677 also slides as the slide member 710 slides, the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 can be adjusted. That is, by rotating the rotation operation member 414 of the handle device 400, the resilience of the hit ball of the hit ball launching device 650 can be adjusted.

  By the way, in this embodiment, since the handle device 400 is provided on the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 is provided on the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 of the handle device 400 is opened each time the door frame 5 is opened and closed. And the slide member 710 of the ball striking device 650 are linked or separated. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, by closing the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 183 is automatically inserted into the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, and the handle device 400. The ball striking device 650 is linked, and conversely, by opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 is separated from the insertion space 714 to separate the handle device 400 and the ball striking device 650. Therefore, the handle device 400 and the hitting ball launcher 650 can be linked and separated very easily as the door frame 5 is opened and closed. In particular, when the slide projecting piece 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, even if the position of the slide projecting piece 183 is slightly shifted in the vertical direction, the second inclination of the sandwiching piece 716 projecting into the insertion space 714 is provided. The slide protrusion 183 is smoothly inserted into the clamping position by the surface 717.

  In some cases, the player may stuff the padding operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 and fix it at a position rotated to some extent, but the store clerk at the game hall knows the padding without knowing the padding. 5 may be opened and closed. Even in such a case, when the door frame 5 is opened, there is no problem because the slide protruding piece 183 is merely separated from the insertion space 714. However, when the door frame 5 is closed, the position of the slide protruding piece 183 is Is slightly displaced in one direction, but the sliding member is accompanied with the closing operation of the door frame 5 by the cooperative action of the inclined side 183a of the sliding protrusion 183 and the first inclined surface 715 of the sliding member 710. The slide protrusion 183 and the slide member 710 are finally engaged with each other while moving 710 in one direction. In other words, in the present embodiment, the handle device 400 and the hit ball launching device 650 can be linked with each other regardless of the rotation position of the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410. is there.

[3-2. Prize ball tank]
Next, the prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank 720. As described above, the prize ball tank 720 is detachably attached to the tank attachment groove 550 (see FIG. 61) formed in the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. Thus, the prize ball tank 720 is formed in a rectangular box shape, and when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a notch portion 729 is formed in the front wall 721, and the bottom surface thereof extends from the upstream side wall 724 to the downstream side wall. A storage portion 728 is formed by a first inclined bottom surface 726 inclined toward 723 and a second inclined bottom surface 727 inclined from the front wall 721 toward a discharge port 730 described below.

  In addition, a discharge port 730 is formed at the lower end of the second inclined bottom surface 727, and the discharge port 730 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Thus, it is formed so as to be surrounded by a discharge port protruding wall 725 that connects the downstream side wall 723 and the rear wall 722 in a U-shape. Further, on both outer sides of the front wall 721 of the prize ball tank 720, attachment flanges 733 that engage with the tank attachment groove 550 are formed, and the main frame 3 is arranged on the back side of the bottom surface of the prize ball tank 720. Placement contact pieces 731 and 732 for placement and contact with the four side walls 543 project, and a ball for attaching a ball leveling member 744 described later to the lower part of the rear surface wall 722 on the upstream side of the prize ball tank 720. A leveling attachment shaft 735 is protruded. Further, an overflow preventing member 734 for preventing the ball from jumping is detachably attached to the rear wall 722 and the upstream side wall 724 of the prize ball tank 720 excluding the discharge port 730.

  In the prize ball tank 720 configured as described above, the mounting flange 733 is attached to the tank mounting groove 550 of the main body frame 3 so as to be inserted from above, and the mounting contact pieces 731 and 732 are attached to the main body frame 3. It abuts on the fourth side wall 543. As a result, the prize ball tank 720 is placed and mounted on the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. In this mounted state, as shown in FIG. The portion 728 and the relief recess 551 formed on the back surface of the main body frame 3 communicate with each other, and as shown in FIG. 4, the discharge port 730 faces the upstream end of the tank rail member 740 to be described next. ing. Accordingly, in the prize ball tank 720, the width in the front-rear direction of the storage portion 728 for storing the sphere (the storage space portion corresponding to the first inclined bottom surface 726 and the second inclined bottom surface 727) is the second side wall 541 of the main body frame 3. It forms so that it may become substantially the same as the width | variety of the front-back direction to -4th side wall 543, and is mounted in the upper part to those side walls 541-543.

  Further, as described above, the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 of the main body frame 3 are deeply formed so as to cover the rearward projecting space in the peripheral part of the game board 4, so Although the depth of the storage portion of the prize ball tank 720 placed on the upper part of the 543 is shallower than that of the conventional storage tank, the prize ball tank 720 is stored even if the prize ball is stored and increases in weight. Is supported by the side walls 542 to 543 of the main body frame 3, the stored sphere can be smoothly guided to the discharge port 730 without the inclined bottom surfaces 726 and 727 being deformed. Further, since the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, the flow of the sphere stored in the storage portion 728 flows outward from the second inclined bottom surface 727. It is configured. For this reason, as compared with the prize ball tank in which a part of the inclined bottom surface is provided with an opening as a discharge port as in the prior art, a spherical break-up protrusion for eliminating the clogging is formed in the storage portion near the discharge port. Therefore, it is possible to obtain a structure in which clogging of balls is difficult to occur.

[3-3. Tank rail member]
Next, the tank rail member 740 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. 74 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900 as seen from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. These are the perspective views seen from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 showing the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball path unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900.

  As described above, the tank rail member 740 is detachably attached to the rail engaging grooves 553 and 554 (see FIG. 61) of the upper rear wall 545 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the tank rail member 740 is provided with a plurality of locking protrusions 749 that are inserted from above into the rail locking groove 553 on the left and right sides and the lower side of the rear side surface, and the upper side of the rear side surface. At the center, a hook-shaped locking protrusion 750 is provided so as to be hooked on the rail locking groove 554 from above. Thus, the tank rail member 740 is formed in an inclined bowl shape with an open upper surface, the upper surface of the upstream end faces the discharge port 730 of the prize ball tank 720, and the lower surface of the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 forms a ball passage unit 770 described in detail later. I'm here. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the inside of the tank rail member 740 is a passage 742 through which the spheres flow down in two rows by the partition wall 741.

  The bottom surface of the passage 742 is notched with a narrow groove, and foreign substances that roll along the passage 742 together with the ball fall downward from the narrow groove. Further, a metal plate (not shown) for removing static electricity is attached to the side wall of the passage 742, and the downstream end of the metal plate is connected to the ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 59) described above. ing. For this reason, static electricity charged in the sphere flowing down the tank rail member 740 is grounded from the metal plate to the outside via the ground wire connector 557 via the ground connector of the power supply board 1136.

  In addition, an egg-shaped ball leveling member 744 having a weight on the slightly downstream side of the midstream region of the tank rail member 740 is swingably provided. The ball leveling member 744 is pivotally supported by the ball leveling mounting shaft 735 of the award ball tank 720 described above, and moves toward the two passages 742 in the tank rail member 740. The spheres that are suspended and flow down the respective passages 742 flow down in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction so as to be rectified so as to become one stage. Further, the upper surface of the tank rail member 740 on the downstream side from the installation position of the ball leveling member 744 is covered with a ball pressing plate 745. The ball holding plate 745 is formed in an inclined arc shape so that the ball that has not been made one step by the ball leveling member 744 is forced to one step.

  Further, a pair of alignment gears 747 are rotatably supported by shaft pins 748 at the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 so as to face the respective passages 742. The alignment gear 747 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is fixed to the shaft pin 748 so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 747 is shifted by a half pitch. For this reason, when the upper part of the sphere that has flowed down each passage 742 of the tank rail member 740 flows downstream while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 747, the spheres in the two rows of passages 742 are alternately sent one by one. become. The alignment gear 747 is covered with an arcuate gear cover 746 on its upper surface.

[3-4. Ball passage unit]
Next, the ball passage unit 770 for guiding the balls dropped from the tank rail member 740 in a line to the prize ball unit 800 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 74 and 75 are as described above, and FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the main body frame 3, the ball path unit 770, and the prize ball unit 800.

  In the spherical passage unit 770 of the present embodiment, a spherical drop passage 772 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 771 bent on the back surface (a surface seen from the back surface) of a substantially rectangular plate material. As shown in FIG. 76, the ball drop passage 772 communicates with the front / rear bent passage portion 772a whose upstream is bent in the front / rear direction (depth direction when viewed from the rear) and the front / rear bent passage portion 772a. Left and right bent passage portions 772b bent in the left-right direction as viewed from the right side, and a vertical passage portion 772c communicating with the left and right bent passage portions 772b and having a substantially vertical shape.

  Since the position of the upper end inlet 773 dropping from the tank rail member 740 described above is substantially the center of the two rows of passages 742 as described above, the front / rear bent passage 772a has the upper rear wall 545 and the shaft support. Since the rear rear wall 546 is located away from the rear surface, the ball drop passage 772 is pivotally supported by the front / rear bent passage 772a and the prize ball guide protrusion 561 projecting from the pivot side rear wall 546. It bends in the front-rear direction so as to be positioned close to the surface of the side rear wall 546. Further, the left and right bent passage portions 772b are formed to be bent in a U-shape to the full width of the ball passage unit 770 in order to weaken the momentum of the sphere that has dropped from the tank rail member 740 to the front and rear bent passage portions 772a. It is.

  Further, although the vertical passage portion 772c is formed in a substantially vertical shape, the vertical passage portion 772c is slightly curved and formed, and a notch portion 775 is formed in one bent passage wall 771 constituting the vertical passage portion 772c. A ball breakage detecting piece 776 whose upper end is supported by a support shaft 777 is attached to 775 so as to be swingable. A ball break switch 778 is attached to the side of the ball break detection piece 776, and an actuator of the ball break switch 778 is in contact with the ball break detection piece 776. The ball break detection piece 776 and the ball break switch 778 constitute a ball break detection mechanism for detecting a ball break in the vertical passage portion 772c.

  Thus, when a sphere is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the sphere breakage detecting piece 776 is pressed by the sphere present in the vertical passage portion 772c and the actuator is pushed to turn on the sphere breakage switch 778. When a ball is no longer present due to clogging or ball deficiency at 772c, the ball breakage detecting piece 776 swings into the vertical passage portion 772c, so that the actuator turns off the ball breakage switch 778. When the ball break switch 778 is turned off, the rotation of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, stops and the payout of the prize ball is stopped.

  Further, a stop hole 782 and a positioning boss 783 are formed in the ball path unit 770 at a position avoiding the above-described ball drop path 772. The positioning boss 783 is engaged with a positioning pin 574 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the stop hole 782 is similarly a passage unit formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546. This corresponds to the mounting boss 562. Thus, to attach the ball passage unit 770 to the main body frame 3, the passage unit mounting boss 562 and the stop hole 782 are made to coincide with each other while the positioning boss 783 is engaged with the positioning pin 574. This can be done by screwing 784. Further, the ball passage unit 770 is formed with a cover body engagement groove 785 that engages with the engagement piece 1252 of the cover body 1250 in the middle of one side thereof, and is connected to the prize ball unit 800 at the lower part. The connecting lid member 786 is rotatably provided.

  The connecting lid member 786 is configured by projecting a pair of passage walls 790 projecting in an arc shape on the back surface of a rectangular plate member, and projecting from both left and right end portions of the lower surface of the spherical passage unit 770. A projecting shaft 789 serving as a rotary shaft projecting from the tip of a support piece 788 extending from both ends of the connecting lid member 786 is fitted to a support projecting piece 787 serving as a shaft support portion, so that the shaft can rotate freely. It is to be supported. Further, the connecting lid member 786 extends below the spherical passage unit 770 by closing, and the passage formed by the passage wall 790 communicates with the downstream end of the ball dropping passage 772 and opens to open the passage. The passage formed by the wall 790 and the downstream end of the ball drop passage 772 can be rotated to a state where they do not communicate with each other, but when the transition from the open state to the closed state occurs, the support piece of the connecting lid member 786 is supported. A guide projection 791 for guiding 788 is provided at the lower end of the rear surface of the ball path unit 770.

  Thus, in a state where the ball passage unit 770 is fixed to the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the prize ball unit 800 is also mounted on the shaft support side rear wall 546 as described later, The lid member 786 is closed and its rear surface is locked by a locking elastic claw 820 provided in the prize ball unit 800, whereby the ball drop path 772 of the ball path unit 770 and the bent path 803 of the prize ball unit 800 are connected to the passage wall. The ball that falls through the ball drop passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 can be guided to the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800 by communicating at 790. The reason why the rotatable connecting lid member 786 is provided in the ball passage unit 770 is that the award ball unit 800 can be easily attached to and detached from the main body frame 3 as will be described later, and the attachment and detachment thereof is possible. This is to prevent the space formed between the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 from being hindered from falling smoothly.

  Further, between the pair of bent passage walls 771 projecting from the ball passage unit 770, the projecting height is provided on the pivot side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 so as to gradually decrease toward the downstream side. By inserting the award ball guide protrusion 561, the upstream portion of the ball drop passage 772 is placed on the rear side so that the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 is positioned substantially at the lower center of the two rows of passages 742 of the tank rail member 740. It is formed as a front / rear bent passage portion 772a that bends in the front / rear direction when viewed from the side. Thus, in the configuration in which the balls flowing down in two rows by the pair of alignment gears 747 are alternately sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 side, the balls are smoothly sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 through the ball drop passage 772. Can do. Further, according to this configuration, since it is not necessary to form the ball drop passage 772 from an assembly of a plurality of members, the number of parts constituting the ball drop passage 772 can be reduced, and the ball drop passage 772 can be assembled. Workability can be improved.

  Further, the sphere that has dropped from the tank rail member 740 in the front / rear bent passage portion 772a weakens its momentum by passing through the left / right bent passage portion 772b, and then is sent to the winning ball unit 800 through the vertical passage portion 772c. . In addition, the vertical passage portion 772c into which the ball is fed in a state where the momentum is weakened is provided with a ball break detection mechanism (a ball break detection piece 776 and a ball break switch 778) for detecting the ball break. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably detect a break in the ball drop passage 772, in other words, a break in the ball supplied to the winning ball unit 800 (a ball break).

[3-5. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 800 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described ball path unit 770 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. 77 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the back side of the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 78 is a rear view for explaining the relationship between the payout motor 815 and the sprocket 807 as a payout member.

  77, a prize ball unit 800 includes a unit base body 801 in which a bent path 803, a prize ball path 810, and a ball extraction path 811 that form a ball path by a pair of bent path walls 802, and a unit base body 801. A unit sub-plate 825 covering the rear surface of the unit sub-plate, an intra-prize ball relay terminal plate 830 attached to the upper surface (rear side) of the unit sub-plate 825, and a substantially central surface region (rear side region) of the unit sub-plate 825. And a gear cover 866 that covers the detection disk 850 (rotation transmission member). Hereinafter, these configurations will be sequentially described.

  The unit base body 801 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as a “bottom surface”), and a pair of bent passages projecting toward the plate-like unit sub plate 825 side. A bent passage 803 is formed by the wall 802. The bent passage wall 802 protrudes from the center of the upper portion of the unit base body 801 to a substantially middle position on the downstream side at a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. It also serves as side walls on both ends of the unit base body 801 from the downstream end to the downstream end. The middle bent passage wall 802 is largely divided into left and right portions to form a distribution space 805 in which a sprocket 807 serving as a ball feed rotating body is arranged. A passage partition wall 809 is formed projecting so as to form a pair of bent passage walls 802 divided to the left and right until the downstream end.

  That is, the right and left bent passage walls 802 and the passage partition wall 809 on the downstream side from the middle form two passages on the left and right from the distribution space 805, and one passage constitutes the prize ball passage 810, The other passage forms a ball passage 811. The passage partition wall 809 is also largely divided into left and right, and a motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 809. That is, the payout motor 815 is stored in a motor storage space 814 that is located at a position avoiding the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and within the depth width dimension of the ball passage. Fixed. The bent passage 803 is formed in a meandering shape so as to weaken the pressure applied to the sprocket 807 of a sphere staying in the passage 803 and reaches the distribution space 805, but on the upstream side of the distribution space 805. An elliptical opening 804 is formed on the bottom surface. The opening 804 stores small dust or the like that has entered the bent passage 803, and can collect dust or the like that is collected when the prize ball unit 800 is removed from the main body frame 3.

  Further, in the distribution space 805 described above, a sprocket 807 as a payout member having a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) recesses in which a sphere fits on the outer periphery is rotatably disposed. A bearing cylinder 806 that pivotally supports the other end of the rotary shaft 808 to which the 807 is fixed is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 805. Further, the upper end portion of the passage partition wall 809 constituting the bottom portion of the distribution space 805 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 807, and in the upstream portion of the prize ball passage 810 formed on one side thereof The counting switch 812 is detachably attached.

  The counting switch 812 is formed of a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor having a circular passage hole through which a sphere passes, and a switch fitting recess 865 that matches the shape of the rear end is formed by a bent passage wall 802. By doing so, it can be easily attached and detached. A wiring (not shown) from the counting switch 812 is connected to a prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 to be described later. Further, on the downstream side of the bent passage wall 802 constituting the prize ball passage 810, a locking claw that engages with a locking portion 860 formed on a passage lid plate portion 859 formed integrally with the unit sub plate 825. A plurality of 813 are formed. However, among the plurality of locking claws 813, the locking claw 813 that engages with one locking portion 860 at the lower end of the passage lid plate portion 859 is formed on the passage partition wall 809 side.

  In addition, a circular motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed below the unit base body 801 and between the prize ball passage 810 and the ball removal passage 811. This motor storage space 814 The cylindrical main body of the payout motor 815 is accommodated in the inside. However, the payout motor 815 is fixed to the back side of the aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 attached below the unit sub plate 825 with a pair of mounting pieces 816 formed on the front surface thereof with screws 817. Then, in a state where the payout motor 815 is attached to the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub-plate 825, the rotating shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 passes through the shaft insertion hole 842 drilled in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841. The gear 843 is fixed.

  In addition, a space in the depth width direction in which the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, and the ball removal passage 811 are formed by covering the rear surface side of the unit base body 801 with the unit sub plate 825 and the aluminum heat sink 841. The cylindrical main body portion of the dispensing motor 815 is also accommodated in the inside. Since the motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 and the distribution space 805 in which the sprocket 807 described above is arranged are formed in an extremely close positional relationship in the vertical direction, the unit base body 801 in the vertical direction The length can be shortened, and as a result, the prize ball unit 800 can be made compact.

  Further, the unit base body 801 is provided with a guide protrusion 819 that guides the ball extracted at the lowermost end of the above-described ball extraction path 811 to the back side of the prize ball unit 800, and the guide protrusion 819 The guided ball is guided to a ball pulling connection passage 880 described later, and finally discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (a collection basket provided below the island platform). A locking elastic claw 820 that locks the connecting lid member 786 of the above-described ball passage unit 770 protrudes from the upper portion of the unit base body 801, and the prize ball unit 800 is mounted on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3. A mounting boss for connecting the button insertion engagement hole 821 and the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 for removably attaching to the rear wall 546 and the gear cover 866 with the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched therebetween. 823 is provided.

  The button insertion engagement hole 821 is provided on one side of the upper portion of the unit base body 801, and a rod-like attachment / detachment button 822 is slidably attached in the depth width direction. Corresponds to the locking elastic claw 564 formed on the pivot side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Further, as shown in FIG. 76, the rear end surface of the button insertion engagement hole 821 has a concave shape so that the distal end portion of the lock elastic claw 564 enters. The hook-shaped engaging portion 824 engages with an engaging protrusion 565 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and presses the prize ball unit 800 against the shaft support side rear wall 546. By pushing down downward, the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 are engaged. In the engaged state, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged with each other, so that the upward movement of the prize ball unit 800 cannot be performed.

  Note that the hook-shaped engagement portions 824 are formed on the upper left and right of the unit base body 801. In addition, the mounting boss 823 for connecting the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 with the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched therebetween is long and protrudes toward the rear surface side, and penetrates through the unit sub plate 825. After passing through the hole 858, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover are held in a state where the unit sub-plate 825 is sandwiched by fitting a screw 868 from the surface of the gear cover 866 so as to correspond to the mounting hole 867 of the gear cover 866. 866.

  The configuration of the unit sub-plate 825 that covers the unit base body 801 will be described. The unit sub-plate 825 is a composite that covers the bent passage 803 portion, the distribution space 805 portion, and the prize ball passage 810 portion of the unit base body 801. A payout motor 815 is attached to a resin plate, and an aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 that covers the downstream portion of the ball extraction passage 811 is attached. On the front side (rear side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub-plate 825, a relay board region 826 for attaching the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 is formed in the upper part, and a plurality of gears 843 are provided below the relay board area 826. A gear region 840 to which 844, 847 and the detection disk 850 are attached is formed.

  The relay board region 826 is formed in a substantially square shape, and mounting ribs 827 for placing the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 are projected along the square shape. An engaging groove portion 828 that engages with an engaging protrusion 836 of the substrate cover 835 is formed, and a locking claw portion 829 that engages with a locking protrusion 837 of the substrate cover 835 is formed at the center of the other side vertical side. Yes. The relay board region 826 is formed with a button insertion hole 834 through which the attach / detach button 822 is inserted and a mounting boss portion 832 for fixing the in-prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 with screws (not shown). .

  The prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 attached to the relay board area 826 is connected to the above-described counting switch 812, payout motor 815, and rotation angle switch 855, which will be described later, provided in the prize ball unit 800, as will be described later. It relays the wiring from the payout control board 1186 (see FIGS. 62 and 84). For this purpose, a plurality of connectors are provided, and the button insertion hole 833 through which the detachable button 822 is inserted and the mounting boss portion 832 are provided. Corresponding mounting holes 831 are formed. The award ball unit relay terminal plate 830 is placed on the placement rib 827 of the relay board region 826, and the mounting hole 831 and the mounting boss portion 832 are aligned with each other and fastened with screws (not shown). The intra-sphere relay terminal plate 830 can be fixed to the surface (rear surface) of the unit sub-plate 825.

  Further, the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 attached as described above is covered with the substrate cover 835. The substrate cover 835 is formed in a box shape having a substantially square front side open, and an engagement protrusion 836 is formed on the upper and lower bases of one vertical side, and a locking projection 837 is formed on the substantially central side surface of the other vertical side. ing. Further, a button opening 838 and a connection opening 839 are formed on the square vertical surface of the substrate cover 835. Thus, after the engagement protrusion 836 of the substrate cover 835 is inserted into the engagement groove portion 828 of the relay substrate region 826 and engaged, the engagement protrusion 837 and the engagement claw portion 829 are engaged with each other. The baseball unit relay terminal plate 830 can be covered with the substrate cover 835. On the other hand, when removing, the latching claw portion 829 is elastically deformed to release the engagement with the latching projection 837 and the substrate cover 835 is pulled diagonally forward to engage the engagement projection 836 and the engagement groove 828. The engagement with can be released. In the state where the substrate cover 835 is covered, the head of the detachable button 822 engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821 passes through the button insertion holes 833 and 834 and slightly faces the outside from the button opening 838. Yes. Further, the wiring connected to the inward prize unit relay terminal plate 830 is drawn out from the connection opening 839 to the outside.

  Next, the gears 843, 844, 847 and the detection disk 850 provided in the gear region 840 formed in the unit sub plate 825 will be described. As described above, the tip of the rotation shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 protrudes from the surface (rear side) of the unit sub plate 825 through the shaft insertion hole 842 formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub plate 825. The first gear 843 (drive gear, number of teeth Z1 = 30) is fixed to the protruding portion. Above the first gear 843, a second gear 844 (rotation transmission gear, number of teeth Z2 = 30) meshing with the first gear 843 is press-fitted into the back surface (front side) of the gear cover 866, and an aluminum heat sink A shaft hole 845 drilled in the shaft 841 is rotatably provided on a shaft 845 supported at the other end. Above the second gear 844, a third gear 847 (rotation transmission gear) meshing with the second gear 844 is provided. , The number of teeth Z3 = 20) is rotatably provided on a shaft 848 press-fitted into a shaft hole 849 formed in the unit sub-plate 825. Further, above the third gear 847, a detection disk 850 having a gear portion 852 (driven gear, number of teeth Z4 = 34) meshing with the third gear 847 is rotatable on a rotating shaft 808 that supports the sprocket 807. Is provided.

  Note that the tip of the rotating shaft 818 is loosely fitted in a receiving hole formed in the gear cover 866. One end of the rotary shaft 808 is supported by being press-fitted into a bearing cylinder 806 formed on the unit base body 801, and the other end is supported by a bearing hole formed on the gear cover 866. The sprocket 807 is rotatably supported in the distribution space 805 through a shaft through hole 864 formed slightly below the center of the region 840, and detected in the space formed by the unit sub plate 825 and the gear cover 866. A disk 850 is rotatably supported. However, since the rear end portion of the sprocket 807 is engaged with the center front surface portion of the detection disk 850, the sprocket 807 and the detection disk 850 rotate integrally around the rotation shaft 808. ing. Therefore, when the dispensing motor 815 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 807 via the first gear 843, the second gear 844, the third gear 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850.

  Here, the rotation speed of the sprocket 807 is obtained by reducing the rotation speed of the rotation shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 by the first gear 843, the second gear 844, the third gear 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850. . The reduction ratio n is set to the number of teeth Z1 (= 30) of the first gear 843 / the number of teeth Z4 (= 34) of the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850 by calculation based on the mechanism. In this embodiment, the payout motor 815 is a four-phase stepping motor whose rotation shaft 818 rotates once in 48 steps. Therefore, in order for the sprocket 807 to rotate once, the rotation shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 rotates about 54 steps. It will be. In this case, the sprocket 807 rotates 7.5 degrees (= 360 degrees / 48 steps) in one step, and the sprocket 807 rotates about 6.6 degrees (7.5 degrees × deceleration) in one step of the rotation shaft 818 of the payout motor 815. Ratio n) will be rotated.

  The outer periphery of the detection disk 850 is formed to be slightly larger than the circle of the gear portion 852, and the outer peripheral portion protruding outward from the gear portion 852 has the same number as the recesses of the sprocket 807 (in the illustrated case). 3) detection notches 851 are formed. This detection notch 851 is detected by a light projection / reception type rotation angle switch 855 provided on a sensor substrate 854 sandwiched and supported by a substrate mounting portion 857 formed on the surface of the unit sub-plate 825. The rotation angle switch 855 is for monitoring whether or not the sprocket 807 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 851 within a predetermined interval during the payout operation. If abnormal rotation is detected by the rotation angle switch 855 (in many cases, the ball is engaged with the sprocket 807), the sprocket 807 is rotated forward and backward a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, the ball engagement state). To do. Note that the number of balls actually paid out is detected by the counting switch 812 provided in the prize ball passage 810 and used for counting. Note that the other end side of the sensor substrate 854 is also sandwiched between substrate mounting portions formed on the gear cover 866.

  Here, as described above, the detection cutouts 851 are three in the same number as the recesses of the sprocket 807, and are formed on the outer circumference of the detection disk 850 equally (every 120 degrees). The rotation shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 rotates the sprocket 807 via the first gear 843, the second gear 844, the third gear 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850. Since the rotation shaft 818 of the dispensing motor 815 rotates about 54 steps, the sprocket 807 rotates once, and therefore the rotation between the detection notches 851 (120 degrees) of the detection disk 850 (sprocket 807) is the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 815. 818 rotations of 18 steps (= about 54 steps / 3).

  As described above, of the plurality of gears provided in the gear region 840, only the second gear 844 is rotatably provided on the rotary shaft 845 that is press-fitted into the gear cover 866 side. The cover 866 is formed with a mounting hole 867 that is provided at a position corresponding to the tip of the mounting boss 823 that protrudes from the unit base body 801 and passes through the through hole 858 of the unit sub-plate 825. The mounting holes 867 and the mounting bosses 823 are engaged with the teeth of the second gear 844 provided on the gear cover 866 side and the teeth of the first gear 843 and the third gear 847 provided on the unit sub-plate 825 side. The unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are integrally fixed in a state where the unit sub plate 825 is sandwiched by screwing with the screw 868 from the rear surface of the gear cover 866 in the matched state. Further, on one side surface of the gear cover 866, wiring connected to the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit (for example, wiring connecting the relay terminal board 830 in the prize ball unit and a payout control board 1186 described later). A wiring processing piece 869 that is hooked and gathered is projected.

  The configuration of the prize ball unit 800 has been described above. However, in the state where the unit base body 801, the unit sub board 825, the prize ball unit relay terminal board 830, the board cover 835, and the gear cover 866 are assembled, payout is performed. The cylindrical main body portion of the payout motor 815 is positioned below the bent passage 803 through which the power ball is guided. Further, the unit base body 801 includes a sprocket 807 arranged in a ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and a depth width dimension of the ball passage at a position avoiding the ball passage. A payout motor 815 housed in a motor housing space 814 formed therein, and the rotation of the rotating shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 along the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825 is rotated by the sprocket 807. A rotation transmitting member (first gear 843, second and third gears 844, 847, and a gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) for transmitting to the shaft 808 is provided, and in the distribution space 805 of the dispensing motor 815 and the bending passage 803. A plurality of gears 843, 844, 847 provided in the gear region 840 on the rear surface of the unit sub-plate 825 with the sprocket 807 serving as a disposing member disposed. And it has a connecting structure to be rotated by 850 (852). That is, the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are accommodated within the depth width of the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) formed between the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825. In addition, the rotation transmission member (the first gear 843, the second and third gears 844, 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) that connects the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 is connected to the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825. Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 can be made thinner than the one in which a payout motor and a part of the sprocket are arranged outside the ball passage.

  In addition, such a prize ball unit 800 is further thinned by forming the ball passages (the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, and the ball passage 811) in the prize ball unit 800 in a single passage shape. It is planned. That is, unlike the conventional case in which the payout motor 815 protrudes to the front side, the rear side or the side of the prize ball unit, when attached to the rear side of the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, Any part of the prize ball unit 800 can be structured not to protrude further rearward. Note that the front end portion of the payout motor 815 is configured to slightly protrude from the rear surface of the unit base body 801, and this protruded portion is provided below the shaft support side rear wall 546 as shown in FIG. Since the relief opening 572 faces the front portion of the main body frame 3, as a result, only the dimension obtained by subtracting the plate thickness dimension of the pivot support side rear wall 546 from the projection dimension is obtained. The amount of protrusion toward the front side of the side rear wall 546 is slight. In addition, by adopting such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the game board 4 is provided between the pivot side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 to which the prize ball unit 800 is attached and the back surface of the game board 4. A storage space for storing the rearward protruding portion of the gaming apparatus can be increased in the depth width direction.

  Further, in order to attach the prize ball unit 800 configured as described above to the pivotal support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 76, a hook-shaped engagement portion 824, an engagement protrusion 565, After the alignment, the lower end of the prize ball unit 800 is hooked in the locking groove 573, and the prize ball unit 800 is pivotally supported to engage the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565. The lower side wall 546 is pressed down while being in close contact with the side rear wall 546. At this time, since the lower end portion of the prize ball unit 800 and the locking groove 573 are engaged, and the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging protrusion 565 are engaged, the mounting itself is completed. When the prize ball unit 800 is moved upward, the respective engagement states are easily released. To prevent this, the lock elastic claw 564 is engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821. It is supposed to be.

  That is, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged to prevent the prize ball unit 800 from moving upward in the attached state. Thus, after the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the connecting lid member 786 of the ball path unit 770 is rotated as described above and locked by the locking elastic claw 820, so that the ball path of the ball path unit 770 drops. The downstream end of the passage 772 and the upstream end of the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800 can be communicated with each other through a passage constituted by a pair of passage walls 790. When the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is connected to the prize ball entrance 927 of the full tank unit 900 described in detail later, and the downstream end of the ball removal path 811 is connected to the ball removal connection path. Connected to the upstream end of 880.

  On the other hand, when the prize ball unit 800 is removed, the engagement by the latching elastic claws 820 is released and the connecting lid member 786 is rotated forward, and then the detachable button 822 is pressed to release the locking elastic claws 564. It is moved to the front side to release the engagement between the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821, and then the prize ball unit 800 is pulled upward with the detachable button 822 pressed, and the prize ball unit 800. By releasing the engagement between the lower end portion of the lens and the locking groove 573 and the engagement between the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 and pulling out the prize ball unit 800 to the front side, Easy to remove.

[3-6. Full tank unit]
Next, the full tank unit 900 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described prize ball unit 800 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 79 to 83. 79 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball unit 800 and the full tank unit 900, FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 81 is a front view of the full tank unit 900. 82 is an exploded perspective view, FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back side of the full tank unit 900, and FIG.

  As described above, the full tank unit 900 is mounted and fixed on the full tank unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. 901 and a lid body 926 that covers the upper surface of the box main body 901. The box main body 901 is configured such that the sphere that has flowed in from the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is guided in a zigzag shape inside and discharged from the outlet 921. Therefore, a side guide passage 902 that guides a sphere that has flowed in from a prize ball inlet 927 formed in the lid 926 to the side from one end to the other end is formed in the upstream portion. A side guide receiving portion 903 formed in a concave arc shape so as to guide the sphere toward the side is provided at one end portion of the side guide passage 902 directly below the prize ball entrance 927, and the side guide passage 902 is provided. A buffer member 904 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of 902 to receive the impact of the sphere flowing through the side guide passage 902 and guide the sphere downstream.

  In addition, the sphere that collides with the buffer member 904 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guide passage 902 is guided to flow in the opposite direction to the flow of the sphere in the side guide passage 902 after changing the direction to the downstream side. A reverse side guide passage 905 is formed. The sphere that has flowed through the reverse side guide passage 905 is then guided to the front guide passage 920 formed toward the front, and the award of the dish unit 300 described above from the outlet 921 formed at the lower end of the front guide passage 920. Guided to the ball contact 343.

  By the way, a bottom surface opening 906 is formed on the bottom surface on the upstream side of the reverse side guide passage 905 so as to open over the entire bottom surface. Yes. The bottom surface opening 906 is formed in a substantially square concave shape having an open top surface, and a pair of shaft projections 911 project from the side walls in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front inside. A circular spring mounting recess 912 for positioning the lower end of the spring 913 is formed on the concave bottom surface of the bottom surface opening 906. On the other hand, the bottom rocking plate 907 that closes the bottom opening 906 is formed in a substantially square shape, and is a semicircular bearing that is pivotally supported by being fitted to a pivot projection 911 as viewed from the front on the downstream side of the back surface. A portion 908 is formed to project.

  Further, a spring locking projection 910 that locks the upper end of the spring 913 protrudes downward from the center of the back surface of the bottom rocking plate 907. Therefore, the bottom rocking plate 907 is biased in the direction in which the upstream side is always rocked upward by the biasing force of the spring 913. The spring 913 does not swing the bottom rocking plate 907 downward even when the number of normal prize balls paid out (for example, 15) is placed on the bottom rocking plate 907 at a time. A predetermined number of balls equal to or greater than the payout number is formed by a spring member having a spring coefficient that swings downward when placed on the bottom swing plate 907. Further, a detection protrusion 909 protrudes forward on the upstream side of the bottom rocking plate 907. The detection protrusion 909 passes through the communication hole 929 and is positioned in a switch storage space 914 described below when the bearing portion 908 of the bottom rocking plate 907 is fitted and supported on the shaft support protrusion 911. It has become.

  In addition, a switch storage space 914 for storing the full tank switch 916 is integrally formed on the outer side of the upstream end side wall of the reverse side guide passage 905. In order to mount the full switch 916 in the switch storage space 914, a switch mounting portion 918 is formed on the outer surface of the side wall of the upstream end portion of the reverse side guide passage 905 above the switch storage space 914. A mounting piece 917 of the switch holder 915 that holds the full switch 916 is fixed to the portion 918 by a screw 919. The full tank switch 916 is configured as a switch composed of a projector and a light receiver, and detects ON / OFF when the detection protrusion 909 swings up and down between the light receiver and the light projector.

  Further, a foul ball passage 922 is formed on one side downstream of the reverse side guide passage 905. As shown in FIG. 83, the foul ball passage 922 is bent so that the upstream foul ball entrance 923 communicates with the foul port 610 described above and the downstream side communicates with the upstream side of the front guide passage 920. Has been. Therefore, the foul ball taken into the foul port 610 is guided from the foul ball inlet 923 through the bent foul ball passage 922 to the front guide passage 920, and further through the outlet 921 and the prize ball connecting rod 343 to the dish unit. Returned to 300.

  The box main body 901 has engaging pieces 924 that are engaged with unit engaging grooves 532 formed in the full unit mounting portion 531 on both sides of the outlet 921 and one side of the foul ball inlet 923. A latching protrusion 925 that engages with a latching piece 928 formed on the lid 926 is formed. The latching protrusion 925 is appropriately formed on the upper left and right side walls of the box main body 901.

  On the other hand, the lid 926 is formed in a plate shape so as to cover the upper surfaces of the side guide passage 902, the reverse side guide passage 905, the front guide passage 920, and the foul ball passage 922 of the box main body 901. A square prize ball entrance 927 is opened at a position corresponding to the upstream end at 902. In addition, a latching piece 928 for engaging with a latching protrusion 925 of the box main body 901 is provided around the lid 926 so as to project downward.

  In the full tank unit 900 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 79, the balls paid out from the prize ball path 810 of the prize ball unit 800 are moved upstream from the prize ball entrance 927 to the upstream side of the side guidance path 902. It enters and is guided toward the side by the side guide receiving portion 903 and collides with the buffer member 904. The ball colliding with the buffer member 904 is guided in the reverse side guide passage 905 toward the downstream side in the direction opposite to the guide direction of the side guide passage 902 and guided to the front guide passage 920. The exit 921 is led to the dish unit 300 through the prize ball communication rod 343. Further, the foul sphere entered from the foul ball entrance 923 is also weakened by the bent foul ball passage 922 and joined to the front guide passage 920, and passes through the prize ball connection rod 343 from the exit 921 of the front guide passage 920. Guided to the dish unit 300.

  In normal times, when the sphere naturally flows in the full tank unit 900, when the sphere moves from the side guide passage 902 to the reverse side guide passage 905, it falls to the bottom rocking plate 907. Since the elastic force of the spring 913 is strong when the number of normal award balls is paid out, the bottom rocking plate 907 does not rock, and the detection protrusion 909 receives the light projector and light receiving device of the full tank switch 916 of the light projecting / receiving method. The switch is not in conduction (OFF). On the other hand, when the prize balls are stored in the dish unit 300 and the full tank unit 900 is also filled with balls, the bottom fluctuations formed in the entire upstream area of the front guide path 920 and the reverse side guide path 905 are formed. The bottom rocking plate 907 rocks downward against the biasing force of the spring 913 due to the pressure of the sphere stored on the moving plate 907, and the detection projection 909 is projected and received by the light emitting / receiving full tank switch 916. The switch is disconnected from the container and the switch becomes conductive (ON). When the full tank switch 916 is turned on, the rotational drive of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 is stopped (if the ON signal is derived while the predetermined number of prize balls are being paid out, the predetermined number of prize balls Will be stopped after it has been paid out).

  As described above, in the full tank unit 900, the full tank switch is operated by the bottom rocking plate 907 having substantially the same width as the width of the bottom of the path of the path through which the ball flows (in the illustrated case, the reverse side guide path 905). 916 is actuated and biased by a biasing member (spring 913) so that the bottom rocking plate 907 swings when a certain amount of balls are placed without swinging due to the normal flow of the balls. Therefore, compared to the conventional case where a ball is placed on the bottom surface of some passages or the like to detect a clogged ball, the placement of the balls in that portion of the passage is not detected due to the clogging. It can be surely prevented. This can reliably detect a full tank.

  Moreover, in the full unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the full unit is formed on the main body frame as in the prior art because it is detachably attached to the full unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3. It is not necessary to form a passage for the full tank structure in the main body frame as compared with the one assembled in the dispensing passage. Further, by making the inside of the full tank unit 900 a zigzag passage, it is possible to guide to the dish unit 300 while weakening the momentum of the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800. The awarded ball does not jump out of the dish unit 300. Further, in the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the foul ball passage 922 that guides the foul ball joins the ball in the middle of the front guide passage 920 that pays out the award ball. The foul sphere can be merged without hindering the flow of the sphere.

[3-7. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 1100 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back side, FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back side, and FIG. 86 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the front side. 87 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the front side of the substrate unit, FIG. 88 is a front view as seen from the front side of the frame substrate holder which is the main body of the substrate unit, and FIG. 90 is a rear view of the board unit, FIG. 91 is a rear view of the board unit with the dispensing control board box and the terminal board box removed, and FIG. FIG. 93 is a plan view showing the connection relationship of each board provided in the board unit, FIG. 93 is a schematic diagram showing the electrical connection between the board unit and the game board, and FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the payout control board and the board unit. Pachinko game showing wiring etc. Is part of a rear view of the machine, Figure 95 is a front view of a game board for explaining a cross-sectional portion of the sectional view of FIG. 96, FIG. 96 is a sectional view taken along line C-C of Figure 95.

  The substrate unit 1100 is attached to a plurality of holder mounting holes 527 (see FIGS. 59 and 61) formed in the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. As shown in FIGS. Various substrates such as a door relay board 1102, a power board box 1103, a terminal board box 1104, a payout control board box 1105, a main drawer relay board 1107, and a sub drawer relay board 1108 are attached to a resin-molded frame board holder 1101. It is comprised by. Among the above boards, the door relay board 1102, the power board box 1103, the terminal board box 1104, and the payout control board box 1105 are attached to the rear side of the frame board holder 1101 so as to overlap in the front-rear direction. The substrate 1107 and the sub drawer relay substrate 1108 are attached to the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. Since the power supply board 1136 creates and supplies + 34V, + 18V and + 9V, it becomes a very high temperature heat source, and the heat generated from the power supply board 1136 stored in the power supply board box 1103 rises. For this reason, the payout control board box 1105 for storing the payout control board 1186 is attached to the upper surface of the power supply board box 1103 so as not to receive the rising heat. A metal shield heat dissipating plate 1106 is attached to the back surface of the payout control board box 1105 to prevent the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board 1136 and the like and to dissipate heat generated from the power supply board 1136. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are covered and attached to the board cover 1109. Hereinafter, each member constituting the substrate unit 1100 will be described in detail.

  It should be noted that the shield heat dissipation plate 1106 in the present embodiment is particularly shielded as shown in FIG. 85 and FIG. The plate surface of the plate 1106 is formed as an uneven surface 1106a. Heat transmitted to the payout control board 1186 by the shield heat sink 1106 can be kept small. The uneven surface 1106a increases the contact area with the outside (outside air) to enhance the heat dissipation effect. The uneven surface 1106a is desirably formed in a vertical or inclined shape so that heat can be easily dissipated when installed. Of course, even if the uneven surface 1106a is formed on the shield heat sink 1106, the shielding effect against electromagnetic waves is not impaired. The shield heat sink 1106 prevents the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board 1136 and the like. Thereby, since the influence of the noise by electromagnetic waves can be suppressed, the malfunctioning of the payout control board 1186 accommodated in the payout control board box 1105 by the influence of noise can be prevented. Further, the shield heat dissipation function of the shield heat sink 1106 is not only between the power supply board box 1103 and the payout control board box 1105 but also when a plurality of other board boxes are attached to the frame board holder 1101 in an overlapping manner. Is also achieved by providing the same shield heat dissipating plate 1106 as in the present embodiment between the lower and upper substrate boxes.

  The heat of the power supply board 1136 is radiated to the inside of the power supply board box 1103 by uneven radiating fins (not shown). Since the heat dissipating fins are inside the power supply board box 1103, the size of the heat dissipating fins is restricted by the structure. For this reason, it is difficult to dissipate the heat of the power supply board 1136, which is a high heat source, into the power supply board box 1103 by enlarging the heat radiation fins. On the upper and lower surfaces of the power supply board box 1103 that houses the power supply board 1136, which is a high heat source, as shown in FIGS. 85 and 87, long heat dissipation holes in the front-rear direction are provided at predetermined intervals on the upper surface of the power supply board box 1103. A plurality of suction ports which are long in the front-rear direction are formed at predetermined intervals on the lower surface of the power supply board box 1103 corresponding to the heat radiation ports. As a result, when the heat generated from the power supply board 1136 rises and is released through the heat radiating port formed on the upper surface of the power supply board box 1103 (when it is discharged), it is pulled by this discharged (this discharged) air. Thus, outside air can be taken into the power supply board box 1103 through a suction port formed on the lower surface of the power supply board box 1103.

  In the pachinko island facilities where the pachinko gaming machines 1 are installed, pachinko gaming machines with a large number of various lamps are arranged in the back as well as the pachinko gaming machines 1, so they are attached to these pachinko gaming machines. Due to the heat generated from the power supply board, the temperature inside the pachinko island facility is also increasing. For this reason, the temperature difference between the internal temperature of the power supply board box 1103 and the ambient temperature of the power supply board box 1103 is reduced, so that the efficiency of heat radiation from the power supply board box 1103 to the surroundings is reduced. The heat generated by the power supply board 1136 accumulates inside, and the temperature inside the power supply board box 1103 rises. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a discharge control board box 1105 which is a heat radiation port formed in the left half of the upper surface of the power supply board box 1103 when viewed from the back and which is attached to the rear side of the power supply board box 1103 is attached. As shown in FIG. 84, an air-cooling fan unit 1500 for cooling the power supply board 1136 is attached to a position corresponding to the position to be provided. The air cooling fan unit 1500 includes a box-shaped air cooling fan unit main body 1501 having an opening corresponding to the upper surface side of the power supply board box 1103, and an air cooling fan 1502 accommodated in the air cooling fan unit main body 105. It is configured. When the air-cooling fan 1502 rotates to take in outside air, the taken-in air is exhausted from an elongated rectangular exhaust port 1503 formed along the front front side of the air-cooling fan unit main body 1501. In FIG. 84, since the air cooling fan 1502 of the air cooling fan unit 1500 is arranged so as to block the heat radiation port formed on the upper surface of the power supply board box 1103, when the air cooling fan 1502 rotates, it is blocked by the air cooling fan 1502. Air inside the power supply board box 1103 is taken in through the heat radiating port, and the taken-in air is exhausted from the exhaust port 1503. When the air inside the power board box 1103 is taken in by the air cooling fan 1502, the outside air is pulled inside the power board box 1103 through the suction port formed on the lower surface of the power board box 1103 by being pulled by the taken air. Incorporated. As described above, since the air inside the power supply board box 1103 is forcibly replaced by the rotation of the air cooling fan 1502, the power supply board 1136 stored in the power supply board box 1103 is in an air-cooled state. As a result, the uneven radiating fins of the power supply board 1136 are also air-cooled, so that the efficiency of radiating heat generated from various voltage generation circuits for generating + 34V, + 18V, and + 9V to the inside of the power supply board box 1103 is not lowered. It has become. In the present embodiment, even when the rotation of the air cooling fan 1502 is stopped and the inside of the power supply board box 1103 is not air cooled, the illumination of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completely turned off to turn off the power supply board 1136. To reduce the load. The size of the radiating fin is designed so that the power supply board 1136 is not broken due to heat generation even in such a state, so that the player can continue the game even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completely turned off. It has become.

  The frame substrate holder 1101 is formed of a synthetic resin in a horizontally long shape, and as shown in FIGS. 85 and 88, a wiring opening 1124 is formed on one side of the rear surface side (right side in FIG. 88). A relay board recess 1110 for attaching the door relay board 1102 is formed inside the opening 1124. The relay substrate recess 1110 is formed as a square recess so as to match the outer shape of the substantially square door relay substrate 1102, and on the upper and lower sides of the relay substrate recess 1110, the back surface of the door relay substrate 1102 is formed. And a retaining claw 1111 that is engaged with the surface of one vertical side of the door relay board 1102 in a state where the door relay board 1102 is stored in the relay board recess 1110. ing. In addition, on the upper and lower sides of the relay board recess 1110, there are mounting bosses 1112 that are engaged with engagement locking holes 1135 formed on one end side of the power supply board box 1103 and fixed with screws (not shown). Projected.

  Further, on the rear surface side of the frame substrate holder 1101, two wiring processing pieces 1114 are formed for locking and collecting wirings passing through the inside closer to the center than the above-described relay substrate recess 1110. The wiring processing piece 1114 is formed so as to project in an L shape when viewed from the side with respect to the vertical surface, and the wiring is hung between the vertical surface and the L-shaped projecting piece. ing. Further, the area from the upper part of the relay board recess 1110 of the frame board holder 1101 to a part slightly closer to the other end side than the center is an area for attaching the power supply board box 1103 (the lower area on the right side described below). Abutting protrusions 1115 that abut against the back surface of the power supply board box 1103 are provided on the upper and lower sides. Therefore, in a state where the power supply board box 1103 is attached to the power supply board box attachment area so as to contact the contact protrusion 1115, there is a space between the back surface of the power supply board box 1103 and the vertical surface of the frame substrate holder 1101. The wirings that are formed and connect the substrates to each other are accommodated in this space, and the two wiring processing pieces 1114 hold and hold the accommodated wirings together.

  It should be noted that the rearward projecting amount is large from the other end side of the region where the power supply board box 1103 is attached to the other end side of the frame substrate holder 1101 (left side in FIG. 88). In other words, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in a stepped shape slightly higher on the left side and lower on the right side at a position slightly left of the center when viewed from the back, and the lower region on the right side is for attaching the power supply board box 1103. (Hereinafter sometimes referred to as “power supply board box mounting region”). An insertion port 1115a is formed on the other end side of the power supply board box mounting region. The insertion opening 1115a is inserted into the insertion protrusion 1134 that protrudes above and below the other end side of the power supply board box 1103. Therefore, in order to attach the power supply board box 1103, after inserting the insertion protrusion 1134 into the insertion slot 1115 a, the engagement locking holes 1135 formed on the upper and lower ends of one end side of the power supply board box 1103 are formed on the attachment boss 1112 from above. The power supply board box 1103 can be fixed to the frame board holder 1101 by being inserted and fastened with screws (not shown).

  Further, on the back side of the frame substrate holder 1101, the above step-like high region is one of regions for attaching the payout control board box 1105 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “payout control board box attachment region”). A horizontal L-shaped concave wiring routing space 1116 is formed in a part of the step-like high region. A wiring opening 1121 (see FIGS. 87 to 90) is formed on the bottom surface of the wiring routing space 1116, and the wirings hooked to the two wiring processing pieces 1114 in the power supply board box mounting region are connected. The wiring routing space 1116 and the wiring opening 1121 are pulled out to the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. In addition, a locking projection 1117 for engaging with the engagement elastic piece 1184 of the dispensing control board box 1105 is formed to project from the other end side (left end side in FIG. 85) of the dispensing control board box mounting region. ing.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 86, 87, and 89, the out ball passage 1119 is inverted at the approximate center of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. It is formed in an L shape. The out ball passage 1119 includes the above-described out port 606 (see FIG. 97), a downstream side of the ball discharge passage 524 (see FIG. 59), and a drop port 629 (formed on the bottom surface of the board substrate holder 623). 66) (see FIG. 66), the upper part is formed wide and the downstream part is formed narrow so that the spheres are discharged in a row. Therefore, when the substrate unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 62, the wide upstream portion of the out ball passage 1119 is positioned behind the passage support projection 513 that supports the lower surface of the out port 606. ing. Then, an out ball, a winning ball, or a ball without ball is discharged from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119 toward the outside of the pachinko gaming machine (generally, an island recovery basket).

  In addition, on the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 corresponding to the payout control board box mounting area, a main drawer relay board 1107 and a sub drawer relay board 1108 are laterally spaced at a predetermined interval in the upper area. A drawer mounting area 1120 is formed to be spaced and mounted in parallel. In the drawer mounting area 1120, support holes 1204 and 1205 formed in the respective relay boards 1107 and 1108 are penetrated, and drawer mounting bosses 1118 for supporting the relay boards 1107 and 1108 are projected and provided. Bonding guide holes 1126 and guide holes 1125 are formed above and below the intermediate positions of the relay boards 1107 and 1108. As shown in FIG. 96, the joint guide holes 1126 are connected to drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 (holder side connectors) provided on the board unit 1100 side and the game board 4 as the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. The joint guide protrusion 628 formed on the board substrate holder 623 of the game board 4 is inserted so that the drawer connectors 626 and 627 (game board side connectors) provided on the side are naturally connected. On the other hand, when the board unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, the guide hole 1125 is inserted with a guide protrusion 525 (see FIGS. 59 and 61) that protrudes from the main body frame 3. The positioning is performed and the mounting operation is facilitated. Further, on both the left and right sides and the lower side of the frame substrate holder 1101, attachment pieces 1122 for attaching the substrate unit 1100 to the main body frame 3 protrude outward, and the attachment pieces 1122 are attached to the attachment holes 527 of the main body frame 3. The board unit 1100 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 by fastening with screws (not shown) corresponding to (see FIG. 59). In addition, as shown in FIG. 61, the attachment hole 527 has an outer peripheral wall that matches the outer shape of the attachment piece 1122. Further, a wiring latching piece 1123 for locking the wiring is formed on the outside of the side wall on the other end side (right side in FIG. 86) of the frame substrate holder 1101.

  The configuration of the frame substrate holder 1101 is generally as described above, and the configurations of various substrates attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 having such a configuration will be described. First, the door relay board 1102 mounted in the relay board recess 1110 on the rear surface side of the frame board holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 85, the door relay board 1102 has an internal connection terminal of a multi-pin connector type. 1130 and a door frame connection terminal 1131 are provided. As shown in FIG. 90, the door frame connection terminal 1131 can be seen from the outside as viewed from the back, even when all the substrates are attached to the frame substrate holder 1101, and is provided on the door frame 5. The door frame wiring 1212 (refer to FIG. 92) such as an electric decoration component and a speaker composed of a lamp and an LED is connected to the door frame connection terminal 1131 through the wiring opening 1124. The internal connection terminal 1130 is connected to a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board 1108 by an internal wiring 1213 (see FIG. 92). However, the internal wiring 1213 is provided inside the frame substrate holder 1101 so that the wiring processing piece 1114, the wiring routing space 1116, and the wiring opening 1124 are laid.

  The power supply board box 1103 attached to the power supply board box attachment region on the rear side of the frame board holder 1101 includes a box main body 1132 for fixing the power supply board 1136 (see FIG. 91) and a cover body covering the box main body 1132. 1133. The box main body 1132 is integrally formed with an engagement locking hole 1135 that engages with the mounting boss 1112 at the top and bottom of one end thereof, and the insertion protrusion 1134 that is inserted into the insertion port 1115a at the top and bottom of the other end. Is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 91, a power switch 1137, a power line connector 1138, a CR unit power connector 1139, and a grounding portion are provided on a portion of the power supply board 1136 that is not covered with the cover body 1133 (the right side and lower left in FIG. A connector 1140 and a payout control board power connector 1141 are provided. The power switch 1137 is a switch for supplying power to all electric devices of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is turned on when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used. In addition, the power line connector 1138 connects the power line from the AC 24V (AC 24V) power line supplied to the island, and grounds the noise charged in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the outside as a frame ground. It is a connector to do. The CR unit power connector 1139 is a connector for supplying power to a card-type ball lending machine (not shown; generally referred to as a CR unit) adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. . The grounding connector 1140 is electrically connected to various antistatic grounding wires provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and noise or the like that has entered the pachinko gaming machine 1 is connected to the outside via the power line connector 1138. It is a connector for grounding. Specifically, a ground wire that removes noise from the door frame 5 (reinforcing plates 211 to 214) is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140a as a frame ground, and noise from a sphere flowing down the tank rail member 740 The ground wire for removing the noise and the like is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140b as the frame ground FG1, and the ground wire for removing noise from the prize ball unit 800 is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140c as the frame ground FG1. An earth wire for removing noise from the CR unit is electrically connected to the earth connector 1140d as a frame ground. These frame grounds are electrically connected to the frame ground of the power line connector 1138, and are grounded to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the frame ground. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 92, a power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the power supply connector 1141 for the payout control board, and the power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the power supply terminal 1192 of the payout control board 1186. Then, by this power supply wiring 1214, another control board or the like (for example, the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 or the peripheral control board housed in the peripheral board box 622 via the payout control board 1186. 4139 and the like). The power supply wiring 1214 is led from the payout control board power supply connector 1141 to the wiring routing space 1116 and drawn backward from the back surface of the payout control board box 1105 to be connected to the power supply terminal 1192. Yes. That is, the power supply wiring 1214 is also laid inside the frame substrate holder 1101.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 85, the rear surface of the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is formed in a stepped shape, and an area with the high step is an attachment area 1142 for attaching the terminal board box 1104. Is a mounting region 1143 for mounting the dispensing control board box 1105. The attachment area 1143 constitutes an attachment area for attaching the horizontally long delivery control board box 1105 together with the above-described delivery control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 1101. In addition, an engagement hole 1146 into which an engagement piece 1182 (see FIG. 87) described later of the payout control board box 1105 is inserted is formed substantially at the center of the stepped portion.

  The cover body 1133 constituting the attachment region 1142 for attaching the terminal board box 1104 has a positioning hole 1145 for positioning or engaging with the positioning pin 1148 and the engaging piece 1147 formed on the back surface side of the terminal board box 1104. A mounting engagement hole 1144 is formed. The engagement piece portion 1147 is formed in an L-shaped cross section, while the attachment engagement hole 1144 is formed in a hole shape in which the wide portion and the narrow portion are continuous, so the engagement piece portion 1147 is attached. After being inserted into the wide portion of the engagement hole 1144, the L-shaped engagement piece 1147 and the mounting engagement hole are slid in one direction (in the illustrated case, the center direction of the frame substrate holder 1101). The narrow portion 1144 is engaged. Note that a latching piece 1149 protrudes from the lower side of the other side of the terminal board box 1104, and when the terminal board box 1104 is slidably engaged with the cover body 1133, the latching piece 1149 is disengaged from the dispensing control board box 1105. The box main body 1180 is engaged with a part of the box main body 1180. This engagement is an engagement state that can be easily released by sliding the terminal board box 1104 in the non-engagement direction with a little force.

  In the terminal board box 1104, as shown in FIG. 90, an external terminal board 1150a provided with a plurality of external information terminals 1151 and a payout control board terminal 1156, a frequency indicator terminal 1152, a power ground terminal 1153, Two boards, a CR unit terminal board 1150b provided with a CR unit terminal 1154 and a payout control board terminal 1155, are housed in parallel in the vertical direction. A plurality of external information terminals 1151 provided on the external terminal board 1150a externally (for example, installed in a game arcade) various information signals necessary for the management of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a jackpot information output signal and a start opening prize information output signal The main drawer relay connector 1200 which will be described in detail later from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624. Is transmitted to the payout control board 1186, and is further transmitted to each of the plurality of external information terminals 1151 by connecting the external terminal board terminal 1188 and the payout control board terminal 1156 provided on the payout control board 1186. Is done. The frequency indicator terminal 1152 of the CR unit terminal board 1150b is connected to the wiring of the remaining frequency indicator, a lending switch, and a return switch of a prepaid card provided in the plate unit 300 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. is there. The power supply ground terminal 1153 includes two connectors. One connector (the left side in FIG. 90) is connected to the wiring from the CR unit power connector 1139 of the power supply board 1136, and the other connector is the power supply board 1136. The wiring from one ground connector 1140 of the plurality of ground connectors 1140 is connected. Further, the CR unit terminal 1154 is connected to a wiring from a CR unit (not shown), and the CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 of the payout control board 1186 and the payout control board terminal 1155 are connected. The payout control board 1186 and the CR unit are connected.

  As described above, the terminal board box 1104 connects the external terminal board 1150a for leading game information from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 to the outside, and the payout control board 1186 and the CR unit. Both the CR unit terminal board 1150b to be relayed are housed, and these are conventionally housed in separate board boxes and provided at different positions on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the embodiment, the terminal board box 1104 is collectively attached to the frame board holder 1101. For this reason, in particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the main control board 4100 and the external terminal board 1150a have a unique configuration in which the main control board 4100 and the external terminal board 1150a are connected via the payout control board 1186 without being directly connected.

  Next, the payout control board box 1105 that can be mounted over the payout control board box mounting area of the frame board holder 1101 and the mounting area 1143 formed on the cover body 1133 of the power board box 1103 is mainly shown in FIGS. Reference is made to FIG. The payout control board box 1105 includes a box main body 1180 to which a horizontally long payout control board 1186 is fixed with a screw (not shown), a cover body 1181 attached to the box main body 1180 and covering the surface of the payout control board 1186, It is composed of The box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 are engaged with one side (the right side in FIG. 90), and are fixed to the other side (the left side in FIG. 90) by a separation cutting portion 1183. Thus, in order to separate the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181, the separation cannot be performed unless the separation / cutting portion 1183 is cut. However, the caulking and fixing at the separation / cutting portion 1183 may be performed by caulking any one of a plurality of locations (in the illustrated case, 4 locations indicated by numerals 1 to 4) by, for example, inspection. If necessary, it can be done up to 3 times. Of course, in the case of an illegal separation, a cut trace remains, so that it is possible to immediately know whether there has been an illegal act. In addition, an engagement piece 1182 that is inserted into an engagement hole 1146 formed in the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is projected and formed at the center of one side short side of the box main body 1180, and the other side short side lower portion is formed. An engagement elastic piece 1184 is formed which elastically engages with a locking projection 1117 formed on the frame substrate holder 1101. Therefore, in order to attach the payout control board box 1105 to the frame board holder 1101, the engaging piece 1182 is inserted into the engaging hole 1146, and then the engaging elastic piece 1184 is engaged with the locking protrusion 1117. Can be installed easily. In the state where the payout control board box 1105 is attached across the payout control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 1101 and the attachment area 1143 formed on the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103, The payout control board box 1105 is housed in a fixed state so that it cannot move in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. On the contrary, when removing, the engaging elastic piece 1184 is pressed in the direction opposite to the elastic direction to disengage the engaging elastic piece 1184 and the locking projection 1117 and pulling up the dispensing control board box 1105, By pulling out the engagement piece 1182 from the engagement hole 1146, the payout control board box 1105 can be removed from the frame board holder 1101.

  Further, the dispensing control board 1186 covered by the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 has a door frame opening switch terminal 1185a and a body frame opening switch terminal 1185b on one side (right side in FIG. 90). , A prize ball unit terminal 1187, an external terminal board terminal 1188, a CR unit terminal board terminal 1189, an operation handle terminal 1194, an error LED indicator 4130, an error release switch 4131, and a ball removal switch 4132 are provided. A full switch terminal 1190, an inspection output terminal 1191, a power supply terminal 1192, a firing motor terminal 1193, and an internal connection terminal 1195 are provided on the lower side (left side in FIG. 90).

  The door frame opening switch terminal 1185a is a connector to which wiring from a door frame opening switch 4133 that detects that the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 is connected. The main body frame opening switch terminal 1185b is a connector to which wiring from the main body frame opening switch 4134 for detecting that the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 is connected. The prize ball unit terminal 1187 is a multi-pin connector to which the wiring from the relay board 480 of the prize ball unit 800 described above is connected. The external terminal board terminal 1188 is a multi-pin connector connected to the payout control board terminal 1156 of the external terminal board 1150a as described above. The CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 is a multi-pin connector connected to the payout control board terminal 1155 of the CR unit terminal board 1150b as described above. The full tank switch terminal 1190 is a connector to which wiring from the full tank switch 916 of the full unit 900 is connected. The error LED display 4130 displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine such as CR unit connection abnormality. When the error cancel switch 4131 is operated, a guide for a cancel method corresponding to the error displayed on the error LED display 4130 flows from the side speaker 121 or the lower speaker 391. When operated, the ball removal switch 4132 starts discharging the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 (starts ball removal). The inspection output terminal 1191 is a connector for connecting to an inspection device when the dispensing control board 1186 is inspected, and is a terminal for outputting various output signals for inspection. The power supply terminal 1192 is a connector connected to the payout control board power connector 1141 of the power supply board 1136 by the power supply wiring 1214 as described above. The launch motor terminal 1193 is a connector to which the wiring from the launch motor 695 of the hit ball launcher 650 is connected. The operation handle terminal 1194 is a connector to which wiring from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 provided in the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 is connected. The internal connection terminal 1195 is a connector connected to the payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107 by the signal power supply wiring 1215.

  In addition, resistors R1194a to R1194d are arranged near the left side of the error release switch 4131 as shown in FIG. These resistors R1194a to R1194d are connected to the ground (GND) when noise or the like from the door frame 5 (the reinforcing plates 211 to 214 shown in FIG. 9) enters various detection signals input to the operation handle terminal 1194. Is described in detail later.

  Next, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 attached to the drawer attachment area 1120 formed on the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 87, the main drawer relay board 1107 is connected to a main drawer connector 626 (game board side connector: see FIG. 101) provided on a relay terminal board 625 attached to the back side of the game board 4. A main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder side connector), a payout control board connector 1201 connected via an internal connection terminal 1195 of the payout control board 1186 and a signal power supply wiring 1215 are provided vertically. Further, the sub drawer relay board 1108 is connected to a sub drawer connector 627 (game board side connector: see FIG. 101) provided on a relay terminal plate 625 attached to the back side of the game board 4. (Holder side connector) and a door frame connector 1203 connected via an internal connection terminal 1130 of the door relay substrate 1102 and an internal wiring 1213 are provided vertically. Further, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are provided with support holes 1204 and 1205 on the left and right sides of each board, and the support holes 1204 and 1205 are protruded from the drawer mounting area 1120. By inserting into 1118, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are positioned and supported in the drawer mounting area 1120, and then firmly fixed by covering with the board cover 1109.

  By the way, the board cover 1109 includes a main drawer relay connector 1200 and a payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107, a sub drawer relay connector 1202 and a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board 1108. Are formed in rectangular connector openings 1206, 1207, 1208, 1209 for projecting outward from the substrate cover 1109, and a pin through which the tip of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted on the back surface side of the substrate cover 1109. Insertion holes 1210 (see FIG. 85) are formed, and stop holes 1211 for fixing the substrate cover 1109 to the frame substrate holder 1101 with screws (not shown) are formed on the left and right ends. Therefore, the support holes 1204 and 1205 of the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are inserted into the drawer mounting boss 1118 protruding from the drawer mounting area 1120, and the leading end of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted into the pin insertion hole 1210. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 can be firmly fixed in the drawer mounting area 1120 by covering with the board cover 1109 while being inserted and fixing with a screw (not shown) in the stop hole 1211.

  As described above, the configuration of the board unit 1100 has been described. In the case of the present embodiment, among the various boards necessary for driving and controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1, the board unit 1100 is replaced as the game board 4 is changed. Door relay board 1102, which is a board other than main control board 4100 and peripheral control board 4139, power board 1136 housed in power board box 1103, external terminal board 1150 housed in terminal board box 1104, and dispensing control board box 1105 The stored dispensing control board 1186 is assembled in advance into a frame substrate holder 1101 to form a unit, and the assembled and unitized board unit 1100 is conventionally separated separately by simply attaching it to the lower part on the back side of the main body frame 3. Work efficiency is improved compared to various board mounting work that was attached to the back side of the body frame 3 Door can be. Further, in this case, the wiring between the substrates unitized in the substrate unit 1100 can also be accommodated in the frame substrate holder 1101, so that the wiring connecting the substrates is not messed up and disturbed, and is laid out neatly. can do.

  In the present embodiment, a main drawer relay board 1107 having a main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder side connector) on the front surface of the board unit 1100 and a sub drawer relay board 1108 having a sub drawer relay connector 1202 (holder side connector); 96, as shown in FIG. 96, the main drawer connector of the relay terminal plate 625 provided on the back side of the game board 4 as the game board 4 is mounted on the main body frame 3 from the front side. 626 and the sub drawer connector 627 (game board side connector) are connected to the corresponding main drawer relay connector 1200 and sub drawer relay connector 1202 (holder side connector), respectively. Can be performed simultaneously. For this reason, the exchange work of the game board 4 can be performed skillfully.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the substrate unit 1100 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, a payout control board box 1105 that requires wiring work with various electric devices provided on the main body frame 3, and an external A terminal board box 1104 that needs to be connected to a CR unit or a management computer is arranged in parallel at the rearmost position of the board unit 1100 where it can be easily seen, while a power supply board that requires less external connection work. Since the box 1103 and the door relay substrate 1102 are arranged inside, a plurality of substrates can be efficiently overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the size of the substrate unit 1100 can be designed to a minimum. However, even in the power supply board box 1103 and the door relay board 1102 arranged inside, all the terminal portions connected to the outside can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the connection work becomes a problem. There is no.

[3-7-1. Electrical connection between board unit and game board (connection using drawer connector)]
Next, electrical connection between the board unit 1100 and the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 are provided on the game board 4 side, and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 are provided on the board unit 1100 side. As shown in FIG. 93 (a), the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side can be electrically connected by inserting them into the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side. As shown in FIG. 93 (b), the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side have terminals 626a and 627a, and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are shown in FIG. 93 (c). As shown, contacts 1200a and 1202a are provided. When the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side are inserted into the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side, the terminals 626a and 627a push down the contacts 1200a and 1202a as shown in FIG. Is displaced. The repulsive force of the contacts 1200a and 1202a generated by this displacement is brought into an electrically conductive state by strongly contacting the terminals 626a and 627a. As a result, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are mutually controlled by various control boards (for example, by the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 1186). Control signal lines for transmitting various control signals are formed. The drawer connector 626 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connector 1200 on the board unit 1100 side are further formed with voltage supply lines for supplying various voltages created by the power supply board 1136. In this way, by attaching the game board 4 to the main body frame 3 in a detachable manner, control signal lines and voltages by the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are provided. The supply line can be connected freely.

  In this embodiment, the terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a are of the bellows type. In the case of the pin type, there is a risk that the pin may be inadvertently touched and bent during the work, but in the case of the bellows type, there is no such risk. Further, gold plating with a small friction coefficient is adopted for plating of the terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a. Thereby, the sliding goodness (goodness of fitting) at the time of attachment and detachment of game board 4 is secured.

  Here, when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, if the operation is performed with the power switch 1137 shown in FIG. 91 being turned on, the contact between the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a, specifically, Since a large current (an inrush current described later) flows at the contact points for various voltage supply lines, welding occurs. If the game board 4 is forcibly pushed into the main body frame 3 to be attached in this welded state, the contact 1200a is bent and broken, or when the game board 4 is removed from the main body frame, the contact 1200a is removed from the drawer connector 1200. The drawer connector 1200 cannot be used due to being peeled off and damaged.

  Further, when the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a are welded, various control boards may malfunction or electronic components mounted on the various control boards may be damaged due to breakage of the connector. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a circuit for preventing welding is provided on the main control board 4100 described later. Detailed description thereof will be described later.

[3-7-2. Wiring with prize ball unit]
Next, wiring between the payout control board 1186 housed in the payout control board box 1105 and the prize ball unit 800 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 includes the counting switch connector 830a, the payout motor connector 830b, the rotation angle switch connector 830c, the ball break switch connector 830d, the ground connector 830e, and the payout control. A board connector 830f is provided.

  The count switch connector 830a is connected to the wiring from the count switch 812, the payout motor connector 830b is connected to the wire from the payout motor 815, the rotation angle switch connector 830c is connected to the wiring from the rotation angle switch 855, The ball break switch connector 830d is connected to the wire from the ball break switch 778 of the ball passage unit 770, and the ground connector 830e is connected to the ground wire from the payout motor 815. The payout control board connector 830f is connected to the prize ball unit terminal 1187 of the payout control board 1186 by wiring (harness).

  The wiring from the counting switch 812, the wiring from the payout motor 815, the ground wire from the payout motor 815, and the prize ball unit terminal 1187, excluding the wiring from the ball break switch 778 and the wiring from the rotation angle switch 855, The harness is assembled by being hooked by a wiring processing piece 869.

  As described above, the balls supplied from the island are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740, taken into the ball path unit 770, and guided to the prize ball unit 800. When the spheres rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge occurs to generate noise. Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment.

  As described above, the rotation angle switch 855 is provided on the sensor substrate 854 of the prize ball unit 800, and the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 855 is easily affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the sphere. The harness connecting the payout control connector 480f and the prize ball unit terminal 1187, that is, the harness connecting the prize ball unit 800 and the payout control board 1186, is also affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the ball. Cheap.

[4. Detailed configuration of game board]
Next, the configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 97 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 98 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the diagonally right front, FIG. 99 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the diagonally left front, and FIG. 100 is the game board. FIG. 101 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from the front side after disassembling the main components, and FIG. 102 is a perspective view of the disassembled view from the back side. FIG.

  As shown in the figure, the game board 4 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603, and a frame-shaped front constituent member that defines an outer periphery of a game area 605 into which game balls are to be driven. 601, a gaming panel 600 disposed so as to close the gaming area 605 behind the front component 601, and a function disposed below the front structural member 601 on the right side of the out port 606 outside the gaming area 605. A display unit 640, an attacker unit 2000 that is disposed at the approximate center in the left-right direction in the game area 605 and above the out port 606 and supported by the front surface of the game panel 600, and along the outer periphery of the game area 605 on the left side And a side prize opening member 2100 supported by the front surface of the gaming panel 600, and a vertical center in the gaming area 605. A gate member 2200 disposed on the upper left side and supported on the front surface of the gaming panel 600, a frame-shaped center accessory 2300 disposed substantially at the center of the gaming area 605 and supported by the gaming panel 600, and the gaming panel 600 A back unit 3000 attached to the rear side, and a liquid crystal display device that is attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 so as to be visible from the player side through the inside of the game panel 600 and the center accessory 2300 and can display a predetermined effect image 1400.

  The back box 3001 constituting the back unit 3000 is for guiding the game balls that have entered the various winning openings provided in the game area 605 to be arranged downstream, and below the back side, there is a board substrate. A holder 623 is fixed. A drop opening 629 is formed on the bottom surface of the board substrate holder 623, and the game balls guided and aligned by the back box 3001 are out ball passages 1119 formed in the substrate unit 1100 via the drop opening 629 (FIG. 86). )). A main control board box 624 containing a main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is attached to the back of the board substrate holder 623.

  On the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, a peripheral substrate box 622 in which a peripheral control substrate 4139 that controls the progress of presentation based on a command from the main control substrate 4100 is accommodated, and an inverter that supplies power to the liquid crystal display device 1400 An inverter board box 1410 in which the board 1411 is accommodated is attached. The liquid crystal display device 1400 is detachably attached to the back unit 3000. Hereinafter, the configuration of each device mounted on the game panel 600 will be described in detail.

[4-1. Attacker unit]
First, the attacker unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. FIG. 103 is a perspective view in which each device mounted on the game panel is disassembled for each member and viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. 104 is a perspective view of the attacker unit viewed from an oblique front. The attacker unit 2000 of the present embodiment is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600 after being inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 600e formed at the lower portion of the game panel 600 at the center in the left-right direction. The attacker unit 2000 has a plurality of entrances (winning ports) through which game balls that have been driven into the game area 605 can be received. Specifically, the first start port 2001 disposed substantially in the center in the left-right direction, the second start port 2002 disposed below the first start port 2001, and the second start port 2002 disposed below. And a rectangular big prize winning port 2003 extending in the left-right direction larger than the first starting port 2001 and the second starting port 2002.

  The first start port 2001 is open on the upper side, and game balls can be received (winning) at all times. On the other hand, the second start port 2002 disposed below the first start port 2001 is a pair of movable pieces 2005 that can be expanded by a start port solenoid 2015 (see FIG. 172) between the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002. In a state where the pair of movable pieces 2005 rises substantially vertically, the first start port 2001 and the pair of movable pieces 2005 make it impossible for the game ball to be received into the second start port 2002. Thus, in a state where the pair of movable pieces 2005 are expanded in the left-right direction (the state shown in FIG. 104), the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2002. That is, the second starting port 2002 is a variable winning port by the pair of movable pieces 2005. The pair of movable pieces 2005 are opened and closed based on detection of the passage of a game ball by a gate sensor 2202 of a gate member 2200 described later.

  The special winning opening 2003 can be opened and closed by a horizontally-long rectangular opening and closing member 2006 that can close the opening. The opening / closing member 2006 is pivotally supported at the lower side, and in a substantially vertical state (the state shown in FIG. 104), closes the grand prize opening 2003 to make it impossible to receive a game ball, and the upper side is inclined forward. When it is rotated, the special winning opening 2003 is opened so that a game ball can be received. The opening / closing member 2006 is in a state in which the big prize opening 2003 is closed in a normal gaming state, and lottery is performed when a game ball is received (starts winning) in the first starting opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2002. In response to the special lottery result (when the special lottery result is “big hit” or “small hit”), it is opened and closed by driving the attacker solenoid 2016 (see FIG. 172).

[4-2. Side prize opening member]
The side prize opening member 2100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 103 and 105. FIG. 105 is a perspective view of the side winning opening member viewed obliquely from the front. The side winning opening member 2100 is inserted from the front side with respect to the opening portion 600e formed on the left side of the opening portion 600e into which the attacker unit 2000 is inserted and fixed at the lower left side from the center in the left-right direction of the game panel 600. Above, it is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600, and is provided with four general winning holes 2101 arranged along the outer periphery of the game area 605. As shown in the drawing, these four general winning ports 2101 are opened upward so that game balls can be received (winned) at all times.

  Further, the side prize opening member 2100 is provided with a shelf 2102 on the upper side, which is disposed at a position where the left end is in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 605 and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right. The shelf 2102 can bring the game balls that have flowed down along the outer periphery of the game area 605 toward the center of the game area 605. The four general winning openings 2101 are arranged on the right side of the right end of the shelf 2102, and even if the game balls are brought closer to the center side of the game area 605 by the shelf 2102, the general winning openings 2101 are arranged. There is a possibility to win a prize. In addition, a decoration portion 2103 is provided on the front side (player side) of the side prize opening member 2100, and light emission decoration can be performed by light from a light emitting substrate (not shown) arranged behind the decoration portion 2103. ing.

[4-3. Gate member]
As shown in FIG. 103, the gate member 2200 is inserted from the front side into the opening 600e formed on the left side of the game panel 600 from the center in the horizontal direction and slightly above the center in the vertical direction. The game panel 600 is fixed to the front surface. The gate member 2200 has a gate 2201 having a width through which only one game ball can pass, and a game ball that has passed through the gate 2201 can be detected by a gate sensor 2202 disposed in the gate 2201. It is like that.

[4-4. Center character]
Next, the configuration of the center accessory 2300 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 103 and FIGS. FIG. 106 is a perspective view of the center accessory as seen from diagonally forward, FIG. 107 is a perspective view of the center feature as disassembled for each main member and seen from diagonally forward, and FIG. FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the center unit of the object disassembled and viewed from an oblique front; FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the center shelf movable shelf unit, and FIG. 110 is the movable shelf unit; Fig. 111 is a perspective view of the center drive unit viewed from an oblique front, Fig. 111 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory from the lower right decorative unit, and Fig. 112 is an oblique view of the lower right decorative unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the structure of the principal part, FIG. 113 is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right decoration unit of the center accessory and was seen from the diagonal front.

  As shown in FIG. 103, the center accessory 2300 is inserted from the front side into an opening 600e formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 600, and then fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600. As shown in the figure, the frame occupies most of the game area 605 and is formed in a frame shape. A gate member 2200 is disposed between the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the center accessory 2300 and the outer periphery of the game area 605.

  As shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the center accessory 2300 includes a frame-shaped center unit 2310, a movable shelf unit 2330 disposed in the lower portion thereof, and a lower right portion disposed in the lower right portion of the center unit 2310. A decoration unit 2360 and a right decoration unit 2370 disposed on the upper side thereof are provided. As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, the center unit 2310 includes a frame-shaped base plate 2311 made of a transparent resin member, and a plurality of decorative members 2321 arranged on the front surface of the base plate 2311. The base plate 2311 has a substantially annular shape, and a game ball that has entered a chance opening 2334a (see FIG. 109) formed in the movable shelf unit 2330 is placed below the center accessory 2300 in the lower part. A chance outlet 2311a that discharges to the game area 605 is provided penetrating in the front-rear direction. In addition, a pedestal portion 2311b for mounting the lower right decoration unit 2360 is formed on the lower right side of the base plate 2311 so as to protrude downward.

  The decorative member 2321 attached to the front surface of the base plate 2311 includes a brick-shaped upper brick ornament 2312 disposed on the top of the base plate 2311, and an upper left ornament 2313 disposed on the upper left of the base plate 2311. , A brick-shaped left brick ornament 2314 arranged along the left inner peripheral surface of the base plate 2311, an R-shaped ornament 2315 arranged below the upper left ornament 2313, and “phone” A telephone-shaped ornament 2316 simulating a shape, a telephone box-shaped ornament 2317 simulating the shape of a “phone box” disposed below the phone-shaped ornament 2316, and a substantially arc-shaped base plate below the base plate 2311 The decorative member 2321 other than the left brick-shaped ornament 2314 and the base plate lower ornament 2320 is provided so as to protrude from the front surface of the game panel 600 to the player side. That is, the game ball is configured not to enter the center unit 2310 from the outside of the center unit 2310. However, a warp passage forming member 2318 having a warp passage 2318a is provided on the back side of the telephone box type ornament 2317, and a game ball that rolls in the game area 605 on the left side of the center accessory 2300 is taken in, and a movable shelf It can be sent to the upper rolling surface 2334b (see FIG. 109) formed in the unit 2330. In other words, the warp passage 2318a has a warp entrance on the left side where a game ball can enter, and the right end communicates with the ball guide member 2319, so that the game ball taken in from the warp entrance can be And it is sent to the upper rolling surface 2334b via the ball guide member 2319.

  By the way, since the warp passage 2318a is incorporated in the center unit 2310 in a hidden state, even if a game ball is taken into the warp passage 2318a, it cannot be noticed, and thus the warp passage 2318a is produced. It may be difficult to draw attention as part of Therefore, in the present embodiment, the warp passage forming member 2318 is formed of a transparent resin member, and a viewing window 2317a is provided on the front surface of the telephone box type ornament 2317, and the inside of the warp passage 2318a is looked through the viewing window 2317a. It is possible to visually recognize whether or not a game ball has been taken into the warp passage 2318a.

  However, even if the peeping window 2317a is formed in this way, if the frequency at which the game ball is taken into the warp passage 2318a is low, there is a possibility that the peeping timing matches the timing at which the gaming ball passes, that is, peeping Since the possibility of visually recognizing a game ball through the window 2317a is extremely reduced, there is a possibility that the interest in the viewing window 2317a is impaired. In particular, when the size of the viewing window 2317a is relatively small, the possibility of visually recognizing the game ball is further reduced. There is a concern to make it happen.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to arrange the viewing window 2317a in front of a movable character body 3192 (see FIG. 138) described later and show the movable character body 3192 in the standby position (original position) through the viewing window 2317a. I have to. That is, by showing the movable character body 3192 hidden behind the game panel 600 or the center unit 2310 as the background of the warp passage 2318a, the willingness to look inside through the viewing window 2317a is increased, and the game ball Even if it is not visible, dissatisfaction with it can be reduced.

  Next, the movable shelf unit 2330 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 107 and 109, the movable shelf unit 2330 rolls the game ball taken in the center unit 2310 in the left-right direction, and in particular, part of the rolling surface in the left-right direction. By reciprocating, it is possible to change the path of the game ball. More specifically, the movable shelf unit 2330 includes a cheese mold shelf 2331 shaped like “cheese”, a star lens 2332 disposed on the upper left side of the cheese mold shelf 2331, and a cheese mold shelf 2331. And a light emitting substrate 2333 that emits light from below. Further, on the front side of the cheese mold shelf 2331, a rear shelf 2334 having a chance opening 2334a and an upper rolling surface 2334b, and a movable shelf that is disposed on the front side of the chance opening 2334a and is slidably supported in the left-right direction. 2339 and a shelf driving unit 2340 that is disposed below the rear shelf 2334 and reciprocates the movable shelf 2339 in the left-right direction.

  The upper rolling surface 2334b of the rear shelf 2334 is formed in a wave shape, and the left end communicates with the ball guiding member 2319. The game ball sent through the warp passage 2318a and the ball guiding member 2319 rolls in the left-right direction. It is possible to make it. In particular, the upper rolling surface 2334b has a substantially central portion in the left-right direction raised in a mountain shape, and a first outflow portion 2334c formed in a downward slope toward the front is provided at the top portion, and further on the left and right outer sides thereof. A second outflow portion 2334d formed with a downward slope toward the front inner side is provided in each valley portion. That is, when the momentum of the game ball rolling in the left-right direction is no longer in the central portion (top portion) in the left-right direction, the game ball is flowed out forward from the first first outflow portion 2334c, On the other hand, when there is no momentum other than the central portion, the second outflow portion 2334d flows out toward the front inner side.

  As shown in FIGS. 109 and 110, the movable shelf portion 2339 has a substantially arc-shaped chance guiding portion 2339a formed at the center portion in the left-right direction and a flat shape formed on the left and right outer sides of the chance guiding portion 2339a, respectively. The chance part 2339a and the rolling part 2339b are partitioned by the protrusion part 2339c. The chance guiding part 2339a corresponds to the chance opening 2334a of the rear shelf 2334, and the game ball sent to the chance guiding part 2339a enters the chance opening 2334a and the chance of the base plate 2311 (see FIG. 108). The game is discharged from the outlet 2311a to the game area 605 directly above the first start port 2001. Note that a ball receiving portion 2341 is disposed on the rear side of the chance opening 2334a, and a game ball that has entered the chance opening 2334a is guided toward the lower portion of the base plate 2311. On the other hand, the left and right rolling portions 2339b of the movable shelf 2339 are not in communication with the chance opening 2334a, and are configured to guide the game ball toward the lower rolling surface 2335a of the front shelf 2335. The movable shelf 2339 reciprocates in the left-right direction so that the position relative to the rear shelf 2334 changes, and the timing of the game ball flowing out from the second outlet 2334d of the rear shelf 2334 Based on the position of the movable shelf 2339 at that time, the outflowing game ball is sent to the chance guiding part 2339a (that is, when the advantage is high), and is sent to the rolling part 2339b (that is, (When the advantage is low). The game ball that has flowed out of the first outflow portion 2334c in the center of the rear shelf 2334 is always sent to the chance guiding portion 2339a regardless of the position of the movable shelf 2339.

  As shown in FIG. 110, the shelf drive unit 2340 includes an upright motor base 2342, a drive motor 2343 fixed to the rear surface of the motor base 2342, a motor cam 2344 connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 2343, A pair of pins 2347 connecting the first link 2345 and the second link 2346, which are connected to the motor cam 2344 and convert the rotational motion of the motor cam 2344 into a reciprocating linear motion in the left-right direction, and the rear surface of the movable shelf 2339 and the second link 2346. And is configured. The pins 2347 are arranged through a pair of long hole portions 2334e that penetrates the rear shelf 2334 (see FIG. 109) in the front-rear direction, and the movable direction is guided in the left-right direction by the long hole portions 2334e. ing. In addition, a photo sensor 2349 (see FIG. 109) that detects the original position of the movable shelf 2339 is provided on the front surface of the motor base 2342.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 109, a front shelf 2335 having a lower rolling surface 2335a is disposed on the front side of the movable shelf 2339, and toward the movable shelf 2339 and the front shelf 2335 on the lower side. A light emitting substrate 2338 for irradiating light is provided. Further, at the boundary portion between the cheese mold shelf 2331 and the rear shelf 2334, a shelf shield 2336 serving as a rear wall of the upper rolling surface 2334b, and a fork type shaped like a “fork” disposed on the upper right side thereof. A decoration 2337 is provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 107 and 111, the lower right decoration unit 2360 is disposed on the front surface of the pedestal portion 2311b of the base plate 2311 except for the light emitting substrate 2362 described later, and has an arc-shaped decoration base as a decoration member. 2361, a first explosive lens 2363 disposed at the center of the decoration base 2361 in the vertical direction, and a second explosive lens 2369 disposed on the lower front surface of the pedestal 2311b. The second explosive lens 2369 includes a lens frame 2365, an explosive translucent portion 2366 inside the lens frame 2365, and a TRAP translucent portion 2367 that imitates the characters “TRAP”. Further, on the rear side of the first explosive lens 2363 and the second explosive lens 2369, light emitting substrates 2364 and 2368 for irradiating the respective decorative members are disposed, and on the rear side of the decorative base 2361. Is provided with a light emitting substrate 2362 that is attached to the rear surface of the pedestal portion 2311b and emits light to the decoration base 2361 through a window portion 2311c formed in the pedestal portion 2311b. It is possible to decorate the decorative member.

  In addition, the decoration base 2361 includes a plate-like protruding piece 2361a that protrudes obliquely downward to the right from the base plate 2311. On the other hand, the explosion-type translucent portion 2366 has a protruding portion 2366a that faces the protruding piece 2361a. As shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 112, a passage S through which the game ball K can pass is formed between the protruding piece 2361a and the protruding portion 2366a. In particular, the projecting piece 2361a of the decoration base 2361 is formed with a first projecting portion 2361b and a second projecting portion 2361c that project toward the passage S side. The speed of the game ball sent to the out port 606 is suppressed by making it flow down while making it collide with the protrusion part 2366a of the part 2366. More specifically, since a game nail or the like is not provided in the game area 605 on the right side of the center accessory 2300, the game ball driven into the game area 605 on the right side moves toward the out port 606 with a large kinetic energy. However, it is possible to reduce the momentum of the game ball K and make it easier to enter the out port 606 by causing the game ball K passing therethrough to collide with the protruding portion 2366a as in the present embodiment. Yes. In addition, although the corner | angular part of the protrusion part 2366a has high possibility of the collision of the game ball K, the damage by collision is suppressed by forming a chamfer in this part. Further, the second protrusion 2361c on the downstream side has a lower height than the first protrusion 2361b, and the second protrusion 2361c can rectify the behavior of the game ball K rolling in a zigzag manner. It is possible.

  As shown in FIGS. 107 and 113, the right decoration unit 2370 is disposed on the front surface of the base plate 2311 located above the lower right decoration unit 2360, and has a right foot decoration 2371 shaped like a right foot, and A right foot unit 2374 composed of an explosive mark 2372 disposed at the center thereof, a light emitting substrate 2373 for irradiating light on the rear side of the right foot unit 2374 and illuminating the right foot unit 2374, and an upper side of the right foot unit 2374. GYA type lens 2375 having the characters “GAA”, GYA type lens 2375 and lens sheet 2376 are accommodated in the front side, frame lens 2378 is accommodated in the rear side, and GYA type lens is passed through frame lens 2378 and lens sheet 2376. A light emitting substrate 2379 for irradiating light to 2375 It is configured Te. Further, on the upper right of the frame 2377, a character back member 2380 and a character left foot member 2382 provided as a part of the first character described later, and a frame for guiding the light emitted from the light emitting board 2379 toward the character back member 2380. And a right upper decoration 2383 disposed on the upper right side of the character left foot member 2382 are provided. Further, a center upper right drive substrate 2384 is provided so as to be covered with a substrate cover 2385 on the rear surface of the base plate 2311 located on the rear side of the light emitting substrate 2379.

[4-5. Back unit]
Next, the configuration of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 114 to 167. FIG. 114 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from diagonally forward, FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board showing the effect state by the first character accessory unit, and FIG. 116 is the first character accessory unit. FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the first character combination unit disassembled and viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. 118 is an exploded view of the left arm unit of the first character combination unit. FIG. 119 is a perspective view of the first character combination unit disassembled from the right arm unit and a front view of the first character combination unit. FIG. 120 is a perspective view of the first character combination unit. FIG. 121 is a perspective view of the arm drive unit as viewed obliquely from behind; FIG. 121 is a perspective view of the face slide unit of the first character accessory unit as viewed from obliquely forward; and FIG. FIG. 123 is a perspective view of the face slide mechanism section and the face moving section, viewed from diagonally forward. FIG. 123 is a perspective view of the face slide mechanism section disassembled and viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. 124 is a face slide. FIG. 125 is a perspective view of the driving unit of the mechanism unit viewed from an oblique front, FIG. 125 is a perspective view of the driving unit viewed from an oblique rear, and FIG. 126 illustrates the face moving unit and the face type unit viewed from an oblique front. 127 is a perspective view in which the face moving unit is disassembled into a mouth mechanism unit and a face base part, and is seen obliquely from the front. FIG. 128 is a perspective view in which the mouth mechanism unit is seen from obliquely behind. FIG. 129 is a perspective view of the mouth mechanism unit disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the face base portion and obliquely viewed from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view which made the face type unit of the 1st character actor unit transparent, and was seen from the slant front.

  FIG. 132 is a front view of the game board showing the effect state by the signboard-type accessory unit, FIG. 133 is a perspective view of the signboard-type accessory unit viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. FIG. 135 is a perspective view of the accessory unit disassembled and seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. 135 is an exploded perspective view of the signboard movable part of the signage-type accessory unit as seen obliquely from the front.

  FIG. 136 is a front view of the game board showing the effect state by the second character combination unit, FIG. 137 is a perspective view of the second character combination unit viewed from diagonally forward, and FIG. FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the character unit of the second character actor unit as viewed from diagonally forward; FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the character unit as viewed from diagonally forward; and FIG. 141 (a) is a perspective view of the mechanism unit of the character unit as viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 141 (b) is a front view of the state in which the cover member is removed. FIG. 143 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the mechanism unit of the character unit, FIG. 143 is a perspective view of the door unit of the second character accessory unit as viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. FIG. 145 is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the viewing window in the game board, and FIG. 146 is a perspective view of the character unit and the members disposed on the rear side thereof as viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 147 is a perspective view of the character unit and the members arranged on the rear side thereof, as seen obliquely from behind.

  Further, FIG. 148 is a front view of the game board showing the effect state by the saddle type accessory unit, FIG. 149 is a perspective view of the saddle type accessory unit seen from diagonally forward, and FIG. FIG. 151 is a perspective view of the accessory unit disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 151 is a front view showing a state in which the saddle type decorative body in the saddle type accessory unit is in the initial position, and FIG. 152 is a saddle type FIG. 153 is a front view illustrating a state in which the decorative body has moved to the intermediate position, and FIG. 153 is a front view illustrating a state in which the saddle-shaped decorative body has moved to the end position.

  Further, FIG. 154 is a front view of the game board showing the effect state by the composite accessory unit, FIG. 155 is a perspective view of the composite accessory unit seen from the diagonal front, and FIG. 156 is the composite accessory unit. FIG. 157 is a perspective view as seen from the front with the cover member of the composite accessory unit removed, and FIG. 158 is an exploded view from the front as seen from the front. FIG. 159 is a perspective view showing an operating state of the composite accessory unit.

  FIG. 160 is a perspective view of the trap-type accessory unit as viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 161 is a perspective view showing an operation state of the trap-type accessory unit, and FIG. 162 is a trap-type accessory unit. FIG. 163 is a perspective view of the spherical guide passage and the star light-emitting light guide plate as viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 164 is a perspective view of the spherical guide passage and the star light-emitting light guide plate. FIG. 165 is a perspective view of the liquid crystal display device and the surrounding decorative portion as viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. 166 is a perspective view of the back box and the drive substrate as viewed from the oblique front. FIG. 167 is a perspective view of the exploded view seen obliquely from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 98 and 114, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 600, and mainly supports the liquid crystal display device 1400 at a position away from the gaming panel 600 to the rear side by a predetermined distance. In the back box 3001, the first character combination unit 3010 disposed on the upper right side in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the signboard type combination disposed on the left side of the first character combination unit 3010. Object unit 3150, a second character accessory unit 3180 disposed on the front left side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, a saddle type accessory unit 3240 disposed on the front right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the liquid crystal display device 1400. A composite accessory unit 3270 disposed on the lower front side of the rear box 3001, and a trap-type accessory unit 331 disposed on the lower right side of the back box 3001. And a ball guide passage 3340 and a star light emission light guide plate 3341 disposed in the lower left portion of the back box 3001, and a start port guide passage 3347 disposed on the left side of the trap type accessory unit 3310. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 114, the back box 3001 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and is provided with a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 3001a projecting outward at the front end, via the fixing portion 3001a. The game panel 600 is fixed to the rear side. Further, the back box 3001 has a rectangular opening 3001c formed substantially at the center of the rear wall 3001b, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 supported on the rear side can be seen through the opening 3001c. . Further, the back box 3001 is formed with an attachment portion at an appropriate position for attaching and fixing the first character combination unit 3010, the second character combination unit 3180, and the respective substrates.

  The first character combination unit 3010 will be described in detail. The first character accessory unit 3010 is a movable accessory arranged on the upper right side in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and changes from a standby position (original position) shown in FIG. 97 to an effect position (movable limit position) shown in FIG. When moved (down), as shown in FIG. 115, the liquid crystal display device 1400 is disposed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400 so that the upper right of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is blocked about 1/3. As shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, the first character accessory unit 3010 includes an arm driving unit 3020 and a face slide unit 3060. The arm drive unit 3020 is for moving the left and right arms of a first character (hereinafter referred to as “cat character”) that makes a cat image. Yes. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the left arm unit 3021 is shaped like the left arm of the “cat character”, and is disposed at the top of the left arm 3022 and the left arm 3022 that are long in the vertical direction. A left-hand portion 3023 and a light-emitting substrate 3024 that emits light from the rear side toward the left arm portion 3022 and the left-hand portion 3023 to illuminate and decorate them are configured. Further, an L-shaped attachment portion 3022a bent rearward and extending upward is formed on the upper portion of the left arm portion 3022, and a left arm base 3025 is assembled on the rear surface thereof. A shaft support portion 3025a inserted from the rear into the through hole 3022b of the attachment portion 3022a is formed on the upper portion of the left arm base 3025, and a cylindrical fitting tube portion 3025b protruding in the front-rear direction is formed on the lower right side of the left arm base 3025. Is formed. An arm shaft portion 3026 is fitted into the center of the shaft support portion 3025a, and a guide pin 3027 is fitted into the fitting tube portion 3025b via a left bush 3053.

  As shown in FIGS. 117 and 119, the right arm unit 3030 is modeled after the right arm of the “cat character”, and is arranged at the right arm portion 3031 which is long to the left and right, and the tip of the right arm portion 3031. A right-hand portion 3032 and a light-emitting substrate 3033 that emits light from the rear side toward the right arm portion 3031 and the right-hand portion 3032 to emit and decorate them are configured. Note that a star-shaped opening 3032a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the center of the right-hand portion 3032, and a star frame 3034 and a star lens 3035 are fitted into the opening 3032a from the rear side. Further, a substantially rectangular attachment portion 3031a is formed to extend from the right portion of the right arm portion 3031. A right arm base 3036 is assembled to the rear surface of the right arm portion 3031. A shaft support portion 3036a is formed at the right end portion of the right arm base 3036, and a cylindrical fitting tube portion 3036b protruding in the front-rear direction is formed on the upper left side of the right arm base 3036. Note that an arm shaft portion 3037 is fitted in the center of the shaft support portion 3036a, and a guide pin 3038 is fitted in the fitting tube portion 3036b via a right bush 3054.

  117 and 120, the drive unit 3040 swings the left arm unit 3021 and the right arm unit 3030 so that the “cat character” swings his arm, and has a thin box shape whose rear surface is open. The gear box base 3041, a gear box lid (not shown) for closing the rear surface of the gear box base 3041, an arm drive motor 3043 disposed on the upper right of the front surface of the gear box base 3041, and the gear box base 3041. And a mechanism unit 3039 for transmitting the power of the arm drive motor 3043 to move the left arm unit 3021 and the right arm unit 3030. In the mechanism unit 3039, a motor gear 3044 connected to the arm drive motor 3043, a first intermediate gear 3046 that is rotatably supported by a gear pin 3045, and an outer peripheral large gear 3046a is engaged with the motor gear 3044, and a first intermediate gear And a fan-shaped left drive gear 3047 meshed with a small gear (not shown) formed at 3046. The rotation center 3047a of the left drive gear 3047 is connected to the shaft support portion 3025a of the left arm unit 3021 via the arm shaft portion 3026 (see FIG. 118), and the rotation of the left drive gear 3047 is transmitted to the left arm unit 3021. It has become so. Note that an arcuate guide groove 3041a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at the lower right end of the gear box base 3041, and a guide pin 3027 (see FIG. 118) is inserted to smoothly slide the left arm unit 3021. And the movable range of the left arm unit 3021 is mechanically limited.

  Further, the mechanism unit 3039 is rotatably supported by a gear pin 3048 and is engaged with a second intermediate gear 3049 engaged with a small gear (not shown) of the first intermediate gear 3046 and a second intermediate gear 3049. The fan-shaped right drive gear 3050 is included. The rotation center 3050a of the right drive gear 3050 is connected to the shaft support portion 3036a of the right arm unit 3030 via an arm shaft portion 3037 (see FIG. 119), and the rotation of the right drive gear 3050 is transmitted to the right arm unit 3030. It has become so. Note that an arcuate guide groove 3041b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at the left end of the gear box base 3041, and a guide pin 3038 (see FIG. 119) is fitted therein, so that the right arm unit 3030 can be smoothly inserted. While rotating, the movable range of the right arm unit 3030 is mechanically limited. The right drive gear 3050 is provided with a torsion spring 3051, and the right arm unit 3030 is urged toward the upper stop position. In addition, a plurality of photo sensors 3052 are disposed in the gear box base 3041, and the movable positions (the original position and the movable limit position) of the left arm unit 3021 and the right arm unit 3030 can be detected. Yes.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 117 and 121, the face slide unit 3060 includes a face mold unit 3061, a face slide mechanism unit 3070, and a face moving unit 3100. The face-type unit 3061 is modeled after the face of a “cat character” which is a three-dimensional character, and is hollowed by a material having flexibility and light transmission, specifically, soft polyvinyl chloride. And a face part 3062 formed on the face part and four heel parts 3063 attached to the face part 3062. Note that an opening (not shown) is formed on the rear side of the face portion 3062 and is attached to the face moving portion 3100 from the front.

  The face slide mechanism unit 3070 moves the face moving unit 3100 up and down diagonally. As shown in FIGS. 122 and 123, the face slide mechanism unit 3070 is disposed on the rear side of the unit base 3071, the shaft base sheet metal 3072 disposed on the rear side of the unit base 3071, and the shaft base sheet metal 3072. The sheet metal presser 3073 is provided as a base member. The shaft base sheet metal 3072 is sandwiched and supported by the unit base 3071 and the sheet metal retainer 3073, and the shaft lower support piece 3072a extending forward from the lower end, the shaft upper support piece 3072b extending forward from the upper end, A motor support piece 3072c extending greatly forward from the right end of the upper end is attached so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the unit base 3071.

  Further, the face slide mechanism unit 3070 includes a slide moving unit 3075 disposed on the front side of the unit base 3071. As shown in FIG. 124, the slide moving unit 3075 includes a slide base 3076 supported so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and a relay substrate 3077 mounted on the rear surface of the slide base 3076 (see FIG. 123 (not shown in FIG. 124)). ) And a pressing member 3078 for supporting the relay substrate 3077 from the rear side. The slide base 3076 has a substantially rectangular shape in front view and has a base 3076b having an opening 3076a at the center, a box-shaped left support 3076c formed at the left end of the base 3076b, and a box formed at the right end of the base 3076b. And a right support portion 3076d. The slide moving unit 3075 is connected to the face moving unit 3100 (see FIG. 122) via a screwing member 3092 and a bearing retainer 3097 described later, and the slide moving unit 3075 is moved up and down together with the face moving unit 3100. It has become. Note that the entire unit that can be moved up and down including the face type unit 3061 (see FIG. 116), the face moving unit 3100, and the slide moving unit 3075 will be described as a movable unit 3079.

  By the way, since the movable unit 3079 is comparatively large and includes many mechanisms, the weight is significantly increased, and it is difficult to move the movable unit 3079 up and down with a small drive motor. When a large drive motor is used, the movable unit 3079 can be moved up and down, but this increases the size of the drive motor and makes it difficult to place it in a limited space. . Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 125, a constant load spring 3081 is disposed on the rear side of the slide moving unit 3075, and the constant load spring 3081 assembled to the unit base 3071 (see FIG. 123) is interposed. The movable unit 3079 is supported in a suspended state. The constant load spring 3081 is called a Conston (trade name) spring, and includes a small spring drum 3082 and a long leaf spring portion 3083 wound tightly around the spring drum 3082 with a certain curvature. Is attached to the unit base 3071, and the distal end portion of the leaf spring 3083 is connected to the rear surface of the slide base 3076. In this constant load spring 3081, the return force (load) generated when the leaf spring portion 3083 is stretched in a straight line is substantially constant regardless of the stroke. And is supported in a balanced state. For this reason, the weight of the movable unit 3079 is theoretically zero, and can be moved up and down by the drive motor 3088 having a small output. Further, the constant load spring 3081 is connected to a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the movable unit 3079, and the movable unit 3079 is suspended in a state where the left-right balance is taken. The original position of the movable unit 3079 is detected by a photosensor 3098 attached to the unit base 3071.

  As shown in FIGS. 124 and 125, the drive unit 3085 for raising and lowering the movable unit 3079 includes a drive motor 3088 attached to a motor support piece 3072c of a shaft base sheet metal 3072 (see FIG. 123), and a drive motor 3088. A motor gear 3089 connected to the rotation shaft, a shaft gear 3090 meshed with the motor gear 3089, a rotary shaft 3091 coupled to the shaft gear 3090 and having a helical feed screw 3091a formed on the peripheral surface, and a feed screw 3091a And a screwing member 3092 fixed to the right support portion 3076d of the slide base 3076. The rotating shaft 3091 is rotatably supported by the shaft lower support piece 3072a and the motor support piece 3072c of the shaft base sheet metal 3072. The right support portion 3076d is formed with a groove portion (not shown) that is U-shaped in plan view, penetrating in the vertical direction. A rotary shaft 3091 is inserted into the groove portion from the front, and the front surface is a threaded member. It is closed by 3092. The threaded member 3092 has a protrusion (not shown) that is threadedly engaged with the feed screw 3091a of the rotary shaft 3091 formed on the inner surface, and is fixed to the front surface of the right support portion 3076d. The generated propulsive force is transmitted to the slide base 3076. As described above, the movable unit 3079 is moved up and down using the rotary shaft 3091 on which the feed screw 3091a is formed, so that the load on the drive motor 3088 is further reduced. The drive motor 3088 is housed and enclosed by a motor cover 3086 and a cover lid 3087 as shown in FIG.

  Further, since the screwing member 3092 is connected to the right end portion of the slide base 3076, it can be arranged without interfering with the leaf spring portion 3083 of the constant load spring 3081. Further, by arranging the drive unit 3085 close to one end of the slide base 3076, a relatively wide space can be provided on the rear side of the slide base 3076. For example, other members are arranged close to the slide base 3076. It is also possible.

  By the way, in the case where the leaf spring portion 3083 of the constant load spring 3081 is connected to the approximate center of the slide base 3076 in the left-right direction and the screwing member 3092 is connected to one end side of the slide base 3076 as described above, the connection of the spring drum 3082 is performed. Since the distance from the point to the connection point of the screwing member 3092 becomes long, when the movable unit 3079 is moved up and down, a moment for rotating the movable unit 3079 around the connection point of the constant load spring 3081 becomes large.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left end portion of the slide base 3076 is slidably supported, and even when power is applied to the right end portion of the slide base 3076 when the movable unit 3079 is raised and lowered, The state can be maintained, and as a result, the movable unit 3079 can be raised and lowered smoothly. Specifically, the left support portion 3076c of the slide base 3076 is formed with a groove portion that is U-shaped when viewed from above in the vertical direction, and houses a slide collar (not shown) in the groove portion. A slide shaft 3095 whose axial direction is the vertical direction is fitted into the slide collar. The slide shaft 3095 is supported by the shaft lower support piece 3072a and the shaft upper support piece 3072b of the shaft base metal plate 3072.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 126 and 127, the face moving unit 3100 includes a front mouth mechanism unit 3110 and a rear face base 3140. As shown in FIGS. 127 and 130, the face base portion 3140 includes a rear support member 3141 that supports the rear side of the face portion 3062 in the face mold unit 3061 (see FIG. 126) from the inside. The rear support member 3141 is made of a resin member, has a substantially semicircular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of uneven portions on the front surface. In addition, the rear support member 3141 is plated on the entire surface, and even if the face portion 3062 made of soft polyvinyl chloride comes into contact, it is possible to prevent the resin from being eroded by the plasticizer. Two light emitting substrates 3143 are disposed on the front surface of the rear support member 3141, particularly in the substantially right half region, via the rear insulating member 3142, and from the rear side of the face portion 3062 to the inner surface of the face portion 3062. By irradiating light, the face portion 3062 can be decorated with light emission. The rear insulating member 3142 is a non-conductive resin member, and the light emitting substrate 3143 and the plating can be insulated by attaching the light emitting substrate 3143 via the rear insulating member 3142. It is possible to prevent damages and malfunctions.

  As shown in FIGS. 127 to 129, the mouth mechanism unit 3110 includes a resin-made front support member 3111 that supports the front side of the face portion 3062 from the inside. A light reflecting surface 3111a is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the front support member 3111 so that light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3143 (see FIG. 130) of the face base portion 3140 is reflected. This will be described in detail. In the case where the front support member 3111 is provided in front of the light emitting substrate 3143, light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3143 may be blocked by the front support member 3111, and it may be difficult to irradiate the front side of the face portion 3062. In addition, this may cause unevenness in the brightness of the surface of the face portion 3062, or the outline of the front support member 3111 may be projected like a shadow picture.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the front support member 3111 is formed smaller than the rear support member 3141, and the light reflecting surface 3111a is formed at least on the outer peripheral edge of the front support member 3111. As a result, light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3143 is irradiated onto the light reflecting surface 3111a, and the outer peripheral edge of the front support member 3111 can be illuminated. In particular, since the light reflecting surface 3111a is formed by plating, the light reflecting surface 3111a is finished to have a smooth surface so that unevenness does not appear on the surface of the face portion 3062. Further, by plating the outer peripheral edge of the front support member 3111, it is possible to prevent the resin from being eroded by the plasticizer even if it directly contacts the inner surface of the face 3062.

  In addition, a light emitting substrate 3113 is mounted on the front surface of the front support member 3111 via a front insulating member 3112. According to this, light is emitted to the front surface portion of the face portion 3062 by the light emitting substrate 3113, and the entire face portion 3062 can be illuminated. In particular, as shown in FIG. 131, the front support member 3111 is arranged to be inclined in the front-rear direction so that the right end side is wider than the left end side with respect to the rear support member 3141. The light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3143 arranged on the front surface of the side support member 3141 is easily emitted from the right side, and the ratio of irradiating the right side surface of the face portion 3062 increases. On the other hand, since the front support member 3111 is disposed to be inclined in the front-rear direction, the ratio of the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3113 attached to the front surface of the front support member 3111 irradiates the left surface of the face portion 3062 increases. Therefore, the entire face portion 3062 can be efficiently and uniformly illuminated by the two light emitting substrates 3143 and 3113. In addition, since the light emitting substrate 3143 is not provided in the left region where the interval is narrowed in the front surface of the rear support member 3141, useless light emission in a portion where the irradiation efficiency to the face portion 3062 is low is suppressed. It is possible to suppress energy consumption. In addition, a deformation operation mechanism (described later) for deforming the mouth portion of the face portion 3062 is disposed in front of the left region, but since the light emitting substrate 3143 is not disposed behind the deformation operation mechanism, deformation is performed. The outline of the operating mechanism is not projected. The front insulating member 3112 is a non-conductive resin member similar to the rear insulating member 3142, and the light emitting substrate 3113 and the plating are insulated by attaching the light emitting substrate 3113 via the front insulating member 3112. Thus, the light emitting substrate 3113 can be prevented from being damaged or malfunctioning. Further, on the front side of the light emitting substrate 3113, an eye-shaped reflector 3114 for guiding a part of light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3113 (for example, light of different colors) to a portion corresponding to the eyes of the face portion 3062 is arranged. It is installed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 129, a gate-shaped mouth mechanism base metal plate 3116 is attached to the rear surface of the front insulating member 3112 via a substrate mounting metal plate 3115, and a deformation operation mechanism is provided on the mouth mechanism base metal plate 3116. The upper jaw metal plate 3119 and the first link metal plate 3117 connected to the lower jaw metal plate 3121 are respectively supported to be rotatable. The upper jaw metal plate 3119 and the lower jaw metal plate 3121 are disposed in the mouth portion of the face portion 3062, and can be opened and closed by rotating in opposite directions to each other. The lower jaw metal plate 3121 is pivotally supported by the tip portion of the first link metal plate 3117 via the link shaft 3122, and the extending portion 3121 extending rearward from the left side is supported by the mouth mechanism base metal plate 3116. The first link sheet metal 3117 is an L-shaped member in a side view, and is pivotally supported by the first hole 3116a below the mouth mechanism base sheet metal 3116 via the spacer 3123 and provided at the upper end portion. Both ends of the link shaft 3129 a are inserted into arc-shaped guide grooves 3116 c formed on the upper side surface of the mouth mechanism base metal plate 3116. On the other hand, the upper jaw sheet metal 3119 is pivotally supported by the second hole 3116b at the lower end of the mouth mechanism base sheet metal 3116 via the link shaft 3119a, and the link shaft 3120 provided at the rear end portion is provided with the second link sheet metal 3118. It is connected with the tip part. The rear end portion of the second link metal plate 3118 is pivotally supported by a link shaft 3129 a provided at the upper end of the first link metal plate 3117. A link 3129b is slidably inserted in the link shaft 3129a so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and a link pin 3130 whose axial direction is the vertical direction is inserted into the link 3129b from above. The link pin 3130 is coupled to a position eccentric with respect to the motor link 3128 connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 3127.

  According to this, when the drive motor 3127 operates and the motor link 3128 rotates, the link pin 3130 and the link 3129b turn around the rotation axis of the drive motor 3127. Since the link 3129b is supported so as to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the link shaft 3129a, the link shaft 3129a is displaced with respect to a component in the front-rear direction of the link 3129b, and the second link metal plate 3118 and the first link metal plate. 3117 can be moved. Then, the lower jaw sheet metal 3121 is displaced with the movement of the first link sheet metal 3117, the upper jaw sheet metal 3119 is displaced with the movement of the second link sheet metal 3118, and the lower jaw sheet metal 3121 and the upper jaw sheet metal 3119 are moved in directions opposite to each other. It becomes. Thus, each time the drive motor 3127 is rotated, the lower jaw metal plate 3121 and the upper jaw metal plate 3119 reciprocate once, and the mouth portion of the face portion 3062 can be moved as if the character is speaking. The original positions of the lower jaw sheet metal 3121 and the upper jaw sheet metal 3119 are detected by the photosensor 3131. In addition, a light emitting substrate 3124 is mounted on the upper jaw metal plate 3119 via a substrate base 3125 so that the mouth portion (in the mouth) of the face portion 3062 can be illuminated.

  Next, the signboard-type accessory unit 3150 will be described in detail. The signboard-type accessory unit 3150 is a movable accessory placed on the upper left front side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and moves from the standby position (original position) shown in FIG. 97 to the effect position (movable limit position) shown in FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 132, the liquid crystal display device 1400 is inclined from the upper left to the lower right. As shown in FIGS. 133 and 134, the sign-type accessory unit 3150 includes a signboard movable part 3151 having a signboard shape, a signboard case 3161 and a case lid 3162 that rotatably support the signboard movable part 3151, A drive unit 3165 that rotates the sign body 3152 within a predetermined range (range from the original position to the movable limit position), and two photos that detect the rotation position (original position and movable limit position) of the signboard movable unit 3151 A sensor 3173 and a brick-shaped decorative portion 3174 that covers the right side surfaces of the signboard case 3161 and the case lid 3162 are configured.

  As shown in FIGS. 134 and 135, the signboard movable portion 3151 includes a box-shaped signboard body 3152 having a window portion 3052a in the shape of a predetermined character (TOM / JERRY) on the front surface, and the window portion 3052a from the rear side. A logo lens 3153 fitted therein, and a light emitting substrate 3154 for irradiating the sign main body 3152 with light from the rear side of the logo lens 3153 to decorate the light are provided. In addition, a cheese-shaped decorative body 3156 shaped like cheese is attached to the lower right portion of the front surface of the sign body 3152, and a photo shielding plate 3160 having a detection piece 3160a for the photosensor 3173 is provided on the left side of the front face of the sign body 3152. It is installed. Further, between the light emitting substrate 3154 and the logo lens 3153, reflectors 3155 and 3157 for guiding light emitted from a part of the light emitting substrate 3154 (for example, light of a color different from the others) to a predetermined part of the logo lens 3153. Is arranged. Note that the cheese-shaped decorative body 3156 attached to the front surface of the signboard body 3152 is attached to the light emitting substrate 3154 via screws (not shown), whereby the logo lens 3153 and the reflectors 3155 and 3157 are connected to the signboard body 3152. It is supported in a state of being sandwiched between the light emitting substrate 3154. A substrate cover 3158 is disposed on the rear side of the light emitting substrate 3154.

  The signboard case 3161 has a space in the front side that can accommodate the drive unit 3165 (other than the drive motor 3166) and the photosensor 3173, and a bearing unit 3161a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed on the lower right side. A shaft 3159 connected to the left side of the signboard body 3152 is inserted into the bearing portion 3161a, and the signboard movable portion 3151 is supported so as to be rotatable around the bearing portion 3161a. The case lid 3162 is attached to the front side of the signboard case 3161 and shields the drive unit 3165, the photo sensor 3173, and the like housed in the signboard case 3161.

  The drive unit 3165 includes a drive motor 3166 disposed on the rear surface of the signboard case 3161, a motor gear (not shown) disposed on the front side of the signboard case 3161 and connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 3166, and the signboard case 3161. A first gear 3169 disposed between the rear surface and the cover body 3168 and having a large gear 3169a meshed with the motor gear on the outer periphery, and a small gear (not shown) formed on the inner side of the first gear 3169. A second gear 3170 and a fan-shaped third gear 3171 having a shaft 3159 fitted and inserted through a bush 3172 at the center while being meshed with the second gear 3170 are provided. According to this, when the drive motor 3166 is operated, rotational movement is transmitted to the shaft 3159 via the motor gear, the first gear 3169, the second gear 3170, and the third gear 3171, and the signboard movable portion 3151 is moved to the shaft 3159. It is designed to rotate around. The motor gear is covered from the front side by a gear cover 3167. The brick-shaped decorative portion 3174 is attached to a screw hole forming cylinder portion 3161b protruding in the front-rear direction from the right end portion of the signboard case 3161 with a screw (not shown).

  Next, the second character accessory unit 3180 will be described in detail. The second character combination unit 3180 is a movable combination arranged on the front left side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and from the standby position (original position) shown in FIGS. 97 and 98 to the effect position (movable limit position) shown in FIG. ), It appears in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 137, the second character accessory unit 3180 includes a character unit 3190 and a door unit 3220. As shown in FIGS. 138 to 140, the character unit 3190 is housed inside the case member 3191 with the front surface and the right side surface opened, and protruded from the right side of the case member 3191. A movable character body 3192 capable of moving and a drive device 3199 that moves the movable character body 3192 are provided.

  The movable character body 3192 is decorated with a decorative body 3193 that is modeled after a second character (hereinafter referred to as “murine character”) that makes a mouse image, and the decorative body 3193 is irradiated with light from the rear side to decorate the light. The light emitting board 3194 includes a sliding member 3195 that is assembled to the decorative body 3193 and the light emitting board 3194 and supported to be slidable in the left-right direction. The sliding member 3195 is a member having a substantially U-shaped cross section, and is formed to be elongated in the left-right direction. In addition, the movable character body 3192 includes a left hand portion 3196 simulating the left hand of the mouse character, and can be moved separately from the decorative body 3193 composed of the face and upper body of the mouse character.

  As shown in FIGS. 139 and 141, the driving device 3199 is housed inside the case member 3191 and the driving motor 3204 disposed on the rear surface of the case member 3191, and the driving force of the driving motor 3204 is transferred to the movable character. And a drive mechanism 3199a that transmits to the body 3192. The drive mechanism 3199a is supported by a rear support plate 3209 and a second rack 3207, which will be described later, so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and includes a movable base unit 3200 (a base plate 3201 and a cover member 3202) that supports the movable character body 3192. ), The first gear 3203 connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 3204, and the front surface of the movable base unit 3200, and meshed with the first gear 3203, and the rotational movement of the first gear 3203 is controlled by the movable base unit. The first rack 3205 that converts the linear motion 3200 in the left-right direction, the second gear 3206 that is disposed on the movable base unit 3200 (base plate 3201) and is rotatably supported, and the case member 3191 are fixed. The movable base unit 320 is engaged with the second gear 3206. Is attached to the movable character body 3192 and is engaged with the second gear 3206, and the rotational movement of the second gear 3206 is converted into the movable character body 3192. The third rack 3208 is configured to move the movable character body 3192 on the movable base unit 3200 in the same direction as the moving direction of the movable base unit 3200 by converting it into a linear motion in the horizontal direction. ing.

  According to this drive mechanism 3199a, when the drive motor 3204 operates and the first gear 3203 rotates, power is transmitted to the movable base unit 3200 via the first rack 3205 meshed with the first gear 3203. That is, the rotational movement of the first gear 3203 is converted into a linear movement by the first rack 3205, and the movable base unit 3200 moves to the right. Here, a movable character body 3192 is provided on the movable base unit 3200, and the movable character body 3192 also moves in a predetermined direction together with the movable base unit 3200.

  On the other hand, the movable base unit 3200 is provided with a second gear 3206 that is rotatably supported. Since the second gear 3206 is meshed with a second rack 3207 that is fixed to the case member 3191, the movable base unit 3200 is movable. When the unit 3200 moves, the linear motion of the movable base unit 3200 is converted into the rotational motion of the second gear 3206.

  The movable character body 3192 includes a third rack 3208 that is slidably supported with respect to the movable base unit 3200 and meshes with the second gear 3206. The movable character body 3192 moves in the same direction as the traveling direction (that is, the right direction) on the movable base unit 3200. As a result, the relative movement distance of the movable character body 3192 is obtained by adding the movement distance of the movable character body 3192 itself to the movement distance of the movable base unit 3200. Therefore, even when the arrangement space of the driving device 3199 is relatively narrow, the movable character body 3192 can be moved greatly, and as a result, the impact of the movable character body 3192 in the production can be increased. Moreover, since the driving force for moving the movable character body 3192 is generated by the second rack 3207 and the second gear 3206, a relatively simple and inexpensive configuration can be achieved.

  Further, the second rack 3207 and the third rack 3208 are arranged to face each other, and the second gear 3206 made of a spur gear is interposed between them, so that the entire mechanism is extremely simple. It is possible to reduce the overall size. Since the number of the second gears 3206 is one, the traveling direction of the movable base unit 3200 with respect to the second rack 3207 and the traveling direction of the third rack 3208 (that is, the traveling direction of the movable character body 3192) are matched. It is possible.

  In addition, the decorative body 3193 provided in the movable character body 3192 is a three-dimensional object modeled after the “mouse character” that is the second character. The visual effect can be enhanced.

  Further, since the sliding member 3195 supported so as to be slidable with respect to the movable base unit 3200 is formed long along the left-right direction, the area of the sliding surface with respect to the movable base unit 3200 should be made relatively large. It is possible to slide in a stable state. In particular, since the third rack 3208 is attached to the sliding member 3195, power can be transmitted to the vicinity of the sliding portion, and the torsion of the movable character body 3192 with the sliding portion as a fulcrum can be suppressed. It is possible. Further, in the case where the sliding member 3195 is formed to be elongated along the left-right direction as described above, a space is formed between the movable base unit 3200 and the light emitting substrate 3194, and this space is used. By disposing the second gear 3206, the second gear 3206 can be engaged with the second rack 3207, and even when the second gear 3206 is relatively large, it is possible to easily secure an arrangement space. ing.

  The movable base unit 3200 includes a plate-like base plate 3201 and a cover member 3202 attached to the plate-like base plate 3201, and the base plate 3201, the second gear 3206, and the third rack 3208 are configured by the cover member 3202. Shielded. The first gear 3203 is shielded by a gear cover 3211 attached to the case member 3191. For this reason, as a background of the movable character body 3192, it is possible to prevent the transmission mechanisms such as the second gear 3206 and the third rack 3208 from being exposed, and to suppress a decrease in appearance.

  The cover member 3202 is formed with a guide portion 3202a that guides the movement of the third rack 3208 and the sliding member 3195 in the left-right direction. For this reason, it is not necessary to separately provide a mechanism for guiding the sliding member 3195 and the like, and the overall configuration can be further simplified.

  The base plate 3201 is provided with a long hole 3201a formed along the left-right direction. On the back surface of the third rack 3208, a protrusion 3208a (see FIG. 140) that fits into the long hole 3201a of the base plate 3201. Reference) is formed. For this reason, the moving directions of the third rack 3208 and the sliding member 3195 are restricted, and the third rack 3208 and the sliding member 3195 are guided more smoothly in the left-right direction. Further, the movable range of the movable character body 3192 is limited by the length of the long hole 3201a, and the end position in the traveling direction can be accurately determined.

  By the way, the left hand portion 3196 provided as a part of the movable character body 3192 proceeds using the power in the traveling direction of the movable character body 3192 (that is, the right direction) when the movable character body 3192 moves to a predetermined position. It is displaced in a direction different from the direction. 141 and 142, the left hand portion 3196 is formed long in the left-right direction, the left end portion is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the sliding member 3195, and further upward from the left end portion. An extended arm portion 3196a is provided. In addition, a spring 3197 that urges the left hand portion 3196 to the first position side (clockwise side) is attached to the left hand portion 3196. On the other hand, the base plate 3201 is formed with a contact portion 3201b extending rightward from the right end portion and further curved forward, and when the movable character body 3192 (sliding member 3195) moves to a predetermined position ( 142 (a)), the arm portion 3196a abuts on the abutment portion 3201b, and the left hand portion 3196 can be moved to the second position side (counterclockwise) by using the movement of the movable character body 3192. (See FIG. 142 (b)). When the movable character body 3192 (sliding member 3195) moves to the left from the state shown in FIG. 142B, the left hand portion 3196 is displaced from the second position to the first position by the biasing force of the spring 3197. ing. The contact portion 3201b that contacts the arm portion 3196a is provided at the tip portion of the base plate 3201, so that even after the movable character body 3192 is moved relatively large with respect to the movable base unit 3200. The arm portion 3196a can be brought into contact with the contact portion 3201b.

  As described above, when the movable character body 3192 moves to a predetermined position, the left hand portion 3196 is displaced in a direction different from the traveling direction of the movable character body 3192, so that the movement of the entire movable character body 3192 is complicated. It is possible to enhance the production effect. In particular, since the left hand portion 3196 is displaced using the power when the movable character body 3192 moves in the traveling direction, the left hand portion 3196 can be moved without providing a dedicated drive source.

  In particular, the predetermined position at which the left hand portion 3196 starts to be displaced is in front of the movable end position of the movable character body 3192, and the left hand portion is subjected to a mechanical action that the movable character body 3192 moves from the predetermined position to the movable end position. In order to move 3196 from the first position (see FIG. 142 (a)) to the second position (see FIG. 142 (b)), the left hand portion 3196 is displaced immediately before the movable character body 3192 stops at the movable end position. As a result, the action of the movable character body 3192 can be noticed until the end (until it stops).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 138, since the left hand portion 3196 is arranged at the front end in the moving direction of the movable character body 3192, the front end portion of the movable character body 3192 can be noted, and the moving distance of the movable character body 3192 Can be felt for a longer time. In particular, since the left hand portion 3196 at the tip moves, an image that the movable character body 3192 extends in the traveling direction can be aroused, and the movable character body 3192 can be shown larger.

  Since the left hand portion 3196 is supported so as to be rotatable about the front-rear direction as an axial direction, the linear motion of the movable character body 3192 is converted into the rotational motion of the left hand portion 3196 so that the left hand portion 3196 is moved along an arc. Can be moved. Accordingly, the left hand portion 3196 can be moved in a direction different from the traveling direction of the movable character body 3192 with a very simple configuration.

  Further, since the left hand portion 3196 is smaller than the decorative body 3193 and the moving distance thereof is shorter than the moving distance of the decorative body 3193, the left hand portion 3196 may be made less conspicuous than the decorative body 3193. As a result, the movement of the left hand portion 3196 can be stared.

  Furthermore, since the left hand portion 3196 is a modeled object related to the decorative body 3193, the movement of the left hand portion 3196 can be shown in association with the movement of the decorative body 3193, even if the movement of the left hand portion 3196 is extremely small. Even if it exists, the production effect can be enhanced by the movement. In particular, after the decorative body 3193 imitating the face and upper body of the “murine character” appears, the left hand portion 3196 imitating the hand can be moved to make it appear as if the “murine character” is waving. It is possible to give a dynamic feeling to the movement of the “mouse character”.

  Further, since the movable base unit 3200 is arranged so that the decorative body 3193 is positioned in front of the movable base unit 3200, the decorative body 3193 is directly opposed to the player, and the movable base unit 3200 is placed on the decorative body 3193. It can be visually recognized as a background. For this reason, the entire space in which the decorative body 3193 is accommodated moves, and an image in which the decorative body 3193 jumps out of the space can be recalled, and the dynamic feeling of the decorative body 3193 can be enhanced.

  In addition, the movable character body 3192 moves between a standby position (original position) shielded by the game panel 600 and an effect position (movable limit position) that can be viewed through the opening window 2300a of the center accessory 2300. It has become. For this reason, the visual recognition state of the movable character body 3192 can be changed (visible and hidden), and a great impact can be given to the player. In particular, by moving the movable character body 3192 largely, it is possible to make the entire appearance of the decorative body 3193 visible at the production position (movable limit position) (see FIG. 136).

  Further, in the present embodiment, by controlling the movement stop position of the movable character body 3192, a special lottery result ((a) is distinguished from an expected large position where the left hand portion 3196 moves and an expected small position where the left hand portion 3196 does not move. The expectation of the big hit state) is suggested. That is, when the possibility of a big hit is high, the movable character body 3192 is moved to the position (expected big position) where the left hand portion 3196 moves (see FIG. 142 (b)), while the possibility of a big hit is reached. When is low, the movement of the movable character body 3192 is stopped at the expected small position before reaching the expected large position (see FIG. 142 (a)). For this reason, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation for the special lottery result by visually recognizing whether or not the left hand portion 3196 moves, and it is possible to further increase the attention to the left hand portion 3196.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, the door unit 3220 can open and close the right opening of the case member 3191 in the character unit 3190 (see FIG. 138), and is perpendicular to the game panel 600. The door wall 3221 provided with the entrance 3221a of the movable character body 3192, the door 3222 disposed on the right side of the door wall 3221 and closing the entrance 3221a, and on the left side of the door wall 3221. A light emitting substrate 3224 is disposed so as to surround the entrance / exit 3221a and irradiates light to the door wall portion 3221 through the door back lens 3223. The door body 3222 has a rear end portion as a rotation shaft (not shown) and is supported so as to be openable toward the inside of the center accessory 2300. The door wall 3221 on the upper side of the door body 3222 has a light bulb type decorative body. 3227 is attached by a bulb holder 3228.

  A motor case 3230 having an open upper surface is provided so as to extend to the left from the lower end of the door wall portion 3221, and a drive motor 3232 accommodated in a motor cover 3231 is arranged on the lower surface of the motor case 3230. Inside the motor case 3230 is a mechanism for opening and closing the door body 3222 by the power of the drive motor 3232, that is, the door cam 3233 connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 3232, and the rotation of the door cam 3233 is the door body. A first link 3234, a second link 3235, and a third link 3236 that transmit to the vicinity of the rotating shaft 3222 are provided. The motor case 3230 is provided with a photosensor 3237 that detects the original position of the door body 3222 by detecting the detection piece 3233a formed on the door cam 3233.

  As described above, since the entrance / exit 3221a of the movable character body 3192 is closed by the door body 3222, the movable character body 3192 disposed at the standby position (original position) is invisible or difficult to see from the entrance / exit 3221a side. It becomes. Therefore, when the movable character body 3192 jumps out toward the effect position (movable limit position), it is possible to give a greater impact to the player by an unexpected operation. In particular, since the door body 3222 is opened toward the inside of the center accessory 2300 with the rotation axis (not shown) on the rear end side as the center, the door 3222 is seen from the player side as the movable character body 3192. The moving direction (protruding direction) and the opening direction of the door body 3222 can be matched, and the movement of the movable character body 3192 can be shown as if the movable character body 3192 pushes the door body 3222 open. It has become. In addition, when the movable character body 3192 moves to the effect position (movable limit position), the inner surface of the door body 3222 becomes visible as the background of the movable character body 3192, so that a sense of reality is enhanced by the three-dimensional decoration.

  Further, when the movable character body 3192 is moved from the standby position (original position) to the effect position (movable limit position), first, the door body 3222 is opened by the operation of the drive motor 3232. For this reason, the movable character body 3192 can be prevented from colliding with the door body 3222, and the movable character body 3192 can be prevented from being damaged. Further, by opening the door body 3222, the expectation for the appearance of the movable character body 3192 is enhanced, and the movement of the movable character body 3192 can be noticed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 145, a transparent warp passage forming member 2318 that forms a warp passage 2318a is disposed in front of the movable character body 3192 (particularly the decorative body 3193) at the standby position (original position). Further, a telephone box type decoration 2317 having a viewing window 2317a is disposed on the front side of the warp passage forming member 2318. That is, it is possible to show the decorative body 3193 at the standby position (original position) through the viewing window 2317a. For this reason, the decorative body 3193 hidden behind the game panel 600 or the center unit 2310 is shown as the background of the warp passage 2318a, thereby increasing the willingness to look inside through the viewing window 2317a and playing balls. It is possible to alleviate dissatisfaction even when is not visible. Further, by showing the decorative body 3193 hidden at the standby position (original position), it is possible to make the user aware of the existence of the movable character body 3192 and to be interested in the movement of the movable character body 3192. .

  In particular, since the decorative body 3193 of the movable character body 3192 is modeled after a “murine character”, the interest in the movable character body 3192 is increased, and the internal space seen through the viewing window 2317a (the hole in the wall) ) Can be evoked as if a "murine character" is living, and the willingness to look into can be further increased. In addition, since the viewing window 2317a has a size that allows only a part of the decorative body 3193 to be visually recognized, a viewing position (movable limit position) at which the entire appearance of the decorative body 3193 can be visually recognized and a standby position that is hidden and cannot be seen ( Can be differentiated from the original position), and it is possible to suppress a decrease in impact at the production position (movable limit position).

  In addition, since the decorative body 3193 at the standby position (original position) is illuminated by the light emitting board 3194, the appearance of the decorative body 3193 can be clearly seen even if the space where the movable character body 3192 is arranged is dark. The production effect can be enhanced. Note that the light emission state of the light emitting substrate 3194 is controlled by the light emission state control means, and can be switched between a state where the decorative body 3193 can be clearly seen and a state where the decorative body 3193 cannot be seen (or a state where it is difficult to see). Yes. For this reason, it is possible to give sharpness to the result of peeping, and it is possible to arouse a sense of happiness for having visually recognized the decorative body 3193.

  By the way, the space on the rear side of the game panel 600 has a limited size, and the movable character body 3192 must be formed so as to be conspicuous to some extent. Therefore, the size of the driving device 3199 (see FIG. 139) It will be limited. In particular, since the drive motor 3204 is provided so as to protrude rearward from the drive mechanism 3199a and the case member 3191, the overall size of the drive device 3199 tends to be relatively large and can be disposed in a limited space. It becomes difficult. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, an opening 3364 having a size capable of inserting the drive motor 3204 is formed in the motor drive board 3363 disposed on the rear side of the drive device 3199. Has been. For this reason, the drive device 3199 and the motor drive board 3363 can be placed close to each other by inserting the drive motor 3204 into the opening 3364. That is, since the arrangement space for the drive motor 3204 is secured, the entire drive device 3199 can be easily arranged in a limited space even when the space in front of the motor drive board 3363 is relatively narrow. It becomes.

  In particular, the opening 3364 formed in the motor drive board 3363 has a shape into which the drive motor 3204 is inserted, that is, a shape that substantially matches the outer shape of the drive motor 3204, and the drive motor 3204 is fitted into the motor drive board 3363. It is in the state. Therefore, when the drive device 3199 is assembled after the motor drive substrate 3363 is assembled, the opening 3364 of the motor drive substrate 3363 functions as a positioning and guide when the drive device 3199 is assembled, and is driven with respect to the motor drive substrate 3363. The device 3199 can be assembled at the correct position. Conversely, when the motor drive board 3363 is assembled after the drive apparatus 3199 is assembled, the drive motor 3204 functions as a positioning and guide when the motor drive board 3363 is assembled, and the motor drive board 3363 with respect to the drive apparatus 3199. Can be assembled at the correct position.

  The motor drive board 3363 arranged on the rear side of the drive device 3199 is arranged with the mounting surface 3363c of the electronic component 3363a facing the rear side. In other words, the front surface of the mounting surface 3363c is a flat surface on which the electronic component 3363a is not mounted. For this reason, the motor drive board 3363 and the drive mechanism 3199a can be brought closer to each other, and the arrangement space in the drive device 3199 can be secured more easily.

  The motor drive board 3363 is covered with a resin motor drive board case 3368, and the electronic components 3363a arranged on the mounting surface 3363c and the electric circuit on the motor drive board 3363 are protected. In particular, the motor drive board case 3368 is provided with a hole 3371 at a position facing the opening 3364 of the motor drive board 3363, and even when the drive motor 3204 protrudes greatly, the drive motor 3204 is attached to the motor drive board. By passing through the hole 3371 of the case 3368, the drive device 3199 and the motor drive board 3363 can be arranged close to each other without hitting the motor drive board case 3368. Further, since heat of the drive motor 3204 can be released to the outside of the motor drive board case 3368 through the hole 3371, overheating of the drive motor 3204 can be suppressed.

  Further, the motor drive board case 3368 is formed with a cylindrical protruding cylinder part 3372 communicating with the hole 3371 so as to protrude forward from the inner surface of the motor drive board case 3368, and the internal space of the motor drive board case 3368 has a drive motor 3204. It almost matches the external shape. That is, the drive motor 3204 can be inserted straight and smoothly into the projecting cylindrical portion 3372.

  The motor drive board case 3368 includes a thick portion 3369 and a thin portion 3370 so as to correspond to the height of the electronic component 3363a protruding from the mounting surface 3363c. Thick portion 3369 is provided. For this reason, the space | interval of the inner surface of the motor drive board case 3368 and the motor drive board 3363 becomes large, and the length of the protrusion cylinder part 3372 is formed comparatively long. Further, since the drive motor 3204 is accommodated in the protruding cylindrical portion 3372 without protruding outside the motor drive board case 3368, the drive motor 3204 can be protected by the motor drive board case 3368. It is possible to prevent damage to the machine.

  The drive motor 3204 is provided with a harness 3204a for supplying power, and a mounting terminal 3363b to which a connector 3204b at the tip of the harness 3204a is connected is mounted on the mounting surface 3363c of the motor drive board 3363. . The connection terminal 3363b is provided through an opening 3368a formed in the thin portion 3370 of the motor drive board case 3368 so that the connector 3204b is connected from the rear of the motor drive board case 3368. It is configured. Further, since the harness 3204a is wired through the opening 3364 and the protruding cylindrical portion 3372, it can be wired very easily regardless of the size of the motor drive board 3363 or the motor drive board case 3368. In addition, the length of the harness 3204a can be shortened as much as possible. Note that the protruding cylindrical portion 3372 is formed at the boundary portion between the thick portion 3369 and the thin portion 3370 of the motor driving substrate case 3368 where the thickness (projection height from the substrate) is thick. The harness 3204a can be pulled out of the motor drive board case 3368 from the thin portion 3370 while protecting. Therefore, the length of the harness 3204a can be further shortened, the harness 3204a can be prevented from protruding behind the motor drive board case 3368, and the disconnection of the harness 3204a can be suppressed.

  The driving device 3199 is disposed in the back box 3001 (see FIG. 167), while the motor drive board 3363 is mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3001. As shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, the back box 3001 is formed with a through hole 3001 d that matches the opening 3364 of the motor drive board 3363. Therefore, the drive motor 3204 protruding backward from the drive mechanism 3199a can be inserted into the through hole 3001d of the back box 3001 and the opening 3364 of the motor drive board 3363, and the motor drive board 3363 is mounted on the rear surface. It is possible to arrange the back box 3001 and the driving device 3199 close to each other. Therefore, even when the arrangement space in the back box 3001 is relatively small, the drive device 3199 can be easily accommodated in the back box 3001.

  Next, the saddle type accessory unit 3240 will be described in detail. The saddle type accessory unit 3240 is a movable accessory arranged on the front right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and has moved from the standby position (original position) shown in FIG. 97 to the effect position (movable limit position) shown in FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 148, it appears in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400. As shown in FIGS. 151 to 153, the scissors-type accessory unit 3240 moves the “spear” to fall while jumping out in the left horizontal direction, that is, the side surface of the “spear” positioned above the center of gravity of the “spear”. Is provided with a mechanism that simulates the movement of the “壷” that occurs when an external force in the substantially left direction is applied. It can be held.

  149 to 151 will be described in detail. The scissors-type accessory unit 3240 irradiates light from the rear side of the scissors-shaped decorative body 3241 that is modeled after the “spear” and the scissors-shaped decorative body 3241. The light emitting substrate 3242 for performing the light emission decoration, and the driving device 3243 for performing the pseudo operation of the saddle-shaped decoration body 3241 and the light emission substrate 3242 as described above are configured. The drive device 3243 rotates with respect to the motor base 3244, a drive motor 3245 disposed on the rear surface of the motor base 3244, a gear 3246 connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 3245, and the motor base 3244. And an arm member 3247 having a gear portion 3247c meshed with the gear 3246 and supported rotatably about a shaft 3247a.

  The arm member 3247 is formed in a substantially “<” shape, and the connecting portion 3247 d at the upper end is pivotally supported on the upper connection portion 3241 a of the saddle-shaped decorative body 3241 via the first shaft member 3248. Further, the left side of the motor base 3244 extends upward, and a guide portion 3244a made of a long hole formed in a substantially arc shape obliquely upward and to the left is formed in that portion. A second shaft member 3249 that is slidably supported by a roller 3250 and a washer 3251 is inserted into the guide portion 3244a. The second shaft member 3249 is disposed in parallel with the first shaft member 3248, and the tip thereof is pivotally supported by the lower connection portion 3241 b of the bowl-shaped decorative body 3241.

  According to this, when the power of the drive motor 3245 is transmitted to the arm member 3247 via the gear 3246, the arm member 3247 rotates around the rotation shaft 3247 a disposed below the saddle-shaped decorative body 3241. Since the connecting portion 3247d at the upper end of the arm member 3247 is connected to the upper connecting portion 3241a of the saddle-shaped decorative body 3241, the saddle-shaped decorative body 3241 also turns around the rotation shaft 3247a. Since the connecting portion 3247d of the arm member 3247 is connected to the saddle-shaped decorative body 3241 via the first shaft member 3248, the saddle-shaped decorative body 3241 can rotate around the tip of the arm member 3247. It has become.

  On the other hand, a second shaft member 3249 is connected to the lower connection portion 3241b of the saddle-shaped decorative body 3241, and the displacement direction of the second shaft member 3249 is guided by the guide portion 3244a. When the decorative body 3241 pivots about the rotation shaft 3247a, the displacement direction of the second shaft member 3249 that accompanies the pivot is guided by the guide portion 3244a, and the saddle-shaped decorative body 3241 rotates around the upper connection portion 3241a (rotates automatically). ) That is, the saddle-shaped decorative body 3241 moves in a substantially horizontal direction along a large-diameter arc centering on the rotation shaft 3247a provided outside (below) the saddle-shaped decorative body 3241 while moving in a substantially horizontal direction. It rotates around the upper connection portion 3241a.

  That is, by moving the saddle-shaped decorative body 3241 along a large-diameter arc in a substantially horizontal direction, a substantially horizontal movement that is generated when a horizontal external force is applied to the side surface of the “壷” is created, By rotating the scissors-shaped decorative body 3241, a motion is generated by the position where the external force is applied on the upper side of the center of gravity of the scissors (that is, a rotational motion about to turn around the center of gravity). Therefore, by combining the two rotation mechanisms, it is displaced from the standby position (original position) shown in FIG. 151 (FIG. 97) to the intermediate position shown in FIG. 152 and further to the effect position (movable limit position) shown in FIG. By displacing it, it is possible to realize a movement that mimics the actual overturning movement of “壷”. In particular, when the saddle-shaped decorative body 3241 is rotated, the rotation of the saddle-shaped decorative body 3241 is used as power, so that a power source for rotating the saddle-shaped decorative body 3241 is not required, and the overall mechanism is small. And cost reduction.

  By the way, the first shaft member 3248 and the second shaft member 3249 are both supported by the saddle-shaped decorative body 3241, and the distance between them is always constant. For this reason, when the connecting portion 3247d at the tip of the arm member 3247 moves on a large arc, the second shaft member 3249 is also displaced correspondingly, and as a result, the guide portion 3244a for guiding the displacement direction of the second shaft member 3249 is also large. There is a possibility. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the second shaft member 3249 is disposed at the edge of the rotating shaft 3247a side in the lower part of the bowl-shaped decorative body 3241, the second shaft member 3249 is disposed near the rotating shaft 3247a. According to this, the movable range of the second shaft member 3249 is reduced, and as a result, the guide portion 3244a can be configured to be small.

  Further, the upper portion of the arm member 3247 protrudes greatly on the right side, and a support portion 3247b made of a substantially arc-shaped long hole extending in the vertical direction is formed at the end portion thereof. An auxiliary shaft portion 3252 that is slidably supported via a washer 3253 is inserted into the support portion 3247b. The auxiliary shaft portion 3252 is disposed in parallel to the first shaft member 3248 and has a tip connected to the intermediate connection portion 3241 c of the saddle-shaped decorative body 3241. In this way, by providing the auxiliary shaft portion 3252 on the intermediate connection portion 3241c (particularly the edge on the opposite side of the lower connection portion 3241b) of the saddle-shaped decorative body 3241, the saddle-shaped decorative body 3241 is supported at three points. Even when the saddle-shaped decorative body 3241 is moved vigorously, it can be moved in a stable state. Since the support portion 3247b is integrally formed with the arm member 3247, the number of parts is reduced, and the support portion 3247b can be configured more easily.

  The motor base 3244 includes a photo sensor 3254 that detects the original position of the arm member 3247, a harness suspension 3258 that supports the harness H (see FIG. 149) connected to the light emitting substrate 3242, and a drive motor. A relay board 3259 for relaying drive signals to 3245 and the light emitting board 3242 is also attached. In the upper part of the harness suspension 3258, a vertically long hole 3258a is formed penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the harness H can be wired through the hole 3258a. More specifically, the harness H connects the light emitting board 3242 that moves together with the saddle-shaped decorative body 3241 and the relay board 3259 fixed to the motor base 3244, and is rearward from the guide portion 3242 a at the lower end of the light emitting board 3242. The harness H drawn out is routed along the rear surface of the harness suspension 3258 after passing through the hole 3258a of the harness suspension 3258. The hole 3258a is located behind the guide portion 3242a when the saddle-shaped decorative body 3241 reaches the intermediate position (see the two-dot chain line in FIG. 149), and has a predetermined interval between the hole 3258a and the guide portion 3242a. It is provided and arranged. In addition, the length of the harness H spanned between the hole 3258a and the guide portion 3242a is longer than the predetermined interval, and the light emitting substrate can be used without applying tension (mechanical load) to the harness H. 3242 can be rotated between an effect position (movable limit position) and a standby position (original position).

  By the way, the saddle-shaped decorative body 3241 has a standby position (original position) shielded by the center accessory 2300 or the game panel 600, and an effect position (movable limit position) that can be viewed through the opening window 2300a of the center accessory 2300. To move between. For this reason, the saddle-shaped decorative body 3241 can be made visible and hidden, and the impact on the player can be increased. In particular, when the saddle-shaped decorative body 3241 appears, it falls down while jumping out in the horizontal direction, so that it is possible to perform powerful effects.

  Next, the complex accessory unit 3270 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, the composite accessory unit 3270 is disposed on the lower right front side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the television-type accessory 3271 disposed on the lower right front side of the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the movable combination is combined with the earthen-pipe type combination 3272 and moved from the standby position (original position) shown in FIGS. 97 to 99 to the respective production positions (movable limit positions) shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 6, the liquid crystal display device 1400 appears on the front surface of the display area.

  As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the composite accessory unit 3270 includes a motor base 3275 as a base member, a cover member 3276 attached to the front surface of the motor base 3275, and a television set disposed on the right side of the motor base 3275. TV frame type decorative body 3277 having an opening 3277a that is shaped like the frame of the above, and a frame-shaped light emitting substrate 3278 that irradiates light from the rear side to the TV frame type decorative body 3277 and decorates it. Configured. The cross-sectional shape of the television frame-type decorative body 3277 surrounding the opening 3277a when cut along a plane perpendicular to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is inclined to narrow the opening 3277a toward the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is formed so that the wall thickness is gradually increased by being formed into a shape. A plurality of color LEDs 3278 a are mounted on the light emitting substrate 3278.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 156 to 158, as a mechanism for rotating the television frame decorative body 3277, a drive motor 3279 disposed on the rear surface of the motor base 3275 and a drive disposed on the front side of the motor base 3275 are driven. A first gear 3280 connected to the rotating shaft of the motor 3279 and a second gear 3281 meshed with the first gear 3280 are provided, and a left arm portion 3277a extending from the lower left of the TV frame type decorative body 3277 is provided. It is connected to the rotation shaft 3282 of the second gear 3281. The lower end of the right arm portion 3277b extending from the lower right of the TV frame type decorative body 3277 is inserted into an arc-shaped guide groove 3275a formed along the right side surface of the motor base 3275, and is guided by the guide bush 3283. It is supported.

  According to this, when the drive motor 3279 operates and the first gear 3280 rotates, the rotational motion is transmitted to the left arm portion 3277a of the TV frame type decorative body 3277 via the second gear 3281 and the rotating shaft 3282, and the TV frame The mold decorative body 3277 rotates around the rotation shaft 3282. For example, in the case of displacement from the standby position (original position) to the effect position (movable limit position), the inclined state shown in FIG. 155 changes to the suspended state shown in FIG. Note that the lower end of the right arm portion 3277b of the TV frame type decorative body 3277 is guided along the guide groove 3275a, so that it smoothly rotates and the rotation range is limited.

  Further, in a state where the TV frame type decorative body 3277 is made to appear from the outside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 to the front of the display area, that is, the TV frame type decorative body 3277 is moved from the standby position (original position) to the effect position (movable limit). In the state of being operated to the position), the frame-shaped portion that is a portion of the TV frame type decorative body 3277 surrounding the opening 3277a is drawn on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 that is visually recognized through the opening 3277a. The distance dimension from the displayed image to the TV frame type decorative body 3277 has a distance dimension longer than the actual distance dimension d in which the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the TV frame type decorative body 3277 shown in FIG. It can express the feeling of depth. In other words, it is possible to perform a novel effect of expressing a sense of depth due to the appearance of the TV frame-type decorative body 3277 while performing an effect with a powerful video expression in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Therefore, the production by the video expression is less likely to be monotonous and can contribute to the improvement of interest. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest by performing a novel production.

  Further, in a state where the TV frame type decorative body 3277 is appearing from the outside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 to the front of the display area, that is, the TV frame type decorative body 3277 is moved from the standby position (original position) to the effect position (movable limit). In the state of being operated to the position), the frame-shaped portion that is a portion of the TV frame type decorative body 3277 surrounding the opening 3277a is drawn on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 that is visually recognized through the opening 3277a. It is possible to express a drawing mode in which a specific image is enlarged among existing images. In other words, drawing on the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 that is visually recognized through the opening 3277a by the appearance of the television frame-type decorative body 3277 while performing an effect with a powerful video expression in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is also possible to produce a novel effect that expresses a drawing mode in which a specific image is magnified among the images being displayed, so that the effect of the video expression is less likely to be monotonous. This can contribute to improvement. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest by performing a novel production.

  Furthermore, the television frame type decorative body 3277 of the television type accessory 3271 stands by outside the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400, that is, the television frame type decorative body 3277 stands by at the standby position (original position). Since the liquid crystal display device 1400 does not always appear in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400, even if the TV frame type decoration 3277 appears on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the television frame type decoration body. The possibility of causing the player to feel the presence of 3277 is extremely small.

  The television frame decorative body 3277 is formed in a frame shape having an opening 3277a in the shape of the portion appearing in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400. In the state of appearing from the outside of the display area to the front of the display area, that is, in the state where the TV frame type decorative body 3277 is operated from the standby position (original position) to the effect position (movable limit position), the TV frame type The image drawn in the area corresponding to the decorative body 3277 can be visually recognized through the opening 3277a formed in the TV frame type decorative body 3277 without being obstructed by the TV frame type decorative body 3277. . In other words, the effect of the presentation by the appearance of the TV frame type decorative body 3277 can be exhibited without losing the effect of the presentation by the powerful video expression in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Therefore, it is possible to effectively use the effect produced by the image drawn in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the operation of the television frame type decorative body 3277.

  Further, the cross-sectional shape of the television frame type decorative body 3277 surrounding the opening 3277a when cut along a plane perpendicular to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is such that the opening 3277a is directed toward the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Since it is formed so as to gradually increase in thickness by being formed into a narrowing inclined shape, the frame-shaped portion that is a portion of the TV frame type decorative body 3277 surrounding the opening 3277a has a so-called “hood” shape. Thus, unnecessary light can be blocked, and when an image drawn in an area corresponding to the TV frame type decorative body 3277 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is viewed through the opening 3277a, Visibility can be improved.

  Further, when the TV frame type decorative body 3277 appears in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the color LED 3278a mounted on the light emitting substrate 3278 of the TV frame type decorative body 3277 emits light, thereby the TV frame type decorative body. It can be emphasized that 3277 is arranged in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the TV frame-type decorative body 3277 has a so-called “hood” shape even if the color LED 3278a emits light. Thus, it is possible to block the light to the inside of the TV frame type decorative body 3277 by the light emission of the color LED 3278a.

  On the other hand, a clay pipe type accessory 3272 includes a clay pipe main body 3290 that is modeled after a “earth pipe”, a light emitting substrate 3291 that irradiates and decorates the clay pipe main body 3290 with light from the rear side, and a front surface of the clay pipe main body 3290. , And a clay pipe frame 3293 disposed on the lower side of the clay pipe main body 3290. Four guide bushes 3296 arranged on the top, bottom, left and right are provided on the back surface of the clay pipe main body 3290, and are fitted into a pair of vertical grooves 3275b formed at the center of the motor base 3275. In addition, a rack (not shown) that meshes with a gear 3295 described later is formed in the vertical direction at the center of the back surface of the clay pipe frame 3293. As a mechanism for moving the clay pipe frame 3293 and the clay pipe main body 3290 up and down, a drive motor 3294 disposed on the rear surface of the motor base 3275 and a rack formed on the back surface of the clay pipe frame 3293 are connected to the rotating shaft of the drive motor 3294. And a gear 3295 meshed with each other. That is, when the drive motor 3294 operates and the gear 3295 rotates, the rotational motion is converted into linear motion by the rack, and the clay pipe frame 3293 and the clay pipe main body 3290 slide along the vertical groove 3275b (that is, move up and down). Like).

  As shown in FIG. 156, a magnetized plate 3298 is disposed on the rear surface of the clay pipe frame 3293 so as to face the magnet 3297 provided on the upper part of the motor base 3275, and the clay pipe frame 3293 is located at the effect position. When it rises to (movable limit position), the magnetized plate 3298 comes into contact with the magnet 3297, and the clay pipe body 3290 and the clay pipe frame 3293 can be held at the effect position (movable limit position) by magnetic force. As shown in FIG. 158, a relay board 3299 accommodated in the accommodating portion 3275c is provided at the left end portion of the motor base 3275, and signals to the drive motor 3294 and the drive motor 3279 via the relay board 3299 are provided. Has been relayed. Further, the motor base 3275 is provided with a photo sensor 3285 for detecting the original position of the television frame type decorative body 3277 at a predetermined position on the back surface thereof, and detects the original position of the clay pipe frame 3293 at a predetermined position on the front surface thereof. A photosensor 3286 is provided for this purpose.

  Next, the trap type accessory unit 3310 will be described in detail. The trap-type accessory unit 3310 is arranged obliquely below and to the right of the center accessory 2300 (see FIG. 154), and as shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the tail of the “cat character” as the first character. This is a movable combination in which a tail-shaped accessory 3311 corresponding to is combined with a cage-shaped accessory 3312 that imitates a trap for catching a “cat character”. 160 shows a standby state (original position) before the tail-type accessory 3311 and the saddle type accessory 3312 move, and FIG. 161 shows the effect after the tail-type accessory 3311 and the saddle type accessory 3312 move. The position (movable limit position) is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 160 and 162, the trap type accessory unit 3310 includes a base member 3316, a tail body 3313 rotatably supported on the front upper portion of the base member 3316, and a tail tip portion 3314 at the tip thereof. The base member 3316 is configured to include a saddle-shaped decorative body 3325 attached to the lower front surface of the base member 3316. Note that a trap lever 3326 is rotatably supported by the bowl-shaped decorative body 3325. Further, light emitting substrates 3315 and 3327 are disposed on the rear side of the tail body 3313 and on the rear side of the saddle-shaped decorative body 3325, respectively, so that the light emitting decoration can be performed. A light emitting substrate 3317 that irradiates light to the entire rear surface of the base member 3316 is also provided on the rear side of the base member 3316.

  Further, as a mechanism for rotating the tail body 3313 and the tail tip portion 3314, the drive motor 3318 disposed on the rear surface of the base member 3316 and the rotation shaft of the drive motor 3318 are connected to the tail body 3313. A support member 3319 is provided. Note that a light shielding plate 3320 is formed on the support member 3319, and the photo sensor 3321 can detect the original position of the support member 3319. The drive motor 3318 is supported by a motor presser 3322.

  The trap-type accessory unit 3310 includes a motor base 3330 disposed on the rear surface of the base member 3316 and a drive motor attached to the motor base 3330 as a mechanism for rotating the trap lever 3326 of the saddle-type accessory 3312. 3329 and an arm member 3331 connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 3329, and a lever clamp 3332 coupled to the lever shaft 3328 of the trap lever 3326 is disposed so as to interfere with the tip of the arm member 3331. ing. That is, when the drive motor 3329 operates and the arm member 3331 rotates clockwise, the lever clamp 3332 is pushed down, and the trap lever 3326 is changed from the state shown in FIG. 160 (standby state) to the state shown in FIG. 161 (effect state). It is possible to displace it. In the effect state, when the arm member 3331 rotates counterclockwise, the lever clamp 3332 is flipped up by the urging force of the spring 3332a, and the trap lever 3326 is returned to the original state (standby state). Yes. Note that the original position of the arm member 3331 is detected by the photosensor 3333.

  Next, the ball guide passage 3340 and the like disposed in the lower left portion of the back box 3001 will be described. As shown in FIG. 163, the ball guiding passage 3340 is disposed behind the side winning port member 2100 (see FIG. 105), and a predetermined number of game balls that have entered the respective general winning ports 2101 of the side winning port member 2100 are predetermined. And is formed of a transparent member. In addition, a magnetic sensor 3345 for detecting an illegal game using a magnet is provided in the upper right part of the ball guide passage 3340. This magnetic sensor 3345 has a rectangular box shape, and when attached in the state shown in FIG. 163, the left side surface 3345a of the rectangular box shape is opposed to the left side surface 3345a when viewed from the front. It is possible to detect magnetism in the first detection region having high directivity with high sensitivity in the vertical direction, and the right side surface 3345b having a rectangular box shape which is the side surface opposite to the left side surface 3345a has a right side surface. It is possible to detect magnetism in the second detection region having directivity with high sensitivity in the vertical direction with respect to 3345b. On the right side surface 3345b, a wiring opening 3345ba is formed through which wiring for electrically connecting to a connector terminal built in the rectangular box-shaped magnetic sensor 3345 is passed. Here, “highly sensitive in the vertical direction” means that the left side 3345a and the right side 3345b are more sensitive in the vertical direction than the horizontal direction, and have no sensitivity in the horizontal direction. It doesn't mean. In other words, the first inspection region having directivity with high sensitivity in the vertical direction on the left side surface 3345a and the second inspection region having directivity with high sensitivity in the vertical direction on the right side surface 3345b are surrounded by a sphere. It is a wide area.

  In addition, a star light-emitting light guide plate 3341 formed integrally with the ball guide passage 3340 is provided on the front upper portion of the ball guide passage 3340, and a light emitting substrate 3344 is provided on the upper rear surface of the ball guide passage 3340. In addition, light can be emitted to the player side through a plurality of through-hole portions 600a disposed above the side prize port member 2100 in the game panel 600 (see FIG. 97). Specifically, the star light emitting light guide plate 3341 has a plurality of cylindrical light guide protrusions 3342 protruding forward, and each light guide protrusion 3342 is a game panel as shown in FIG. It is inserted into the through-hole portion 600a formed in 600 from the rear side. That is, by guiding the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3344 to the front side of the game panel 600 through the light guide protrusion 3342, it is possible to make it appear as if the front surface of the game panel 600 is shining. Note that a reinforcing portion 3343 is integrally formed between the adjacent light guide protrusions 3342 to increase the strength of the light guide protrusion 3342 and bring the reinforcement portion 3343 into contact with the back surface of the game panel 600. As a result, the relative position between the front surface of the game panel 600 and the tip of the light guide protrusion 3342 can be accurately determined.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, a lower front drive board 3361 is disposed on the front surface of the back box 3001 located on the rear side of the ball guide passage 3340, and an upper left drive board is placed on the upper side of the back box 3001. 3362 is disposed. Further, on the rear side of the back box 3001, a motor drive board 3363, a lower lamp drive board 3365, an upper lamp drive board 3366, and a panel relay terminal plate 3367 are disposed. The motor drive board 3363 is housed in the motor drive board case 3368, the lower lamp drive board 3365 is housed in the lower lamp drive board case 3374, and the upper lamp drive board 3366 is housed in the upper lamp drive board case 3375. An LCD guide 3376 for supporting the liquid crystal display device 1400 (see FIG. 165) is attached to the right side of the motor drive board 3363.

  As shown in FIG. 165, a liquid crystal decoration unit 3350 is provided around the liquid crystal display device 1400. The liquid crystal decoration unit 3350 includes a thin plate-like lower left decoration portion 3351 disposed at the lower left of the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400, a lower right decoration portion 3352 disposed at the lower right of the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the liquid crystal display device 1400. A right decoration part 3353 arranged on the right side and a plurality of decoration frame seals 3354 attached to the entire right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 are provided.

  Here, a brief description will be given of a case where all the objects are moved from the standby position (original position) to the effect position (movable limit position). FIG. 168 is a front view of the game board when all the actors are moved to the effect position. As described above, on the front surface of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400, a plurality of actors are movable in accordance with the effect produced by the image drawn in the display area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 168, a first character accessory unit 3010, a signboard-type accessory unit 3150, a second character accessory unit 3180, a saddle-type accessory unit 3240, a composite accessory unit 3270, and a trap. The mold accessory unit 3310 is movable. The first character combination unit 3010 and the sign-type combination unit 3150 are always visible through the opening window 2003a of the center combination 2300. In particular, the first character combination unit 3010 not only jumps downward, but also moves the left and right big hands and mouths, and is “a cat that is big and violent, but has a part that cannot be hated somewhere.” The image is aroused.

  The second character combination unit 3180, the saddle type combination unit 3240, and the combined combination unit 3270 are shielded by the game panel 600 at the standby position (original position), and can be moved in accordance with the effect image. It moves to the front of the display area 1400 and becomes visible through the opening window 2300a of the center accessory 2300. Therefore, when it appears, it is possible to give a big impact to the player.

  In particular, in the second character actor unit 3180, the movable character body 3192 is moved large and promptly to evoke the image of “a mouse that is small in body but clear in mind and that flies away with the cats that follow it”. Yes. Further, by visually confirming whether or not the left hand portion 3196 of the movable character body 3192 moves, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation for the big hit, and it is possible to pay attention to the movement of the movable character body 3192 to the end. ing.

  Further, the scissors-type accessory unit 3240 includes a mechanism that performs a pseudo-operation so as to resemble the actual overturning motion of the “spear”. The mold decorative body 3241 can be made realistic.

[4-6. Magnetic sensor]
Next, the detection area of the magnetic sensor 3345 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 215 is a schematic diagram illustrating the detection area of the magnetic sensor. In FIG. 215, in order to explain the detection area of the magnetic sensor, the gaming panel is made transparent so that the rear of the gaming panel can be seen.

  As described above, the magnetic sensor 3345 has a rectangular box shape, and when attached in the state shown in FIG. 163, the left side surface 3345a of the rectangular box shape has a left side surface as viewed from the front. Magnetism in the first detection region having directivity with high sensitivity in the vertical direction with respect to 3345a can be detected, and the rectangular box-shaped right side surface 3345b, which is the side surface opposite to the left side surface 3345a, The magnetism can be detected in the second detection region having directivity with high sensitivity in the vertical direction with respect to the right side surface 3345b.

  As shown in FIG. 215, the magnetic sensor 3345 has four general winning ports 2101 provided in the side winning port member 2100 disposed in the lower gaming area 605 on the lower left side from the center in the horizontal direction of the gaming panel 600. A center accessory disposed at a substantially center of the game panel 600 (approximately the center of the game area 605) so as to be within the first inspection area having a directivity with high sensitivity in the direction perpendicular to the surface 3345a. 2300, the upper rolling surface 2334b of the rear shelf 2334, the lower rolling surface 2335a of the front shelf 2335, and the attacker unit 2000 arranged in the game area 605 below the center accessory 2300 is perpendicular to the right side surface 3345b of the rectangular box shape. The back side of the gaming panel 600 is positioned so as to be within the second inspection area having high directivity with high sensitivity. It is located at the upper right position of the sphere guide channel 3340 of the back box 3001 shown in 114.

  In order to examine the actual inspection area between the first inspection area and the second inspection area of the magnetic sensor 3345 thus arranged, the surface of the glass unit 450 from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. An experiment was conducted in which the reference magnet was moved while being applied. The magnetic sensor 3345 outputs an ON signal when it detects magnetism enough to receive and guide the game ball flowing down the game area 605, and detects magnetism that has not reached that level or detects magnetism at all. When not, an OFF signal is output. As shown in FIG. 215, the result of examining the inspection area based on the ON signal and the OFF signal is indicated by a two-dot chain line extending from the lower left side of the center accessory 2300 to the lower side of the side prize port member 2100. The area RA is a first inspection area, and an area RB indicated by a two-dot chain line extending from the upper side of the upper rolling surface 2334b of the rear shelf 2334 to the lower side of the attacker unit 2000 in the center accessory 2300 is the second area RB. This is an inspection area.

  Thereby, in the area RA, by detecting the magnets approaching the four general winning holes 2101 of the side winning hole member 2100, the game balls flowing down the gaming area 605 are guided to the general winning holes 2101 with the magnets to enter the balls. Magnet goto can be detected. In the region RB, magnets approaching the upper rolling surface 2334b, the lower rolling surface 2335a, the first starting port 2001, the second starting port 2002, and the big winning port 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 are detected. 108, the game ball flowing down the game area 605 is taken in by the center warp passage forming member 2318 shown in FIG. 108, passes through the ball guide member 2319, and rolls on the upper rolling surface 2334 b of the rear shelf 2334. A game ball rolling on the lower rolling surface 2335a of 2335 is guided to the chance guiding portion 2339a of the movable shelf 2339 with a magnet and is introduced into the chance opening 2334a of the rear shelf 2334, and the first starting port 2001 from the chance exit 2311a. It is possible to detect the magnets to be discharged to the game area 605 directly above the game area 605 and to flow down the game area 605 A magnet that guides the game ball to the first start port 2001 with a magnet can be detected, and the start port solenoid 2015 is driven to expand the pair of movable pieces 2005 in the left-right direction. When a game ball can be received at the start port 2002, the game ball flowing down the game area 605 is guided to the second start port 2002 with a magnet to detect a magnetic got that allows a large amount of game balls to enter. The game ball that flows down the game area 605 when the attacker solenoid 2016 is driven and the opening / closing member 2006 is rotated so as to incline forward to open the big winning opening 2003 is opened with a magnet. It is possible to detect a magnetic goto that is guided to the mouth 2003 and causes a large amount of game balls to enter.

  When the pair of movable pieces 2005 are expanded in the left-right direction, a current flows through the coil of the start-port solenoid 2015, so that magnetism is generated from the start-port solenoid 2015 and the opening / closing member 2006 is rotated so as to tilt forward. When the special winning opening 2003 is opened, a current flows through the coil of the attacker solenoid 2016, so that magnetism is generated from the attacker solenoid 2016. However, even if the start opening solenoid 2015 and the attacker solenoid 2016 are driven, the game The type of solenoid, the magnitude of the current flowing through the coil, and the magnitude of the voltage applied to the coil are selected in advance so that the path of the game ball flowing down the area 605 cannot be changed. For this reason, the magnetism caused by the current flowing through the coil of the start-up solenoid 2015 and the magnetism caused by the current flowing through the coil of the attacker solenoid 2016 do not reach the magnitude of dragging the game ball. That is, even if the start-up solenoid 2015 and the attacker solenoid 2016 are respectively attached to the attacker unit 200 arranged in the region RB, the magnetic sensor 3345 does not detect the magnetism caused by the current flowing in the coil of the start-up solenoid 2015 and the attacker. Even if the magnetism due to the current flowing in the coil of the solenoid 2016 is detected, it is determined that the magnet is not magnetized for the above-described “magnet goto” (the magnet has not reached the magnetism that can be used for the magnet goto), and the OFF signal Is output.

  Here, a brief description will be given of the advantage of preventing the magnet ball that causes the game balls to enter the four general winning ports 2101 of the side winning port member 2100. As described above, the side winning port members are the left and right sides of the gaming panel 600. It is arranged in the lower game area 605 from the center in the direction, and the general winning opening 2101 is arranged close to the storage tray 311 of the dish unit 300 shown in FIG. In the storage tray 311, in addition to the game balls that have been lent out, the game balls that have been paid out are stored, and the player usually enters his / her hand and smoothes the stored game balls. Therefore, the person who performs the magnet goto needs only to place the hand holding the magnet on the storage tray 311 when putting the game ball into the general winning opening 2101, and the action is extremely inconspicuous and should be repeated for a long time. Can do. When a game ball enters the general winning opening 2101, a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is paid out as a winning ball, and therefore, a magnet that makes a game ball enter the general winning opening 2101 is repeatedly performed for a long time. Thus, even if the big hit gaming state advantageous to the player does not occur, an extremely large number of illegal gaming balls can be acquired.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the region RB, the upper rolling surface 2334b, the lower rolling surface 2335a of the center accessory 2300, the first starting port 2001, the second starting port 2002, and the big winning port 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 are approached. In addition to detecting magnets, a method of detecting magnets approaching the four general winning ports 2101 of the side winning port member 2100 in the region RA was adopted. Then, as a mechanism for individually detecting the magnetism in the region RA and the region RB with the two magnetic sensors, a side surface opposite to the side surface on which the wiring insertion port for passing the wiring through the magnetic sensor connector is formed is played. As described above, the magnetism in the region RA is detected on the left side surface 3345a and the right side surface 3345b is detected on the right side surface 3345b. A mechanism is adopted in which one magnetic sensor 3345 is arranged on the back side of the game board 4 so that the magnetism in the region RB can be detected.

  Next, an input circuit to which a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3345 is input will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 216 shows an input circuit to which a detection signal from the magnetic sensor is input.

  As described above, the magnetic sensor 3345 outputs an ON signal when detecting a magnetism that can receive and guide the game ball flowing down the game area 605, and detects a magnetism that does not reach that level or does not detect the magnetism at all. When no magnetism is detected, an OFF signal is output. For this reason, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3345 is input as an ON / OFF signal.

  As shown in FIG. 216, the ON / OFF signal from the magnetic sensor 3345 is input to the magnetic sensor input circuit 4100z of the main control board 4100 via the panel relay terminal plate 3367, and the ON signal is a logic LOW, OFF signal. Is input as negative logic which becomes logic HI. As a result, in the state where the magnet is not being performed, since the OFF signal is output from the magnetic sensor 3345, the logic state of HI is maintained from the magnetic sensor 3345 to the main control board 4100. It becomes.

  The magnetic sensor 3345 is supplied with + 18V through the resistance R0 of the magnetic sensor input circuit 4100z of the main control board 4100 and the panel relay terminal board 3367, and with the ground of the main control board 4100 through the panel relay terminal board 3367. It is at the same ground level by being electrically connected.

  The magnetic sensor 3345 and the panel relay terminal plate 3367 are electrically connected by a wiring (not shown), and the panel relay terminal plate 3367 and the main control board 4100 are electrically connected by a wiring (not shown). When the ON / OFF signal from the magnetic sensor 3345 is input to the magnetic sensor input circuit 4100z of the main control board 4100 via the panel relay terminal plate 3367, it is input to the base of the transistor TR0 via the resistor R1. A ground and grounded resistor R2 is electrically connected between the resistor R1 and the base of the transistor TR0. When the ON signal from the magnetic sensor 3345 is input, that is, when the magnetism that can be received and guided by the game ball flowing down the game area 605 is detected, the values of the resistors R1 and R2 are turned off. It is set to be in a state. As a result, when the OFF signal from the magnetic sensor 3345 is input, that is, the magnetism that has not reached the level that can receive and guide the game ball flowing down the game area 605 is detected or no magnetism is detected. Sometimes, the transistor TR0 is turned on. In other words, the transistor TR0 is in an ON state during normal times when no magnet is used.

  The collector of the transistor TR0 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R3, and an ON / OFF signal from the magnetic sensor 3345 is output to a main control I / O port 4100b (see FIG. 172) described later as a magnet goto detection signal. To do.

  When the transistor TR0 is in the ON state, that is, when the magnetism that has not reached the level at which the game ball flowing down the game area 605 can be received and guided is detected or the magnetism is not detected at all, the collector of the transistor TR0 Since the current flows through the emitter, a magnet goto detection signal whose logic is LOW is output to the main control I / O port 4100b. In contrast, when the transistor TR0 is turned off, that is, when magnetism that can be received and guided by the game ball flowing down the game area 605 is detected, no current flows from the collector of the transistor TR0 to the emitter of the transistor TR0. A magnet goto detection signal that has been pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor R3 and has a logic level of HI is output to the main control I / O port 4100b.

  The main control board 4100 confirms the logic of the magnet goto detection signal in the switch input process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the logic of the magnet goto detection signal is HI, that is, when magnetism that can be received and guided by the game ball flowing down the game area 605 is detected, an illegal command detection process (not shown) in the same process is displayed. The magnetic sensor abnormality display command (see FIG. 182) is output to the peripheral control board 4139 in the peripheral control board command transmission process in the process.

  When the payout control board 1186 receives a magnetic sensor abnormality command from the main control board 4100, the hall control computer (not shown) from the external terminal board 1150a (see FIG. 172) in the port output process of the payout control section power-on process described later. When the peripheral control board 4139 receives a magnetic sensor abnormality display command from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4139 outputs a signal indicating that the magnet has been closed. The light emission mode of various LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is changed to a light emission mode that indicates that the magnet is being performed, and an alarm sound that indicates that the magnet is being performed from the side speaker 121. Is supposed to flow.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, in the region RA described above, the upper rolling surface 2334b, the lower rolling surface 2335a of the center accessory 2300, the first starting port 2001, the second starting port 2002 of the attacker unit 2000, the large One magnetic sensor 3345 can detect a magnet approaching the prize winning port 2003 and detect a magnet approaching the four general prize winning ports 2101 of the side prize port member 2100 in the region RA. In other words, in this embodiment, the signal from the magnetic sensor 3345 input to the main control board 4100 via the panel relay terminal plate 3367 is only one ON / OFF signal, so the input of the main control I / O port 4100b is sufficient. The presence or absence of a magnet approaching the region RA and the region RB can be monitored with only one bit among the plurality of bits constituting the port.

  In addition, one of the wiring that electrically connects the magnetic sensor 3345 and the panel relay terminal plate 3367 and the wiring that electrically connects the panel relay terminal plate 3367 and the main control board 4100 is disconnected, When the magnetic sensor 3345 is disconnected, the magnetic sensor 3345 and the main control board 4100 are not electrically connected. Therefore, in the magnetic sensor input circuit 4100z of the main control board 4100, the voltage applied to the base of the transistor TR0 is The transistor TR0 is turned off by being pulled down to the ground level by the resistor R2 connected to the ground. When the transistor TR0 is OFF, no current flows from the collector of the transistor TR0 to the emitter of the transistor TR0. Therefore, the magnet goto detection signal whose logic is HI is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R3 is the main control I / O port. It will be output to 4100b. That is, the ON signal from the magnetic sensor 3345 is input to the magnetic sensor input circuit 4100z when the wiring from the magnetic sensor 3345 to the main control board 4100 is not disconnected or disconnected normally. HI which is the same logic as the logic to be performed. In other words, the HI is the same logic as when the magnetism that can receive and guide the game ball flowing down the game area 605 is detected. Therefore, in order that the person who performs the magnet goto does not detect the act, the wiring for electrically connecting the magnetic sensor 3345 and the panel relay terminal plate 3367 and the panel relay terminal plate 3367 and the main control board 4100 are electrically connected. Even if any of the wirings to be disconnected is disconnected or removed, the logic sensor LOW input to the magnetic sensor input circuit 4100z of the main control board 4100 is maintained. Therefore, as described above, the main control board 4100 outputs the magnetic sensor abnormality command to the payout control board 1186 in the fraud detection process in the main control side timer interrupt process, and the magnetic sensor in the peripheral control board command transmission process in the same process. The abnormality display command is output to the peripheral control board 4139. As a result, when the payout control board 1186 receives the magnetic sensor abnormality command from the main control board 4100, the magnetic control is performed from the external terminal board 1150a to the hall computer in the port output process of the payout control unit power-on process. When the peripheral control board 4139 receives the magnetic sensor abnormality display command from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4139 outputs the signal to the door frame 5 and the game board 4 in the payout state determination process in the power-on process of the peripheral control unit. While the light emission mode of the various LEDs provided can be a light emission mode that reports that the magnet has been performed, an alarm sound that reports that the magnet has been performed can be emitted from the side speaker 121.

  In the present embodiment, the magnetic sensor 3345 can detect magnetism in the region RA and the region RB as described above, and thus detects magnetism in regions other than the region A and the region B. However, if a game ball enters the warp passage 2318a shown in FIG. 108, a magnet is applied to the surface of the glass unit 450 to receive the game ball flowing down the game area 605 and By stacking game balls that flow down one after another and forming them in a “grape-like” state that has a certain size, the game balls that flow down along the “grape-like” part are released by releasing the magnets. 108, guided to the warp passage 2318a and sent to the upper rolling surface 2334b shown in FIG. Even when a magnet is used to increase the probability of entering the ball 1, the peripheral control board 4139 emits various LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 in the start opening prize abnormality notification determination process described later. The store clerk is notified.

[4-7. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 640 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a function display substrate 640a and a cover member 640b as shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the function display board 640a includes segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, and LED1 to LED12. A first special symbol indicator 641 is assigned to the segment indicator SEG1, and the segment indicator SEG2 has a first indicator. Two special symbol indicators 642 are assigned. The segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 can display alphanumeric characters and figures, etc., and by displaying these alphanumeric characters and figures as special symbols, the first starting port 2001 of the attacker unit 2000 is displayed. When the game ball wins, the segment display SEG1 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner, and when the game ball wins at the second start port 2002, the segment display SEG2 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner. Yes.

  LED 1 is assigned a first special symbol memory lamp 643a, LED 2 is assigned a first special symbol memory lamp 643b, LED 3 is assigned a second special symbol memory lamp 644a, and LED 4 is assigned a second special symbol memory lamp 644b. Each is assigned. When the game ball won in the first starting port 2001 is not used in the special symbol fluctuation display, the first special symbol memory display 643 lights up or blinks with the number of the game balls won as the holding number. Yes. Specifically, the first special symbol memory lamp 643a is turned on when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the first special symbol memory lamp 643b is turned off, and the first special symbol memory when the holding ball is two balls. When both the indicators 643 are lit and the number of the holding balls is three, the first special symbol memory lamp 643a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 643b is lit, and when the number of the holding balls is four, the first special symbol memory display Both devices 643 flash. On the other hand, when the game ball won to the second starting port 2002 is not used in the special symbol change display, the second special symbol memory display 644 is turned on or blinking with the number of the game balls won as the holding number. It has become. Specifically, the second special symbol memory lamp 644a is turned on when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the second special symbol memory lamp 644b is turned off, and the second special symbol memory when the holding ball is two balls. When both of the indicators 644 are turned on and the number of the holding balls is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 644a flashes and the second special symbol memory lamp 644b is lit, and when the number of the holding balls is four, the second special symbol memory display Both units 644 flash.

  Further, a normal symbol display 645 is assigned to the LED 5. The LED 5 is an LED capable of lighting red / green / orange, and can be turned on by combining these red / green / orange. The LED 5 displays the lit color as a normal symbol so that when a game ball passes through the gate 2201, a predetermined normal symbol is variably displayed.

  Further, a normal symbol memory display 646 is assigned to each of the LEDs 6 to 9. When the game ball that has passed through the gate 2201 is not used in the normal symbol fluctuation display (when the normal symbol display is performed on the normal symbol display 645 and when the movable piece 2005 is opened / closed) The game symbol which is not used for the normal symbol fluctuation display immediately after passing 2201) is turned on by the normal symbol memory display 646 with the number of the game balls passed as the holding number. Specifically, the normal symbol memory lamp 646a is turned on when the holding ball is one ball, and the normal symbol memory lamps 646b to 646d are turned off. When the holding ball is two balls, the normal symbol memory lamps 646a and 646b are turned on. The normal symbol memory lamps 646c and 646d are turned off, the normal symbol memory lamps 646a to 646c are turned on when the holding ball is three balls, the normal symbol memory lamp 646b is turned off, and the normal symbol memory indicator is displayed when the holding ball is four balls. All 646 lights up.

  Further, a gaming state indicator 647 is assigned to the LED 10. The LED 10 is an LED capable of lighting red / green / orange, and can be turned on by combining these red / green / orange. The LED 10 displays the color to be lit as a gaming state, thereby notifying that the gaming state has a probability variation or a small hit.

  Further, a 2-round display lamp 648a is assigned to the LED 11, and a 15-round display lamp 648b is assigned to the LED 12. As described above, the 2-round display lamp 648a lights and notifies that the number of times (rounds) that the grand prize winning opening 2003 is in the open state from the closed state is two, while the 15-round display is displayed. The lamp 648b lights up and notifies that there are 15 rounds.

  Thus, the segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 mounted on the function display board 640a are the first special symbol indicator 641, the second special symbol indicator 642, the first special symbol memory indicator 643, A second special symbol memory display 644, a normal symbol display 645, a normal symbol memory display 646, a game status indicator 647, and a round indicator 648 are assigned to each segment display SEG1, which displays various functions. SEG2, LED1 to LED12, that is, the first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol storage display 643, the second special symbol storage display 644, the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol storage The display 646, the game status display 647, and the round display 648 are integrated on the function display board 640a. That.

  In addition, the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 each variably display the jackpot gaming state as a special symbol, so the first special symbol storage display 643, the second special symbol storage display 644, Differentiating from the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol storage display 646, the gaming state display 647, and the round display 648, segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 different from the LED1 to LED12 assigned to them are used to display alphanumeric characters and graphics. Etc. are variably displayed as special symbols. The first special symbol display unit 641 and the second special symbol display unit 642 perform the symbol variation display by blinking the graphic “−” until immediately before the symbol variation starts and the stop symbol is displayed, which will be described later. A special symbol obtained by calculation according to the calculation method is displayed as a stop symbol.

  Note that the sum of the number of LEDs 6 to 9 assigned to the normal symbol memory display 646 and the number of LEDs 11 and LED 12 assigned to the round display 648 is a fixed value 6.

  By the way, the function display board 640a is fixed to the cover member 640b with a screw (not shown), and the cover member 640b is attached from the back surface of the front component member 601 of the game board 4 with a screw (not shown). The front component 601 is provided with segment indicator openings 601c at positions corresponding to the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 of the function display board 640a so that the contents displayed by these segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 can be visually recognized. It has become.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 169, the front component member 601 is provided with LED insertion holes 601d at positions corresponding to the LEDs 1 to 12 of the function display board 640a, and the cover member 640b is connected to the front component member 601. LED1 to LED12 do not interfere with the game board 4 when being attached to the back surface of the game board. These LED insertion holes 601d are formed in a cylindrical shape so that the lights of the LEDs 1 to 12 that are turned on or blinking are not mistaken for the lights of the adjacent LEDs that are turned on or blinked. The contents displayed by the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 and the contents displayed by turning on or blinking the LEDs 1 to 12 are printed on a function display sticker 649 described later. The front component member 601 is provided with a function display seal pasting portion 601e to which the function display seal 649 is pasted. In addition, a concave portion 601f is formed in the function display seal pasting portion 601e. The function display seal 649, which is pasted by inserting a tool such as a flat-blade screwdriver, into the recess 601f, is easily peeled off. Here, in order to make it easy to peel off the function display seal 649, it is conceivable to provide a protrusion on the function display seal 649. However, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed from the main body frame 3, the protrusion is pulled for some reason. The function display sticker 649 may be peeled off from the function display sticker pasting portion 601e. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the function display sticker 601e is formed in the function display sticker 601e so that the function display sticker 649 does not peel from the function display sticker 601e when the door frame 5 is opened and closed from the main body frame 3. ing.

[4-7-1. Function display sticker]
Next, as shown in FIG. 170, the function display sticker 649 in the game board 4 is printed on the surface of the game board 4 by being grouped into groups Grp1 to Grp3 for each function display. It is affixed to a function display seal affixing portion 601e formed on a certain front component 601.

  As shown in FIG. 170, the group Grp1 includes a first special symbol display 641 and a first special symbol storage display 643. The first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 is divided and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by a solid line SL1. The area surrounded by the solid line SL1 is displayed in the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol memory so that the display by the first special symbol display 641 and the lighting or blinking by the first special symbol memory display 643 can be visually recognized. The position corresponding to the display 643 is transparent. In the group Grp1, various kinds of information related to the special symbol change display by winning the game ball to the first start port 2001 are displayed. For example, when a winning prize is received at the first starting port 2001, the first special symbol display 641 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner, or the first special symbol memory display 643 sets the number of winning game balls as a holding number. Lights up or flashes. Thus, by grouping the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 into one group Grp1, the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 Can indicate to the player that various types of information related to the display of variation of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball at the first start port 2001 are shown. As a result, the player sees the group Grp1 that is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by the solid line SL1, and changes the special symbol due to the start winning of the game ball to the first start port 2001. Various information related to the display can be easily confirmed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 170, the group Grp2 includes a second special symbol display 642 and a second special symbol storage display 644, and these second special symbol display 642 and second special symbol storage are stored. The display unit 644 is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by a solid line SL2. The area surrounded by the solid line SL2 is the second special symbol display 642, the second special symbol storage so that the display by the second special symbol display 642 and the lighting or blinking by the second special symbol storage display 644 can be visually recognized. The position corresponding to the display 644 is transparent. In this group Grp2, various types of information related to the special symbol variation display by winning a game ball to the second starting port 2002 are displayed. For example, when a game ball starts winning a prize at the second start opening 2002, the second special symbol display 642 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner, or displays the number of winning game balls as the number of reserves in the second special symbol memory display. The device 644 lights up or flashes. Thus, by grouping the second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol storage display 644 into one group Grp2, the second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol storage display 644 are combined. Can indicate to the player that various types of information related to the special symbol variation display due to the winning of the game ball at the second starting port 2002 are shown. As a result, the player can visually observe the group Grp2 which is partitioned in a state surrounded by the solid line SL2 and printed on the function display sticker 649, thereby changing the special symbol display by winning the game ball at the second starting port 2002. Various information regarding can be easily confirmed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 170, the group Grp3 includes a normal symbol display 645 and a normal symbol storage display 646, and a solid line SL3 that allows the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 to be visually recognized. And is printed on the function display sticker 649. In the area surrounded by the solid line SL3, the positions corresponding to the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 are transparent so that the lighting by the normal symbol display 645 and the lighting by the normal symbol storage display 646 can be visually recognized. It has become. As described above, the normal symbol display unit 645 variably displays whether the movable piece 2005 is opened or closed as a predetermined normal symbol. When the movable piece 2005 is changed from the closed state to the open state, the game ball is moved to the second start port 2002. It becomes easy to win. Therefore, the normal symbol display 645 includes a first special symbol display 641, a first special symbol storage display 643, a second special symbol display 642, a second special symbol storage display 644, and a normal symbol storage display. Stars are printed so that they can be distinguished from the game display 646, the game status display 647, and the round display 648. In this group Grp3, various information related to the gate 2201 of the gate member 2200 can also be displayed. For example, when a game ball passes through the gate 2201, the normal symbol display unit 645 displays a predetermined normal symbol in a variable manner, or the normal symbol storage display unit 646 lights up with the number of game balls passed as a holding number. As described above, the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 are grouped into one group Grp3, so that the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 can perform various operations related to the normal symbol variation display. The player can be informed that the information is shown. As a result, the player can easily confirm various information related to the variation display of the normal symbol by visually observing the group Grp3 which is partitioned in a state surrounded by the solid line SL3 and printed on the function display sticker 649.

  Furthermore, the positions corresponding to the game status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 are surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 that can be seen by the game status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648, respectively, as shown in FIG. It is divided and printed on the function display sticker 649. In the area surrounded by the solid lines SL4 to SL6, the positions corresponding to the game status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 are transparent so that the lighting by the game status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 can be visually recognized. In order to make it easy to understand the maximum number of rounds, the round indicator 648 has a value 2 that is the maximum number of rounds at the center in the area corresponding to the two-round display lamp 648a and surrounded by the solid line SL5. The value 15 which is the maximum number of rounds is printed at the center in the area surrounded by the solid line SL6 at the position corresponding to the 15 round display lamp 648b. As described above, the gaming status indicator 647 displays the lighting color as the gaming status, thereby notifying that the gaming status has a probability variation or a small hit, and the two-round display lamp 648 a The fact that the number of times (rounds) from the closed state to the open state (round) is 2 is turned on and notified, and the 15-round display lamp 648b lights and notifies that the round is 15 times. Thus, the player can easily check the gaming state by visually observing the gaming state indicator 647 that is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by the solid line SL4. By visually observing the two-round display lamp 648a that is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the maximum number of rounds is two. Whether or not the maximum number of rounds is 15 can be easily confirmed by visually observing the 15-round display lamp 648b which is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the groups Grp1 to Grp3 are partitioned and surrounded by the solid lines SL1 to SL6 and printed on the function display sticker 649, and the gaming status indicator 647, round indicator The position corresponding to 648 is partitioned and printed in a state surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 that can be visually recognized by the game status display 647 and the round display 648.

  In this way, the function display seal 649 is grouped so that the functions of the segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12, which are collectively mounted on the function display board 640a shown in FIG. 169, are grouped as groups Grp1 to Grp3. The contents are printed and partitioned. In addition, a star symbol is printed on the normal symbol display 645 or the like, and even if the contents displayed by the segment displays SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 are collectively printed on the function display sticker 649, their meanings are displayed. It can be easily understood.

  The correspondence between such functions and the printed contents is printed on the function display sticker 649 as a sticker management number 649a as shown in FIG. This seal management number 649a is printed at a position that is difficult to see from the game window 101 through the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, and does not convey unnecessary information to the player. It is like that. Further, the concave portion 601f provided in the function display sticker attaching portion 601e is also formed at a position that is difficult to see through the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, and the concave portion 601f is provided to the player. It is difficult to see.

  Further, the seal management number 649a is used to prevent a worker of a manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko gaming machine 1 from mistakenly attaching a function display seal of another specification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is assembled. . The seal management number 649a is also used for inventory management of the function display sticker 649, and modes such as the group Grp1 to the group Grp3 are managed in association with the seal management number 649a. Thereby, when the seal management number 649a is examined, the stock of the function display sticker 649 corresponding to the seal management number 649a can be known.

  Here, with the recent shortening of the life cycle of the pachinko gaming machine, the development period of the pachinko gaming machine is also shortened. For this reason, in the present embodiment, for example, a 2-round display lamp and a 15-round display lamp for lighting and informing that the number of times (rounds) that the winning prize opening 2003 is changed from the closed state to the open state is 2 times and 15 times. In addition to adding 5 round display lamps and 8 round display lamps that light up and notify that the number of rounds is 5 or 8, depending on the case of reducing the number of starting ports from two to one, etc. The specification change of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be dealt with by using a common function display board 640a. In order to change the contents printed on the function display sticker in accordance with the specification change of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the functions of the segment display units SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 described above, and the contents printed on the function display sticker, Is printed on the function display sticker as a seal management number. Thereby, for example, in the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1, whether or not the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 correspond to the function display sticker 649 before the line operator attaches the function display sticker 649 to the game board 4. Can be confirmed by visually checking the seal management number 649a, and the sticking of the function display seal 649 that does not correspond to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be prevented. Note that the function display seal 649 is a seal, and there is no work process for applying an adhesive or the like to the back surface of the function display seal 649, which contributes to improvement in productivity.

[4-7-2. Calculation method to determine the special symbol that is stopped and displayed on the segment display]
Next, a calculation method for determining a special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 171 is a table showing an example of a calculation method for determining a special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the segment display. The calculation by this calculation method is performed as one process of the special symbol fluctuation display pattern setting process described later.

  The segment indicators SEG1, SEG2 are composed of a total of seven segments, segment a, segment b, segment c, segment d, segment e, segment f, and segment g, and one dot Dt. When the segment g is all lit, the number “8” is displayed, and when the dot Dt is lit, “.” Is displayed at the lower right of the number “8”. When the segments a to g and the dots Dt are individually lit, a total of eight control signals are required. In other words, based on 8-bit information, segment a to segment g and dot Dt are individually bit-controlled, so that segment a to segment g and dot Dt can be lit in combination, and alphanumeric characters, graphics, etc. Can be variably displayed as a special symbol. In this 8-bit information, a total of 256 values from value 0 to value 255 can be expressed, so that the lighting states of segment a to segment g and dot Dt are 256 ways.

  The special symbols that are variably displayed in this way are then stopped at a predetermined symbol. The special symbol displayed in a stopped state is created by calculation. Since the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 can individually turn on the segments a to g and the dots Dt based on 8-bit information as described above, there are a total of 256 lighting modes. Therefore, the value 0 to the value 255 are assigned to the values of the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number, respectively. Specifically, the range of random numbers for the jackpot symbol is from the assigned value 1 to the assigned value 200 every time the value 0 increases to the value 199 by 1 with respect to a total of 200 values 0 to 199. Each of the random numbers for small symbols for the small hits is assigned to an allocation value 201 to an allocation value 250 each time it is increased by a value 1 from the value 0 to the value 49 for a total of 50 values 0 to 49. Each is associated. In other words, the range from the allocation value 1 to the allocation value 250 is associated with the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number continuously without the allocation value being interrupted.

  The special symbol calculation method that is stopped and displayed based on the values of the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number, first, each of the allocation value 1 to the allocation value 250 described above and a value that is the first calculation constant 102 (represented in bits, “01100110B (“ B ”represents a bit)”) is executed (referred to as “first exclusive OR operation process”). ). When the value of this operation result is expressed in binary bit representation, the number of bits standing up, that is, the total number of bits in which the value 1 is set is determined as the shift amount (referred to as “shift amount determination processing”). The left bit shift operation is executed bit by bit with respect to the value of the operation result of the first exclusive OR operation process by this determined shift amount (referred to as “left bit shift operation process”). In actuality, this left bit shift operation process performs left rotate operation on the value of the operation result of the first exclusive OR operation process by the determined shift amount bit by bit (“left Also called “rotate calculation processing”). The value of the calculation result by the left bit shift calculation processing and the value 153 that is the second calculation constant obtained by inverting the first calculation constant (“10011001B” in the bit display) are exclusive. An OR operation is executed (referred to as “second exclusive OR operation process”). The value of the calculation result is information output to the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2. This calculation is executed before the variable display for blinking the graphic “−” on the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 is started.

  Specifically, for example, when a special symbol that is displayed in a stopped state when the value of the jackpot symbol is 0 is calculated, the value assigned to the value 0 is assigned to the assigned value as shown in FIG. Since this value is 1, when this value is expressed in binary bits, it is “00000001B”. In the first exclusive OR operation processing, an exclusive OR operation of “00000001B” and the first operation constant “01100110B” is executed. If the value of this operation result is expressed as a binary bit, it becomes “01100111B”. Subsequently, in the shift amount determination process, the number of bits standing in the value of the calculation result, that is, the total number of bits in which the value 1 is set is obtained, and this “5” is determined as the shift amount. Subsequently, in the left bit shift calculation process, the left bit shift calculation is executed bit by bit with respect to the value “01100111B” of the calculation result by the first exclusive OR calculation process by the determined shift amount. If the value of this operation result is expressed as a binary bit, it becomes “11101100B”. Subsequently, in the second exclusive OR operation processing, when an exclusive OR operation of this operation result and the second operation constant “10011001B” is executed, the value of this operation result is converted into a binary number. When expressed in bit form, “01110101B” is obtained. That is, “01110101B” as the calculation result is 8-bit information output to the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2. The segment a to the segment g and the dot Dt corresponding to the portion where this bit is set are lit.

  In the case of a loss, the special symbol that is stopped and displayed on the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 is set to one, and the allocation value 0 is allocated. When the special symbol that is stopped and displayed at the assigned value 0 is calculated according to the calculation method described above, the calculation result is “11111111B”. That is, since the segment a to the segment g and the dot Dt corresponding to the portion where the bit is set are turned on, the segment a to the segment g and the dot Dt are all turned on in the case of a loss. It becomes. On the other hand, the allocation value 251 to the allocation value 255 are not used. In particular, when the allocation value 255 is calculated according to the calculation method described above, the calculation result is “00000000B”. That is, since there is no portion where this bit is set, all of the segments a to g and the dot Dt are turned off and cannot be used as a special symbol. The values from the allocation value 251 to the allocation value 254 are out of place, and the special symbol that is stopped and displayed according to the above-described calculation method is calculated although it is not associated with the value of the big hit symbol random number and the value of the small hit symbol random number When the value from the allocation value 0 to the allocation value 250 changes to any value from the allocation value 251 to the allocation value 254 for some reason (for example, under the influence of noise) The special symbol that is stopped and displayed according to the calculation method is forcibly calculated based on the allocation value 255, and the calculation result is always “00000000B”, that is, all of the segments a to g and the dots Dt are all It is turned off. As described above, even if the calculation is performed according to the calculation method based on any value from the allocation value 251 to the allocation value 255, it is not used as a special symbol. In addition, it stops according to the calculation method mentioned above using the first calculation constant (value 102) and the second calculation constant (value 153 obtained by inverting the first calculation constant) among the allocation values 1 to 250. If the result obtained by calculating the displayed special symbol is the same as the graphic “-” displayed during the change on the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642, the first symbol The value 102 which is the operation constant is changed to another value. The result obtained by calculating the special symbol that is stopped and displayed according to the above-described calculation method using the changed first calculation constant is the allocated value 1 to 1 when the first calculation constant uses the value 102. The calculation result based on the allocation value 250, that is, the same symbol as the figure that is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 is not made. In addition, the result obtained by calculating the special symbol that is stopped and displayed in accordance with the above-described calculation method is caused by some cause (for example, under the influence of noise), the first special symbol indicator 641 or the second special symbol indicator. When the figure becomes the same as the figure “-” displayed during the change in 642, a special symbol that is stopped and displayed is calculated according to the calculation method based on another allocation value of the same category. . For example, when the calculation result obtained by calculating a special symbol that is stopped and displayed according to the calculation method based on the value 0 of the jackpot symbol random number 0 and the corresponding allocation value 1 is the symbol “-”, it is the same category. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is calculated according to the calculation method based on the allocation value 2 corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number 1 and based on the allocation value 201 corresponding to the small bonus symbol random value 0. When the calculation result obtained by calculating the special symbol to be stopped and displayed according to the calculation method is “−”, based on the assigned value 202 corresponding to the random category value 1 for the small hit symbol, which is the same category. A special symbol to be stopped and displayed is calculated according to the calculation method.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol that is stopped and displayed on the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 calculated based on the allocation value 1 to the allocation value 200 allocated to the value 0 to the value 199 that is the range of the random number for the jackpot symbol is The jackpot game state is generated, and the lighting mode is a “hit symbol” which is the lighting mode at the time of jackpot. This big hit lighting mode is the same 200 as the big hit design random numbers, and the probability variation, non-probability variation, etc. can be identified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed on the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 calculated based on the value 201 to the value 250 assigned to the value 0 to the value 49 that is the range of random numbers for the small hit symbol, (Small hit game state) is generated, and the lighting mode is a “small hit design” which is a lighting mode at a small hit different from the lighting mode at the big hit. The lighting mode at the time of the small hit is 50, which is the same as the random number for the small hit symbol. When the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state are not generated, the allocation value 0 is assigned. The special symbol which is calculated based on the allocated value 0 and stopped and displayed on the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 is in a state where all of the segments a to g and the dot Dt are lit as described above, and is the only off-set. It becomes the “offset symbol” which is the hour lighting mode. Note that there is no light-on-hit mode, light-on-hit mode, or off-hit-on mode that is calculated according to the above-described calculation method, and thus has the same lighting mode. In other words, there is no one that overlaps any lighting mode among the big hit lighting mode, the small hit lighting mode, and the loss lighting mode.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by adopting the control for obtaining the special symbols stopped and displayed on the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 by the same calculation method, the segment a to the segment g and the dot in the program development stage. Since it is not necessary to prepare the lighting mode of Dt in advance, it is possible to save the trouble, and since it is not necessary to store these lighting modes as data in the main control built-in ROM, It can be used as an area for storing other data for increasing variations.

  Further, since the special symbols stopped and displayed on the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 can be rich in at least 250 variations from the allocation value 1 to the allocation value 250, the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the content notified by the lighting state of the special symbol that is stopped and displayed.

  Furthermore, by using the three bit operations described above, the first exclusive OR operation process, the left bit shift operation process (left rotate operation process), and the second exclusive OR operation process, The small hit symbol and the off symbol can be determined very easily without overlapping. Note that the three bit operations are arithmetic operations. For this arithmetic operation, logical operations such as AND and OR, shift processing, rotation processing, and the like can be executed in addition to the four arithmetic operations.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol stopped and displayed on the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 is calculated according to the same calculation method, but the segment indicator SEG1 is configured even if the same calculation result is obtained. The wiring method is made different so that the segment a to the segment g and the dot Dt and the segment a to the segment g and the dot Dt constituting the segment indicator SEG2 do not have the same display content. For example, the wiring sequence to the segment a, segment b, segment c, segment d, segment e, segment g, and dot Dt constituting the segment indicator SEG1, and the dot Dt, segment g, segment constituting the segment indicator SEG2 The wiring order to f, segment e, segment d, segment c, segment b, and segment a is used. Thereby, even if it is the same calculation result, the lighting aspect of the special symbol stopped and displayed on the segment indicator SEG1, SEG2 can be changed into a very different lighting aspect.

  In the present embodiment, the first arithmetic constant is 8-bit information, and the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits are composed of the same information. The upper 4 bits are set so that the bits to which the value 1 is set are adjacent to each other. Since the first operation constant is the value 102 (“01100110B”), the information of the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits is the same as “0110B”, and the bit in which the value 1 is set is It is set to be adjacent. As examples of how the bits are arranged, “1100B” and “0011B” can be given as other examples in which the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits are the same information. Further, even if the bits set with the value 1 are not adjacent to each other, the bits set with the value 0 may be set adjacent to each other. For example, “1001B” can be cited as an example in which the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits are the same information. As another example in which the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits are the same information, “1010B” or “10” or “1010B” in which the bit set to the value 1 and the bit set to the value 0 are alternately set are used. 0101B ”can be used, but, for example, when the first conversion constant is“ 01010101B ”, if the value of the jackpot symbol random number is 0, that is, the allocation value is 1 When it is, since it becomes “00001000B”, the number of bits standing up (the number of bits in which the value 1 is set) becomes extremely small, so that the special symbol that is stopped and displayed on the segment display units SEG1 and SEG2 There is no complexity in the form, and it is easily recorded on the memo paper etc. by the player, and the relationship between the lighting state of the special symbol and the content to be notified thereof is not easily analyzed. .

  In recent pachinko machines, it is difficult to grasp the game state for a player by providing a plurality of lighting modes of special symbols, and various effects are provided to the liquid crystal display device 1400 to provide the player with attractive effects. To improve the game play. When the lighting mode of the special symbol is increased, the data of the increased lighting mode needs to be stored in the main control built-in ROM, and a variation pattern for determining various effects unfolded in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is selected. Therefore, a plurality of tables must be stored in the main control built-in ROM. However, the storage capacity of the main control built-in ROM is limited by various circumstances specific to pachinko gaming machines (for example, the data capacity is limited to less than 3 kilobytes). The required capacity is required to improve the gameability, and it is necessary to avoid wasteful use of a 1-byte capacity. Therefore, in this embodiment, by adopting the control for obtaining the special symbols that are stopped and displayed on the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 by the same calculation method, the lighting manner of the segments a to g and the dots Dt is changed. It is no longer necessary to store data in the main control built-in ROM. Thereby, since the capacity for storing the data of the lighting mode of the special symbol can be further added, for example, a table for selecting a variation pattern for determining various effects unfolded in the liquid crystal display device 1400, It can contribute to improving game playability.

[5. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 172 and 173. FIG. 172 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board, and FIG. 173 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. As shown in FIGS. 172 and 173, the control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly configured by a main control board 4100, a payout control board 1186, and a peripheral control board 4139, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board 4100 will be described, and then the payout control board 1186 and the peripheral control board 4139 will be described.

[5-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 172, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 4100a as a microprocessor, a main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), and the above-mentioned RAM clear switch 624a. The main control MPU 4100a incorporates a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and preventing fraud. It also has built-in functions.

  The main control MPU 4100a includes a first start port sensor 2011 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2001, a second start port sensor 2012 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2002, and a side prize. A detection signal from the general winning port sensor 2014 that detects a game ball that has entered the upper two general winning ports 2101 among the four general winning ports 2101 provided in the mouth member 2100 is sent via the main control I / O port 4100b. The gate sensor 2202 that detects a game ball that has been input or passed through the gate 2201 of the gate member 2200 and the four general winning ports 2101 provided in the side winning port member 2100 enter the lower two general winning ports 2101. A general winning opening sensor 2014 that detects a game ball that has been balled, and a count sensor 2 that detects a gaming ball that has entered the big winning opening 2003 13 and a panel relay terminal plate 3367 attached to the game board 4 and a detection signal from a magnetic sensor 3345 attached to the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 to detect fraud using a magnet, and the main control I / O Or input via the port 4100b. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs drive signals to the start port solenoid 2015 and the attacker solenoid 2016 via the main control I / O port 4100b and the panel relay terminal plate 3367, and the main control I / O The first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol storage display 643, and the second special symbol storage display through the O port 4100b, the panel relay terminal plate 3367, and the function display board 640a. 644, a normal symbol display 645, a normal symbol storage display 646, a game state display 647, and a round display 648 are output.

  In the present embodiment, an electromagnetic proximity sensor which is a non-contact type sensor is used for the first start port sensor 2011, the second start port sensor 2012, the gate sensor 2202, and the count sensor 2013. On the other hand, as the general prize opening sensors 2014 and 2014, a mechanical sensor which is a contact type ON / OFF operation sensor is used. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002, and frequently pass through the gate 2201 of the gate member 2200, so the first start port sensor 2011 and the second start port sensor The detection of game balls by 2012 and the gate sensor 2202 also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity sensors are used for the first start port sensor 2011, the second start port sensor 2012, and the gate sensor 2202. In addition, when a big hit gaming state occurs, the big winning opening 2003 is opened and game balls frequently enter, so that the detection of the game balls by the count sensor 2013 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity sensor having a long life is also used for the count sensor 2013. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensors 2014 and 2014 does not frequently occur in the general winning openings 2101 and 2101 where game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical sensor having a shorter lifespan than the proximity sensor is used for the general winning award opening sensors 2014 and 2014.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to games (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 1186 via the main control I / O port 4100b and the main drawer relay board 1107. Various commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 1186 are received via the main drawer relay board 1107 and the main control I / O port 4100b. Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the peripheral control board 4139 via the main control I / O port 4100b (the main control board 4100). And the peripheral control board 4139 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown). When the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 1186, the main control MPU 4100a shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control board 4139.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 from the power supply board 1136. The power supply board 1136 includes an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) BC0 (see FIG. 174) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. ing. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) even when the power is shut off. . The stored various information is erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 624a is also output to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit 4100d (see FIG. 174). The power failure monitoring circuit 4100d monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 1136, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning voltage when these voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, this power failure notice signal is also output to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107, and the peripheral control board 4139 and the inverter board 1411. Is also output.

[5-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 172, a payout control board 1186 that controls payout of game balls, etc. includes a payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls relating to payout, a firing control unit 4120 that performs firing control of the firing motor 695, and a pachinko gaming machine. 1, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of 1, an error release switch 4131, and a ball removal switch 4132.

[5-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 172, the payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls relating to payouts operates normally as a payout control MPU 4110a as a microprocessor, a payout control I / O port 4110b as an I / O device, and a payout control MPU4110a. And an external watchdog timer 4110c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4110c”) for monitoring whether or not a payout motor is driven, and a payout motor drive circuit 4110d that outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 815. . The payout control MPU 4110a incorporates a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and also has a function for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU 4110a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to the payout via the payout control I / O port 4110b or the RAM clear switch 624a from the main control board 4100. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) being input via the payout control I / O port 4110b, the detection signal from the full switch 916 is input via the payout control I / O port 4110b, 778, detection signals from the counting switch 812 and the rotation angle switch 855 are input via the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 and the payout control I / O port 4110b. The opening signal (detection signal) from the door frame opening switch 4133 and the opening signal (detection signal) from the body frame opening switch 4134 are sent to the main control board via the payout control board 1186 and the main drawer relay board 1107. 4100 is input.

  When the payout control MPU 4110a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 via the payout control I / O port 4110b, the payout control MPU 4110a passes the payout control I / O port 4110b based on the received various commands related to payout. When a driving signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 815 via the inward ball unit relay terminal plate 830, or when the ball removal switch 4132 is operated, this operation signal (detection signal) is used as the payout control I. / O port 4110b, and a payout control I / O port for discharging game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 based on the input detection signal. The prize ball unit relay terminal board 8 from the payout motor drive circuit 4110d through 4110b When a drive signal is output to the payout motor 815 via 0 or a lending request signal from a CR unit (not shown) is input via the CR unit terminal board 1150b and the payout control I / O port 4110b, Based on the ball request signal, a drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 815 via the payout control I / O port 4110b to the payout motor 815 via the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830, or from the full switch 916. When the detection signal is input via the payout control I / O port 4110b, based on this detection signal, the payout motor drive circuit 4110d passes through the payout control I / O port 4110b and passes through the award ball unit relay terminal plate 830. The driving signal to the payout motor 815 is stopped and the payout motor 815 is stopped.

  Also, the payout control MPU 4110a displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4110b, and various commands indicating the state via the payout control I / O port 4110b. When the detection signal from the counting switch 812 is input via the award ball unit relay terminal plate 830 and the payout control I / O port 4110b, based on this detection signal, The number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 1150a via the payout control I / O port 4110b. The external terminal board 1150a is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by ascertaining the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1, game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is notified that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it indicates that it is “connection abnormality” (specifically, with the main control board 4100). An error has occurred in the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 1186 (that is, an error has occurred in various command signals), and when the number “1” is displayed, “out of ball” When the number “2” is displayed, it is informed that it is “sphere”, and when the number “3” is displayed, it is notified that it is a “counting switch error”. When the number “5” is displayed, the “retry error” is notified, and when the number “6” is displayed, the “full” is notified, and the number “7” is displayed. When it is, notify that it is “CR not connected” Are notifying is "in stock" when the letter "9" is displayed.

[5-2-2. Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 172, a firing control unit 4120 that performs firing control of the firing motor 695 includes an input circuit 4120a to which various signals are input, a transmission circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and the clock signal. A firing control circuit 4120c that outputs a reference pulse for determining the rotation speed of the firing motor 695 based on the firing motor drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing motor 695 based on the reference pulse from the firing control circuit 4120c; It is configured with. The launch control circuit 4120c controls the rotation speed of the launch motor 695 so that approximately 99.95 game balls per minute are launched toward the game area 605 based on the clock signal from the transmission circuit 4120b. . That is, the movement of the hitting ball 687 is controlled.

  Detection signals from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 built in the handle device 400 (operation handle portion 461) are input to the input circuit 4120a. Specifically, when the rotation operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 461 is touched, the touch sensor 420 detects the detection signal, and the detection signal is input to the input circuit 4120a via the handle relay terminal 194. A detection signal detected by the stop switch 422 is input to the input circuit 4120a via the handle relay terminal 194. Further, when the CR unit is electrically connected to the CR unit terminal board 1150b, the CR connection signal is input to the input circuit 4120a via the CR unit terminal board 1150b.

  Various types of voltages are supplied to the payout control board 1186 from the power supply board 1136 in the same manner as the main control board 4100. The power supply board 1136 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 174) that supplies power to the payout control board 1186 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4110a can store various payout information relating to payout in its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) even when the power is shut off. The stored payout information is erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[5-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 173, the peripheral control board 4139 includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1400 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control.

[5-3-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 173, the peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control includes a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC 4140c that performs high-quality sound, And a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c is stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is connected to each light emitting board of the game board 4 based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED is sent from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. In synchronization with the upper lamp driving board 3366 and the lower lamp driving board 3365, or output the game board side motor (drive motor 2343, 3043, 3088, 3127, 3166, 3204, 3232, 3245, 3279, 3294, 3318). , 3329) to output a drive signal to the game board side motor drive data SM- AT is output from the motor drive board serial I / O port to the motor drive board 3363 via the upper lamp drive board 3366 in synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, or the door side motor. Rotating lamp motor driving data for outputting driving signals to the left rotating lamp motor 245, the right rotating lamp motor 265, and the central rotating lamp motor 285 of the top lamp illumination unit 200, and the main button 371 to the vibrating body 371c. It is composed of vibration body drive data for outputting drive signals and door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals or gradation lighting signals to various color LEDs provided on the door side. Door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT (see FIG. 177) from door decoration drive board serial I / O port to door side motor drive light emission clock In synchronization with the signal ST-CLK (see FIG. 177), control data indicating a screen to be output to the door decoration drive board 192 or displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the door relay board 1102 Display command) is output from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 in synchronization with the clock signal for the liquid crystal control unit. In the present embodiment, the left rotating lamp motor 245, the right rotating lamp motor 265, and the central rotating lamp motor 285 of the top lamp lighting unit 200, which are the game board side motor and the door side motor, are rotated. A four-phase stepping motor whose shaft rotates once in 48 steps is adopted. These rotational speeds are controlled in a peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process described later of the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and reach the maximum rotational speed when driven with a pulse width of 2 ms. Since it becomes 96 ms (= 48 steps × 2 ms), it rotates only 1/96 ms per second and becomes 625 (= 60 s / 96 ms) per minute, so that the rotating shaft can rotate at high speed. Yes.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a receives serial data output from the door decoration drive board 192 via the door relay board 1102 and the sub drawer relay board 1108. The serial data includes the detection signal LB-SEN from the left sub button sensor 377L that detects the operation of the left sub button 372L and the right sub button sensor that detects the operation of the right sub button 372R. The detection signal RB-SEN from 377R and the detection signal CB-SEN from the main button sensor 376 that detects the operation of the main button 371 are serialized by the door-side serial transmission circuit 192c (see FIG. 177) of the door decoration drive board 192. The serialized button operation detection data TS-DAT (see FIG. 177) is synchronized with the button operation detection clock signal TS-CLK (see FIG. 177) from the door-side serial transmission circuit 192c to the door relay. Peripheral control M via substrate 1102 and sub drawer relay substrate 1108 Is input to U4140a serial I / O ports for the detection of the button operation.

  When the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives various commands from the main control board 4100, based on these various commands, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is driven from the motor drive board serial I / O port to the game board side motor drive. After being output to the motor drive board 3363 via the upper lamp drive board 3366 in synchronization with the clock signal SM-CLK, the game board side motor drive latch signal SM-LAT is sent from the parallel I / O port via the upper lamp drive board 3366. The sub-drawer relay board 1108 is output to the motor drive board 3363 or the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is synchronized with the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK from the door decoration drive board serial I / O port. And after output to the door decoration drive board 192 via the door relay board 1102 The door-side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT (see FIG. 177) is output from the parallel I / O port to the sub-drawer relay board 1108 and the door decoration drive board 192 via the door relay board 1102 or extracted from the sound ROM 4140d. A control signal (sound command) indicating sound information to be output is output from the parallel I / O port to the sound source IC 4140c.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives detection signals IN1-SEN to IN11-SEN from game board side position detection sensors (photosensors 2349, 3052, 3098, 3131, 3173, 3237, 3285, 3254, 3286, 3321, 3333). The signal is input to the parallel I / O port via the motor drive board 3363 and the upper lamp drive board 3366. The peripheral control MPU 4140a grasps the standby position (original position) of the movable accessory of the various accessory units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 based on the detection signals IN1-SEN to IN11-SEN. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 4140a also detects detection signals LT-SEN from the left rotation position detection sensor 250, the right rotation position detection sensor 270, and the center rotation position detection sensor 290 that detect the rotation positions of the rotary lights 244, 264, and 284 of the door frame 5. , RT-SEN, CT-SEN (see FIG. 177) are input to the parallel I / O port via the door relay board 1102 and the sub drawer relay board 1108. The peripheral control MPU 4140a grasps the original positions of the rotating lights 244, 264, and 284 based on these detection signals LT-SEN, RT-SEN, and CT-SEN. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the power supply air cooling fan 1502 for air cooling the power supply board 1136 is operating normally via the door relay board 1102 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 in parallel. Input to I / O port. The peripheral control MPU 4140a monitors the operation of the power cooling fan 1502 based on this operation signal. The peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 to the parallel I / O port. The peripheral control MPU 4140a monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on this operation signal.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the speakers 121, Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from 391 (side speakers 121 and lower speakers 391 of the door frame 5).

  In addition to the built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”) 4140af (see FIG. 176), the peripheral control board 4139 has an external watchdog timer (hereinafter, not shown). The peripheral control MPU 4140a diagnoses whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4140a is running out of control using the peripheral control built-in WDT 4140af in combination with the external WDT.

  Here, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) of a clock signal set when serial communication is performed between the boards will be described. In the present embodiment, when serial communication is performed between various boards provided in the game board 4, a clock signal bit rate of 300 kilo (k) BPS (hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is used. In the case where serial communication is performed between the board provided in the game board 4 and the board provided in the door frame 5, 100 kbps is set as the bit rate of the clock signal. Specifically, the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK output from the motor drive board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the game board side light emission output from the lamp drive board serial I / O port. 300 kbps is set as the bit rate of the clock signal SL-CLK and the liquid crystal controller clock signal output from the liquid crystal controller serial I / O port, and the door is output from the door decoration drive board serial I / O port. 100 kbps is set as the bit rate of the side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK and the button operation detection clock signal TS-CLK input to the button operation detection serial I / O port.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when serial communication is performed between various boards provided in the game board 4, and when serial communication is performed between the board provided in the game board 4 and the board provided in the door frame 5, In this case, the bit rate of the clock signal is set to be different. Since various boards provided in the game board 4 are densely attached inside the outer shape of the game board 4, the distance between the boards is short, and the length of the harness for electrically connecting the boards is also shortened. Yes. On the other hand, the board between the board provided in the game board 4 and the board provided in the door frame 5 is different from the various boards densely attached to the game board 4 in the board and the door frame 5 provided in the game board 4. 85 is formed in the frame substrate holder 1101 shown in FIG. 85. The harness for electrically connecting the substrate provided to the game board 4 and the substrate provided to the door frame 5 is electrically separated from each other. The wiring opening 1124 and the wiring opening 537 formed in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 62 need to be passed through, so that the harness is routed and the board and the door frame 5 provided in the game board 4 The length of the harness that electrically connects the boards to the board provided in the game board 4 is extremely longer than the length of the harness that electrically connects the various boards provided in the game board 4.

  When the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge generates noise, which may intrude into the harness that electrically connects the various boards and affect the various boards. . The inventor knows that the noise width of the game ball due to electrostatic discharge is about 0.8 microseconds (μs). However, when serial communication is performed at high speed, the bit rate of the clock signal needs to be set high, so that the pulse width of the clock signal approaches the noise width. Then, if serial data is transmitted at high speed to the harness that electrically connects the boards, when noise enters the harness, it becomes serial data that is different from the normal data due to the influence of this noise. It becomes difficult to transmit accurate serial data between boards. For this reason, for the bit rate that can be set to the clock signal, the pulse width must be larger than the noise width.

  As described above, the various boards included in the game board 4 are densely attached to the inside of the outer shape of the game board 4, the distance between the boards is short, and the length of the harness that electrically connects the boards is long. In addition, since the time is shortened, the time for transmission to the harness per bit of the serial data is short. On the other hand, the board of the board provided in the game board 4 and the board provided in the door frame 5 are separated from the board of the board provided in the game board 4 and the board provided in the door frame 5. It is necessary to pass a harness electrically connecting between the board provided to the board and the board provided to the door frame 5 through the wiring opening 537 and the like, and the harness is routed and the board provided to the game board 4 and the door frame 5 Since the length of the harness for electrically connecting the board to the board provided for the game board 4 is significantly longer than the length of the harness for electrically connecting the various boards provided for the game board 4, one bit of serial data The time transmitted to the harness around is long. In other words, the harness that electrically connects between the board provided in the game board 4 and the board provided in the door frame 5 is less affected by noise than the harness that electrically connects various boards provided in the game board 4. Longer time to receive.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when serial communication is performed with various boards provided in the game board 4 having a short harness length, the clock signal pulse width is made larger than the noise width, and the clock signal bit rate is high. 300 kbps (pulse width, about 1.7 μs) is set. On the other hand, when serial communication is performed between the board having the long harness and the board provided in the game board 4 and the board provided in the door frame 5, the clock signal has a pulse width much larger than the noise width. The bit rate of 100 kbps (pulse width, 5.0 μs) is set.

[5-3-2. LCD controller]
As shown in FIG. 173, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1400 includes a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, a liquid crystal control ROM 4150b that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a liquid crystal display. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 4150c for controlling the display of the device 1400, a character ROM 4150d for storing various screen data displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and various data stored in the character ROM 4150d are transferred. A character RAM 4150e to be copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to control drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1400. I do. If the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives a DMA execution signal DMAFLAG, which will be described later, from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b includes schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 and control data (display command) in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400. A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constituted by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e. In this non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in advance is defined for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 according to the progress of the schedule data. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c. Then, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data following the head screen data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the head screen data, and outputs the extracted screen data to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data, and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1400. Further, when the VDP 4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c outputs a DMA execution signal DMAFLAG to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer system”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1400. This is the output method.

  The character ROM 4150d stores a very large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the drawing speed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 as a unit. For example, when displaying various persons on the liquid crystal display device 1400, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. Thus, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 by setting the position on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite superposition sequence”). Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in 2 × 3 horizontal, for example. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1400 repeats main scanning in which the display state for each pixel is set in one direction along the pixels, and from the left to the right when viewed from the front, and in the direction intersecting with the one direction. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1400, the main scanning is performed sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1400 shifts to a line immediately below as sub-scanning. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the data are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Note that the liquid crystal display device 1400 incorporates a backlight (cold cathode tube) whose lighting is controlled by the inverter substrate 1411.

[6. Power system]
Next, the power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. First, the power supply board 1136 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board will be described. FIG. 174 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 175 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG.

[6-1. Power supply board]
The power supply board 1136 has a power line connector 1138 electrically connected to a power cord (not shown), and a plug of the power cord is inserted into a power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 1137 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board 1136, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 174, the power supply board 1136 includes a + 34V creation circuit 1136a, a + 18V creation circuit 1136b, and a + 9V creation circuit 1136c. The + 34V creation circuit 1136a rectifies the AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility and describes it as DC + 34V (DC + 34V, hereinafter, “+ 34V.” In this embodiment, the maximum current is 6 amperes (A ). The + 18V creation circuit 1136b creates + 34V by rectifying the AC24V supplied from the Pachinko island facility, and describes the + 34V from the created + 34V (DC + 18V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 18V”. In the present embodiment, the maximum current is described. 4A can flow.) The + 9V creation circuit 1136c creates DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”. In this embodiment, 0.4 A can be passed as the maximum current) from + 18V created by the + 18V creation circuit 1136b. ing. The voltages created by the + 34V creation circuit 1136a, + 18V creation circuit 1136b, and + 9V creation circuit 1136c are supplied to the payout control board 1186. In addition to the + 34V creation circuit 1136a and the + 18V creation circuit 1136b, the AC 24V supplied from the Pachinko island facility is also supplied to the CR unit terminal board 1150a via the power supply board 1136.

  The power supply board 1136 includes capacitors BC0 and BC1. The capacitor BC0 is a backup power source for a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and the capacitor BC1 is a RAM (built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 1186. RAM). The capacitor BC0, which is a backup power source for the main control built-in RAM, is charged when a voltage generated by a main control series regulator 4100c described later is applied via the main drawer relay board 1107. The voltage thus supplied is supplied to the main control built-in RAM via the main drawer relay board 1107 as the main VBB. The backup power source BC1 of the payout control built-in RAM is charged by applying a voltage created by a payout control series regulator 1186a, which will be described later, and this charged voltage is used as the payout voltage VBB. Is supplied to the payout control built-in RAM.

[6-2. Power supplied to each control board]
Next, the power supplied to each control board will be described. As shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, + 34V, + 18V and + 9V supplied from the power supply board 1136 are supplied to the payout control board 1186 and supplied to the main control board 4100 via the main drawer relay board 1107. . Then, + 34V and + 18V supplied to the main control board 4100 are supplied to the peripheral control board 4139. In addition to being supplied to the upper lamp drive board 3366, + 34V and + 18V supplied to the peripheral control board 4139 are also supplied to the door decoration drive board 192 via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the door relay board 1102. Yes. Further, + 34V supplied to the peripheral control board 4139 is also supplied to the inverter board 1411. The + 34V and + 18V supplied to the upper lamp driving board 3366 are supplied to the motor driving board 3363. Here, the power supplied to the payout control board 1186 will be described first, then the power supplied to the main control board 4100, the power supplied to the peripheral control board 4139, the power supplied to the inverter board 1411, The power supplied to the lamp drive board 3366, the power supplied to the motor drive board 3363, the power supplied to the lower lamp drive board 3365, and the power supplied to the door decoration drive board 192 will be described.

[6-2-1. Power supplied to dispensing control board]
The payout control board 1186 includes a payout control series regulator 1186a in addition to the payout control MPU 4110a and the like. The payout control series regulator 1186a is supplied with + 9V from the power supply board 1136, and generates a direct current + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”) which is a reference voltage of the payout control board 1186 from the + 9V. ing. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 1136, this + 5V is supplied to the payout control MPU 4110a, the payout control I / O port 4110b, the external WDT 4110c, the payout motor drive circuit 4110d, and the firing shown in FIG. It is also supplied to the input circuit 4120a, firing control circuit 4120c, firing motor drive circuit 4120d, etc. of the control unit 4120.

  + 34V from the power supply board 1136 is supplied not only to the payout motor drive circuit 4110d but also to the launch motor drive circuit 4120d, and is used as a drive power source for the payout motor 815 and the launch motor 695 shown in FIG. . In addition to the door frame opening switch 4133, + 18V from the power supply board 1136 is the main body frame opening switch 4134, the full tank switch 916, the ball break switch 778, the counting switch 812, the rotation angle switch 855, etc. shown in FIG. Has also been supplied.

[6-2-2. Power supplied to main control board]
The main control board 4100 includes a main control series regulator 4100c and a power failure monitoring circuit 4100d in addition to the main control MPU 4100a and the like. The main control series regulator 4100c is supplied with + 9V from the payout control board 1186, and creates + 5V which is the reference voltage of the main control board 4100 from this + 9V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 1136, this + 5V is also supplied to the main control MPU 4100a, the main control I / O port 4100b, etc. shown in FIG. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100d is supplied with + 18V and + 9V from the payout control board 1186, and monitors these + 18V and + 9V power outages or signs of instantaneous power failure. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100d receives a radio wave detection signal from the radio wave detection switch 4100e and monitors the radio wave detection signal. The radio wave detection switch 4100e is disposed in the vicinity of the main control series regulator 4100c. When the main control series regulator 4100c is irradiated with high frequency, the main control series regulator 4100c temporarily stops generating + 5V. It is to detect whether or not.

  When the power failure monitoring circuit 4100d detects the sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure or when a radio wave detection signal is input from the radio wave detection switch 4100e, the power failure warning signal is transmitted as a power failure warning signal to the peripheral control board in addition to the main control MPU 4100a. 4139 and output to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107. A power failure warning signal is input to the inverter board 1411 via the peripheral control board 4139.

  + 34V from the payout control board 1186 is used as a drive power source for the attacker solenoid 2016, the start-up solenoid 2015, etc. shown in FIG. Note that + 18V from the payout control board 1186 is also supplied to the first start port sensor 2011, the gate sensor 2202, and the like shown in FIG.

  The main control board 4100 includes a live line failure prevention circuit 4100f. First, + 34V, +18, and + 9V from the payout control board 1186 are supplied to the live line failure prevention circuit 4100f. Here, the “live line” means a state in which a current is flowing through the wiring (harness). The hot-wire failure prevention circuit 4100f does not manually turn off the power switch 1137, that is, the state in which the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is kept on (+ 34V, +18 and + 9V created by the power supply board 1136 are paid out) The main drawer relay connector 1200 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107 when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 while being supplied to the main drawer relay board 1107 via the control board 1186) When + 34V, +18 and + 9V from the payout control board 1186 are supplied toward the main control board 4100 at the moment when the main drawer connector 626 provided on the relay terminal board 625 of the game board 4 comes into contact with the main drawer board 625, Mainly due to a large current temporarily flowing in the contact portion between the drawer relay connector 1200 and the main drawer connector 626 It is a circuit for preventing the welding between the lower relay connector 1200 and the main drawer connector 626.

[6-2-3. Power supplied to the peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 4139 includes a peripheral control power circuit 4139a in addition to the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the peripheral control ROM 4140b, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c, and the like. The peripheral control power supply circuit 4139a is supplied with + 18V from the main control board 4100. From this + 18V, the reference voltage of the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control ROM 4140b, etc. is + 1.8V (DC + 1.8V, hereinafter referred to as “ + 1.8V ”), the reference voltage of the liquid crystal control substrate 4150, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, etc., is + 3.3V (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as“ + 3.3V ”), and the VDP 4150c. DC + 1.5V (DC + 1.5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 1.5V”) and DC + 2.5V (DC + 2.5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 2.5V”), which are power sources, are created. is doing. + 3.3V and + 1.8V are also supplied to a bus buffer circuit (not shown). Even if different voltages are supplied to the peripheral control MPU 4140a and the peripheral control ROM 4140b, or different voltages are supplied to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a and the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, this bus buffer circuit is supplied from the peripheral control MPU 4140a. The peripheral control MPU 4140a and the peripheral control ROM 4140b are interfaced by converting the level of the signal voltage of the + 3.3V system signal to the + 1.8V system signal of the peripheral control ROM 4140b, or the + 3.3V system signal from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a and the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b are interfaced by converting the level of the signal voltage into a + 1.8V signal of the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b.

  In addition to the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, and the bus buffer circuit, + 3.3V is supplied to a sound source IC 4140c, a VDP 4150c, a liquid crystal drive circuit (not shown) that drives the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the like shown in FIG. . In addition to the peripheral control ROM 4140b and the bus buffer circuit, + 1.8V is supplied to the sound ROM 4140d shown in FIG. +1.5 V is supplied to the character ROM 4150d and the character RAM 4150e shown in FIG. 172 in addition to the VDP 4150c. By supplying + 1.5V, + 2.5V and + 3.3V, the VDP 4150c can directly access the character ROM 4150d and the character RAM 4150e without passing through the bus buffer circuit, and exchanges signals with the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. Can also be done directly.

  For example, + 18V from the main control board 4100 is also supplied to an amplification circuit (not shown) that amplifies music, sound effects and the like output from the side speakers 121 and 121 and the lower speaker 391 shown in FIG. Note that + 34V from the main control board 4100 is not used by the peripheral control board 4139 and is supplied as it is to the upper lamp driving board 3366, the door decoration driving board 192, and the inverter board 1411 via the peripheral control board 4139. Yes.

[6-2-4. Power supplied to inverter board]
The inverter board 1411 includes a cold cathode fluorescent lamp lighting circuit 1411a. The cold cathode fluorescent lamp lighting circuit 1411a is supplied with + 34V from the peripheral control board 4139 and lights a cold cathode tube as a backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1400.

[6-2-5. Power supplied to upper lamp drive board]
The upper lamp driving substrate 3366 includes an upper lamp driving side power supply circuit 3366a, a gradation control IC 3366b, an electrical decoration driving circuit group 3366c, and the like. The upper lamp drive side power supply circuit 3366a receives + 18V from the peripheral control board 4139, and generates + 3.3V which is the reference voltage of the upper lamp drive board 3366 from + 18V. This + 3.3V is supplied to the gradation control IC 3366b and the like. The gradation control IC 3366b is an IC that turns on, blinks, and illuminates the color LEDs provided on each light emitting board of the game board 4. + 18V from the peripheral control board 4139 is supplied to the electrical decoration drive circuit group 3366c. This electrical decoration drive circuit group 3366c drives the color LEDs in accordance with the lighting signal, the flashing signal, and the gradation lighting signal from the gradation control IC 3366b. Note that + 34V from the peripheral control board 4139 is not used in the upper lamp driving board 3366 but is supplied to the motor driving board 3363 as it is through the upper lamp driving board 3366.

[6-2-6. Power supplied to motor drive board]
The motor drive board 3363 includes a motor drive side power supply circuit 3363a, a game board side motor drive circuit group 3363b, a serial / parallel conversion IC group 3363c, and the like. The motor drive side power supply circuit 3363a is supplied with + 18V from the upper lamp drive board 3366, and creates + 3.3V which is a reference voltage of the motor drive board 3363 from + 18V. This + 3.3V is supplied to the serial / parallel conversion IC group 3363c and the like. The serial / parallel conversion IC group 3363c is configured by so-called “daisy chain connection” in which a plurality of serial / parallel conversion ICs for converting received serial data into parallel data are connected in a daisy chain. Serial data (game board side motor drive data SM-DAT) for outputting drive signals to the side motors (drive motors 2343, 3043, 3088, 3127, 3166, 3204, 3232, 3245, 3279, 3294, 3318, 3329) The game board side motor drive circuit group 3363b converts the drive motor 2343, 3043, 3088, 3127, 3166, 3204, 3232, 3245, 3279 according to the drive signal from the serial / parallel conversion IC group 3363c. It is intended to drive the 3294,3318,3329.

[6-2-7. Power supplied to lower lamp drive board]
The lower lamp driving substrate 3365 includes a lower lamp driving side power supply circuit 3365a, a gradation control IC 3365b, an electrical decoration driving circuit group 3365c, and the like. The lower lamp drive side power supply circuit 3365a receives + 18V from the motor drive board 3363, and creates + 3.3V which is the reference voltage of the lower lamp drive board 3365 from + 18V. This + 3.3V is supplied to the gradation control IC 3365b and the like. This gradation control IC 3365b turns on, blinks, and turns on the color LEDs provided on each light-emitting board of the game board 4 where the gradation control IC 3366b of the upper lamp driving board 3366 is not turned on, blinked, and turned on. IC. + 18V from the motor drive board 3363 is supplied to the electrical decoration drive circuit group 3365c. The electrical decoration drive circuit group 3365c drives the color LEDs in accordance with the lighting signal, the flashing signal, and the gradation lighting signal from the gradation control IC 3365b.

[6-2-8. Power supplied to door decoration drive board]
The door decoration drive board 192 includes a door decoration drive side power supply circuit 192a, a door side motor drive circuit group 192b, a door side serial transmission circuit 192c, a serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d, and the like. The door decoration drive side power supply circuit 192a is supplied with + 18V from the peripheral control board 4139 via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the door relay board 1102, and from this + 18V, the reference voltage of the door decoration drive board 192 is +3. .3V is created. This +3.3 V is supplied to the door side serial transmission circuit 192c, the serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d, and the like. The door-side serial transmission circuit 192c includes a detection signal LB-SEN from the left sub-button sensor 377L that detects the operation of the left sub-button 372L provided in the operation button unit 370, and the right that detects the operation of the right sub-button 372R. The detection signal RB-SEN from the sub button sensor 377R and the detection signal CB-SEN from the main button sensor 376 for detecting the operation of the main button 371 are serialized as button operation detection data TS-DAT (see FIG. 177). , The signal is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4139 via the door relay board 1102 and the sub drawer relay board 1108. The serial-parallel conversion IC group 192d is configured by daisy chaining a plurality of serial-parallel conversion ICs for converting received serial data into parallel data. To output drive signals to the left rotating lamp motor 245, the right rotating lamp motor 265, and the central rotating lamp motor 285 of the top lamp illumination unit 200, which is a door side motor, in the ST-DAT (see FIG. 177). The rotating lamp motor drive data and the vibrator drive data for outputting a drive signal of the main button 371 to the vibrator 371c are converted into parallel data. + 34V and + 18V from the peripheral control board 4139 are supplied to the door-side motor drive circuit group 192b. This door side motor drive circuit group 192b drives the left rotating lamp motor 245, the right rotating lamp motor 265, the central rotating lamp motor 285, and the vibrating body 371c in accordance with the driving signal from the serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d.

[7. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a which is a microcomputer mounted on the peripheral control board 4139 will be described. FIG. 176 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU.

  As shown in FIG. 176, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is configured with a peripheral control CPU core 4140aa as the center. A port 4140ae, a peripheral control built-in WDT 4140af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4140ag, and the like are connected to each other through a bus 4140ah.

  The peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab is provided with a lamp driving board side transmission data area 4140ab, a door decoration driving board side transmission data area 4140abb, and a motor driving board side transmission data area 4140abc. Is a storage area in which game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED provided on each light emitting board of the game board 4 is set. In the decoration drive board side transmission data area 4140abb, a drive signal is output to the left rotation lamp motor 245, the right rotation lamp motor 265, and the center rotation lamp motor 285 of the top lamp illumination unit 200, which is a door side motor. Of the rotating lamp motor and the drive of the main button 371 to the vibrating body 371c. A door composed of vibration body drive data for outputting a signal and door side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to various color LEDs provided on the door side. Side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT (see FIG. 177) is set, and the motor drive board side transmission data area 4140abc has a center frame motor 2352, a left motor 3110, which are game board side motors, This is a storage area in which game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting drive signals to the right motor 3210, the lower motor 3310, the upper left motor 3410, and the upper right motor 3510 is set.

  The lamp driving board side transmission data area 4140ab, the door decoration driving board side transmission data area 4140abb, and the motor driving board side transmission data area 4140abc are each divided into two areas, a first area and a second area. In the lamp drive board side transmission data area 4140aba, when a peripheral control unit 16ms steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is stored in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data area 4140aba, When the next peripheral control unit 16ms steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is stored in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data area 4140aba, and the peripheral control part 16ms steady state is stored. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately stored in the first area and the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data area 4140aba. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is stored in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data area 4140aba in the current peripheral control part 16ms steady process, When the peripheral control unit 16 ms steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data area 4140aba.

  The door decoration drive board side transmission data area 4140abb has door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT in the first area of the door decoration drive board side transmission data area 4140abb when a peripheral control unit 2ms steady process described later is executed. When the next peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process is executed, the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is stored in the second area of the door decoration drive board side transmission data area 4140abb. Each time the peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process is executed, the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is alternately stored in the first area and the second area of the door decoration drive board side transmission data area 4140abb. For example, when the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is stored in the second area of the door decoration drive board-side transmission data area 4140abb in the current peripheral control part 2ms steady process, When the previous peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT stored in the first area of the door decoration drive board side transmission data area 4140abb. ing.

  In the motor drive board side transmission data area 4140abc, when the peripheral control unit 2ms steady process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is stored in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data area 4140abc. When the peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is stored in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data area 4140abc. Each time the process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately stored in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data area 4140abc. For example, when the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is stored in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data area 4140abc in the current peripheral control part 2ms steady process, When the peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data area 4140abc. .

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac is a dedicated controller for independently transferring data without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa, and in this embodiment, the game board set in the lamp drive board side transmission data area 4140aba Side light emission data SL-DAT, door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT set in the door decoration drive board side transmission data area 4140abb, and game board side motor drive data SM set in the motor drive board side transmission data area 4140abc -Control is performed to output DAT from various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4140ae without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa. The peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac has four channels, DMA0 to DMA3.

  The peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4140ae are independently controlled by the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac without directly passing through the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa, and the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board and the serial for the motor driving board In addition to the I / O port and the door decoration drive board serial I / O port, the liquid crystal controller serial I / O port directly controlled by the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa and the button operation detection serial I / O port have.

  Peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4140ag include a game board side motor drive latch signal SM-LAT, a door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT (see FIG. 177), and a control signal indicating sound information extracted from the sound ROM 4140d. (Sound command) and the like are output from the left rotation position detection sensor 250, the right rotation position detection sensor 270, and the center rotation position detection sensor 290 that detect the rotation positions of the rotating lights 244, 264, and 284 of the door frame 5. Game board side that detects signals LT-SEN, RT-SEN, CT-SEN (see FIG. 177), the standby position (original position) of the movable accessory of various accessory units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 Position detection sensors (photosensors 2349, 3052, 3098, 3131, 3173, 3237, 3285, 3254, 3286 3321, 3333), signals indicating that the power supply air cooling fan 1502 for air cooling the power supply board 1136 is operating normally, and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 operates normally A signal (operation signal), etc., indicating that the operation is being performed is input.

  Peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 4140af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4140a is running out of control, and when this timer is up, a hardware reset is performed. It has become. In other words, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa resets if it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4140af within a certain period (until the timer expires). Will take. When the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4140af within a certain period, the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa can restart the timer count, so that it is not reset.

[8. Electrical connection of various boards in the door frame and serial data captured by each board]
Next, electrical connection from the peripheral control board 4139 provided in the game board 4 to various boards provided in the door frame 5 and serial data from the peripheral control board 4139 taken in by various boards provided in the door frame 5 will be described. To do. FIG. 177 is a block diagram showing the electrical connection from the peripheral control board provided in the game board to the door decoration drive board provided in the door frame, and FIG. 178 is a plate unit and left side speaker illumination unit from the door decoration drive board. And it is a block diagram which shows the electrical connection to a glass unit, FIG. 179 is a block diagram which shows the electrical connection from a glass unit to a top lamp electrical decoration unit and a right side speaker electrical decoration unit.

[8-1. Electrical connection of various substrates in the door frame]
First, the electrical connection from the peripheral control board 4139 provided on the game board 4 to the door decoration drive board 192 provided on the door frame 5 will be briefly described. A board between the control board 4139 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 provided in the frame board holder 1101 of the board unit 1100 shown in FIG. 85 is electrically connected. The sub-drawer relay board 1108 and the board of the door relay board 1102 included in the frame board holder 1101 are electrically connected via a harness, and the board of the door relay board 1102 and the door decoration drive board 192 is 85, the wiring openings 1124 formed in the frame substrate holder 1101 shown in FIG. 85, and the wiring openings 537 formed in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. It has become so.

  Next, electrical connection between the door decoration drive board 192 and other boards provided in the door frame 5 will be briefly described. As shown in FIGS. 177 to 179, the door decoration drive board 192 and the dish unit 300 are provided. The board with the saucer relay board 190 is electrically connected via a harness, and the side decoration board 126 (hereinafter referred to as “left side decoration board 126L”) included in the saucer relay board 190 and the left side speaker illumination unit 120L. The board between the left side decorative board 126L and the glass decorative relay board 454 included in the glass unit 450 is electrically connected via the harness. The top of the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 connected to the glass decoration relay board 454 and the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 when viewed from the front. The board with the amplifier board 206 (hereinafter referred to as “left top lamp board 206L”) is electrically connected via a harness, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided in the same unit as the left top lamp board 206L. The right top lamp board 206 (hereinafter referred to as “right top lamp board 206R”) as viewed from the front is electrically connected to the right top lamp board 260R and the right side via a harness. The board | substrate with the side decoration board 126 (henceforth "right side decoration board 126R") with which the speaker electrical decoration unit 120R is equipped is electrically connected via the harness.

[8-2. Serial data captured by each board]
[8-2-1. Serial data captured by door decoration drive board]
Next, serial data captured by the door decoration drive board 192 will be described. As shown in FIG. 177, the door decoration drive board 192 includes a door side motor drive circuit group 192b, a serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d, and the like. The door-side motor drive circuit group 192b includes a door-side motor drive circuit 192ba that drives the left rotation lamp motor 245 of the top lamp illumination unit 200, and a door-side motor drive circuit 192bb that drives the right rotation lamp motor 265 of the unit. The door side motor drive circuit 192bc for driving the central rotary lamp motor 285 of the unit and the door side motor drive circuit 192bd for driving the vibrating body 371c of the main button 371 are provided. The serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d is configured by daisy chain connection in which 8-bit serial / parallel conversion ICs 192da and 192db are electrically connected in a daisy chain, and the serial / parallel conversion IC 192da drives the left rotating lamp motor 245. The drive signal to the door side motor drive circuit 192ba is assigned 4 bits, the drive signal to the door side motor drive circuit 192bb that drives the right turn lamp motor 265 and 4 bits are assigned, and the serial / parallel conversion IC 192db is assigned to the central turn lamp motor 285. 4 bits are assigned as a drive signal to the door side motor drive circuit 192bc for driving the motor, and 1 bit is assigned as a drive signal to the door side motor drive circuit 192bd for driving the vibrating body 371c.

  The first-stage serial / parallel conversion IC 192da synchronizes the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT, which is serial data from the peripheral control board 4139, with the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK from the peripheral control board 4139, One bit is taken into the built-in 8-bit shift register. Each time the shift register fetches one bit at a time, the fetched serial data is shifted bit by bit and discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal. The serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal is input to the serial / parallel conversion IC 192db of the final stage, which is the next stage, in synchronization with the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK, thereby being built in the serial / parallel conversion IC 192db. One bit is taken into an 8-bit shift register.

  The serial-parallel conversion ICs 192da and 192db receive the door-side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT from the peripheral control board 4139, and receive the serial data (door-side motor drive) taken in the built-in 8-bit shift register. Rotating lamp motor driving data for outputting driving signals to the left rotating lamp motor 245, the right rotating lamp motor 265, and the central rotating lamp motor 285 of the top lamp illumination unit 200, which constitute the light emission data ST-DAT, Vibration data for outputting a drive signal of the main button 371 to the vibration body 371c) is converted into parallel data, and the serial / parallel conversion IC 192da outputs a drive signal to the door side motor drive circuits 192ba and 192bb. Serial parallel conversion IC 192db is on the door side It outputs a drive signal to the over motor drive circuit 192Bb. Thereby, the door side motor drive circuit 192ba can drive the left rotation lamp motor 245 and the right rotation lamp motor 265 according to the drive signal from the serial / parallel conversion IC 192da, and the door side motor drive circuit 192bb can perform serial / parallel conversion. The central rotary lamp motor 285 and the vibrating body 371c can be driven in accordance with a drive signal from the IC 192db.

  Note that the serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal of the final-stage serial / parallel conversion IC 192db, that is, the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is synchronized with the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. It is transmitted to the saucer relay board 190 via a harness that electrically connects the drive board 192 and the saucer relay board 190 provided in the dish unit 300, and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST− from the peripheral control board 4139. The LAT is transmitted to the tray relay board 190 via the harness. Further, + 18V from the peripheral control board 4139 is supplied from the door decoration drive board 192 to the tray relay board 190 via its harness, and is provided in the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 from the door decoration drive board 192 via the power harness. It is supplied to the top lamp power supply substrate 205.

[8-2-2. Serial data captured by the tray relay board]
Next, serial data captured by the tray relay board 190 will be described. As shown in FIG. 178, the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT, the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK, and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT from the door decoration drive board 192 The data is input to the serial-parallel conversion IC group 190 a included in 190. This serial / parallel conversion IC group 190a has the same configuration as the serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d of the door decoration drive board 192 described above, and is a daisy circuit in which a plurality of 8-bit serial / parallel conversion ICs are electrically connected in a daisy chain. It is configured by chain connection. In the present embodiment, the dish unit 300 is provided with six color LEDs 336a on the dish unit main body 320 and five color LEDs 375a on the operation button unit 370, and a total of eleven systems ( = 6 systems of plate unit main body 320 +5 systems of operation button unit 370), the serial-parallel conversion IC group 190a is configured to have two 8-bit serial-parallel conversion ICs.

  The first serial / parallel conversion IC of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 190a receives the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT from the door decoration drive board 192 and the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK from the door decoration drive board 192. In synchronism with each other, the data is fetched bit by bit into the built-in 8-bit shift register. Each time the shift register fetches one bit at a time, the fetched serial data is shifted bit by bit and discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal. The serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal is input to the serial-parallel conversion IC of the final stage, which is the next stage, in synchronization with the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. One bit is taken into the shift register.

  The serial-parallel conversion ICs of the serial-parallel conversion IC group 190a are serials captured in a built-in 8-bit shift register when the door-side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT is input from the door decoration drive board 192. Data (door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal for the color LEDs 336a and 375a constituting the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT) is converted into parallel data, and is illuminated. A lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal is output to the drive circuit group 190b. As a result, the illumination drive circuit group 190b causes the color LED 336a of the plate unit body 320 and the color LED 375a of the operation button unit 370 according to the lighting signal, the flashing signal, or the gradation lighting signal from the serial / parallel conversion IC of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 190a. Can be turned on, blinked, or lit in gradation. The electrical decoration drive circuit group 190b uses + 18V supplied from the door decoration drive board 192 as a light emission power source for the color LED 336a of the plate unit main body 320 and the color LED 375a of the operation button unit 370. The + 3.3V reference voltage of the serial / parallel conversion IC of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 190a is supplied from the top lamp power supply board 205 provided in the top lamp illumination unit 200.

  Thus, serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal of the serial-parallel conversion IC 192db at the final stage in the serial-parallel conversion IC group 192d provided on the door decoration drive board 192, that is, door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is relayed. Since it is inputted to the first-stage serial / parallel conversion IC in the serial conversion IC group 190a provided on the substrate 190, the serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d provided on the door decoration drive substrate 192 and the serial / parallel conversion IC group 190a provided on the saucer relay substrate 190 are provided. And, it is configured to be connected in a daisy chain by being electrically connected in a daisy chain.

  Note that the serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal of the last serial / parallel conversion IC in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 190a, that is, the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. Synchronously with the receiving tray relay board 190 and the left side decoration board 126L provided in the left side speaker electrical decoration unit 120L, it is transmitted to the left side decoration board 126L via a harness that electrically connects the boards, and the receiving tray relay board The door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT from 190 is transmitted to the left side decorative board 126L via the harness. Further, + 18V from the door decoration drive board 192 is supplied from the tray relay board 190 to the left side decoration board 126L via the harness.

[8-2-3. Serial data captured by the left side decorative board]
Next, serial data captured by the left side decorative board 126L will be described. As shown in FIG. 178, the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT, the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT from the tray relay board 190 The data is input to the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126La included in 126L. This serial / parallel conversion IC group 126La has the same configuration as the serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d of the door decoration drive board 192 described above, and a daisy circuit in which a plurality of 8-bit serial / parallel conversion ICs are electrically connected in a daisy chain. It is configured by chain connection. In the present embodiment, the left side speaker illumination unit 120L is provided with 13 systems of color LEDs 126a, white LEDs 126b, and flashlights 129a in the illumination unit 122. Therefore, the serial-parallel conversion IC group 126La has an 8-bit configuration. It is configured to have two serial / parallel conversion ICs.

  The first-stage serial / parallel conversion IC of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126La synchronizes the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT from the tray relay board 190 with the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK from the tray relay board 190. Then, one bit is taken into the built-in 8-bit shift register. Each time the shift register fetches one bit at a time, the fetched serial data is shifted bit by bit and discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal. The serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal is input to the serial-parallel conversion IC of the final stage, which is the next stage, in synchronization with the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. One bit is taken into the shift register.

  The serial / parallel conversion ICs of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126La are the serial data captured in the built-in 8-bit shift register when the door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT is input from the tray relay board 190. (Door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals for the color LED 126a, white LED 126b, and flash light 129a constituting the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT) is converted into parallel data. Then, a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal is output to the illumination driving circuit group 126Lb. Thereby, the illumination drive circuit group 126Lb controls the color LED 126a, the white LED 126b, and the flashlight 129a of the illumination unit 122 according to the lighting signal, the blinking signal, or the gradation lighting signal from the serial parallel conversion IC of the serial parallel conversion IC group 126La. It can be lit, flashing, or lit in gradation. The illumination drive circuit group 126Lb uses + 18V supplied from the tray relay board 190 as a light emission power source for the color LED 126a, the white LED 126b, and the flashlight 129a of the illumination unit 122. A reference voltage of +3.3 V, which is a reference voltage of the serial / parallel conversion ICs of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126La, is supplied from the top lamp power supply board 205 included in the top lamp illumination unit 200.

  As described above, the serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal of the last serial / parallel conversion IC in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 190a provided on the tray relay board 190, that is, the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is the left side decoration Since it is inputted to the first stage serial / parallel conversion IC in the serial conversion IC group 126La provided on the board 126L, the serial / parallel conversion IC group 190a provided on the tray relay board 190 and the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126La provided on the left side decorative board 126L. And, it is configured to be connected in a daisy chain by being electrically connected in a daisy chain.

  The serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal of the serial-parallel conversion IC in the final stage of the serial-parallel conversion IC group 126La, that is, the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. Synchronously with the left side decorative board 126L and the glass decorative relay board 454 included in the glass unit 450, a harness that electrically connects the boards is transmitted to the glass decorative relay board 454, and is transmitted from the left side decorative board 126L. The door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT is transmitted to the glass decorative relay board 454 via the harness. Further, + 18V from the tray relay board 190 is supplied from the left side decorative board 126L to the glass decorative relay board 454 via its harness.

[8-2-4. Serial data captured by glass decorative relay board]
Next, serial data captured by the glass decoration relay board 454 will be described. As shown in FIG. 178, the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT, the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK, and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT from the left side decorative board 126L The data is input to the serial / parallel conversion IC group 454 a provided on the substrate 454. This serial / parallel conversion IC group 454a has the same configuration as the serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d of the door decoration drive board 192 described above, and a daisy chain in which a plurality of 8-bit serial / parallel conversion ICs are electrically connected in a daisy chain. It is configured by chain connection. In the present embodiment, since the glass unit 450 is provided with six color LEDs 453a in the unit frame 451, the serial / parallel conversion IC group 454a is configured to have one 8-bit serial / parallel conversion IC. ing.

  The first-stage serial / parallel conversion IC of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 454a receives the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT from the left side decorative board 126L and the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK from the left side decorative board 126L. In synchronism with each other, the data is fetched bit by bit into the built-in 8-bit shift register. Each time the shift register fetches one bit at a time, the fetched serial data is shifted bit by bit and discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal. The serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal is input to the serial-parallel conversion IC of the final stage, which is the next stage, in synchronization with the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. One bit is taken into the shift register.

  The serial / parallel conversion ICs of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 454a are serial data captured in a built-in 8-bit shift register when the door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT is input from the tray relay board 190. (Door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED 453a constituting the door-side motor driving light emission data ST-DAT) is converted into parallel data, and an electric decoration drive circuit group A lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal is output to 454b. Thereby, the illumination driving circuit group 454b lights or blinks the color LED 453a of the unit frame 451 according to the lighting signal, the blinking signal, or the gradation lighting signal from the serial parallel conversion IC of the serial parallel conversion IC group 454a. The gradation can be lit. The electrical decoration drive circuit group 454b uses + 18V supplied from the left side decorative board 126L as a power source for light emission of the color LED 453a of the unit frame 451. +3.3 V, which is the reference voltage of the serial / parallel conversion ICs in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 454a, is supplied from the top lamp power supply board 205 provided in the top lamp illumination unit 200.

  As described above, the serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal of the final serial-parallel conversion IC in the serial-parallel conversion IC group 126La provided on the left side decorative board 126L, that is, the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is the glass decoration. Since it is input to the first-stage serial / parallel conversion IC in the serial conversion IC group 454a provided on the relay board 454, the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126La provided on the left side decoration board 126L and the serial / parallel conversion IC provided on the glass decoration relay board 454 The group 454a is electrically connected in a daisy chain and is daisy chain connected.

  The serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal of the serial-parallel conversion IC in the final stage of the serial-parallel conversion IC group 454a, that is, the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. Synchronously with the glass decoration relay board 454 and the left top lamp board 206L provided in the top lamp illumination unit 200, a harness that electrically connects the boards is transmitted to the left top lamp board 206L to transmit the glass decoration relay. A door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT from the board 454 is transmitted to the left top lamp board 206L via the harness. Further, + 18V from the left side decorative board 126L is supplied from the glass decorative relay board 454 to the left top lamp board 206L via the harness.

[8-2-5. Serial data captured by the left top lamp board]
Next, serial data captured by the left top lamp substrate 206L will be described. As shown in FIG. 179, the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT, the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT from the glass decorative relay board 454 are left top lamps. The data is input to the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206La provided on the substrate 206L. The serial / parallel conversion IC group 206La has the same configuration as the serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d of the door decoration drive board 192 described above, and a daisy chain in which a plurality of 8-bit serial / parallel conversion ICs are electrically connected in a daisy chain. It is configured by chain connection. In this embodiment, the top lamp illumination unit 200 is provided with 18 color LEDs 224a, 226a, and 231a in the top lamp reflector unit 220. Therefore, the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206La has an 8-bit serial / parallel conversion. It is configured to have three ICs.

  The first-stage serial / parallel conversion IC of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206La receives the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT from the glass decoration relay board 454 and the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK from the glass decoration relay board 454. In synchronism with each other, the data is fetched bit by bit into the built-in 8-bit shift register. Each time the shift register fetches one bit at a time, the fetched serial data is shifted bit by bit and discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal. The serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal is input to the next-stage middle serial-parallel conversion IC in synchronization with the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. Each bit is taken into the register, and every time one bit is taken in, the fetched serial data is shifted one bit at a time and discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal. The serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal is emitted from the door side motor drive light. In synchronization with the clock signal ST-CLK, it is input to the final serial-parallel conversion IC, which is the next stage, so that it is fetched bit by bit into its built-in 8-bit shift register.

  The serial-parallel conversion ICs of the serial-parallel conversion IC group 206La are serials captured in the built-in 8-bit shift register when the door-side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT is input from the glass decoration relay board 454. Data (door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs 224a, 226a, 231a constituting the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT) is converted into parallel data, A lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal is output to the illumination driving circuit group 206Lb. As a result, the illumination drive circuit group 206Lb lights the color LEDs 224a, 226a, and 231a of the top lamp reflector unit 220 according to the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal from the serial / parallel conversion ICs of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206La. , Flashing, and gradation lighting. The illumination drive circuit group 206Lb uses + 18V supplied from the glass decoration relay substrate 454 as a light emission power source for the color LEDs 224a, 226a, 231a of the top lamp reflector unit 220. A reference voltage of +3.3 V, which is a reference voltage of the serial / parallel conversion ICs of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206La, is supplied from the top lamp power supply board 205 provided in the top lamp illumination unit 200.

  As described above, the serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal of the last serial / parallel conversion IC in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 454a provided on the glass decorative relay substrate 454, that is, the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is the left top. Since it is input to the first-stage serial / parallel conversion IC in the serial conversion IC group 206La provided on the lamp board 206L, the serial / parallel conversion IC group 454a provided on the glass decoration relay board 454 and the serial / parallel conversion IC provided on the left top lamp board 206L. The group 206La is configured to be connected in a daisy chain by being electrically connected in a daisy chain.

  The serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal of the last serial / parallel conversion IC in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206La, that is, the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. In synchronization with the left top lamp board 206L and the right top lamp board 206R provided in the top lamp illumination unit 200, the right top lamp board 206R is transmitted to the right top lamp board 206R via a harness to electrically connect the left top lamp board 206R and the left top lamp board 206R. A door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT from the board 206L is transmitted to the right top lamp board 206R via the harness. Further, + 18V from the glass decorative relay board 454 is supplied from the left top lamp board 206L to the right top lamp board 206R via the harness.

[8-2-6. Serial data captured by the right top lamp board]
Next, serial data captured by the right top lamp substrate 206R will be described. As shown in FIG. 179, the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT, the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT from the left top lamp substrate 206L The data is input to the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206Ra included in the substrate 206R. This serial / parallel conversion IC group 206Ra has the same configuration as the serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d of the door decoration drive board 192 described above, and is a daisy circuit in which a plurality of 8-bit serial / parallel conversion ICs are electrically connected in a daisy chain. It is configured by chain connection. In the present embodiment, the top lamp illumination unit 200 includes, in addition to the above-described top lamp reflector unit, 18 LEDs 224a, 226a, 231a, the left rotating lamp unit 240, three color LEDs 248a, and a right rotating lamp unit. Since 260 color LEDs 268a and 6 color LEDs 288a and 296a are provided in the central rotary lamp unit 280, a total of 12 color LEDs are provided, so the serial-parallel conversion IC group 206Ra is an 8-bit serial LED. It is configured to have two parallel conversion ICs.

  The first-stage serial / parallel conversion IC of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206Ra includes the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT from the left top lamp substrate 206L and the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK from the left top lamp substrate 206L. In synchronism with each other, the data is fetched bit by bit into the built-in 8-bit shift register. Each time the shift register fetches one bit at a time, the fetched serial data is shifted bit by bit and discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal. The serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal is input to the serial-parallel conversion IC of the final stage, which is the next stage, in synchronization with the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. One bit is taken into the shift register.

  The serial-parallel conversion ICs of the serial-parallel conversion IC group 206Ra are serials captured in the built-in 8-bit shift register when the door-side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT is input from the left top lamp board 206L. Converts data (door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs 248a, 268a, 288a, and 296a constituting the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT) to parallel data Then, a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal is output to the illumination driving circuit group 206Rb. As a result, the illumination drive circuit group 206Rb causes the color LED 248a of the left rotation lamp unit 240 and the right rotation lamp unit 260 of the right rotation lamp unit 260 in accordance with the lighting signal, the blinking signal, or the gradation lighting signal from the serial / parallel conversion IC of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206Ra. The color LEDs 268a and the color LEDs 288a and 296a of the central rotary lamp unit 280 can be turned on, blinked, or lit in gradation. The illumination drive circuit group 206Rb supplies + 18V supplied from the left top lamp board 206L to the color LED 248a of the left rotating lamp unit 240, the color LED 268a of the right rotating lamp unit 260, and the color LEDs 288a and 296a of the central rotating lamp unit 280. The light source is used for light emission. The + 3.3V reference voltage of the serial / parallel conversion IC of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206Ra is supplied from the top lamp power supply board 205 provided in the top lamp illumination unit 200.

  As described above, the serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal of the last serial / parallel conversion IC in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206La provided on the left top lamp substrate 206L, that is, the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is the right top. Since it is inputted to the first-stage serial / parallel conversion IC in the serial conversion IC group 206Ra provided on the lamp board 206R, the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206La provided on the left top lamp board 206L and the serial / parallel conversion IC provided on the right top lamp board 206R. The group 206Ra is electrically connected in a daisy chain and is daisy chain connected.

  The serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal of the serial / parallel conversion IC in the final stage of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206Ra, that is, the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. In synchronization with the right top lamp board 206R and the right side decorative board 126R provided to the right side speaker electrical decoration unit 120R, the right side decorative board 126R is transmitted to the right side decorative board 126R via a harness that electrically connects the boards. A door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT from the lamp board 206R is transmitted to the right side decorative board 126R via the harness. Further, + 18V from the left top lamp substrate 206L is supplied from the right top lamp substrate 206R to the right side decorative substrate 126R via the harness.

[8-2-7. Serial data captured by the right side decorative board]
Next, serial data captured by the right side decorative board 126R will be described. As shown in FIG. 179, the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT, the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK, and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT from the right top lamp board 206R The signal is input to the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126Ra provided on the substrate 126R. This serial / parallel conversion IC group 126Ra has the same configuration as the serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d of the door decoration drive board 192 described above, and a daisy chain in which a plurality of 8-bit serial / parallel conversion ICs are electrically connected in a daisy chain. It is configured by chain connection. In the present embodiment, the right side speaker illumination unit 120R is provided with 13 systems of color LEDs 126a, white LEDs 126b, and flashlights 129a in the illumination unit 122. Therefore, the serial-parallel conversion IC group 126La has an 8-bit configuration. It is configured to have two serial / parallel conversion ICs.

  The first-stage serial / parallel conversion IC in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126Ra receives the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT from the right top lamp board 206R and the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK from the right top lamp board 206R. In synchronism with each other, the data is fetched bit by bit into the built-in 8-bit shift register. Each time the shift register fetches one bit at a time, the fetched serial data is shifted bit by bit and discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal. The serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal is input to the serial-parallel conversion IC of the final stage, which is the next stage, in synchronization with the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. One bit is taken into the shift register.

  The serial-parallel conversion ICs of the serial-parallel conversion IC group 126Ra are serials that are captured in a built-in 8-bit shift register when the door-side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT is input from the right top lamp board 206R. Data (door-side emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals for the color LED 126a, white LED 126b, and flashlight 129a constituting the door-side motor drive emission data ST-DAT) as parallel data Conversion is performed, and a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal is output to the illumination driving circuit group 126Rb. Thereby, the illumination drive circuit group 126Rb controls the color LED 126a, the white LED 126b, and the flashlight 129a of the illumination unit 122 according to the lighting signal, the blinking signal, or the gradation lighting signal from the serial / parallel conversion IC of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126Ra. It can be lit, flashing, or lit in gradation. The illumination drive circuit group 126Rb uses + 18V supplied from the right top lamp substrate 206R as a light emission power source for the color LED 126a, the white LED 126b, and the flashlight 129a of the illumination unit 122. The reference voltage + 3.3V of the serial / parallel conversion IC of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126Ra is supplied from the top lamp power supply board 205 provided in the top lamp illumination unit 200.

  As described above, the serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal of the final serial-parallel conversion IC in the serial-parallel conversion IC group 206Ra provided on the right top lamp substrate 206R, that is, the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is displayed on the right side. Since it is inputted to the first-stage serial / parallel conversion IC in the serial conversion IC group 126Ra provided on the decorative board 126R, the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206Ra provided on the right top lamp board 206R and the serial / parallel conversion IC provided on the right side decorative board 126R. The group 126Ra is electrically connected in a daisy chain connection and connected in a daisy chain.

  In this embodiment, as described above, (1) the serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d provided on the door decoration drive board 192 and the serial / parallel conversion IC group 190a provided on the tray relay board 190 are electrically connected in a daisy chain. (2) The serial / parallel conversion IC group 190a provided on the saucer relay board 190 and the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126La provided on the left side decorative board 126L are electrically connected in a daisy chain. (3) The serial / parallel conversion IC group 126La provided on the left side decorative board 126L and the serial / parallel conversion IC group 454a provided on the glass decorative relay board 454 are: Connected daisy chain and connected daisy chain (4) The serial / parallel conversion IC group 454a provided on the glass decorative relay board 454 and the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206La provided on the left top lamp board 206L are electrically connected in a daisy chain and daisy-chained. (5) The serial / parallel conversion IC group 206La included in the left top lamp substrate 206L and the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206Ra included in the right top lamp substrate 206R are electrically connected in a daisy chain. (6) a serial / parallel conversion IC group 206Ra included in the right top lamp substrate 206R, and a serial / parallel conversion IC group 126Ra included in the right side decorative substrate 126R; Is electrically connected to a daisy chain The serial-parallel conversion IC group 192d provided in the tray relay board 190, the serial-parallel conversion provided in the left side decoration board 126L, from the serial-parallel conversion IC group 192d provided in the door decoration drive board 192, depending on the configuration of the easy chain connection. Conversion IC group 126La, serial / parallel conversion IC group 454a provided on the glass decorative relay board 454, serial / parallel conversion IC group 206La provided on the left top lamp board 206L, serial / parallel conversion IC group 206Ra provided on the right top lamp board 206R, and right The serial-parallel conversion IC group 126Ra provided on the side decorative board 126R is electrically connected in a daisy chain in this order and is daisy chain connected.

  Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4139 is the board farthest from the peripheral control board 4139 when performing serial communication of the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT to the door decoration drive board 192 provided in the door frame 5. The door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is created so that the serial parallel conversion IC group 192d provided in the door decoration drive board 192 which is the closest board to the serial parallel conversion IC group 126Ra provided in the right side decoration board 126R is in the order. I'm waiting. Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a includes the door side light emission data for the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126Ra provided in the right side decorative board 126R, the door side light emission data for the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206Ra provided in the right top lamp board 206R, Door side light emission data for serial parallel conversion IC group 206La provided on left top lamp board 206L, door side light emission data for serial parallel conversion IC group 454a provided on glass decoration relay board 454, serial parallel conversion provided on left side decoration board 126L Door side light emission data for the IC group 126La, door side light emission data for the serial / parallel conversion IC group 190a provided in the tray relay board 190, and vibrator driving data for the serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d provided in the door decoration drive board 192, and Revolving light motor Dynamic data, are creating a door-side motor driving the light emission data ST-DAT in the order of.

  Further, as described above, two 8-bit serial / parallel conversion ICs are provided in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d provided in the door decoration drive board 192, two are provided in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 190a provided in the tray relay board 190, and left Two in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126La provided in the side decorative board 126L, one in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 454a provided in the glass decorative relay board 454, and three in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206La provided in the left top lamp board 206L, Since there are two in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206Ra included in the right top lamp substrate 206R and two in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126Ra included in the right side decorative substrate 126R, the total number is 14. As a result, the bit length of the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT, which is serial data, becomes 112 bits (= 14 × 8 bits). For this reason, when serial communication is performed from the peripheral control board 4139 to various boards connected to the daisy chain included in the door frame 5, the bit rate of the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK is set to 100 kbps as described above. Since it is set, the time for completing transmission of all door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is 1.12 milliseconds (ms) (= 112 ÷ 100 kbps).

  Rotating lamp motor driving for outputting driving signals to the left rotating lamp motor 245, the right rotating lamp motor 265, and the central rotating lamp motor 285 of the top lamp illumination unit 200 in the door side motor driving light emission data ST-DAT. Data and vibration body drive data for outputting a drive signal to the vibration body 371c of the main button 371. For example, the left rotation lamp motor 245, the right rotation lamp motor 265, and the central rotation lamp are included. In some cases, the motor 285 is rotated at a high speed, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4139 outputs a door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT in a peripheral control unit 2ms steady process described later. That is, every time 2 ms elapses, a pulse for driving the left rotating lamp motor 245, the right rotating lamp motor 265, and the central rotating lamp motor 285 is generated by the door side motor driving light emission latch signal ST-LAT. When the pulse width becomes 2 ms, the left rotating lamp motor 245, the right rotating lamp motor 265, and the central rotating lamp motor 285 reach the maximum rotation speed.

  As described above, the rotation speed control of the left rotation lamp motor 245, the right rotation lamp motor 265, and the central rotation lamp motor 285 is performed in the peripheral control unit 2ms steady process of the peripheral control MPU 4140a. Within the period of 2 ms, transmission of door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT must be completed in synchronization with the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. However, as described above, it takes 1.12 milliseconds (ms) to complete the transmission of the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT. Therefore, if the process is performed in the peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process, 2 ms 56% (= 1.12 ms / 2 ms × 100). In other words, the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa of the peripheral control MPU 4140a shown in FIG. 176 directly controls the door decoration drive board serial I / O port and waits until all door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is transmitted. In this state, the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa spends 56% of the time taken from the start of transmission of the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT to the completion of transmission, that is, 56% of 2ms. There isn't enough time to do the other processing inside.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the door decoration drive board serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac of the peripheral control MPU 4140a shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac has a function of transferring data independently without using the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa. That is, each time a transfer request is generated, one transfer source data (1 byte) is transferred to the bus 4140ah. The data is transferred to the transfer destination via Although the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac and the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa use the same bus 4140ah shown in FIG. 176, the bus use right of the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac is more than the bus use right of the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa. And the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa does not use the bus 4140ah. When the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac uses the bus 4140ah, the bus by the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac is used until the use ends. The use of 4140ah is prioritized. Such a method is called a “cycle steel method”. In the present embodiment, by adopting this cycle steal method, the operation from the generation of a transfer request to the completion of 8-bit data transfer can be performed at high speed.

  By adopting such a cycle steal method, the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac uses the bus 4140ah to decorate the door of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab that is the transfer source shown in FIG. Transfer 1 data (1 byte) of the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT set in the drive board side transmission data area 4140abb to the transmission buffer of the door decoration drive board serial I / O port as the transfer destination. Write. Specifically, first, the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa sends the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT having a 112-bit length (having 14 bytes) to the door of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab via the bus 4140ah. The decorative drive board side transmission data area 4140abb is set. The peripheral control CPU core 4140aa designates transmission of the door decoration drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac and stores the door side stored in the head address of the door decoration drive board side transmission data area 4140abb. The first byte of the motor drive light emission data ST-DAT (that is, the door side light emission data for the serial / parallel conversion IC in the final stage of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126Ra provided in the right side decorative board 126R) is used as the bus. Via 4140ah, the data is transferred to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for door decoration drive board and written. The door decoration drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer to the transmission register, and synchronizes with the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. Start transmission bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac is triggered by a transmission interrupt request for the door I / O port serial I / O port (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer for the door I / O port serial I / O port). 1 byte data written to the transfer register is transferred to the transmission register, and the transmission buffer becomes empty because the 1 byte data disappears.), The peripheral control CPU core 4140aa is using the bus 4140ah. If not, the remaining 13 bytes of door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT stored in the door decoration drive board side transmission data area 4140abb are sent byte by byte via the bus 4140ah to the serial I / O for the door decoration drive board. Serial I / O port for door decoration drive board by transferring to port transmission buffer and writing The controller transfers the written data of the transmission buffer to the transmission register, and starts transmitting 1-byte data of the transmission register bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. Continuous transmission is performed through the serial I / O port for the drive board. Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac sends all the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT stored in the door decoration drive board side transmission data area 4140abb to the door decoration drive board serial I / O via the bus 4140ah. When the transfer to the port transmission buffer is completed, the bus use right of the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac is returned to the bus use right of the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

  In this embodiment, although the bus use time of 4 cycles is required to set the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac by the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa, the bus use time of 4 cycles is the peripheral control MPU 4140a. Since the frequency of the external clock input to is 22 megahertz (MHz), it is about 182 (= 4 cycles ÷ 22 MHz) nanoseconds (ns). Thus, unlike the case where the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa directly controls the serial I / O port for the door decoration drive board as described above, in the peripheral control unit 2ms steady process, about 182 ns of this 2 ms is about The bus 4140ah is used at an extremely low rate of 9% (= 182 ns / 2 ms × 100), and sufficient time can be secured for performing other processing within 2 ms. Further, as described above, the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa drives the door-side motor-driven emission data ST-DAT having a 112-bit length (having 14 bytes) via the bus 4140ah to the door decoration drive of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab. After the board side transmission data area 4140abb is set, the remaining 13 bytes of the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT are byte by byte, that is, 13 times, the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac drives the door decoration via the bus 4140ah. Since the data is transferred and written to the transmission buffer of the board serial I / O port, the usage time of the bus 4140ah by the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac in the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the door decoration driving board is about 2.37 ( = About 182 ns × 13 times) microsecond (μ s). That is, this time of about 2.37 μs is a state in which the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa directly controls the door decoration drive board serial I / O port and waits until all door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is transmitted. Compared to the time (1.12 ms) from the start of transmission of the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT to the completion of transmission in FIG.

  Further, in this embodiment, since the peripheral control board 4139 provided in the game board 4 and the door decoration drive board 192 provided in the door frame 5 are serially transferred between the boards, the peripheral control board 4139 Various control signals to the dish unit 300, the left side speaker illumination unit 120L, the glass unit 450, the top lamp illumination unit 200, and the right side speaker illumination unit 120R provided in the door frame 5 are individually supplied via a harness. Compared with the case of transmission, the number of harnesses to be passed through the wiring opening 1124 formed in the frame substrate holder 1101 shown in FIG. 85 and the wiring opening 537 formed in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. Can be extremely reduced. When the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 and closed again, the harness is forced to be pushed into the back from the pulled-out state, and the reaction force due to the harness is generated. The reaction force is also suppressed by the extremely small number of harnesses. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is gradually heavier when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, an operator such as a clerk in the hall There is no feeling. Further, since the number of harnesses is extremely reduced (in this embodiment, the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT, the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK, and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT). 3), because the harness is hidden behind other harnesses so that it is not difficult to see, the workers such as the hall clerk should be able to position each harness so that each harness is not sandwiched between the door frame 5 and the body frame 3. The door frame 5 can be closed to the main body frame 3 while confirming the above. Therefore, it is possible to prevent each harness from being disconnected between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  By the way, with respect to the door decoration drive board 192, each of the receiving tray relay board 190, the left side decoration board 126L, the glass decoration relay board 454, the left top lamp board 206L, the right top lamp board 206R, and the right side decoration board 126R. In the case of being electrically connected individually via the harness, the harness from each board concentrates on the door decoration drive board 192, so that a plurality of harnesses enter the disorder around the door decoration drive board 192, Even if the harness is viewed, it is difficult to immediately determine which board is electrically connected to the door decoration drive board 192. Further, it is necessary to provide a space for routing the harness extending from each board to the door decoration drive board 192 in the door frame 5, but in a portion where a plurality of harnesses are bundled, if the space is formed too large, it is shown in FIG. In addition, the outer shape of the gaming window 101 in which the player can visually recognize the gaming area 605 is reduced and covers a part of the outer periphery of the gaming area 605. In other words, if a plurality of electrical decorations are provided on the door frame 5 to perform an attractive light emission effect, etc., the number of harnesses for transmitting control signals to the electrical decorations and the like increases, so the door frame 5 is used for routing the harnesses. It is necessary to form a large space at a portion where a plurality of harnesses are bundled, and the outer shape of the gaming window 101 must be reduced. Therefore, in the case where an effect that is attractive to the player over the entire game area 605 is used, such as when electrical decorations scattered throughout the game area 605 are used, the door can be reduced by reducing the size of the game area 605. While the number of electrical decorations and the like provided on the frame 5 can be increased, if the size of the gaming area 605 is increased, the number of electrical decorations and the like provided on the door frame 5 needs to be reduced. The number of electrical decorations provided on the door frame 5 is in a conflicting relationship.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, from the door decoration drive board 192, the tray relay board 190, the left side decoration board 126L, the glass decoration relay board 454, the left top lamp board 206L, the right top lamp board 206R, and the right side. Since the decorative board 126R is electrically connected in a daisy chain in this order and connected in a daisy chain, the receiving board relay board is connected to the door decoration driving board 192 from the board provided in the door frame 5. Only the harness from 190 is electrically connected, and each of the left side decorative board 126L, the glass decorative relay board 454, the left top lamp board 206L, the right top lamp board 206R, and the right side decorative board 126R. Harnesses from are not directly and electrically connected individually. Thereby, since the harness from each board | substrate does not concentrate on the door decoration drive board | substrate 192, in the periphery of the door decoration drive board | substrate 192, a plurality of harnesses do not enter and become disordered. The same applies to the harness that electrically connects the substrates. That is, the board between the door decoration drive board 192 and the tray relay board 190 is electrically connected by a harness, and the board between the tray relay board 190 and the left side decoration board 126L is electrically connected by a harness. The left side decorative board 126L and the glass decorative relay board 454 are electrically connected by a harness, and the glass decorative relay board 454 and the left top lamp board 206L are electrically connected by a harness. The left top lamp board 206L and the right top lamp board 206R are electrically connected by a harness, and the right top lamp board 206R and the right side decorative board 126R are electrically connected by a harness. Therefore, if you look at the harness, it is the harness that electrically connects between the boards It is possible to determine immediately.

  In addition, the door decoration drive board 192, the tray relay board 190, the left side decoration board 126L, the glass decoration relay board 454, the left top lamp board 206L, the right top lamp board 206R, and the right side decoration board 126R are in this order. In a configuration in which a plurality of harnesses that are electrically connected to each other are not bundled in a configuration that is electrically connected in a daisy chain and connected in a daisy chain, there is no space for routing the harness that is formed in the door frame 5. Minimal size is required. That is, from the door decoration drive board 192, the tray relay board 190, the left side decoration board 126L, the glass decoration relay board 454, the left top lamp board 206L, the right top lamp board 206R, and the right side decoration board 126R in this order. In a configuration in which daisy chains are connected electrically in a daisy chain, even if a very large amount of electrical decoration is provided on the door frame 5 to perform an attractive light emission effect, etc. Since the number of harnesses that transmit signals does not increase (at least one door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT, door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK, and door side motor drive light emission latch) The signal ST-LAT is fixed to the three signal wirings), and there is no part that bundles a plurality of harnesses that electrically connect the substrates. The door frame 5, it is possible to form a space for routing the harness in minimum size. For example, the reception side of the left side decorative board 126L is electrically connected to the tray relay board 190 via a single harness, and the transmission side thereof is electrically connected to the glass decorative relay board 454 via a single harness. Therefore, even if the door frame 5 is provided with an extremely large number of various electrical members for game effects and performs an attractive effect, the number of harnesses on the reception side and the transmission side of the left side decorative board 126L can be reduced accordingly. There is no need to increase the number of serial parallel conversion ICs 126La of the serial parallel conversion IC group 126La on the left side decorative board 126L. Therefore, the reception side and the transmission side of the left side decorative board 126L have one harness. The door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT can be transmitted respectively. That is, there is no portion for bundling a plurality of harnesses on the reception side and the transmission side of the left side decorative board 126L, and a space for routing the harnesses can be formed in the door frame 5 with a minimum size. This is true for the door decoration drive board 192, the tray relay board 190, the glass decoration relay board 454, the left top lamp board 206L, the right top lamp board 206R, and the like. As a result, a relationship in which the relationship between the size of the game area 605 and the number of electrical decorations provided on the door frame 5 does not contradict is established, and the size of the game area 605 is greatly increased, and a very large number An electrical decoration or the like can be provided on the door frame 5. Therefore, a plurality of electrical decorations and the like can be provided on the door frame 5 regardless of the size of the game area 605.

  In the present embodiment, the left-side rotating lamp motor 245, the right-turning lamp motor 265, and the central rotating lamp motor 285 of the top lamp illumination unit 200, which are door-side motors, and the vibrating body 371c of the main button 371 are provided. The door decoration drive board 192 is driven by a drive signal, and the door decoration drive board 192 is positioned as a dedicated board for driving the door-side motor. As described above, since the door-side motor is driven by the drive signal from the door decoration drive board 192, the left rotating lamp motor 245 of the top lamp illumination unit 200, which forms the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT, Rotating lamp motor driving data for outputting driving signals to the rotating lamp motor 265 and the central rotating lamp motor 285, and vibrating body driving data for outputting a driving signal to the vibrating body 371c of the main button 371. It becomes a side-by-side array. Thus, when the program creator confirms the contents of the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT created by the peripheral control MPU 4140a, It is possible to easily discriminate vibration body drive data and door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to various color LEDs provided on the door side. In other words, when the program creator includes unintended data in the contents of the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT created by the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the program creator first provides the data on the door-side motor or the door side. Since it is possible to determine in a large group which of the various color LED related data has a problem, it becomes a clue to solving the problem and leads to an early solution.

[9. Various commands related to transmission / reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 1186 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4139 will be described. First, a prize ball command which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 1186 will be described, and subsequently various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4139 will be described. Various commands from the payout control board 1186 received by the board 4100 will be described. FIG. 180 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 181 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 181 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 181, and FIG. 183 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board.

[9-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 detects from various winning sensors such as the general winning opening sensor 2014, 2014, the first starting opening sensor 2011, the second starting opening sensor 2012, and the count sensor 2013 shown in FIG. When the signal is input, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a CR unit (a device that communicates with the pachinko gaming machine and drives the payout motor of the pachinko gaming machine (prize ball unit) to pay out the gaming ball as a rented ball to the storage tray). Are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “CR machine”), as shown in FIG. 180 (a), a prize transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 1186. Command 10H to command 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared for the ball command, one award ball is designated for the command 10H, two award balls are designated for the command 11H, .. 15 prize balls are specified in the command 1EH. The payout control board 1186 controls the payout of the game ball by driving the payout motor 815 for the designated number of prize balls.

  In addition, a pachinko gaming machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device for directly paying out gaming balls as a lending ball to a storage tray) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected. (Such a pachinko gaming machine is called a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. 180 (b), a prize ball command transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 1186 is displayed. Command 20H to command 2EH are prepared, one prize ball is designated by the command 20H, two prize balls are designated by the command 21H,..., 15 prize balls are designated by the command 2EH. Yes. The payout control board 1186 controls the payout of the game ball by driving the payout motor 815 for the designated number of prize balls.

  As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 180 (c), and the self-check is designated in the command 30H. By transmitting a command 30H and checking whether or not an ACK signal is input when the transmitting side does not input an ACK signal output as a command reception confirmation from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 1186 confirms the connection state with the CR unit.

[9-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4139 will be described. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4139 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 181 and 182, statuses indicating the types of commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits); And a mode showing variations of performance having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIGS. 181 and 182, the various commands are as follows: special figure 1 synchronized production related, special figure 2 synchronized production related, jackpot related, power-on, general figure synchronized production related, ordinary electric role production related, notification display, state Classified into display and other.

[9-2-1. Special Figure 1 Entrainment Production Related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect related is based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011 shown in FIG. 172, and is divided into the function display board 640a shown in FIG. 172 as shown in FIG. The first special symbol display 641 is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronized effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronized effect end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “A * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designated command designates the off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of the special figure 1 tuning effect, and the variable state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation start, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol 1 tuning effect is started. The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

[9-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012 shown in FIG. 172, and is divided into the function display board 640a shown in FIG. 172 as shown in FIG. The second special symbol display 642 includes commands having names of special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. These various commands are assigned “B * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 2 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designated command designates the off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The special figure 2 synchronization effect end is an instruction to end the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation starts, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[9-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 181, the jackpot-related category includes a jackpot opening, a winning prize opening 1 open Nth display, a winning prize 1 closing display, a winning prize 1 count display, a jackpot ending, a jackpot symbol display, a small hit opening , A small hit opening display, a small hit count display, and a command with the names of small hit ending. These commands are assigned “C * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The jackpot opening command is for instructing the start of the jackpot opening, and the N-th display command for the winning prize opening 1 is started during the opening of the winning prize opening 1 for the 1st to 16th rounds (the attacker unit 2000 shown in FIG. 104). The command indicating that the Nth round of the grand prize opening 2003 is being opened or the start of opening is instructed, and the grand prize opening 1 closing display command is the start of closing the grand prize opening 1 between rounds (the grand prize opening of the attacker unit 2000) During the closing of the round of 2003 or the start of closing), and the winning prize 1 count display command is detected by the count sensor 2013 shown in FIG. The number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2003), and the jackpot ending command is Is intended to indicate the packaging start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (when the big winning port 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 is being opened or opened at the small hit). The small hit count display command is used when the count sensor 2013 detects a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2003 during the small hit. The small hit ending command is an instruction to start the small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is when the big winning opening 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (the large amount of the attacker unit 2000). The winning prize opening 1 closing display command is sent when the winning prize opening 1 is closed (the closing of the winning prize opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 is started). The mouth 1 count display command is used when the winning prize opening 1 is opened and when the count of the winning prize opening 1 is changed (when the winning prize opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 is opened and when the game ball that has entered the winning prize opening 2003 is counted The jackpot ending command is sent at the start of the jackpot ending. Is Shin, big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2003 of attacker unit 2000).

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit release display command is transmitted when the small hit is released (when the big winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 is opened at the small hit), the small hit opening display command is transmitted. The hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit middle big winning opening (when the game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2003 is detected by the count sensor 2013 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is Sent when a small hit ending starts. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[9-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 181, the power-on category includes various commands named power-on. This power-on command is assigned “D * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The power-on command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, instructs the start of the effect when the RAM clear switch 624a shown in FIG. 172 is operated). ).

  As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when it recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure and the RAM clear switch 624a is operated, the main control side power-on process described later is executed. The power-on command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[9-2-5. General drawing related production]
The general figure synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2202 shown in FIG. 172. As shown in FIG. 181, the normal symbol display of the function display board 640a shown in FIG. The command 645 is composed of commands with the names of the start of the ordinary drawing synchronization effect, the designation of the ordinary symbol, the end of the ordinary figure synchronization effect, and the designation of the state at the time of change. These various commands are assigned “E * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The general pattern synchronization production start command is for instructing the general pattern synchronization production start with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern designation command is for specifying off, specific big hit, non-specific big hit, The figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the common figure synchronization effect, and the variable state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state.

  As the transmission timings of these various commands, the general symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the normal symbol 1 fluctuation start, the general symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the general symbol synchronization effect start, and the general symbol synchronization effect end command is When the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is determined), the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[9-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The ordinary electric role effect is related to the pair of movable pieces 2005 shown in FIG. 104 that is opened and closed by the driving of the start opening solenoid 2015 shown in FIG. 172. It consists of commands named “Opening per figure”, “Opening of public power”, and “Ending per common figure”. These various commands are assigned “F * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The opening command per base map is an instruction to start the opening per base map, and the open command display command for general power is open during open power (a pair of movable pieces 2005 are expanded in the left-right direction by driving the start opening solenoid 2015). The ending command per universal map indicates the start of ending per universal map.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per base map is transmitted at the start of the opening per base map, and the general power open display command is displayed when the general power is open (the pair of movable pieces 2005 are driven by the start opening solenoid 2015). The ending command per universal map is transmitted at the start of ending per universal map. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[9-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 182, the notification display section includes commands having names of winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic sensor abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. These various commands are assigned “6 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The winning anomaly display command is used when a winning ball is won other than during a big hit (when the condition device is in operation) (a game ball enters the big winning port 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 even though it is not a big hit). When the count sensor 2013 detects, the start of a prize abnormality notification is instructed. For example, the connection abnormality display command indicates that there is an electrical connection abnormality in the path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 1186. In some cases, an instruction to start connection abnormality notification is given, and the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, the main control board 4100, the first start port sensor 2011, the second start port sensor 2012, the count sensor 2013, and the like. This command instructs the start of the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display when the electrical connection is disconnected or short-circuited. Is for instructing the start of magnetic sensor abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic sensor 3345 shown in FIG. 172.

  Further, the door opening command is issued when the main body frame 3 is released based on detection signals (opening signals) from the door opening switch 4133 and the main body frame opening switch 4134 input via the payout control board 1186 shown in FIG. When the door 2 is open with respect to the frame 2 or when the door frame 5 is open with respect to the main body frame 3, the door opening notification is instructed. Based on detection signals from the opening switch 4133 and the body frame opening switch 4134, the body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3. In some cases, the end of door opening notification is instructed.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a prize winning opening other than during the big hit (condition apparatus is operating), and the connection abnormality displaying command is sent from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 1186. Is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 1186 at the time of command transmission to the command, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is the first start port sensor 2011, the second start port sensor 2012, the count sensor 2013, etc. The magnetic sensor abnormality display command is transmitted when any of the two is disconnected or short-circuited, and the magnetic sensor abnormality indication command is used to electrically connect the magnetic sensor 3345 in addition to the abnormality of the magnetic sensor 3345 itself. Is detected when a disconnection of the wiring or the state where the wiring is removed) Is detected when the door opening is detected (when the main body frame 3 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 based on detection signals from the door opening switch 4133 and the main body frame opening switch 4134, or the door frame 5 Is opened with respect to the main body frame 3), and the door closing command is transmitted when the door closing is detected (based on detection signals from the door opening switch 4133 and the main body frame opening switch 4134). (When the frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[9-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 182, the status display section includes commands named “frame state 1”, “error cancellation navigation”, and “frame state 2”. These various commands are assigned a status of “7 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands transmitted from the payout control board 1186, and detailed descriptions thereof will be described later. When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 1186, as shown in FIG. 181, "7 * H" is displayed. While setting as a status, the received command is set as a mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 1186, it adds “7 * H” as additional information to these received commands. Thus, the command is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the status of the frame is changed, and when the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during the error cancellation navigation. The frame status 2 command is transmitted when the power is restored. And when the frame state changes. Note that the shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[9-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 182, the test-related category includes various commands named “test”. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). And is predetermined according to the specification content of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4139 (for example, the sound source IC 4140c, the liquid crystal control unit 4150, the upper lamp driving board 3366, the lower lamp driving board 3365, and the door decoration driving shown in FIG. 173). Inspects various substrates such as the substrate 192).

  As a test command transmission timing, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, when it recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure and the RAM clear switch 624a is operated, the main control side power-on process described later is executed. A test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[9-2-10. Others]
As shown in FIG. 182, the other categories include start opening prize, change shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect, and It consists of a command with the name of special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect. These various commands are assigned a status of “9 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The start opening prize command is an instruction to start the start opening winning effect, and the start of the effect when a game ball enters the first start opening 2001 based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 2011. , And the start of the production when a game ball enters the second start port 2002 based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012, respectively. The command for instructing state transition from the shortened operating state to the variable shortening non-operating state, and the high probability end designation command is for instructing state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state. The special symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 pieces (the game ball enters the first starting port 2001 shown in FIG. 104 and the special symbol changes on the first special symbol display 641 of the function display board 640a. The special symbol 2 storage command indicates that the special symbol 2 storage command is 0 to 4 special symbols 2 (the game ball is placed in the second starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 104). The number of balls that have not yet been used for the variable symbol display (holding number) is transmitted by the second special symbol display 642 of the function display board 640a after entering the ball, and the normal symbol storage command is the normal symbol 1 Hold 0-4 pieces (the number of balls that have not yet been used for normal symbol change display on the normal symbol display 645 of the function display board 640a after the game ball passes through the gate 2201 of the gate member 2200 shown in FIG. The special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command is used for pre-reading before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the special symbol variable display on the first special symbol display 641 of the function display board 640a. The special symbol 1 hold is instructed to start a pre-reading effect informing the notice of the display result of the first special symbol display 641 based on the special symbol 1 hold. Before the second special symbol display 642 of 640a is used to display the variation of the special symbol, the pre-reading effect is started to pre-read and notify the advance notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 642 based on the special symbol 2 hold. Is instructed.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start opening prize command is the start opening winning prize (when a game ball enters the first start opening 2001 based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 2011, Mainly from the side speaker 121 shown in FIGS. 17 and 19 and the lower speaker 391 shown in FIG. 37 when a game ball enters the second start port 2002 based on the detection signal from the start port sensor 2012. This command is sent to notify that effect by voice, and the command to end change shortening operation is sent at the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed (after the stoppage stop period has elapsed) after digesting the specified number of changes, and ends with a high probability. The designated command is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed (after the outage stop period has elapsed) after digesting the high probability count in the case of “high probability N times”. At the time of the change of the number of symbols held in the symbol 1 operation (there is a number of reserves that have not yet been used for the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol indicator 641 of the function display board 640a when a game ball enters the first start port 2001. In the state, when the game ball enters the first starting port 2001 and the number of held is increased, or from the number of held, the first special symbol display 641 is used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol, the number of held The special symbol 2 storage command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 2 operation suspension balls changes (the game ball enters the second start port 2002 and the second special symbol display 642 on the function display board 640a). In the state where there is a number of holdings that are not yet used for the special symbol fluctuation display, when the number of holdings increases when the game ball enters the second start port 2002, or from the number of holdings, the second special symbol display is performed. Special design with vessel 642 The normal symbol storage command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls for normal operation 1 changes (the game ball passes through the gate 2201 of the gate member 2200 and the function display board). In the state where there is a holding number that is not yet used for the normal symbol change display of the normal symbol display 645 of 640a, when the game ball passes through the gate 2201 of the gate member 2200 and the holding number increases, the holding The special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command is used when the number of reserved symbols for the operation of the special symbol 1 is increased (first time). The special symbol 2 memory pre-reading effect command is sent when the number of special symbol 2 actuated balls is increased (second starting port 2002). When a game ball enters and the number of holds increases. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the start opening prize command is given at the start opening winning (when a game ball enters the first start opening 2001 based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 2011, When a game ball enters the second start port 2002 based on the detection signal from the sensor 2012), the side speaker 121 and the lower speaker 391 are transmitted mainly to notify that effect by voice. How the peripheral control board 4139 shown in 173 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to notifying by sound from the side speaker 121 and the lower speaker 391, as described later, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also used to monitor the presence or absence of fraud. On the other hand, in other pachinko gaming machines 1 ′, there is a specification in which the peripheral control board 4139 ′ simply receives the start opening winning command and does not notify by sound from the side speaker 121 ′ or the lower speaker 391 ′. .

[9-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 1186 received by the main control board 4100 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 183, each command from the payout control board 1186 is composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, and includes frame state 1, error release navigation, and Priorities are set in the order of frame state 2.

  In the frame state 1 command, a ball breakage, a full tank, a connection abnormality and a CR non-connection are prepared in 50 or more stocks. Value 1 is set, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1 when full, bit 1 (B2) is set to 1 in 50 or more stocks, and value is set to bit 3 (B3) when connection is abnormal 1 is set, and the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, a value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7.

  In the error canceling navigation command, there are provided a sphere, a count switch error, and a retry error. In the case of a sphere, a value 1 is set in bit 2 (B2), and in a count switch error, a value is set in bit 3 (B3). 1 is set, and in the case of a retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, “counting switch error” indicates whether or not a malfunction of the counting switch 812 has occurred. The “retry error” indicates that a game ball that is not consistent with the retry operation has been repeatedly paid out. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command, a value 0 is set in B5, a value 1 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7.

  The frame state 2 command is prepared for ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command, a value 1 is set in B5, a value 1 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, the frame state is changed, and the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during the error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. These various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process in step S360 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control part power-on process described later.

[10. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 193. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then main control side power-on processing, main control side timer interruption processing, special symbols and special electric actor control processing, and special symbol change waiting processing will be described. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing an example of main control-side power-on processing, FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 184, and FIG. 186 is an example of main control-side timer interrupt processing. 187 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process of FIG. 187. 189 is a flowchart showing an example of the start opening winning process, FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing an example of the memory prefetching process, FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the memory prefetching process of FIG. 190, and FIG. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing an example of a symbol variation waiting process. FIG. 193 shows a special symbol variation display pattern setting. Is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing.

[10-1. Various random numbers]
As the various random numbers used for game control, a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state, and an initial value for determining the big hit for use in determining the initial value of this big hit determination random number Random number for use in determination of whether or not to generate reach (reach out of reach) when the big hit gaming state is not generated, the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol display 641 shown in FIG. The random display pattern random number for use in determining the variable display pattern of the special symbol variably displayed on the two special symbol indicators 642, and the first special symbol indicator 641 and the second special symbol when the big hit gaming state is generated. A jackpot symbol for use in determining the jackpot symbol derived and displayed by the indicator 642 and a jackpot symbol for use in determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol Random number for determining the initial value for use, random number for small hit symbol for use in determining the small hit symbol derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 when the small hit gaming state is generated In addition, a random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random number for the small hit symbol is prepared. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining normal symbols for use in determining whether or not to move the movable piece 2005 shown in FIG. 104 and an initial value of the random numbers for determining per normal symbol are determined. Random numbers for determining initial values for normal symbols to be used, random numbers for normal symbol variation display patterns to be used for determining the variation display pattern of ordinary symbols variably displayed on the ordinary symbol display 645 shown in FIG. Is prepared.

  Here, the range of the jackpot determination random number will be described. The jackpot determination random number is updated in the range of value 0 to value 32767, and the jackpot range is set to value 32668 to value 32767 at the time of uncertain change. In addition, the upper limit value of the reserve range is set to a value that continues to a value 32667 that is one smaller than the value of the uncertain variation lower limit value ORG-NV-LOW of the big hit range (value 32668), and the range is a value 32667 to a value. It is set to 32665. Thus, “preliminary range” + “big hit range” at the time of uncertain change is a value that continues from value 32265 to value 32767. At the time of probability change, the big hit range is set to a value 32438 to a value 32767. The preliminary range is set to a value that is continuous with a value 32437 that is one lower than the value of the probability variation lower limit value ORG-PV-LOW (value 32438) of the big hit range, and the range is a value 32437 to a value 32435. Is set to Thus, “preliminary range” + “big hit range” at the time of probability change is a value that continues from value 32435 to value 32767. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value ORG-V-UPP of the big hit range is set to be the same value as the upper limit value (value 32767) of the big hit determination random number range.

[10-2. Main control side power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 184 and 185. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control MPU 4100a sets the stack pointer (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S10, output of a power failure clear signal is started to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100d shown in FIG. 174 (step S12). This power failure monitoring circuit 4100d is composed of a voltage comparison circuit and a D-type flip-flop IC. The voltage comparison circuit compares the voltage between + 18V and the reference voltage, or compares the voltage between + 9V and the reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. This comparison result shows that when no power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC. The logic becomes LOW and is inputted to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop IC. In step S12, output of the power failure clear signal is started to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC. The power failure clear signal is input to the clear terminal via the main control I / O port 4100b with the logic being LOW. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop IC, and the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, until the latch state is set. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Following step S12, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S14), and it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S16). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), when the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100d. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on to when the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100d. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S14 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, the wait timer process 200 waits for 200 milliseconds (wait timer) (wait timer). ms) is set. In step S16, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. This determination is performed based on a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, as the power failure notice signal.

  Subsequent to step S16, the output of the power failure clear signal is stopped at the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC (step S18). By stopping the output of the power failure clear signal, the logic becomes HI via the main control I / O port 4100b and is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can set the D-type flip-flop IC in the latched state. When the D-type flip-flop IC latches the state where the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal, the D-type flip-flop IC outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal.

  Following step S18, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 624a shown in FIG. 172 is operated (step S20). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated and an operation signal (detection signal) is input to the main control MPU 4100a. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 624a is operated. On the other hand, when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 624a is not operated.

  When the RAM clear switch 624a is operated in step S20, a value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S22). On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 624a is not operated in step S20, the RAM clear is cleared. A value 0 is set in the notification flag RCL-FLG (step S24). This RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 4100a, and games relating to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, etc. It is a flag indicating whether or not to erase information, and is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. Note that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S22 and step S24 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Subsequent to step S22 or step S24, wait timer processing 2 is performed (step S26). In this wait timer process 2, the system waits until the system that performs the drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1400 by the liquid crystal control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4139 shown in FIG. For example, various control programs compressed from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b shown in FIG. 173 are read out and stored in a RAM built in the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as a time until booting (boot timer).

  Following step S26, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S28). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S28, that is, when the game information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S30). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum.

  Following step S30, whether or not the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off) described later. Is determined (step S32). If they match, it is determined whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S34). The backup flag BK-FLG is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off processing described later, such as game information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off process is normally terminated, and to a value of 0 when the main control-side power-off process is not terminated normally.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S34, that is, when the main control side power-off processing is normally terminated, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as power recovery (step S36). In this setting, the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value 0, and the power recovery time information is read from a ROM built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). Time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Here, “when power is restored” means in addition to a state where the power is turned on from a state where the power is cut off, a state where the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power loss, and a reset is detected upon detection of high-frequency irradiation. In addition, the state after the return is also included.

  Subsequent to step S36, power-on command creation processing is performed (step S38). In the power-on command creation process, the game information is read from the backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S28, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S32. Alternatively, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S34, that is, when the main control side power-off process is not normally terminated, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared ( Step S40). Specifically, the value 0 is written in the main control built-in RAM (a predetermined value may be read from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set). Thereby, for example, the initial value 0 is set to the above-described values such as the big hit determination random number, the initial value update type counter, or the like.

  Following step S40, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as an initial setting (step S42). In this setting, initial information is read from the main control built-in ROM, and this initial information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S42, RAM clear notification and test command creation processing is performed (step S44). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation processing, a power-on command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 181 for notifying that the main control built-in RAM is cleared and the initial setting is performed is created. Test commands classified into test relations shown in FIG. 182 for performing various inspections of the control board 4139 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S38 or step S44, interrupt initialization is performed (step S46). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S46, interrupt permission is set. (Step S48). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S46, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S48, the value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S50). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this watchdog timer clear register WCL in order.

  Following step S50, it is determined whether a power failure warning signal is input (step S52). This determination is made based on a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100d. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off or a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, and a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100d.

  When no power failure warning signal is input in step S52, non-winning random number update processing is performed (step S54). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-described big hit determination initial value determination random number, reach determination random number, variation display pattern random number, big hit symbol initial value determination random number, and small hit symbol initial value determination random number Update etc. For example, the counter for updating the big hit determination random number is the above-described initial value update type counter, and the range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value of the big hit determination random number (the range from 0 to 32767) is described below. Each time the control-side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 (counts up). When the big hit determination initial value determination random number is set (updated) by the non-winning random number update processing, this counter counts up from the big hit determination initial value determination random number to the upper limit value (value 32767), and then It counts up from the lower limit value (value 0) to the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination. Then, the big hit determination initial value determination random number is updated again by the non-winning random number update process. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated. It should be noted that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination, random numbers for initial value determination for normal symbol determination, random numbers for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number update process. The random number for determining normal symbols is the same as the method for updating the random number for determining big hits, and the description thereof is omitted.

  Following step S54, the process returns to step S50 again to set the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. In step S52, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. For example, a non-winning random number update process is performed in step S54, and steps S50 to S54 are repeated. The processing from step S50 to step S54 is referred to as “main control side main processing”.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S52, interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S56). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S56, the power failure clear signal is output to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC of the power failure monitoring circuit 4100d via the main control I / O port 4100b, or the start shown in FIG. Mouth solenoid 2015, attacker solenoid 2016, first special symbol display 641, second special symbol display 642, first special symbol storage display 643, second special symbol storage display 644, normal symbol display 645, normal symbol The drive signal output to the memory display 646, the game status display 647, the round display 648, etc. is stopped (step S58). When the power failure clear signal is output, the D-type flip-flop IC can release the latched state.

  Subsequent to step S58, a checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S60). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Subsequent to step S60, the value 1 is set to the backup flag BK-FLG. (Step S62) This completes the storage of the backup information.

  Subsequent to step S62, the watchdog timer is cleared (step S64). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

  Following step S64, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a is reset, and then the main control MPU 4100a performs the main control side power-on process again. The processing from step S56 to step S64 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and performs power-on processing on the main control side by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S32, it is checked whether or not the backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. In step S34, it is checked whether or not the main control side power-off process has been normally completed. I am inspecting. In this way, by checking the backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM twice, it is inspected whether the backup information is stored by an illegal act.

[10-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interruption process is repeated at every interruption period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 184 and 185.

  When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL as shown in FIG. 186 (step S70). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S50 of the main control side power-on process (main control side main process).

  Subsequent to step S70, the interrupt flag is cleared (step S72). When the interrupt flag is cleared, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is counted from the initial value.

  Subsequent to step S72, switch input processing is performed (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, from the general winning opening sensor 2014 that detects a game ball that has entered the two upper general winning openings 2101 out of the four general winning openings 2101 provided in the side winning opening member 2100 shown in FIG. Detection signal, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2014 that detects a game ball that has entered the lower two general winning openings 2101 out of the four general winning openings 2101 provided on the side winning opening member 2100, A detection signal from the count sensor 2013 that detects a game ball that has entered the mouth 2003, a detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2001, and a detection signal from the second start port 2002. A detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012 that detects a game ball that has entered, and a gate sensor that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 2201 of the gate member 2200. FIG. 172 shows a detection signal from the sensor 2202, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3345 (magnet goto detection signal shown in FIG. 216) for detecting fraud using a magnet, and a prize ball command transmitted in a prize ball control process described later. The ACK signal from the payout control board 1186 that informs that the payout control board 1186 is normally received is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area. Further, a detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2001, and a detection from the second start port sensor 2012 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2002. When each signal is read, the corresponding start opening winning command shown in FIG. 182 corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011, a corresponding start port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and there is a detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012. The start opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. In the present embodiment, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2014 that detects a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2101, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2014 that detects a gaming ball that has entered the general winning opening 2101. A detection signal, a detection signal from the count sensor 2013 that detects a game ball that has entered the grand prize opening 2003, a detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2001, This switch input process starts with the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012 that detects the game ball that has entered the second start port 2002 and the detection signal from the gate sensor 2202 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate 2201. The first time is read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs), the second time is read again. . Then, the result read at the second time is compared with the result read at the first time. It is determined whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those with the same result are treated as having no game balls. As described above, in the switch input process, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 2014 and 2014, the count sensor 2013, the first starting opening sensor 2011, the second starting opening sensor 2012, and the gate sensor 2202 are sent from the first to the third time. By performing the reading twice in total, that is, the twice reading that is compared over two times and the twice reading that is compared between the second time and the fourth time, false detection due to chattering, noise, and the like is avoided. Therefore, the reliability of the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 2014 and 2014, the count sensor 2013, the first starting opening sensor 2011, the second starting opening sensor 2012, and the gate sensor 2202 can be improved.

  Subsequent to step S74, timer subtraction processing is performed (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 are turned on according to the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, In addition to the time that the normal symbol display 645 is turned on according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the symbol and normal electric accessory control process, various commands transmitted by the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) are issued. When determining whether or not an ACK signal indicating that the signal is normally received is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result is 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S76, a winning random number update process is performed (step S78). In the winning random number update process, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number described above are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the big hit determination initial value determination random number updated in the non-winning random number update process in step S54 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The initial value determining random number for the big hit symbol and the initial value determining random number for the small hit symbol are also updated. The big hit determination initial value determining random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively. (In this embodiment, the big hit determination initial value determining random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number are shown in FIG. 185. The update is performed in the non-winning random number update process in step S54 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. However, every time an interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven and within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer is generated When the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S54 is random by repeatedly executing the control side main process, the big hit determination initial value determining random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the small hit It is also possible to update the design initial value determination random number only in the non-winning random number update process in step S54). On the other hand, since the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each time the winning random number update process is performed, each counter Counts up. For example, the counter that updates the big hit determination random number counts up the range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value of the big hit determination random number every time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed. This counter counts up from the big hit determination initial value determination random number to the upper limit value, and then counts up from the lower limit value to the big hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value determination random number for jackpot determination is updated by this winning random number update process (this initial value determination random number for jackpot determination) Is also updated in the above-mentioned non-winning random number update process). Note that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination and random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining normal symbols is the same as the method for updating the random number for determining big hits, and the description thereof is omitted.

  Subsequent to step S78, prize ball control processing is performed (step S80). In this prize ball control process, the prize information shown in FIG. 180 for reading out the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and paying out the game ball based on this input information is created, or the main control board 4100 The self-check command shown in FIG. 180 for confirming the connection state between the board and the payout control board 1186 is created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 1186. For example, when one game ball enters the grand prize opening 2003 shown in FIG. 104, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created and transmitted to the payout control board 1186. When the payer ACK signal notifying that the payout control board 1186 has normally received is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command for confirming the connection state between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 1186 is created. To the payout control board 1186.

  Subsequent to step S80, frame command reception processing is performed (step S82). The payout control board 1186 transmits various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) of 1 byte (8 bits) classified into the state display shown in FIG. In the frame command reception process in step S82, when the various commands are normally received, information that informs the payout control board 1186 to that effect is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Also, the normally received command is shaped into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands (frame state 1 command, error clearing navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into the status display in FIG. 182) And stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S82, an illegal act detection process is performed (step S84). In this fraud detection process, in addition to the abnormal state related to the prize ball, the presence / absence of a magnet is checked. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal from the count sensor 2013 is input when the game is not in the big hit game state (when a game ball enters the big prize opening 2003), etc. When a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 182 as an abnormal state is generated or when magnet goto is performed (when the logic of the magnet goto detection signal is HI), the magnet goto The magnetic sensor abnormality display command divided into the notification display shown in FIG. 182 as a state in which the transmission is performed is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. Further, when a magnetic sensor abnormality display command is created, a process of transmitting a magnetic sensor abnormality command (not shown) to the payout control board 1186 is also performed in the fraud detection process which is this process.

  Subsequent to step S84, a special symbol and special electric accessory control process is performed (step S86). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, the value of the big hit determination random number described above is taken out and within the big hit range pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM (for example, as the big hit range, when there is a non-probable change, While it is set in a range from the lower limit value ORG-NV-LOW (value 32668) to the upper limit value ORG-V-UPP (value 32767), the probability change lower limit value ORG-PV-LOW ( Value 32438) to the upper limit value ORG-V-UPP (value 32767).) Is determined (whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state) Taking out the value of the jackpot symbol random number and determining whether or not the value is within the range of the probability variation determination stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (determining whether or not to generate a probability variation) To. When these determination results are based on the first start port sensor 2011, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 181 are created, while the lottery results are based on the second start port sensor 2012. In some cases, various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning effect shown in FIG. 181 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the first special symbol display is performed according to the determined special symbol variation display pattern. The lighting signal output to the first special symbol indicator 641 or the second special symbol indicator 642 is set so that the indicator 641 or the second special symbol indicator 642 is lit, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. To do. Also, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when the game state is a big hit game state, various commands (a big hit opening command, a big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command, a big winning opening 1 A closing display command, a winning prize 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command), and stores them in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or opens / closes the opening / closing member 2006 to the attacker solenoid 2016 When the number of times (round) when the special winning opening 2003 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two times, the two-round display lamp 648a is set to the output of the driving signal. Set lighting signal output to 2 round display lamp 648a to light up The output information is stored in the output information storage area, or when the number of rounds is 15, the output of the lighting signal to the 15 round display lamp 648b is set so that the 15 round display lamp 648b is turned on. The output of the lighting signal to the game state display 647 is set so as to be stored in the storage area or the presence / absence of the probability variation is turned on in a predetermined color, and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S86, normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing is performed (step S88). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate sensor 2202 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when a detection signal is input to the input terminal, the counter value for updating the above-described normal random number for determination per symbol is extracted and the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as gate information To remember.

  This gate information storage area is provided with 0th partition to 3rd partition (four partitions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. It is like that. For example, when gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when a detection signal from the gate sensor 2202 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. To do.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the above-described gate is turned on so that the normal symbol storage display 646 is turned on using the total number of stored gate information as a holding ball. Based on the information, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol memory display 646 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the normal design random number is extracted from the read gate information and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value per normal symbol (referred to as “normal lottery”). Whether or not the movable piece 2005 is to be opened and closed is determined based on the determination result (the lottery result by the normal lottery). The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern, and various commands classified as related to the common symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 645 is set so that the normal symbol display 645 is turned on in accordance with the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol as well as the transmission information storage area described above, and the output information described above Store in the output information storage area. Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the ordinary electric role effect shown in FIG. Is generated and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the drive signal output to the start port solenoid 2015 is set to open and close the movable piece 2005, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. . Further, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the above-described normal symbol variation display pattern random number, and various commands classified as related to the common symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. In addition to storing in the storage area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 645 is set so that the normal symbol display 645 is turned on according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. Remember.

  Subsequent to step S88, port output processing is performed (step S90). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, a main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 1186 when various commands from the payout control board 1186 are normally received from the output terminal based on the output information, or a big winning opening 2003 when the game is in the big hit gaming state. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2016 that opens and closes the opening / closing member 2006, and outputs a drive signal to the start-up solenoid 2015 that opens and closes the movable piece 2005, a 15 round big hit information output signal, Various information related to games (game information) such as 2-round jackpot information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and medium time information output information, start opening prize information output signal, etc. A signal is output to the payout control board 1186.

  Subsequent to step S90, peripheral control board command transmission processing is performed (step S92). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4139. The transmission information includes various commands created in the main control timer interruption process, which is this routine, shown in FIG. Commands, various commands categorized as jackpots, various commands categorized as power-on, various commands categorized as related to ordinary tuning effects, various commands categorized as related to ordinary electric character effects, shown in FIG. Various commands classified into the notification display, various commands classified into the status display, various commands classified into the test-related, and various commands classified into others are stored.

  Subsequent to step S92, a value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S94, the register is switched (returned) (step S96), and this routine is terminated. Here, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the main control MPU 4100a loads the contents of the general-purpose registers on the stack and saves them. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main process on the main control side from being destroyed. In step S96, the contents saved on the stack are read and written to the original register. Note that the main control MPU 4100a sets the interrupt permission after the return in step S96.

[10-4. Special design and special electric accessory control processing]
Next, the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to FIG. This special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed in step S86 in the main control timer interruption process shown in FIG.

  When the special symbol and special electric accessory control process is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011 shown in FIG. 172 as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S100). This determination is made by reading the presence / absence of a detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011 in the switch input process of step S74 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 186 and storing it in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Perform based on input information. In step S100, input information is read from this input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011.

  When there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011 in the input information in step S100, main control built-in as a transmission information is a start port winning command classified in the other shown in FIG. 182 corresponding to the first start port sensor 2011. The information is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM (step S102), and a value indicating that a game ball has entered the first start opening 2001 shown in FIG. 104 is stored in the start opening identification area of the main control built-in RAM (step S102). S104), a start opening winning process is performed (step S106). In the start-up prize winning process, the detailed description thereof will be described later, and various random numbers described above are acquired. The values stored in the start port identification area are the game information described above, and are backed up in the main control side power-off process shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S106 or when there is no detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011 in the input information in step S100, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012 shown in FIG. (Step S108). This determination is based on the input information stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM by reading the presence / absence of the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012 in the switch input process of step S74 in the main control side timer interrupt process. Do. In step S108, input information is read from this input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the second starter sensor 2012.

  When there is a detection signal from the second starter sensor 2012 in the input information in step S108, the transmission information stored in the main control built-in RAM is sent as a starter prize command classified into the other corresponding to the second starter sensor 2012 as transmission information. In the area (step S110), a value indicating that a game ball has entered the second start port 2002 shown in FIG. 104 is stored in the start port identification area of the main control built-in RAM (step S112). A winning process is performed (step S114).

  Subsequent to step S114 or when there is no detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012 in the input information in step S108, the type of branching process executed in accordance with the progress of the game is designated. The value is checked (step S116). This game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is updated in each branch process executed in accordance with the progress of the game. In step S116, the process proceeds to a branch process designated based on the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area. When the branch process is completed, this routine is terminated. The value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area is game information and is backed up in the main control side power-off process.

  In step S116, based on the value of the game progress state variable, special symbol variation waiting processing (step S118), special symbol variation processing (step S120), special symbol jackpot determination processing (step S122), special symbol, as branch processing. Outage stop processing (step S124), special symbol big hit stop processing (step S126), interval process before opening the big prize opening (step S128), big prize opening opening process (step S130), big winning opening closing process (step S132) Alternatively, the special winning opening opening end interval process (step S134) is performed.

  In the special symbol change waiting process of step S118, the first special symbol display shown in FIG. 641 and the second special symbol display unit 642 perform processing for starting the variation display of the special symbol.

  In the special symbol changing process of step S120, a process of starting the special symbol change display on the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 is performed.

  In the special symbol jackpot determination process in step S122, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first start port 2001 or the second start port 2002, it is determined whether or not a big hit game state is to be generated.

  In the special symbol losing stop processing in step S124, when the big hit gaming state is not generated, processing for stopping the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 and informing the fact, etc. I do.

  In the special symbol jackpot stop process in step S126, when the jackpot game state is generated, a process of stopping the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 and informing the fact, etc. I do.

  In the interval process before the big winning opening is opened in step S128, a process for notifying that the big hit gaming state is generated and the big hit operation is started is performed.

  In the big winning opening opening process of step S130, the process related to the big hit operation that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2003 by changing the opening / closing member 2006 from the closed state to the open state shown in FIG. Do.

  In the large winning opening closing process in step S132, processing relating to a big hit operation that makes it difficult for a game ball to enter the large winning opening 2003 is performed by changing the open / close member 2006 from the open state to the closed state.

  In the winning opening opening end interval process of step S134, it is determined whether or not the operation has ended with a big hit, and when it has ended, a process for notifying that is performed.

[10-4-1. Processing at start-up winning a prize]
Next, the start opening winning time process will be described with reference to FIG. This start opening winning time process is executed in step S106 or step S114 in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process shown in FIG.

  When the start opening winning process is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the second starting opening winning control data table as control data as shown in FIG. 189 (step S140). This second start port winning time control data table is based on the fact that a game ball entering the second start port 2002 shown in FIG. 104 is detected by the second start port sensor 2012 shown in FIG. 172. Is a data table in which the various random numbers described above used for the advancement are stored as the second start memory information, and stored in the start port winning control data storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The control data table at the time of the second start opening winning prize manages a plurality of pieces of second start storing information, and enters the second start opening 2002 with the total number of sections storing the second start storing information. It is possible to grasp the number of special symbol 2 actuated balls that are not used for game progress. In the present embodiment, the total number of sections in which the second start memory information is stored in the second start port winning time control data table is set to a total of four sections from the 0th section to the third section. The information in the data table stored in the start opening winning control data storage area is the game information described above, and is backed up in the main control side power-off process shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S140, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012 is input (step S142). This determination is made based on the value stored in the start port identification area of the main control built-in RAM in the process of step S104 or step S112 in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process shown in FIG. In step S142, a value is read from the start port identification area to determine whether or not there is a detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012.

  When there is no detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012 in step S142, the first start port winning time control data table is set as control data (step S144). This first start port winning time control data table is based on the fact that the game ball that entered the first start port 2001 shown in FIG. 104 is detected by the first start port sensor 2011 shown in FIG. 172. Is a data table in which the various random numbers described above used for the progress are stored as the first start storage information, and stored in the start opening prize control data storage area. The first start opening winning control data table divides and manages a plurality of first start storage information, and enters the first start opening 2001 with the total number of sections storing the first start storage information. It is possible to grasp the number of special symbol 1 operation reserved balls that are not yet used in the progress of the game. In the present embodiment, the total number of sections in which the first start memory information is stored in the first start opening winning control data table is set to a total of four sections from the zeroth section to the third section.

  Subsequent to step S144 or when there is a detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012 in step S142, the special symbol * number of suspended balls is acquired from the control data (step S146). The special symbol * "actual holding ball number" * is the first start opening prize data table set in the control data in step S144 when step S146 is performed subsequent to step S144. This means that the number of special symbol 1 operation hold balls is acquired by the total number of sections storing the first start memory information in the start opening winning time data table, whereas in step S142, from the second start opening sensor 2012. When step S146 is subsequently performed when there is a detection signal, since the second start port winning data table is set in the control data in step S140, the second start port winning data table in the second start port winning data table is set. This means that the number of special symbol 2 operation holding balls is acquired by the total number of sections in which the start memory information is stored. That is, in step S146, the number of special symbol 1 operation reservation balls or the number of special symbol 2 operation reservation balls is acquired.

  It is determined whether or not the number of special symbol 1 action reserved balls or the number of special symbol 2 action reserved balls acquired in step S146 is 4 or more (step S148). This value 4 is the total number of sections in which the first start memory information is stored in the first start opening prize control data table and the section in which the second start memory information is stored in the second start opening prize control data table. The total number is the same as the value set in this embodiment. In step S148, based on the number of special symbol 1 operation reservation balls or the number of special symbol 2 operation reservation balls, whether or not there is an empty section for storing the first start memory information in the first start port winning time control data table. It is determined whether or not there is an empty section for storing the second start memory information in the second start port winning time control data table.

  In step S148, when the number of special symbol 1 operation reservation balls or the number of special symbol 2 operation reservation balls is not 4 or more (less than 4), that is, the first start storage information is stored in the first start port winning time control data table. When there is an empty section for storing, or when there is an empty section for storing the second start memory information in the second start port winning time control data table, the big hit determination random number, for the big hit symbol A random number, a reach determination random number, a variation display pattern random number, and a small hit design random number are acquired and stored in the control data (step S150). In this step S150, when the first start opening prize data table is set in the control data, the obtained various random numbers are stored in the first start opening prize data table as the first start storage information. When the second start opening prize data table is set in the control data, the obtained various random numbers are stored in the empty section of the second start opening winning data table as the second start storage information. For example, in step S150, when the first start opening prize data table is set in the control data, when the number of special symbol 1 action-reserved balls is 2 in the determination in step S148, that is, the first start opening winning prize. When the first start storage information is already stored from the 0th section to the 1st section of the hour control data table, the second section and the third section following the first section of the first start port winning time control data table Since this is an empty section, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number, and the small hit symbol acquired in step S150 are added to the second block following the first block. Random numbers are stored. As described above, in step S150, there are a plurality of empty sections from the 0th section to the 3rd section of the first start opening winning control data table or the 0th section to the 3rd section of the second starting opening winning control data table. In the case where it exists, the acquired big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number, reach determination random number, variation display pattern random number, and small hit symbol random number are stored in the one with the smaller partition number.

  Subsequent to step S150, special symbol hold identification history update processing is performed (step S152). In this special symbol hold identification history update process, the first start memory information stored in the first start port winning time data table and the second start memory information stored in the second start port winning time data table are mutually connected. A history of the order of the stored order is created and stored as start port identification history information in the pending identification history storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S152, storage prefetch processing is performed (step S154), and this routine is terminated. Although detailed description will be given later in this storage prefetch process, when the process is started, the type of effect is determined based on the various random numbers acquired in step S150 that are not yet used for the progress of the game at this time. By doing so, the player is notified of information about the various random numbers acquired (for example, jackpot and reach out) before the game effect that the acquired random numbers are actually used for the progress of the game is performed. In other words, in the memory prefetching process, the various random numbers acquired in step S150 that have not been used yet for the progress of the game are prefetched to determine the type of the prefetch effect, and the acquired various random numbers actually contribute to the progress of the game. By performing the pre-reading effect determined before performing the game effect to be used, the player is notified of information regarding the various random numbers that have been acquired.

  On the other hand, when the number of special symbol 1 operation reservation balls is 4 or more in step S148, that is, the special symbol 1 operation reservation balls number is a free space for storing the first start memory information in the first start port winning time control data table. When there is no remaining or when the number of special symbol 2 operation holding balls is 4 or more, that is, when there is no empty section for storing the second start memory information in the second start opening winning control data table This routine is finished as it is.

  In the present embodiment, when the start opening winning process is started, first, the second start opening winning control data table is set as control data in step S140, and then in step S142, the second start opening sensor 2012 is set. In the determination, if there is no detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2012, the control data table for setting the first starting port winning prize is set as control data in step S144 (flow). ). That is, the presence / absence of a detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012 is determined, and after this determination, the control flow branches to two flows and is used as control data in the first start port winning time control data table or the second starting port winning time control. There is no flow of setting the data table. This is because the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an environment that is extremely susceptible to noise caused by electrostatic discharge of the game ball, and the main control board 4100 is one of the important control boards for controlling the progress of the game. This is part of noise countermeasures. If this determination is skipped when the presence or absence of a detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012 happens to be affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball, the two flows after this determination It is impossible to branch to the first start port winning control data table and the second starting port winning control data table as control data, and the first start memory information or the second start can be set. This is a disadvantageous situation for the player that the stored information is not stored. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the determination in step S142 happens to be influenced by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball, the control data table at the time of winning the second start opening is already set as control data in step S140. Therefore, it is not disadvantageous for the player by being stored as at least the second start storage information.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the special symbol hold identification history update process in step S152, the first start memory information stored in the first start port winning data table and the second start port winning data table are stored. The second start memory information and the order in which they are stored are created in the order history, but other specifications that are used for the progress of the game using this created history It has been introduced to share processing with pachinko machines. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the second start storage information has a specification that is used for the progress of the game in preference to the first start storage information, and therefore the second start storage information is based on the history created in step S152. Although the second start memory information and the first start memory information are not used for the progress of the game, whether or not the first start memory information and the second start memory information are stored in the created history in the special symbol change waiting process described later It is used for the judgment.

[10-4-2. Prefetch processing]
Next, the storage prefetch process will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 and 191. FIG. This storage prefetching process is executed in step S154 in the start opening winning time process shown in FIG. In the storage prefetching process, the prefetching effect is determined by determining whether the prefetching effect is won or lost based on the values of the jackpot determination random number and the reach determination random number. At this time, the big hit determination random number is not compared by referring to the big hit range stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM described above, but the lottery determination range in which the same range as the big hit range is set in advance is main controlled. Reference is made from the built-in ROM. In other words, the jackpot range stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM is referred to in the special symbol change waiting process of step S118 in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process shown in FIG. Thus, the lottery determination range stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM is referred to in the storage prefetching process which is this routine. At the time of non-probability change, the lottery determination range is set to a value 32668 to a value 32767, similarly to the big hit range. The non-probable lower limit value NV-LOW is the same value as the non-probable variable lower limit value ORG-NV-LOW (value 32668) of the big hit range, and the upper limit value V-UPP of the lottery determination range is the upper limit value of the big hit range This is the same value as ORG-V-UPP (upper limit value of random number for jackpot determination (value 32767)). In addition, for the preliminary range that is continuous with the lottery determination range, the upper limit value is set to a value that continues to a value 32667 that is one smaller than the value of the uncertain variation lower limit value NV-LOW (value 32668) of the lottery determination range, The range is set to value 32667 to value 32665. Thus, “preliminary range” + “lottery determination range” at the time of uncertain change is a value that continues from value 32265 to value 32767. Further, at the time of probability change, the lottery determination range is set to a value 32438 to a value 32767, similarly to the big hit range. The probability variation lower limit PV-LOW is the same as the value of the jackpot range probability variation lower limit value ORG-PV-LOW (value 32438), and the lottery determination range upper limit value V-UPP is the jackpot range upper limit value ORG-. It is the same value as V-UPP (upper limit value of random number for jackpot determination (value 32767)). In addition, for the preliminary range that is continuous with the lottery determination range, the upper limit value is set to a value that continues to a value 32437 that is one smaller than the probability variation lower limit PV-LOW value (value 32438) of the lottery determination range. The range is set to value 32437 to value 32435. Thus, “preliminary range” + “lottery determination range” at the time of probability change is a value that continues from value 32435 to value 32767.

  When the storage prefetching process is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not a detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012 is input, as shown in FIGS. 190 and 191. (Step S160). This determination is made based on the value stored in the start port identification area of the main control built-in RAM in the process of step S104 or step S112 in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process shown in FIG. In step S160, a value is read from this starting port identification area to determine whether or not there is a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2012.

  When there is no detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012 in step S160, it is determined whether or not the time is short (step S162). This determination is made based on the game information set in the special symbol variation waiting process of step S118 in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process shown in FIG. As described above, this game information is stored in the main control built-in RAM. In step S162, based on the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM, the value of the short time flag is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the short time gaming state is occurring as the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. judge.

  If it is not time-saving in step S162, it is determined whether or not a big hit is being made (step S164). This determination is made based on the game information set in the special symbol variation waiting process of step S118 in the special symbol and special electric equipment control process. In step S162, based on the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM, whether the value of the big hit flag is acquired and whether the big hit gaming state is generated as the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the big hit is being hit) Determine whether or not.

  When the big hit is made at step S164 or when there is a detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012 at step 160, a big hit judging random number is acquired from the control data (step S166). This control data is the second start opening prize data table set in step S140 in the start opening winning prize process or the first start opening prize data table set in step S144. In step S166, in step S150 of the start opening winning time process, the 0th section to the 3rd section of the first start opening winning control data table, or the 0th section to the third section of the second starting opening winning control data table. If there are multiple vacant partitions before, the stored random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number, reach determination random number, variable display pattern random number, and small hit symbol random number) ) To obtain the jackpot determination random number. For example, in step S150, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, the reach determination random number, the variation display pattern random number, and the small bonus symbol random number are stored in the second section of the first start opening winning control data table. If it is, the big hit determination random number stored in the second section is acquired.

  Subsequent to step S166, based on the value of the probability variation flag, it is determined whether or not a probability variation has occurred in the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S168). This determination is made based on the game information set in the special symbol variation waiting process of step S118 in the special symbol and special electric equipment control process. In step S162, based on the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM, the value of the probability variation flag is acquired to determine whether or not the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a probability variation. To do.

  When the value of the probability variation flag indicates non-probability change in step S168, that is, when the probability fluctuation has not occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (during non-probability change), the jackpot determination obtained in step S166 It is determined whether or not the random number is greater than or equal to the uncertain variation lower limit value NV-LOW (step S170).

  On the other hand, when the value of the probability change flag indicates the probability change in step S168, that is, when the probability fluctuation is occurring in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (at the time of the probability change), the jackpot determination obtained in step S166. It is determined whether or not the random number is greater than or equal to the probability variation lower limit PV-LOW (step S174).

  When the big hit determination random number is greater than or equal to the non-probable variation lower limit value NV-LOW in step S170, or when the big hit determination random number is greater than or equal to the probable variation lower limit value PV-LOW in step S172, the big hit determination random number is the upper limit value V−. It is determined whether the value is equal to or higher than UPP (step S174). In the present embodiment, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is branched into two flows: a state in which a probability variation has occurred and a state in which no probability variation has occurred. On the other hand, in the determination of the upper limit value of the jackpot determination random number, a common value called the upper limit value V-UPP is used. Note that the probability variation lower limit PV-LOW is set to a value larger than the non-accuracy variation lower limit NV-LOW and smaller than the upper limit V-UPP. That is, the non-probable variation lower limit value NV-LOW <the probability variation lower limit value PV-LOW <the upper limit value V-UPP.

  When the big hit determination random number is not greater than or equal to the upper limit value V-UPP in step S174, that is, when the big hit determination random number is within the lottery determination range, it is determined that the pre-reading effect has been won and the big hit is determined from the control data. A design random number is acquired (step S176). As described above, this control data is the second start port winning time data table set in step S140 in the start port winning time processing or the first start port winning time data table set in step S144. In step S176, as in step S166, in step S150 of the start opening winning time process, the 0th to 3rd sections of the first starting opening winning control data table, or the second start opening winning control data table. When there are a plurality of vacant sections from 0 section to 3rd section, various stored random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number, reach determination random number, variable display pattern random number, And random numbers for small hit symbols). For example, in step S150, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number, and the small bonus symbol random number are stored in the second section of the first start opening winning control data table. If so, the jackpot symbol random number stored in the second section is acquired.

  Subsequent to step S176, prefetch effect type determination processing based on the jackpot symbol random number is performed (step S178). In the prefetch effect type determination process based on the jackpot symbol random number, the prefetch effect type determination process is performed based on the jackpot symbol random number acquired in step S176. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of prefetch effects are prepared, and a plurality of patterns are prepared for one type of prefetch effects. For this reason, in this embodiment, about 400 patterns of pre-reading effects are prepared.

  On the other hand, when the big hit determination random number is not greater than or equal to the non-probable variation lower limit NV-LOW in step S170, or when the big hit determination random number is not greater than or equal to the probable variation lower limit PV-LOW in step S172. Alternatively, when the value is equal to or greater than the upper limit value V-UPP in step S174, that is, when the big hit determination random number is not within the lottery determination range (out of the lottery determination range), the reach determination random number is acquired from the control data (step S180). ). As described above, this control data is the second start port winning time data table set in step S140 in the start port winning time processing or the first start port winning time data table set in step S144. In step S180, similarly to step S166, in step S150 in the start opening winning time process, the 0th to 3rd sections of the first starting opening winning control data table, or the second start opening winning control data table. When there are a plurality of vacant sections from 0 section to 3rd section, various stored random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number, reach determination random number, variable display pattern random number, And the random number for reach determination from the random number for small hits symbol). For example, in step S150, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number, and the small bonus symbol random number are stored in the second section of the first start opening winning control data table. If this is the case, the reach determination random number stored in the second section is acquired.

  Following step S180, based on the reach determination random number acquired in step S180, it is determined whether or not to perform reach (reach off) (step S182). In this determination, it is determined whether the acquired reach determination random number is a value within the reach determination range.

  When the reach determination random number is a value within the reach determination range in step S182, the prefetch effect type determination process based on the reach determination random number is performed (step S184). In the type determination process of the prefetch effect based on the reach determination random number, the big hit determination random number is a value continuous with the non-probability lower limit NV-LOW of the lottery determination range at the time of non-probability change, and the non-probability change lower limit NV-LOW. When the value is within the preliminary range (value 32665 to value 32667) having a smaller value as the upper limit value, or a value that is continuous with the probability variation lower limit PV-LOW of the lottery determination range at the time of probability variation, the probability variation lower limit value PV-LOW One of the types of prefetching effects determined in the prefetching effect type determination process based on the big hit symbol random number in step S178 when it is within the preliminary range (value 32435 to value 32437) with the smaller value as the upper limit. While the process of determining the type of pre-reading effect is performed, the non-probability variation lower limit NV-LOW of the lottery determination range when the big hit determination random number is uncertain When the value is not within the preliminary range (value 32665 to value 32667) that is a continuous value and smaller than the non-probable change lower limit value NV-LOW, or the probability change lower limit value PV-LOW of the lottery determination range at the time of probability change When the value is not within the preliminary range (value 32435 to value 32437) that is a continuous value and smaller than the probability variation lower limit PV-LOW, the prefetch effect is based on the reach determination random number acquired in step S180. Process to determine the type.

  Subsequent to step S178 or step S184, a random number for variable display pattern is acquired from the control data (step S186). As described above, this control data is the second start port winning time data table set in step S140 in the start port winning time processing or the first start port winning time data table set in step S144. In step S186, similarly to step S166, step S176, or step S180, in step S150 in the start opening winning time process, the 0th section to the 3rd section of the first start opening winning control data table, or the second start opening When there are a plurality of empty sections in the winning control data table from the 0th section to the 3rd section, various stored random numbers (a big hit determination random number, a big hit design random number, a reach determination random number) The random number for the variable display pattern is obtained from the random number for the variable display pattern and the random number for the small hit symbol. For example, in step S150, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number, and the small bonus symbol random number are stored in the second section of the first start opening winning control data table. If so, the random number for the variable display pattern stored in the second section is acquired.

  Subsequent to step S188, based on the prefetching effect determined in step S188, the special symbol * memorized prefetching command and the special symbol * memory command shown in FIG. Each is set in the transmission information storage area of the control built-in RAM (step S190), and this routine is terminated. The special symbol * memorized prefetch effect command and the special symbol * memorized command "*" are the special symbol 1 memorized prefetched effect determined in step S188 based on the first starting memorized information in the data table at the time of the first medal opening prize. This means that a command is created and a special symbol 1 storage command is created and set as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Based on the second start storage information, the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command determined in step S188 is created, and the special symbol 2 storage command is created and transmitted as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. It means to set each.

  On the other hand, if the time is short in step S162, or if it is a big hit in step S164, or if the reach determination random number is a value outside the reach determination range in step S182, it is deselected for the prefetch effect. Since it is determined that the pre-reading effect is not performed as a thing (as if it is out of the pre-reading effect lottery), the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command and the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command are not created in step S190. A symbol * storage command is created and set as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and this routine is terminated.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the second start memory information stored in the second start port winning data table is prioritized over the first start memory information stored in the first start port winning data table. Based on the two start memory information, it is configured to determine whether or not the implementation of the pre-reading effect as the suggestion effect is won. If the second start memory information is not stored (stored), and it is determined in step S164 that the non-time saving gaming state is being controlled (during non-time saving), based on the first start memory information. Whether the winning of the pre-reading effect is won or not is determined based on the jackpot determination random number in step S174 or the determination based on the reach determination random number in step S182, while being controlled in the short-time gaming state (during time reduction) Is determined based on the first start storage information, it is determined not to determine whether or not the pre-reading effect is won, and the determination based on the jackpot determination random number in step S174 or The determination based on the reach determination random number in step S182 is not performed. As a result, when the pre-reading effect is not executed because the lottery for the pre-reading effect based on the second start-up memory information is not selected, the game ball accidentally enters the first starting port 2001 and the first starting port sensor 2011 Even if the first start memory information based on the detection signal is stored in the first start port winning time data table, the pre-read based on the first start memory information is controlled when the time-saving gaming state is being controlled (the time is short). Since the lottery for the performance is not performed, even if the lottery for the implementation of the pre-reading effect based on the first start memory information is won, the pre-reading effect is not performed so that the first start memory is stored. There is no notification that there is a high possibility of hitting information. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 itself cannot inform the player how to continuously generate the big hit gaming state.

  In addition, even when the short-time gaming state is controlled, when a game ball enters the second start port 2002, the second start memory information based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012 is stored when the second start port is won. Since it is stored in the data table and it is determined whether or not the execution of the pre-reading effect is won based on the second start memory information, the first start memory is stored when the time-saving gaming state is controlled. While the lottery for performing the pre-reading effect based on the information is not performed, the pre-reading effect based on the second start memory information is performed regardless of being controlled in the non-time-saving gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. It is like that. That is, when the pre-reading effect based on the second start-up storage information is won while being controlled in the short-time state, the player can obtain a sense of expectation due to the execution of the pre-reading effect. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game when it is controlled in the time-saving state.

[10-5. Special symbol waiting process]
Next, the special symbol variation waiting process will be described with reference to FIG. This special symbol variation waiting process is executed in step S118 in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process shown in FIG.

  When the special symbol variation waiting process is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the value stored in the special symbol hold identification history area is not zero (value 0) as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S200). This determination is made based on the start opening identification history information stored in the hold identification history storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the special symbol hold identification history update process of step S152 in the start opening winning process shown in FIG. The start port identification history information includes the first start memory information stored in the first start port winning data table and the second start memory information stored in the second start port winning data table. It shows the history of the order in which the data are stored in the order. In step S200, based on the total number of the first start memory information and the second start memory information stored in the start port identification history information, when the total number is zero (value 0), the first start memory is stored in the start port identification history information. While it is determined that no information or second start memory information is stored, the first start memory information or the second start memory information is stored in the start port identification history information when the total number is not zero (value 0). Is determined.

  When the value stored in the special symbol hold identification history area is zero (value 0) in step S200, that is, no first start memory information or second start memory information is stored in the start port identification history information. Sometimes, the routine is terminated as it is, but when the value stored in the special symbol hold identification history area is not zero (value 0) in step S200, that is, the first start memory information or the second start is included in the start port identification history information. When the stored information is stored, the special symbol 2 variation setting data is set as variation setting data (step S202). This special symbol 2 variation setting data is set with an address indicating the 0th section among the 0th section to the 4th section of the second start opening winning control data table stored in the above starting opening winning control data storage area. Is done.

  Subsequent to step S202, the number of special symbol 2 operation reserved balls is acquired (step S204). As described above, the special symbol 2 operation reserved ball number is acquired by the total number of sections storing the second start memory information in the second start port winning time data table.

  Subsequent to step S204, it is determined whether or not the acquired number of special symbol 2 action reserved balls is zero (value 0) (step S206). This determination is performed based on the total number of partitions in which the second start memory information acquired in step S204 is stored. When the total number is not zero (value 0), the second start memory information is stored, so FIG. While the game ball that entered the second starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 4 is grasped that there is a special symbol 2 operation holding ball number that has not yet been used for the progress of the game, when the total number is zero (value 0) Since the two start memory information is not stored, it is grasped that there is no special symbol 2 operation holding ball number that the game ball that has entered the second start port 2002 is not yet used for the progress of the game.

  When the number of the special symbol 2 operation reserved balls acquired in step S206 is zero (value 0), that is, the game balls that have entered the second starting port 2002 are not yet used for the progress of the game. When there is no number, special symbol 1 variation setting data is set as variation setting data (step S208). This special symbol 1 variation setting data is set with an address indicating the 0th section among the 0th section to the 4th section of the first start opening winning control data table stored in the above starting opening winning control data storage area. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the number of special symbol 2 action hold balls acquired in step S206 is not zero (value 0), that is, the game balls that have entered the second start port 2002 are not yet used for the progress of the game. When there is a ball number or following step S208, the holding history is shifted (step S210). In step S210, when the special symbol 2 fluctuation setting data is set as the fluctuation setting data in step S202, the 0th section according to the address indicating the 0th section of the second starting port winning time control data table set in the fluctuation setting data. Is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, and the second start storage information is stored in the first to third sections, the section number becomes smaller. As described above, the second start memory information stored in each section number is shifted. For example, when the second start memory information is stored in the first section, the second start memory information is shifted from the first section to the zeroth section, or the second start memory information is stored in the second section. When the second start memory information is shifted from the second section to the first section, or when the second start memory information is stored in the third section, the second start memory information is transferred from the third section to the first section. Shift to 2 sections. In step S210, when the special symbol 1 fluctuation setting data is set as the fluctuation setting data in step S208, the first symbol according to the address indicating the 0th section of the first start opening winning control data table set in the fluctuation setting data is used. When the first start memory information stored in the zero section is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, and the first start memory information is stored in the first section to the third section, the section number is The first start memory information stored in each section number is shifted so as to be smaller. For example, when the first start memory information is stored in the first section, the first start memory information is shifted from the first section to the zeroth section, or the first start memory information is stored in the second section. When the first start memory information is shifted from the second section to the first section, or when the first start memory information is stored in the third section, the first start memory information is transferred from the third section to the first section. Shift to 2 sections.

  Subsequent to step S210, special symbol / flag setting processing is performed (step S212). In this special symbol / flag setting process, the big hit determination random number value is extracted based on the first start memory information or the second start memory information shifted to the work area in step S210, and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether the value is within the big hit range (determines whether or not the big hit gaming state is generated) (referred to as “special lottery”), or the value within the small hit determination range Determine whether or not there is a value (determine whether or not to generate a small hit gaming state), take out the value of the random number for the big hit symbol, a value within the range of the probability variation hit determination stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM Or the like (determination of whether or not to generate a probability fluctuation). Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of big hit is set higher than normal time (also referred to as non-probability change. The probability of big hit set in normal time (non-probability change) is called low probability). The above-mentioned jackpot range is read from the normal time determination table at low probability (at the time of non-probability change), while it is at high probability (at the time of probability change). In this case, it is read from the probability variation determination table. In the special symbol / flag setting process, the short game when the variation time of the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 shown in FIG. 169 is set shorter than the normal time. When the state is generated, the value 1 (short time medium) is set as the value of the short time flag, and when the short time gaming state is not generated, the value 0 (non-short time medium) is set as the value of the short time flag. In the special symbol / flag setting process, the value 1 (big hit) is set as the value of the big hit flag when the big hit gaming state is generated, and the value 0 (excluded) as the value of the big hit flag when the big hit gaming state is not generated. ) Is set. In the special symbol / flag setting process, the value 1 (probability variation) is set as the value of the probability variation flag when the probability variation is generated, and the value 0 (non-probability variation) is set as the value of the probability variation flag when the probability variation is not generated. ) Is set.

  Subsequent to step S212, special symbol variation display pattern setting processing is performed (step S214), and this routine is terminated. In this special symbol variation display pattern setting process, the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 is based on the first start memory information or the second start memory information shifted to the work area in step S210. The time for deriving and displaying the special symbol (that is, the variation time from the start of variation of the symbol to the stop of variation) is set and classified as related to special effects shown in FIG. The various commands to be executed are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  In this embodiment, after setting the special symbol 2 variation setting data as variation setting data in step S202, it is determined in step S206 whether or not the number of special symbol 2 operation suspension balls is zero (value 0). In this determination, when the number of special symbol 2 operation reservation balls is zero (value 0), the flow is to set special symbol 1 variation setting data as variation setting data in step S206. That is, when the number of special symbol 2 operation reserved balls is not zero (value 0), the special symbol 2 variation setting data set as the variation setting data in step S202 is given priority regardless of the presence of the special symbol 1 operation retention balls. Subsequent processing proceeds based on (second start memory information stored in the 0th section to the 4th section of the second start port winning time control data table). Such processing from step S202 to step S208 is referred to as “priority variation processing”.

[10-6. Special symbol variation display pattern setting process]
Next, the special symbol variation display pattern setting process will be described with reference to FIG. This special symbol variation display pattern setting process is executed in step S214 in the special symbol variation waiting process shown in FIG.

  When the special symbol variation display pattern setting process is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 checks the value of the big hit flag as shown in FIG. 193 (step S220). This determination is made based on the value of the big hit flag set in the special symbol / flag setting process of step S212 in the special symbol fluctuation waiting process shown in FIG. As described above, this jackpot determination flag is set to “1” as “big hit” when a big hit gaming state is generated, and is set to “0” as “out” when no big hit gaming state is generated.

  When the jackpot flag is 1 in step S220, that is, when it is a jackpot, a jackpot symbol random number is acquired from the * starting storage information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM (step S221A). “*” In the * starting storage information is the information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the process of step S210 (holding history shift) in the special symbol fluctuation waiting process shown in FIG. When it is one start memory information, it means that a random number for jackpot symbol is obtained from the first start memory information, whereas when it is second start memory information, a jackpot symbol random number is obtained from this second start memory information. It means to get. That is, in step S221A, the big hit symbol random number is taken out from the first start memory information shifted to the work area, or the big hit symbol random number is taken out from the second start memory information.

  Subsequent to step S221A, a special symbol determination process is performed based on the extracted jackpot symbol random number (step S221B). In this special symbol determination process, the special symbol stopped and displayed on the segment display device is calculated according to the calculation method shown in FIG. 171, and the first exclusive OR calculation process, the shift amount determination process, A bit shift operation process and a second exclusive OR operation process are sequentially performed. If the jackpot symbol random number extracted in step S221A is stored in the first start memory information, an operation for determining a special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 641 is performed, or step If the jackpot symbol random number extracted in S221A is stored in the second start memory information, an operation for determining a special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 642 is performed. The special symbol determined by this calculation is a mode in which one of the seven segments (segment a to segment g) and the dot (dot Dt) of the segment display is turned on and one is turned off (lighting mode at the big hit) It becomes. This calculation result is stored in the work area until the big hit lighting mode is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642, that is, when the variation display of the special symbol is stopped, that is, As a stop symbol, the output information described above is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S221B, the big hit hour variation display pattern table is selected (step S222). The big hit hour fluctuation display pattern table is a time for deriving and displaying a special symbol on the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 when a probability variation big hit or a non-probable variation big hit is generated (that is, , A variation time from the start of variation of the symbol to the variation stop) is defined in advance, and is stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM of the main control MPU 4100a. In this variation time, various effects are developed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. For example, a device that generates a jackpot gaming state with a simple reach (normal reach) that is unlikely to generate a jackpot gaming state, this normal reach There are those that have a reach mode, such as those that generate a big hit gaming state with a super reach that has a longer execution time than that and a high probability that a big hit gaming state will occur, and a big hit gaming state occurs after the end of the variable time .

  Subsequent to step S222, a variable display pattern random number is acquired from the * starting storage information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). “*” In the * starting storage information is the information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the process of step S210 (holding history shift) in the special symbol fluctuation waiting process shown in FIG. This means that the random display pattern random number is obtained from the first start memory information when it is the first start memory information, whereas the variable display pattern for the second start memory information is obtained from the second start memory information. It means to get a random number. That is, in step S224, the variable display pattern random number is extracted from the first start memory information shifted to the work area, or the variable display pattern random number is extracted from the second start memory information.

  Subsequent to step S224, a variation display pattern is determined from the big hit variation display pattern tail selected in step S222 based on the extracted variation display pattern random number (step S226). Here, in accordance with the calculation method for determining the special symbol to be stopped and displayed on the segment display shown in FIG. 171, the first special random number for the jackpot symbol is extracted from the first start memory information shifted to the work area. For performing a calculation for determining a special symbol to be displayed on the symbol display 641, or for determining a special symbol to be displayed on the second special symbol display 642 by extracting a random number for the jackpot symbol from the second start memory information Perform calculations. The special symbol determined by this calculation is a mode in which one of the seven segments (segment a to segment g) and the dot (dot Dt) of the segment display is turned on and one is turned off (lighting mode at the big hit) It becomes. This calculation result is stored in the work area until the big hit lighting mode is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642, and when the variation display of the special symbol stops, The output information is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S226, an effect command is created based on the determined variation display pattern (step S228), and this routine is terminated. Here, as the effect command, a special figure * synchronous effect start command classified as related to the special effect * synchronous effect shown in FIG. set. Note that “*” in the special figure * synchronization effect and special figure * synchronization effect start command relates to the first special symbol display 641 and is classified as special figure 1 synchronization effect. In contrast to the meaning of creating a start command, for the second special symbol display 642, it means creating a special figure 2 synchronized effect start command that is classified as related to the special figure 2 synchronized effect. .

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is 0 in step S220, that is, when it is out of place, special symbol determination processing is performed (step S229). This special symbol determination process is the same as the calculation method performed in the process of step S221B, and is obtained by calculating a special symbol stopped and displayed on the segment display according to the calculation method shown in FIG. A first exclusive OR operation process, a shift amount determination process, a left bit shift operation process, and a second exclusive OR operation process are sequentially performed. Here, when the information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is the first start memory information, a special symbol that conveys the error that is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 641 is calculated and obtained. When it is the start memory information, a special symbol that conveys the error that is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 642 is obtained by calculation. As shown in FIG. 171, the special symbol determined by this calculation is “11111111B”, and the seven segments (segment a to segment g) and the dots (dots Dt) of the segment display are all lit (disconnected. Lighting mode). This calculation result is stored in the work area until the lighting mode at the time of disconnection is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642, and is output when the variation display of the special symbol is stopped. Information is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Following step S229, a reach determination random number is obtained from the * starting storage information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM (step S230). “*” In the * starting storage information is the information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the process of step S210 (holding history shift) in the special symbol fluctuation waiting process shown in FIG. This means that the reach determination random number is acquired from the first start storage information when it is one start storage information, whereas the reach determination random number is acquired from the second start storage information when it is the second start storage information. It means to get. That is, in step S230, the reach determination random number is extracted from the first start storage information shifted to the work area, or the reach determination random number is extracted from the second start storage information.

  Following step S230, it is determined whether or not it is super reach based on the acquired reach determination random number (step S232). As described above, the reach determination random number is used to determine whether or not to generate a reach (reach out of reach) when the big hit gaming state is not generated. As described above, the reach mode includes a simple reach (normal reach) that is unlikely to cause a big hit gaming state, a super reach that is more likely to cause a big hit gaming state than the normal reach, and the like in step S232. In the determination, it is determined whether or not to generate a detachment with super reach as a reach mode. In the range of random numbers for reach determination, a range for determining the super reach as the reach mode (super reach mode determining range) is defined and stored in the main control built-in ROM. In the determination of step S232, it is determined whether or not reach deviation with super reach is generated as the reach mode by determining whether or not the value of the reach determination random number is within the super reach mode determination range.

  When it is super reach in step S232, that is, when the random number for reach determination is within the super reach mode determination range, the super reach variation display pattern table is selected (step S234). This super-reach variation display pattern table has a plurality of variation times for deriving and displaying a special symbol on the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 when super reach is generated as a reach mode. This is a prescribed table, which is stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM of the main control MPU 4100a. In this variation time, although the liquid crystal display device 1400 produces an effect with a super reach that is highly likely to cause a big hit gaming state, the big hit gaming state does not occur after the fluctuation time ends.

  Subsequent to step S234, the process proceeds to step S224 described above, and the random display pattern random number is extracted from the first start memory information shifted to the work area of the main control built-in RAM, or the variable display pattern is extracted from the second start memory information. Take out random numbers. Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S226 described above, and a variable display pattern is determined from the super-reach variable display pattern tail selected in step S234 based on the extracted variable display pattern random number. Then, it progresses to step S228 mentioned above, produces an effect command based on the determined fluctuation | variation display pattern, and complete | finishes this routine. Here, as described above, as the effect command, the special figure * synchronization effect start command classified as related to the special figure * synchronization effect shown in FIG. Set in the transmission information storage area.

  On the other hand, when it is not the super reach in step S232, that is, when the value of the reach determination random number is outside the super reach mode determination range, the random display pattern random number from the * starting storage information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Is acquired (step S236). The processing in step S236 is the same as the processing in step S224 described above, and the random display pattern random number is extracted from the first startup storage information shifted to the work area, or is changed from the second startup storage information. Extract random numbers for display patterns.

  Subsequent to step S236, on the basis of the extracted random number for variation display pattern, a variation display pattern table at the time of reach deviation is selected (step S238). The fluctuation display pattern table at the time of reach deviation is a variation time for deriving and displaying a special symbol on the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 when normal reach is generated as a reach mode. A plurality of fluctuation times for deriving and displaying a special symbol on the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 when a normal variation mode that is not accompanied by a reach mode is generated are defined. This table is stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM of the main control MPU 4100a. In this variation time, an effect with normal reach that is unlikely to generate a big hit gaming state is developed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, or an effect without normal reach is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, but after the variation time is over In both cases, the big hit gaming state does not occur and the game is lost. In the present embodiment, the reach mode is increased as the number of the operation reservation balls such as the special symbol 1 operation reservation ball number and the special symbol 2 operation reservation ball number increases from the value 0 to the value 1, the value 2, and the value 3. The probability of occurrence (probability of appearance of reach (appearance rate)) is such that probability A (1/10)> probability B (1/15)> probability C (1/20)> probability D (1/30) It is set to become lower in order. Such a setting is stored in advance as a table in the fluctuation display pattern table at the time of reach in association with the reach mode and the random number for the fluctuation display pattern.

  Subsequent to step S238, the process proceeds to step S226 described above, and the variable display pattern is determined based on the value of the variable display pattern random number extracted in step S236. In this embodiment, the random display pattern random number range includes a range for determining normal reach (normal reach mode determination range) and a range for determining normal variation without a reach mode (normal variation mode determination range). And are stipulated. Therefore, in the process of step S226, when the random display pattern random number extracted in step S236 is within the normal reach mode determination range, the variable display pattern for generating the normal reach is determined from the non-reach shift display pattern table. On the other hand, when it is within the normal variation determination range, the variation display pattern that generates the normal variation without the reach mode is determined from the variation display pattern table at the time of reach deviation. Then, it progresses to step S228 mentioned above, produces an effect command based on the determined fluctuation | variation display pattern, and complete | finishes this routine. Here, as described above, as the effect command, the special figure * synchronization effect start command classified as related to the special figure * synchronization effect shown in FIG. Set in the transmission information storage area.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, as the number of operation reservation balls such as the special symbol 1 operation reservation ball number and the special symbol 2 operation reservation ball number increases from the value 0 to the value 1, the value 2, and the value 3, The probability of generating the reach mode is set so that the probability A (1/10)> probability B (1/15)> probability C (1/20)> probability D (1/30) is sequentially lowered. . In the case where the probability (appearance rate) that the reach mode occurs according to the increase in the number of reserved balls is set low, the reach mode is likely to occur when the number of the hold balls is reduced. For this reason, super reach is likely to appear. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is increased, it is difficult for the reach mode to occur, and thus super reach is also difficult to appear. For example, the super-reach selected when the number of active-reserved balls is 0 has a higher appearance rate of super-reach than the super reach selected when the number of active-retained balls is 3. It will be. In other words, for example, the player feels that super-reach is likely to appear because the number of reserved balls has been reduced shortly after starting the game. When the number of reserved balls is increased, it is felt that super reach is difficult to appear.

  By the way, when determining the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine, the occurrence probability (expected degree) of the big hit gaming state with respect to the occurrence of super reach is set in advance. However, despite the fact that the occurrence probability of the jackpot gaming state with respect to the occurrence of this super reach is preset and invariable, the player starts the game and increases the number of reserved balls. When a reach hits and a jackpot gaming state occurs, the probability of hitting a jackpot gaming state against super reach is higher when the number of reserved balls is increased than when the number of holding balls is reduced. It becomes.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the reach determination random number is used for determining whether or not the super reach has occurred, and the random display pattern random number is used for determining whether or not the normal reach and the normal change have occurred. When there is, first, it is determined in step S232 whether or not it is super reach based on the reach determination random number. If it is not super reach in this determination, normal reach based on the variable display pattern random number in step S238. Alternatively, a control flow is adopted in which normal fluctuations are selected with a preset probability so that the probability (appearance rate) that the reach mode appears in accordance with the increase in the number of suspended balls is sequentially reduced. Specifically, in a conventional pachinko gaming machine, for example, the probability of generating a reach mode in response to an increase in the number of active balls is probability A (1/10)> probability B (1/15)> probability C (1 / 20)> probability D (1/30), and so on, and the appearance rates of normal reach (NR) and super reach (SR)) are probabilities A to D. , NR: SR = 9: 1 are all set in advance, the normal reach (NR) based on the probability A and the super reach when the number of the active reserve balls is 1, that is, when the reserve ball is one. (SR) and the appearance rate of super reach obtained according to the appearance rate (NR: SR = 9: 1) becomes 1/100 (= probability A (1/10)) × SR probability (1/10)), When the number of active holding balls is 2, When the number of the ball holding balls is two, the appearance rate of the super reach obtained according to the appearance rate (NR: SR = 9: 1) of the normal reach (NR) and the super reach (SR) based on the probability B is 1/150 (= Probability B (1/15)) × SR probability (1/10)), and when the number of suspended balls is 3, that is, when the number of held balls is 3, normal reach (NR) based on probability C and super The appearance rate of the super reach obtained according to the appearance rate with the reach (SR) (NR: SR = 9: 1) becomes 1/200 (= probability C (1/20)) × SR probability (1/10)). When the number of active reserve balls is 4, that is, when the number of reserve balls is 4, it is obtained according to the appearance rate (NR: SR = 9: 1) of normal reach (NR) and super reach (SR) based on probability D. Sue The incidence of Richi is 1/300 (= probability D (1/30)) probability of × SR (1/10)). That is, in conventional pachinko machines, the appearance rate of super reach (= 1/100) obtained according to the appearance rate of normal reach (NR) and super reach (SR) based on probability A, and normal reach (NR) based on probability D ) And the super-reach (SR) appearance rate (= 1/300) obtained according to the super-reach (SR) appearance rate, there is a problem that a difference of three times occurs. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, it is possible to cope with the occurrence probability (expectation) of the big hit gaming state with respect to the occurrence of super reach by changing the number of the holding balls, A dedicated program for executing the process needs to be newly created as a process different from the special symbol variation display pattern setting process shown in FIG. 193, and the capacity for storing the dedicated program is controlled by the main control. There is a problem that it is necessary to secure the internal ROM and only the labor is increased.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the probability that the reach mode is generated according to the increase in the number of suspended balls is probability A (1/10)> probability B (1/15)> probability C (1/20)> Even when the probability D (1/30) is set so as to decrease sequentially, the probability of super reach is set to a constant value of 1/100 for probability A to probability D in advance. . As a result, when the number of activated balls is 1, that is, when the number of held balls is 1, the appearance rate of super reach based on the probability A is also 1/100, and when the number of activated balls is 2, that is, When there are two holding balls, the appearance rate of super reach based on probability B is also 1/100, and when the number of active holding balls is 3, that is, when there are three holding balls, the super reach based on probability C The appearance rate is also 1/100, and when the number of reserved balls is 4, that is, when the number of held balls is 4, the appearance rate of super reach based on the probability D is also 1/100. In addition, since it is not necessary to change the probability (expectation) of the big hit gaming state with respect to the occurrence of super reach according to the number of the holding balls, it is not necessary to create the above-described dedicated program. It is not necessary to secure a capacity for storing the data in the main control built-in ROM.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the appearance rate of normal reach is gradually decreased in accordance with the increase in the number of active reserve balls, whereas the appearance rate of super reach is irrelevant to the increase in the number of active reserve balls. Is constant. Thereby, even if the reach mode is set so as to decrease sequentially in accordance with the increase in the value of the number of active reserve balls, which is the number of balls held, the appearance rate of super reach among the reach modes can be made constant. . Therefore, the player can be misunderstood and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  Also, the above-described control flow allows the appearance rate of super reach to be the same regardless of the value of the number of pending balls, that is, any value of the number of pending balls. Even if it is in a state where the number of holding balls has decreased, such as when it is not long before, or when the number of holding balls has increased after starting a game, it is related to the number of holding balls In addition, for a super reach that occurs at the same appearance rate, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state is not lowered or experienced according to the number of reserved balls. Therefore, it is possible to match the occurrence probability (expected degree) of the jackpot gaming state with respect to the occurrence of the super-reach set in advance with the occurrence probability (expectation degree) of the jackpot gaming state with respect to the occurrence of the super reach due to the player's experience. it can.

  Furthermore, since the appearance rates of the super reach are set to a constant value of 1/100 in the probability A to the probability D, the player who wants to watch various aspects of the super reach among the reach forms, There is no need to interrupt the game to reduce the number of balls. Thereby, the profit and loss on the hall side due to a decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the appearance rates of the super reach are set to a constant value of 1/100 for the probability A to the probability D, it is difficult for the player to increase the number of held balls. Even if a game ball cannot easily enter the 2001 or the second starting port 2002, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a super reach is executed many times longer than a normal reach. Therefore, amplification of the player's frustration due to multiple appearances of super reach can be suppressed.

  And since the appearance rate of super reach is set to a constant value of 1/100 in probability A to probability D, I saw other conventional pachinko machines that repeatedly executed super reach many times. It is possible to prevent misunderstanding that a player is a pachinko gaming machine in which super reach is likely to appear, and to prevent the player from transferring to other pachinko gaming machines.

[11. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 1186 will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 to 197. First, the payout control unit power-on process will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing an example of the process when the payout control unit is turned on, FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the process when the payout control unit is turned on in FIG. 194, and FIG. FIG. 197 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a payout control unit timer interrupt process.

[11-1. Discharge control unit power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 1186 performs a payout control unit power-on process as shown in FIGS. 194 to 196. When the payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU 4110a sets an interrupt mode (step S300). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority order of the interrupt of the payout control MPU 4110a. In this embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Subsequent to step S300, input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) is performed (step S302). In this I / O input / output setting, the I / O port input / output setting of the payout control MPU 4110a is performed.

  Following step S302, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S304). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage decreases. Input from the circuit 4100d. A power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100d when the voltage is equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on to when the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage. Therefore, in the wait timer process 1, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer).

  Subsequent to step S304, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 624a is operated (step S306). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated and an operation signal (detection signal) is input to the payout control MPU 4110a. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 624a is operated. On the other hand, when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 624a is not operated.

  When the RAM clear switch 624a is operated in step S306, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 (step S308), while when the RAM clear switch 624a is not operated in step S306, the payout A value 0 is set to the RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S310). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) built in the payout control MPU 4110a, for example, stored in various flags and various information storage areas. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the CR communication information storage area) Flag indicating whether or not the payout information relating to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set) is to be deleted. When not deleted, the value is set to 0. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S308 and step S310 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4110a.

  Subsequent to step S308 or step S310, setting is made to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S312). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

  Subsequent to step S312, the stack pointer is set (step S314). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S314, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are loaded on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S314, it is determined whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S316). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 in step S316, that is, when the payout information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S318). This checksum calculates the sum by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S318, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process (power-off) described later (step S320). . If they match, it is determined whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S322). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described later. A value of 1 is set when the control unit power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 is set when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated.

  When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S322, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is normally terminated, the work area of the payout control built-in RAM is set as power recovery (step S324). In this setting, in addition to setting the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 0, the power recovery time information is read from a ROM built in the payout control MPU 4110a (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). The power recovery information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. Accordingly, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, and the like, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of inconsistency counter reset determination time (stored in the time management information storage area). Note that “recovery” refers to a state in which power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure in addition to a state in which the power is turned on from a state in which the power is shut off.

  On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S316, that is, when the payout information is erased, or when the checksum values do not match in step S320, or step If the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in S322, that is, if the payout control unit power-off process has not ended normally, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S326). ). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Following step S326, a work area of the payout control built-in RAM is set as an initial setting (step S328). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM, and the initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S324 or step S328, interrupt initialization is performed (step S330). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 1.75 ms.

  Subsequent to step S330, interrupt permission setting is performed (step S332). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S330, that is, every 1.75 ms.

  Subsequent to step S332, it is determined whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S334). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is displayed as a power failure monitoring circuit 4100d on the main control board 4100. It is input from. The determination in step S334 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  If no power failure warning signal is input in step S334, it is determined whether or not the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S336). This 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 1.75 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process processed every 1.75 ms, which will be described later. The value is set to 0 when 75 ms has not elapsed.

  When the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0 in step S336, that is, when 1.75 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S334 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input.

  On the other hand, when the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 in step S336, that is, when 1.75 ms has elapsed, the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set to 0 (step S338) and the external watchdog is set. An external WDT clear signal is output to the timer (external WDT) 4110c (turned ON, step S340). The external WDT 4110c monitors the operation (system) of the payout control MPU 4110a, and outputs a reset signal to the payout control MPU 4110a and the payout control I / O port 4110b when the external WDT clear signal is not stopped at the clear signal release time. To reset (periodically diagnosing whether the system of the payout control MPU 4110a is out of control).

  Subsequent to step S340, port output processing is performed (step S342). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4110b based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, various commands relating to payout from the main control board 4100 (in addition to a prize ball command and a self-check command shown in FIG. 180, a magnetic sensor abnormality indicating that a magnet is being executed) Command ACK information indicating that the command has been normally received, drive information for performing drive control to the payout motor 815, award ball number information on the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 815, and an error LED display Various information such as LED display information to be displayed on 4130 is stored, and various commands relating to payout from the main control board 4100 are normally received from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4110b based on this output information. Sometimes the payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100, the drive signal is output to the payout motor 815, the payout mode is The number of balls actually paid out by the player 815 is output as an award ball number information signal to the external terminal board 1150a (in this embodiment, every time the payout motor 815 actually pays out 10 game balls, The prize ball number information signal is output to the terminal board 1150a), and the display signal is output to the error LED display 4130. In this port output process, when the received command information is read from the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the received command information includes a magnetic sensor abnormality command, the output of the payout control I / O port 4110b is output. A signal to the effect that the magnet is being carried out from the terminal is output to the external terminal board 1150a.

  Subsequent to step S342, port input processing is performed (step S344). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminal of the payout control I / O port 4110b are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal of the error release switch 4131, a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 855, a detection signal from the counting switch 812, a detection signal from the full switch 916, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, a BRDY signal, and a CR connection signal, The main payment board ACK signal from the main control board 4100 that informs that the main control board 4100 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S344, timer update processing is performed (step S346). In this timer update process, when determining whether or not the above-described sprocket 807 is in a stagnation state, the sphere detection time set as the determination condition and the fixed position determination of the sprocket 807 are not performed. The skip determination time set at the time, the ball removal determination time set when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 are discharged, and the full tank unit 900 is a game ball. When determining whether or not the vehicle is full, the full tank determination time set as the determination condition, the number of game balls taken into the ball passage unit 770 by the detection signal from the ball break switch 778 is determined. In addition to performing time management such as the ball breakage determination time set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the number is over a predetermined number, Whether the number of game balls received and paid out in the recesses of the card 807 and the number of balls actually detected by the counting switch 812 are repeatedly paid out due to a mismatch. When determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not, the determination condition and the inconsistency counter reset determination time set are managed. For example, when the sphere collision determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interruption period is set to 1.75 ms. Therefore, every time this timer update process is performed, the sphere collision determination time is subtracted by 1.75 ms. Since the subtraction result is a value of 0, the sphere collision determination time is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the skip determination time is 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is 504 ms, the ball breakage determination time is 119 ms, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time is 7000 s (about 2 hours). Each time this timer update process is performed, the ball removal determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball shortage determination time, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time are subtracted by 1.75 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0. The ball removal determination time, full tank determination time, ball breakage determination time, and inconsistency counter reset determination time are accurately measured. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Following step S346, CR communication processing is performed (step S348). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU 4110a exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S324, as described above, the various flags that are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM and the various information stored in the various information storage areas. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of PRDY signal output setting information or the like in which the logic state of the signal is set. By this process, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. The value of the award ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be restored. As a result, when the game ball payout operation by the prize ball unit 800 is being executed, even if it becomes impossible to continue the payout operation due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the payout operation should be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the storage tray 311 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU 4110a exchanges various signals with the CR unit, and when the game ball is paid out to the storage tray 311, the payout control MPU 4110a causes an instantaneous power failure or a power failure to send the CR unit and various signals. Even if the exchange is interrupted and it is not possible to continue paying out the game ball, the values of the prize ball stock PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are paid out. Immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure stored as backup information, it is restored to values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., thereby causing a momentary power failure or power failure. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4110a) and the CR unit immediately before the power recovery It is possible to continue, so that it is possible to continue to payout of game balls. As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4110a) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or stop at the time of power recovery even if the power outage stops or stops. Thus, various signals from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4110a) and the CR unit are not changed by the influence of the instantaneous stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4110a) and the CR unit can be improved. Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information as described above. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S324. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is not possible, for example, the PRDY signal is paid out. Output from the output terminal of the I / O port 4110b to the CR unit. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main action setting process Is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH. If the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the game ball payout operation by the winning ball unit 800 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball removal determination setting process, For example, if you are not communicating with the CR unit, pay a rental ball as an error status output setting to the CR unit. The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for exiting. As a result, in the CR communication processing, at the next timer interruption from the time of power recovery, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is read from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4110b. Output to CR unit. Thus, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the prize ball unit 800 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, the state is restored at the time of power recovery. At an early stage, a PRDY signal can be output from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4110b to the CR unit to notify that the payout operation for paying out the ball is impossible. The fact that the game ball payout operation by 800 is in an abnormal state can be notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the BRDY, which is a useless rental request signal from the CR unit, from being output at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery. In the CR communication process, when the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal in the port input process of step S344, that is, a pachinko machine. When the power supply 1 is turned on and the payout control board 1186 and the CR unit are electrically connected via the CR unit terminal board 1150b, a payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible. In order to convey the fact, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to HI and output from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4110b to the CR unit, while the logic is LOW, that is, the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. The payout control board 1186 and the CR unit are electrically connected via the CR unit terminal board 1150b. When it is not connected to the terminal, in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to LOW from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4110b to the CR unit. Output. The logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and the payout control board 1186 A CR connection signal that tells whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S348, a full tank and out-of-ball check process is performed (step S350). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the above-described full tank unit 900 is filled with a game ball based on a detection signal from the full tank switch 916. It is determined whether or not the number of game balls taken into the above-described ball path unit 770 by the detection signal from the ball break switch 778 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. . For example, whether or not the full tank unit 900 is full of game balls is determined by detecting from the full tank switch 916 in the current full tank and out-of-ball check process using a timer interruption period of 1.75 ms. When the signal is ON and the detection signal from the full tank switch 916 is OFF in the previous full (1.75 ms before) full and ball-out check processing, that is, the detection signal from the full tank switch 916 transitions from OFF to ON. When this is done, the timer update process in step S346 starts counting the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the full tank switch 916 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine whether. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 916 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the full tank unit 900 is full of game balls is stored in the state information storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 916 is OFF, the full tank information notifying that the full tank unit 900 is not full of game balls is stored in the state information storage area.

  Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the ball passage unit 770 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also determined by the timer full cycle and the ball shortage check process using the timer interruption period 1.75 ms. When the detection signal from the switch is ON, the detection signal from the ball break switch is OFF in the previous full (1.75 ms before) full ball and ball break check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball break switch 778 is OFF. When transitioning to ON, the timer update process in step S346 starts counting the ball breakage determination time (119 ms) described above. When the ball breakage determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball breakage determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the ball breakage switch 778 is ON in this full tank and ball breakage check process. Determine whether. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball break switch 778 is ON, the ball break information for notifying that the number of game balls taken into the ball passage unit 770 is equal to or larger than a predetermined number is stored in the state information storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the ball break switch 778 is OFF, the ball break information indicating that the number of game balls taken into the ball passage unit 770 is not equal to or greater than the predetermined number is stored in the state information storage area. To remember.

  Following step S350, command reception processing is performed (step S352). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 (magnetic sensor abnormality command indicating that a magnet is being played in addition to the prize ball command and the self-check command shown in FIG. 180) are issued. Receive. When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information indicating that is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality that indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 1186 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Following step S352, command analysis processing is performed (step S354). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S352 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S354, main operation setting processing is performed (step S356). In this main motion setting process, motion settings such as winning balls, lending balls, ball removal and ball scooping are performed, retry operation determination is performed, and the number of unpaid balls (prize ball stock number) is monitored. To do.

  Following step S356, LED display data creation processing is performed (step S358). In this LED display data creation process, various types of information are read from the state information storage area described above, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 4130 of the payout control board 1186 is created, and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area described above. Remember. For example, the above-mentioned ball piece information is read from the state information storage area, and when the number of game balls taken into the ball passage unit 770 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on this piece of ball information, the corresponding display data (this embodiment In the embodiment, a display value 1 (number “1”) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Following step S358, command transmission processing is performed (step S360). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the state information storage area described above, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame are classified into the state display shown in FIG. 183 based on the various information. (State 2 command) is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100. For example, when the piece of ball information is read from the state information storage area, a frame state 1 command is created when the number of game balls taken into the ball passage unit 770 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on the piece of ball information. Or transmitted to the main control board 4100.

  Subsequent to step S360, the output of the external WDT clear signal to the external watchdog timer (external WDT) 4110c is stopped (turns OFF, step S362). As a result, the external WDT 4110c is cleared so that the payout control MPU 4110a and the payout control I / O port 4110b are not reset. The external WDT 4110c starts measuring the clear signal release time when the output of the external WDT clear signal is stopped.

  Following step S362, the process returns to step S334 again to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. If this power failure warning signal is not input, the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 in step S336. When the 1.75 ms elapse flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when 1.75 ms elapses, the value 0 is set in the 1.75 ms elapse flag HT-FLG in step S338. In step S340, an external WDT clear signal is output (ON) to the external WDT 4110c, port output processing is performed in step S342, port input processing is performed in step S344, timer update processing is performed in step S346, and CR communication is performed in step S348. Processing, and in step S350, a full tank and out of ball check process is performed. In step S352, command reception processing is performed. In step S354, command analysis processing is performed. In step S356, main operation setting processing is performed. In step S358, LED display data creation processing is performed. In step S360, command transmission processing is performed. In step S362, the output of the external WDT clear signal to the external WDT 4110c is stopped (OFF), and steps S334 to S362 are repeated. The processing from step S334 to step S362 is referred to as “payout control unit main processing”.

  Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 4100, the processing content of the payout control unit main process varies. For this reason, the time required for processing of the payout control MPU 4110a varies. Therefore, the payout control MPU 4110a preferentially outputs to the main control board 4100 a payer ACK signal notifying that various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 have been normally received in the port output processing of step S342. Yes. As a result, the payout control MPU 4110a secures the processing time so that other fluctuating processes can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S334, interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S364). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the payout information described above is protected. Subsequent to step S364, output of the drive signal to the payout motor 815 is stopped (step S366). Thereby, payout of the game ball is stopped. Subsequent to step S366, an external WDT clear signal is output to the external WDT 4110c and the output is stopped (ON / OFF, step S368). As a result, the external WDT 4110c is cleared. Subsequent to step S368, a checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S370). This checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S318 and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG. Subsequent to step S370, the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is set to a value of 1. (Step S372) Thereby, storage of the payout backup information is completed. Subsequent to step S372, prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM is set (step S374). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, and writing and reading cannot be performed, and payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM is protected. Following step S374, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the clear signal is not turned ON / OFF to the external WDT 4110c. Therefore, the external WDT 4110c outputs a reset signal to the payout control MPU 4110a and the payout control I / O port 4110b to reset it. Thereafter, the payout control MPU 4110a performs this payout control unit power-on process again. The processing from step S364 to step S374 and the infinite loop are referred to as “payout control unit power-off processing”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4110a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and performs a payout control unit power-on process upon power recovery thereafter.

  In step S320, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal. In step S322, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process has been normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraud.

[11-2. Payment control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle (1.75 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 194 to 196.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 1186 sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 197 (step S380). Here, the general purpose storage element (general purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control unit main process from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S380, the value 1 is set in the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S382). The 1.75 progress flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 1.75 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 1.75 ms. Set to 0 when no 75 ms has elapsed. Subsequent to step S382, the register is switched (returned) (step S384). This restoration is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main process, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process. Subsequent to step S384, interrupt permission is set (step S386), and this routine ends.

[12. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 4139 that receives various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) will be described. First, various control processes of the peripheral control unit will be described, and subsequently, various control processes of the liquid crystal control unit will be described.

[12-1. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
Various control processes of the peripheral control unit 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process, the peripheral control unit base timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception end interrupt process, the liquid crystal serial command A control process, a transmission buffer empty interrupt process, a DSP-ACK signal interrupt process, a start opening prize abnormality notification determination process, and a start opening prize abnormality notification process will be described. FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on process, FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process, and FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit base timer interrupt process. 201 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit command reception end interrupt process, and FIG. 203 is an example of the liquid crystal serial command control process. 204 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a transmission buffer empty interrupt process, FIG. 205 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a DSP-ACK signal interrupt process, and FIG. 206 is a flowchart of a start opening prize abnormality notification determination process. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example, and FIG. Is a flow chart showing an example of a start-up hole winning abnormality notifying process. The liquid crystal serial command control process is performed in step S762 in the peripheral control unit 2ms steady process described later, and the start opening prize abnormality notification determination process is the payout state determination process in step S728 in the peripheral control unit power-on process described later. It is performed in one process. Also, regarding various control processes of the peripheral control unit 4140, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception end interrupt processing, DSP-ACK signal interrupt processing, transmission buffer empty interrupt processing, peripheral control unit base timer interrupt processing, Priorities are set in the order of the peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process and the peripheral control unit 16 ms steady process in steps S710 to S740 in the peripheral control unit power-on process.

[12-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
When power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 performs processing at power-on of the peripheral control unit as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initial setting process (step S700). In this initial setting process, a process for initializing the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a process for setting a wait timer after reset, and a color LED provided on each light emitting board of the game board 4 is turned on, blinked, or lit in gradation. A process of transmitting initial data composed of pattern creation data to the upper lamp driving substrate 3366 and the lower lamp driving substrate 3368 at a time is performed. In this initial setting process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first performs a process of initializing itself, thereby outputting various commands related to control of game effects and various conditions related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 output from the main control board 4100. The command can be received, and interrupt permission is set. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4140a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 4140a can be initialized in a very short time.

  Subsequent to step S700, it is determined whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is a value 1 (step S702). The 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is a flag for measuring 16 ms in a peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process described later, and is set to a value of 1 when 16 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when 16 ms has not elapsed.

  If the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step 702, the process returns to step S702 again to determine whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is a value 1. When the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is 1 in step S702, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, the value 0 is set in the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG (step S704), and the 16 ms in-process flag SP-FLG is increased. 1 is set (step S706). This 16 ms in-process flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when starting the peripheral control unit 16 ms steady process, and a value of 0 when ending.

  Subsequent to step S706, an external WDT clear signal is output to an external watchdog timer (peripheral control external WDT) (not shown) provided on the peripheral control board 4139 (turns ON, step S710). This peripheral control external WDT monitors the operation (system) of the peripheral control MPU 4140a. When the external WDT clear signal is not stopped at the clear signal release time, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is reset (the system of the peripheral control MPU 4140a runs out of control). Is regularly diagnosed). In step S710, the peripheral control MPU 4140a clears the peripheral control built-in WDT 4140af shown in FIG. 176 in addition to turning on the external WDT clear signal for the peripheral control external WDT. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a diagnoses whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4140a is running out of control by using the peripheral control external WDT and the peripheral control built-in WDT 4140af in combination.

  Subsequent to step S710, it is determined whether or not the test mode flag TM-FLG has a value of 0 (step S712). This test mode flag TM-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) in the command analysis process described later is a test command classified as related to the test shown in FIG. The value is set to 1 when it is a test command, and is set to 0 when it is not a test command. In step S712, the process is performed based on a command analyzed by a command analysis process described later 16 ms before.

  When the test mode flag TM-FLG is 0 in step S712, that is, when the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is not a test command, an effect selection switch input process is performed (step S716). In this effect selection switch input process, the detection signal LB-SEN and the right sub button 372R from the left sub button sensor 377L for detecting the operation of the left sub button 372L provided in the operation button unit 370 shown in FIG. The detection signal RB-SEN from the right sub button sensor 377R that detects the operation of the main button 371 and the detection signal CB-SEN from the main button sensor 376 that detects the operation of the main button 371 are used as the door side serial transmission circuit of the door decoration drive board 192. The button operation detection data TS-DAT serialized in 192c is transmitted from the door side serial transmission circuit 192c via the door relay board 1102 and the auxiliary drawer relay board 1108 to the serial I / O port for button operation detection of the peripheral control MPU 4140a (this The serial I / O port for button operation detection is shown in the figure 76 is one which is of forming a peripheral control various serial I / O port 4140ae shown in.) To determine whether it is entered. Specifically, it is performed based on each history information of detection signals LB-SEN, RB-SEN, CB-SEN from the left sub button sensor 377L, the right sub button sensor 377R, and the main button sensor 376 of the operation button unit 370. . History information having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, “B” represents a bit) is detected signal LB-SEN. , RB-SEN, CB-SEN, and every time this effect selection switch input process is executed, the information stored in each bit is shifted from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7. Processing is performed, and the input detection signals LB-SEN, RB-SEN, and CB-SEN are stored in the least significant bit B0. For example, in the history information of the main button 371 of the operation button unit 370, where the value 1 is stored, the logic of the detection signal CB-SEN from the operation button unit 370 due to the operation of the main button 371 is displayed. HI means that the value 0 is stored, and the logic of the detection signal CB-SEN from the operation button unit 370 becomes LOW because the operation button unit 370 is not operated. It means that In the effect selection switch input process, when all the values stored in the lower 4 bits (B3, B2, B1, and B0) of each history information are 1, that is, the left sub button sensor 377L of the operation button unit 370, the right Whether or not the logic of the detection signals LB-SEN, RB-SEN, and CB-SEN from the sub button sensor 377R and the main button sensor 376 is HI continuously (for 64 ms (= 16 ms × 4 times)). Determine whether.

  Subsequent to step S716, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the gradation control IC is performed (step S718). In the DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the gradation control IC, the serial I / O port serial transmission for the lamp driving board is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac of the peripheral control MPU 4140a shown in FIG. The peripheral control CPU core 4140aa of the peripheral control MPU 4140a shown in FIG. 176 is a color provided on each light emitting board of the game board 4 based on a command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) in a command analysis process described later. Game board side light emission data SL-DAT (having a size of 512 bytes (= 64 lines × 8 bytes)) for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the LED is created. Then, it is set to the lamp drive board side transmission data area 4140aba of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab via the bus 4140ah shown in FIG. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa determines that the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac requires a lamp drive board serial I / O port (the lamp drive board serial I / O port is the peripheral control serial I / O shown in FIG. The first one byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the head address of the lamp drive board side transmission data area 4140aba is designated. Is transferred and written to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the bus 4140ah. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer to the transmission register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side to transmit 1 byte of data of the transmission register. Start transmission bit by bit. Each time the peripheral interrupt DMA controller 4140ac generates a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board (in this embodiment, writing to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board) 1 byte data is transferred to the transmission register, and the transmission buffer is empty because the 1 byte data disappears.) When the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa does not use the bus 4140ah In addition, the remaining 511 bytes of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data area 4140aba are sent to the transmission buffer of the lamp drive board serial I / O port via the bus 4140ah. Serial I / O port for lamp drive board by transferring and writing Then, the written data of the transmission buffer is transferred to the transmission register, and transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission register is started bit by bit in synchronization with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side. Continuous transmission by I / O port is performed. The upper lamp driving board 3366 and the lower lamp driving board 3365 are turned on, blinking, and lit in gradations for the lighting such as color LEDs provided on the respective light emitting boards of the game board 4 for all 64 systems. By being able to control this, it is possible to realize various effects by electric decoration, and provide the player with gorgeous and attractive effects such as reach effects and jackpot effects. In step S718, the process is performed based on the command analyzed by the command analysis process 16 ms before.

  Following step S718, the sound source IC 4140c is initialized (step S720). In the initialization of the sound source IC 4140c, an analog amount of a volume knob (not shown) is detected, and the master volume of the sound source IC 4140c is such that the sound volume corresponding to the analog amount flows from the side speaker 121 and the lower speaker 391 shown in FIG. Set the value.

  Following step S720, it is determined whether a DSP-RUN signal is input (step S722). The DSP-RUN signal is a signal that is input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 and indicates that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally. The reading of the DSP-RUN signal is performed by a peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process described later, and the determination in step S722 is performed based on the DSP-RUN signal read by the peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process.

  When the DSP-RUN signal is input in step S722, that is, when the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally, the RAM-CLR signal is output to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 (turned ON, step S724). The RAM-CLR signal is a signal for forcibly resetting the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and is turned on when not resetting and turned off when resetting.

  On the other hand, when the DSP-RUN signal is not input in step S722, that is, when the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is not operating normally, or following step S724, command analysis processing is performed (step S726). In this command analysis process, various commands from the main control board 4100 are received by a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and a peripheral control unit command reception end interrupt process, which will be described later, and the received various commands are analyzed. The various commands shown in FIG. 181 are classified into various commands classified as related to the special figure 1 synchronous effect, various commands classified as related to the special figure 2 synchronous effect, various commands classified as related to the jackpot, and power-on. , Various commands categorized as related to ordinary drawing effect, various commands categorized as related to ordinary electric role effect, various commands categorized as notification display, and status display shown in FIG. There are various commands, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified into others.

  Subsequent to step S726, a RAM clear determination process is performed (step S727). In this RAM clear determination process, it is determined whether or not the command analyzed in the command analysis process in step S726 is a RAM clear notification command. If the analyzed command is a RAM clear notification command, a notification to that effect is given. .

  Subsequent to step S727, a payout state determination process is performed (step S728). In this payout state determination process, it is determined whether or not the command analyzed in the command analysis process in step S726 is a variety of commands classified into the status display shown in FIG. 182, and the analyzed command is classified into a status display. If it is a variety of commands, various notification processes are performed based on the analyzed command. For example, when the analyzed command is a magnetic sensor abnormality display command, the light emission mode of various LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is changed to a light emission mode that indicates that the magnet is being performed, and the side In addition to performing a process of sounding an alarm sound indicating that the magnet has been performed from the speaker 121, a start opening prize abnormality notification determination process for monitoring the presence or absence of fraudulent acts is performed. The start opening prize abnormality notification determination process will be described in detail later.

  Subsequent to step S728, effect selection switch main processing is performed (step S730). In this effect selection switch main process, the determination result of the effect selection switch input process in step S716 (each history of effect selection signals from the main button sensor 376, left sub button sensor 377L, and right sub button sensor 377R of the operation button unit 370). Based on the information (determination result), various processes relating to effects are performed.

  Following step S730, scheduler main processing is performed (step S732). In the scheduler main process, the tone generator IC 4140c, the gradation control IC 3366b of the upper lamp driving board 3366, the gradation control IC 3365b of the lower lamp driving board 3365, and various data relating to the door decoration driving board 192 are based on the command analyzed in step S726. Newly set or advance (pointer advance) various set data. For example, in the scheduler main process, the fact that a game ball has entered the first start port 2001 based on the start port winning command classified in other shown in FIG. Various data are set in the sound source IC 4140c in order to notify the side ball 121 or the lower speaker 391 by voice that a game ball has entered 2002. The scheduler main process includes a timer update process as one process. In this timer update process, when the start of timing of various timers used in the peripheral control unit 16 ms steady process described later is set, the process of starting or updating the timing of various timers is performed.

  Subsequent to step S732, symbol main processing is performed (step S734). In this symbol main process, the control data (display command) to be output to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is prepared based on the command analyzed in step S726. This display command indicates a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Specifically, the display command is determined based on a winning information command indicating a hit or miss, which is a command from the main control board 4100, and the winning information command. The production pattern information command indicating the type of production pattern (production by animation, production by live action, production by combination of these, etc.), switching points for switching the production by live action from the production by animation, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 4140a stores the created display command in a peripheral control unit transmission ring buffer provided in the peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab of the peripheral control MPU 4140a. This "peripheral control unit transmission ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Remember.

  On the other hand, when the test mode flag TM-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S712, that is, when the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is a test command, test command acquisition processing is performed. (Step S736). In this test command acquisition process, the inspection command for performing various inspections of the upper lamp drive board 3366, the lower lamp drive board 3365, and the door decoration drive board 192 based on the test command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S726. In addition to making preparations, control data (inspection commands) for performing various inspections of the sound source IC 4140c and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 are prepared.

  Subsequent to step S736, a test process is performed (step S738). In this test process, the inspection command prepared in the test command acquisition process in step S736 is transmitted to the upper lamp drive board 3366, the lower lamp drive board 3365, and the door decoration drive board 192, and in the test command acquisition process in step S736. The prepared control data (inspection command) is output to the sound source IC 4140c and the liquid crystal control unit 4150.

  Subsequent to step S734 or step S738, output of the external WDT clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT is stopped (turns OFF, step S740). This clears the peripheral control external WDT and prevents the peripheral control MPU 4140a from being reset. The peripheral control external WDT starts measuring the clear signal release time when the output of the external WDT clear signal is stopped. The peripheral control MPU 4140a clears the peripheral control built-in WDT 4140af only in step S710, and clears the peripheral control built-in WDT 4140af every 16 ms (every time a peripheral control unit 16ms steady process described later is started). It has become. As described above, if the peripheral control built-in WDT 4140af is not cleared every 16 ms, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is reset. Note that the processing in steps S710 to S740 is referred to as “peripheral control unit 16 ms steady processing”.

  Subsequent to step S740, the 16 ms processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0 (end of the peripheral control unit 16ms steady processing) (step S742), and the process returns to step S702 again.

  Returning to step S702, it is determined whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG has a value of 1. When the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, the 16 ms elapsed flag in step S704. A value 0 is set in ST-FLG, a value 1 is set in 16-ms processing flag SP-FLG in step S706, a peripheral control unit 16ms steady processing is performed in steps S710 to S740, and a 16-ms processing flag SP is set in step S742. -A value 0 is set in FLG, and the process returns to step S702 again. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is not 1 in step S702, that is, when 16 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S702 again.

[12-1-2. Peripheral control unit 2ms steady process]
Next, the peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process will be described. When the peripheral control unit 2ms steady process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag STB-FLG is a value 1 as shown in FIG. 199 (step S750). ). This 2 ms elapsed flag STB-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a peripheral control unit base timer interrupt process described later, and is set to a value of 0 when 2 ms have elapsed and a value of 0 when no ms have elapsed.

  When the 2 ms elapsed flag STB-FLG is 1 in step S750, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, the value 2 is set to the 2 ms elapsed flag STB-FLG (step S752), and the test mode flag TM-FLG is 0. Is determined (step S754). As described above, the test mode flag TM-FLG indicates that the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) in the command analysis process in step S726 in the peripheral controller power-on process shown in FIG. This flag is set to 1 when the command is a test command, and 0 when the command is not a test command.

  When the test mode flag TM-FLG is 0 in step S754, that is, when the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is not a test command, switch input processing is performed (step S756). In this switch input process, detection signals IN1-SEN to IN11-SEN from the game board side position detection sensors (photosensors 2349, 3052, 3098, 3131, 3173, 3237, 3285, 3254, 3286, 3321, 3333) It is determined whether or not the signals are input via the drive board 3363 and the upper lamp drive board 3366, or the counterclockwise rotation for detecting the rotational positions of the rotary lamps 244, 264 and 284 of the door frame 5 shown in FIG. Detection signals LT-SEN, RT-SEN, and CT-SEN (see FIG. 177) from the position detection sensor 250, the right rotation position detection sensor 270, and the center rotation position detection sensor 290 are the door relay board 1102 and the auxiliary drawer relay board 1108. It is determined whether or not each is input via the.

  In the switch input process, a history of various input detection signals is created. Specifically, history information having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, “B” represents a bit) is stored. Assigned to each detection signal, each time this switch input process is executed, the information stored in each bit is shifted from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7. Various input detection signals are stored in B0. For example, the value 1 is stored when the logic of the detection signal IN1-SEN from the rotation position detection sensor 3134 that detects the rotation position of the rotating decoration body 3102 (first rotation member 3112) is HI, and when the logic is LOW. Store the value 0.

  Subsequent to step S756, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board is performed (step S758). In this DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board, serial transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac of the peripheral control MPU 4140a shown in FIG. The peripheral control CPU core 4140aa of the peripheral control MPU 4140a shown in FIG. 176 receives the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) in the command analysis processing of step S726 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. Based on the game board side motors (rotary decorative body drive motor 3106, lift drive motor 3160, swing drive motor 3212, ceiling drive motor 3312, character body drive motor 3418, right arm drive motor 3472, and gear drive motor 3514), and The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT (having a size of 4 bytes) for outputting drive signals to the game board side solenoids (the lock solenoid 3127 and the head solenoid 3455) is created. Via bus 4140ah shown in FIG. Is set on the motor drive board side transmits data area 4140abc near control-RAM4140ab. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa determines that the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac requires a motor drive board serial I / O port (this motor drive board serial I / O port is the peripheral control serial I / O shown in FIG. 176). 1 of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data area 4140abc. The byte is transferred and written to the transmission buffer of the motor drive board serial I / O port via the bus 4140ah. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer to the transmission register, and the 1-byte data of the transmission register is synchronized with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Starts transmission bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac uses this as a trigger each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for motor drive board is generated (in this embodiment, writing to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for motor drive board) 1 byte data is transferred to the transmission register, and the transmission buffer is empty because the 1 byte data disappears.) When the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa does not use the bus 4140ah In addition, the remaining 3 bytes of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data area 4140abc are sent byte by byte via the bus 4140ah to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board. Transfer and write to the serial I / O port for motor drive board Transfers the written data of the transmission buffer to the transmission register, and starts transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission register bit by bit in synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Continuous transmission is performed through the serial I / O port. The motor drive board 3363 is shown in FIG. 114 by performing drive control of the game board side motors (drive motors 2343, 3043, 3088, 3127, 3166, 3204, 3232, 3245, 3279, 3294, 3318, 3329). A variety of performances can be realized by moving the movable objects of the various accessory units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 4, providing the player with a gorgeous and attractive performance in reach production and jackpot production, etc. is doing.

  Subsequent to step S758, a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the door decoration drive board is performed (step S760). In the DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the door decoration drive board, serial transmission of the door decoration drive board serial I / O port is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac of the peripheral control MPU 4140a shown in FIG. The peripheral control CPU core 4140aa of the peripheral control MPU 4140a shown in FIG. 176 receives the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) in the command analysis processing of step S726 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. Based on the rotation light motor drive data for outputting drive signals to the left rotation lamp motor 245, the right rotation lamp motor 265, and the central rotation lamp motor 285 of the top lamp illumination unit 200, and the vibrating body of the main button 371 From vibration body drive data for outputting a drive signal to 371c and door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to various color LEDs provided on the door side Constructed door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT (having a size of 14 bytes) Create, shown in FIG. 176, via a bus 4140Ah, set the door decoration drive substrate side transmits data area 4140abb near control-RAM4140ab. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa determines the door decoration drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac (this door decoration drive board serial I / O port is the peripheral control serial number shown in FIG. 176). Of the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT stored in the head address of the door decoration drive board side transmission data area 4140abb. The first 1 byte is transferred to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for door decoration drive board via the bus 4140ah and written. As a result, the door decoration drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer to the transmission register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. Start transmitting data bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac is triggered by a transmission interrupt request for the door I / O port serial I / O port (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer for the door I / O port serial I / O port). 1 byte data written to the transfer register is transferred to the transmission register, and the transmission buffer becomes empty because the 1 byte data disappears.), The peripheral control CPU core 4140aa is using the bus 4140ah. If not, the remaining 13 bytes of door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT stored in the door decoration drive board side transmission data area 4140abb are sent byte by byte via the bus 4140ah to the serial I / O for the door decoration drive board. Serial I / O port for door decoration drive board by transferring to port transmission buffer and writing The controller transfers the written data of the transmission buffer to the transmission register, and starts transmitting 1-byte data of the transmission register bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. Continuous transmission is performed through the serial I / O port for the drive board. The door decoration drive board 192 can control electric drive sources such as the left rotation lamp motor 245, the right rotation lamp motor 265, the central rotation lamp motor 285, and the vibrating body 371c. The decoration board 126L, the glass decoration relay board 454, the left top lamp board 206L, the right top lamp board 206R, and the right side decoration board 126R are turned on and blinking on the electrical decorations such as various color LEDs provided on the door frame 5. In addition, by controlling gradation lighting, it is possible to achieve a variety of effects using electrical drive sources and decorations, providing players with gorgeous and attractive effects such as reach effects and jackpot effects. ing.

  Subsequent to step S760, liquid crystal serial command control processing is performed (step S762). In the liquid crystal serial command control process, the detailed description thereof will be described later, but the control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is output to the liquid crystal control unit 4150. As described above, the display command is stored in the peripheral control unit transmission ring buffer provided in the peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a extracts the display command from the peripheral control unit transmission ring buffer and extracts the liquid crystal control unit. The serial I / O port for the liquid crystal (this serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit is one of the peripheral control serial I / O ports 4140ae shown in FIG. 176) to the liquid crystal control unit 4150. Send.

  On the other hand, when the test mode flag TM-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S754, that is, when the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is a test command, or following step S762, The value 1 is added to the value of the 2 ms update counter C (increment. Step S764). The 2 ms update counter C is a counter that counts the number of times that the peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process has been performed. A value 1 of the 2 ms update counter C corresponds to a time of 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S764, it is determined whether or not the 2 ms update counter C has a value of 8, that is, 16 ms (= 2 ms update counter C × 2 ms) (step S766). If it is 16 ms in step S766, the value 1 is set to the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG (step S768). At this time, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms update counter C.

  Subsequent to step S768, whether or not the 16ms processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, the peripheral control unit 16ms steady processing of steps S710 to S740 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 198 is performed. It is determined whether or not (step S770).

  When the 16 ms processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S770, that is, when the peripheral control unit 16ms steady processing is not performed, the work area is backed up (step S772), and this routine is terminated. This backup of the work area is a copy of the information processed in the peripheral control unit 16 ms steady process of steps S710 to S740 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 198 on the work area provided in the peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab Copy to area.

  On the other hand, when the 2 ms elapsed flag STB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S750, that is, 2 ms has not elapsed, 16 ms has not elapsed in step S766, or the peripheral control unit 16 ms steady processing in step S770. If no information is set, the routine is terminated as it is.

[12-1-3. Peripheral control unit base timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit base timer interrupt process will be described. This peripheral control unit base timer interrupt process is repeated every 130.227 μs as the base clock. When the peripheral control unit base timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 adds 1 to the value of the base update counter BC (increment, as shown in FIG. 200, step S780). The base update counter BC is a counter that counts the number of times that the peripheral control unit base timer interrupt process is performed, and a value 1 of the base update counter BC corresponds to a time of 130.227 μs that is a base clock.

  Subsequent to step S780, it is determined whether or not the base update counter BC has a value of 16, that is, 2 ms (base update counter BC × 130.227 μs) (step S782). If it is not 2 ms in step S782, this routine is ended. On the other hand, if it is 2 ms in step S782, a value 1 is set to the 2 ms elapsed flag STB-FLG (step S784), and this routine is ended. In the process of step S782, a value 0 is set in the base update counter BC. As described above, the 2 ms elapsed flag STB-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms, and is set to a value of 0 when 2 ms have elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed.

[12-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process will be described. When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 starts receiving a command from the main control board 4100 (hereinafter referred to as “WR signal”) as shown in FIG. And a signal for selecting various boards from the main control board 4100 (hereinafter referred to as “SEL signal”) are determined to be 1 (step S790). The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first sets the SEL signal corresponding to the peripheral control board 4139 to the value 1 and the WR signal to the value 1, and transmits a command to the peripheral control board 4139.

  This command is composed of 4 nibbles per packet. This “nibble” means 4 bits, which is 8 bits (1 byte) in 2 nibbles, that is, 16 bits (2 bytes) in 4 nibbles. In the extraction of 1 nibble data, the WR signal rises from the value 0 to the value 1 (referred to as “up edge”) and is held for a predetermined time (for example, 20 microseconds (μs) to 50 μs). This is performed by falling from the value 1 to the value 0 (referred to as “down edge”).

  When both the WR signal and the SEL signal are 1 in step S790, that is, when the main control MPU 4100a transmits a command to the peripheral control board 4139, command reception processing is performed (step S792), and this routine is terminated. In this command reception process, the received one nibble command (one of four divided commands) is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer provided in the peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the top of the buffer are connected. Data is sequentially stored from the beginning of the buffer, and when it reaches the end of the buffer, it returns to the beginning. Remember.

  After storing in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer, the buffer write counter is incremented by “1”. This buffer write counter increments by one each time a command reception process is performed. Therefore, when 1 packet (4 nibbles) is stored, the buffer write counter has a value of 4.

  On the other hand, when both the SEL signal and the WR signal are 0 in step S790, that is, when the main control MPU 4100a does not transmit a command to the peripheral control board 4139, this routine is ended as it is. At the time of command transmission from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4139, as described above, a predetermined time (for example, 20 μs to 50 μs) from the up edge to the down edge of the WR signal, SEL signal, WR signal, data (4 Bit) is held constant, but the signal may be disturbed due to noise and the command may not be received normally. Therefore, as a countermeasure against this noise, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) (first time), the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4) again after a predetermined time elapses (for example, 1 μs). Bit). Then, it is determined whether or not it matches the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) received at the first time. If the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) received at the first time coincide with each other, it is determined in step S790 whether or not both the WR signal and the SEL signal are “1”. On the other hand, when it does not match the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) received at the first time, the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) are received again after a predetermined time has elapsed, and received at the first time. The determination is repeated until it matches the selected SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits).

[12-1-5. Peripheral controller command reception end interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception end interrupt process will be described. When the peripheral control unit command reception end interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 determines whether both the WR signal and the SEL signal are 0 as shown in FIG. Step S795). When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 completes the transmission of the command to the peripheral control board 4139, the main control board 4100 sets the WR signal to the value 0 and then sets the SEL signal to the value 0 (down edge).

  When both the WR signal and the SEL signal are 0 in step S795, that is, when the main control MPU 4100a completes command transmission to the peripheral control board 4139, command reception end processing is performed (step S797), and this routine is ended. . In this command reception end process, the value 0 is set in the buffer write counter added in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process shown in FIG. When the command is normally received, the buffer write counter has a value of 4 because one packet is 4 nibbles. Further, when reception of one packet cannot be performed, that is, when the buffer write counter is less than 4, the received command is discarded.

  On the other hand, when both the WR signal and the SEL signal are not 0 in step S795, that is, when the main control MPU 4100a has not completed transmission of a command to the peripheral control board 4139, this routine is ended as it is. As described above, as a noise countermeasure, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the SEL signal (first time), the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the SEL signal again after a predetermined time (for example, 1 μs), and receives the SEL signal received the first time. It is determined whether or not they match. If it matches the SEL signal received for the first time, it is determined in step S795 whether or not both the WR signal and the SEL signal are zero. On the other hand, when it does not coincide with the SEL signal received for the first time, the SEL signal is received again after a predetermined time, and the determination is repeated until it coincides with the SEL signal received for the first time.

[12-1-6. LCD serial command control processing]
Next, the liquid crystal serial command control process will be described. In this liquid crystal serial command control process, control data (display command) is output as serial data from the peripheral control board 4139 to the liquid crystal control unit 4150.

  When the liquid crystal serial command control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 determines whether there is a display command as shown in FIG. 203 (step S800). As described above, this display command indicates a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and is stored in the peripheral control unit transmission ring buffer provided in the peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab. In step S800, it is determined whether a display command is stored in the peripheral control unit transmission ring buffer.

  When there is a display command in step S800, that is, when a display command is stored in the peripheral control unit transmission ring buffer, it is determined whether or not the transmission flag TX-FLG is 1 (step S802). This transmission flag TX-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a display command is being transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 as the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER, and has a value of 1 when the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is being transmitted. When the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is not being transmitted, the value is set to 0.

  When the transmission flag TX-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S802, that is, when the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is not being transmitted, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is empty (step S804). . This determination determines whether or not the transmission buffer is empty based on the status indicating the state of the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit that transmits the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER to the liquid crystal control unit 4150. .

  If the transmission buffer is empty in step S804, a sum value is calculated (step S806). This sum value is determined based on a display command stored in the peripheral control unit transmission ring buffer. Here, the display command is composed of one or more basic commands composed of a status having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and a mode having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). ing. The status indicates the type of command, and the mode indicates a variation of production. The base command is various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4139 shown in FIGS. 181 and 182, and a status is assigned as the first byte and a mode is assigned as the second byte. In step S806, the information indicated by the status allocated as the first byte of the base command and the information indicated by the mode allocated as the second byte of the base command are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value) is calculated. . Then, a base command for transmission is created by adding the calculated sum value to the base command, that is, expanding and assigning it as the third byte of the base command. In other words, the base command status for transmission is assigned the status of the base command as the first byte, the mode of the base command is assigned as the second byte, and the status of the base command and the mode of the base command are regarded as numerical values as the third byte. A sum value is calculated to calculate the sum. As described above, the transmission base command has a storage capacity of 3 bytes and is handled as a packet composed of 3 bytes.

  Subsequent to step S806, the first byte is set in the transmission buffer (step S808). Here, by setting the status allocated as the first byte of the transmission base command in the transmission buffer, the status information is transmitted bit by bit from the serial input / output port to the liquid crystal control unit 4150. Thereby, transmission of control data (display command) as liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is started.

  Subsequent to step S808, the value 1 is set in the transmission counter TXC (step S810). The transmission counter TXC is a counter that indicates how many bytes of the transmission base command are set in the transmission buffer. When the first byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, the transmission counter TXC has a value of 1. When the second byte is set in the transmission buffer, the value is 2, and when the third byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, the value is 3. The transmission counter TXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Following step S810, a DSP-ACK signal waiting time is set (step S812). The DSP-ACK signal waiting time sets a period during which the DSP-ACK signal from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 can be input. In this embodiment, an asynchronous serial is adopted as a transmission method from the peripheral control unit 4140 to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, the bit rate is 19.2 kbps, the format of the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is 8-bit communication, LSB First, even parity added, 1 stop bit. As a result, since the transmission base command has a storage capacity of 3 bytes (24 bits) as described above, the DSP-ACK signal waiting time including the processing time is 1.6 milliseconds (ms ) Is set. Here, the DSP-ACK signal is a signal indicating that the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 has received the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER, and the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a displays the display that the peripheral control MPU 4140a has started to transmit in step S808. When a command is received within the DSP-ACK signal waiting time, a DSP-ACK signal indicating that fact is output to the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

  Subsequent to step S812, assuming that the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is being transmitted, the transmission flag TX-FLG is set to 1 (step S814), and this routine is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the transmission flag TX-FLG is 1 in step S802, that is, when the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is being transmitted, it is determined whether the DSP-ACK signal waiting time has timed out (step S816). ).

  When the DSP-ACK signal waiting time has timed out in step S816, that is, when the DSP-ACK signal exceeds the period during which the DSP-ACK signal can be input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, the display command stored in the peripheral control unit transmission ring buffer is configured. In step S804, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is empty. When the transmission buffer is empty, information indicated by the status allocated as the first byte of the base command in step S806. And the information indicated by the mode allocated as the second byte of the base command is regarded as a numerical value and the sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value is extended and allocated as the third byte of the base command. A base command for transmission is created. In step S810, it is determined that the first byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, the value 1 is set in the transmission counter TXC, the DSP-ACK signal waiting time is set in step S812, and the DSP-ACK signal is liquid crystal controlled. The period input from the unit 4150 is set, and in step S814, it is determined that the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is being transmitted, a value 1 is set in the transmission flag TX-FLG, and this routine is terminated. In this embodiment, the number of retransmissions is set to 4 times, and the same transmission base command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 up to 5 times.

  On the other hand, when the DSP-ACK signal waiting time has not timed out in step S816, that is, when the DSP-ACK signal is within the period during which the DSP-ACK signal can be input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, two bytes of the transmission base command created in step S806. Since the mode allocated as the eye and the sum value allocated as the third byte are transmitted in order, this routine is terminated. Note that the mode and the sum value are interrupted when the transmission buffer becomes empty. In this interrupt processing, the mode and the sum value are respectively set in the transmission buffer and each bit from the serial input / output port controls the liquid crystal control unit 4150. Sent to.

  On the other hand, when there is no display command in step S800, that is, when no display command is stored in the peripheral control unit transmission ring buffer, there is no display command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150. When the transmission buffer is not empty, the routine is terminated as it is to wait for the transmission buffer to become empty.

  As described above, the liquid crystal serial command control process is performed in step S762 in the peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process shown in FIG. That is, it is repeated every 2 ms. When the peripheral control MPU 4140a creates a transmission base command in step S806 in the liquid crystal serial command control process and sets the first byte in the transmission buffer, the peripheral control MPU 4140a starts transmission to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 bit by bit from the serial input / output port. In step S812, the DSP-ACK signal waiting time is set, and in step S814, the value “1” is set in the transmission flag TX-FLG assuming that the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is being transmitted. As a result, even if the liquid crystal serial command control process is started after the elapse of 2 ms, the value “1” is set in the transmission flag TX-FLG on the assumption that the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is being transmitted. Unless the waiting time is up, that is, within a period during which the DSP-ACK signal can be input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, the second byte and the third byte following the first byte of the transmission base command are not set in the transmission buffer. It is like that. When the transmission of the first byte set in the transmission buffer is completed and the transmission buffer is emptied, the second byte of the base command for transmission is interrupted. Then, transmission is started bit by bit from the serial input / output port to the liquid crystal control unit 4150. The third byte of the base command for transmission is set in the transmission buffer during the interruption process when the transmission of the second byte set in the transmission buffer is completed and the transmission buffer becomes empty. Transmission is started bit by bit from the serial I / O port to the liquid crystal controller 4150. As described above, in the liquid crystal serial command control process, when the base command for transmission is created in step S806 and the first byte is set in the transmission buffer, the second and third bytes of the base command for transmission are transmitted. It comes to be separated. This reduces the load of the peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process shown in FIG. 199 performed every 2 ms.

  When the display command is composed of a plurality of base commands, when the liquid crystal control unit 4150 receives all the base commands and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1400, The peripheral control MPU 4140a can transmit the base command one bit at a time from the serial input / output port to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 and transmit the sum value after completing the transmission of all the base commands. This sum value is a value obtained by regarding the transmitted base command as a numerical value and calculating the sum. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 receives all the base commands and the sum value, then regards these received base commands as numerical values, calculates a sum value that is the sum, By determining whether or not the received sum value matches, it is possible to confirm whether or not all received base commands, that is, display commands are correctly transmitted from the peripheral control unit 4140 to the liquid crystal control unit 4150. . If they do not match, the peripheral control MPU 4140a retransmits the same display command to the liquid crystal control unit 4150. However, after all the base commands have been transmitted, the sum value is transmitted, and the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a determines whether the display command is correctly transmitted from the peripheral control unit 4140 to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 by the above-described determination based on the sum value. For example, when the display command is large, that is, when the number of basic commands is large, one of the basic commands is a harness for electrically connecting the peripheral control board 4139 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 between the boards. If it happens to change due to the influence of noise that has entered the LCD, the other base command is correctly transmitted from the peripheral control unit 4140 to the liquid crystal control unit 4150. Judging that the peripheral control unit 4140 did not correctly transmit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 Becomes, peripheral control MPU4140a becomes possible to retransmit the same display command to the LCD control unit 4150. Then, it is possible to maintain the synchronization between the upper main control board 4100 and the lower peripheral control board 4139 liquid crystal control section 4150 by spending unnecessary transmission time between the peripheral control section 4140 and the liquid crystal control section 4150. Disappear. Therefore, in this embodiment, a sum value is calculated based on the base command, the calculated sum value is added to the base command to create a transmission base command, and the generated transmission base command is used as the liquid crystal control unit 4150. Is sending to. As a result, even if the transmission base command changes due to the influence of noise that has entered between the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150, the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the same transmission base command using the liquid crystal control. By retransmitting to the unit 4150, it is not necessary to retransmit all the base commands constituting the display command to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and useless transmission time is not consumed. Therefore, by adopting a method of creating a transmission base command for each base command and transmitting it to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, the upper level main control board 4100 and the lower level peripheral control board 4139 have the liquid crystal control unit 4150. Synchronization can be maintained.

[12-1-7. Transmit buffer empty interrupt processing]
Next, the transmission buffer empty interrupt process will be described. This transmission buffer empty interrupt process is started when the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit of the peripheral control MPU 4140a becomes empty.

  When the transmission buffer empty interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 determines whether or not the transmission counter TXC is a value 3 as shown in FIG. 204 (step S820). As described above, the transmission counter TXC is a counter that indicates how many bytes of the base command for transmission are set in the transmission buffer. When the first byte of the base command for transmission is set in the transmission buffer, the value 1 When the second byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, the value is 2, and when the third byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, the value is 3.

  When the transmission counter TXC is not 3 in step S820, that is, when the third byte of the transmission base command is not set in the transmission buffer, the next byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer (step S822), The value 1 is added to the value of the transmission counter TXC (increment, step S824), and this routine is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the transmission counter TXC is 3 in step S820, that is, when the third byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, this routine is terminated as it is.

  In step S808 in the liquid crystal serial command transmission control process shown in FIG. 203, as described above, the first byte of the base command for transmission is set in the transmission buffer, and the first byte of the base command for transmission is the liquid crystal. When one bit is outputted from the serial I / O port for the control unit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 and the transmission buffer becomes empty, this transmission buffer empty interrupt processing is started. Then, in step S822 in the transmission buffer empty interrupt process shown in FIG. 204, the second byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, and it is assumed that the second byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer in step S824. The value 1 is added to the value of the transmission counter TXC, the value of the transmission counter is set to the value 2, and this routine is terminated. The second byte of the base command for transmission set in the transmission buffer is output to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 bit by bit from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit. When the transmission buffer becomes empty, this transmission buffer empty interrupt is again generated. Processing begins. In step S822, the third byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, and it is determined that the third byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer. In step S824, the value 1 is added to the value of the transmission counter TXC. The counter value is set to 3 and this routine is terminated. The third byte of the transmission base command set in the transmission buffer is output bit by bit from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150. When the transmission buffer becomes empty, this transmission buffer empty interrupt is again generated. Processing begins. In this case, since the transmission counter TXC has already reached the value 3, this routine is terminated as it is in step S820. As described above, the liquid crystal serial command transmission control processing shown in FIG. 203 sets only the first byte of the transmission base command in the transmission buffer, and the transmission buffer empty interrupt processing performs the second and third bytes of the transmission base command. It is set in the transmission buffer.

[12-1-8. DSP-ACK signal interrupt processing]
Next, DSP-ACK signal interrupt processing will be described. This DSP-ACK signal interruption process is started when the DSP-ACK signal from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140.

  When the DSP-ACK signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 sets a value of 0 to the transmission flag TX-FLG as shown in FIG. 205 (step S830), and ends this routine. To do. The transmission flag TX-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the display command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 as the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER as described above, and the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is being transmitted. Is set to 1 when the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is not being transmitted.

  When the DSP-ACK signal is input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 has received the transmission base command created based on the base command constituting the display command in step S830. A value 0 is set in the transmitting flag TX-FLG. In addition to setting the transmission flag TX-FLG to 0 in step S830, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets the next command constituting the display command stored in the peripheral control unit transmission ring buffer provided in the peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab. If there is a command, the pointer is advanced to the address where the next command is stored so that the next command can be extracted.

[12-1-9. Starting opening prize abnormality notification determination process]
Next, the start opening prize abnormality notification determination process will be described. When the start opening prize abnormality notification determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 determines whether or not there is a start opening prize command as shown in FIG. 206 (step S840). In this determination, various commands from the main control board 4100 analyzed in the command analysis process in step S726 in the peripheral control unit 16 ms steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 198 are added to the other commands shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a start port winning command to be classified is included, and a first start port sensor 2011 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2001 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it corresponds. That is, in step S840, it is not determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second start port 2002 disposed below the first start port 2001 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered.

  When the start port winning command corresponding to the first start port sensor 2011 that detects the game ball that has entered the first start port 2001 in step S840 is included in the various commands received from the main control board 4100, the start port winning is determined. The value 1 is added to the value of the command reception counter PCC (increment. Step S842). The start port winning command reception counter PCC is a counter that counts the number of times the start port winning command corresponding to the first start port sensor 2011 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2001 is received. The value 0 is set as the initial value at the time of power-on, reset, etc.

  On the other hand, when the start port winning command corresponding to the first start port sensor 2011 that detects the game ball that has entered the first start port 2001 in step S840 is not included in the various commands received from the main control board 4100, or Subsequent to step S842, it is determined whether or not the counter initialization timer TMR has passed 15 minutes (step S844). The counter initialization timer TMR is a timer for initializing the start opening winning command reception counter PCC every predetermined period of 15 minutes. The time is counted in the timer update process included in the scheduler main process in step S732 in the 16 ms steady process. That is, the counter initialization timer TMR is timed every 16 ms, which is the peripheral control unit 16 ms steady process. In the timer update process, when the start of counting of the counter initialization timer TMR is set, the counting of the counter initialization timer TMR is started. The counter initialization timer TMR is initialized upon power recovery (power-on, reset, etc.), and the start of timing is set.

  When the counter initialization timer TMR has passed 15 minutes in step S844, the counter initialization timer TMR is initialized, and it is determined whether or not the start opening winning command reception counter PCC is equal to or greater than the upper limit value LMT (step S846). This upper limit value LMT is a value determined based on an upper limit value of the number of times that a game ball can enter the first start port 2001 per unit time (referred to as “unit start number”). In this embodiment, depending on the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, even if the player actually starts the game, considering that the unit start number is about 7 times / min at the maximum, 10 times / minute is set as an assumed value of the number of unit starts. Thereby, the upper limit value LMT becomes a value 150 (= 15 minutes × unit start number (10 times / minute)) when the counter initialization timer TMR has passed 15 minutes.

  When the start port winning command reception counter PCC is equal to or greater than the upper limit value LMT (value 150) in step S846 (when the starting port winning command reception counter PCC has reached the upper limit value LMT), a timer for measuring the notification time is used. A start of timing of a certain notification timer HTMR is set, and start opening prize abnormality notification processing is performed (step S848). Although detailed description will be given later in this start port winning abnormality notifying process, various LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are caused to emit light based on the timed notification timer HTMR, and the first start port 2001. The hall clerk is informed that the number of game balls entering the ball exceeds the estimated number of unit starts.

  On the other hand, when the start port winning command reception counter PCC is not equal to or greater than the upper limit value LMT (value 150) in step S846 (when the starting port winning command reception counter PCC has not reached the upper limit value LMT), or following step S848. , The value of the start opening winning command reception counter PCC is initialized by setting it to 0 (step S850), the counter initialization timer TMR is reset and initialized, the start of timing is set again (step S852), and this routine is executed. finish.

  On the other hand, if the counter initialization timer TMR has not passed 15 minutes in step S844, this routine is ended as it is.

  In this way, every time 15 minutes elapse, the start port winning command reception counter PCC can be initialized in step S850, so that the game ball entering the first start port 2001 in step S846 is assumed to have a unit start number. A determination of whether the value is exceeded can be made every 15 minutes. That is, it is possible to monitor every 15 minutes whether or not the game ball entering the first start port 2001 exceeds the assumed value of the unit start number. Thus, for example, by aiming at the timing when one game ball enters the first start port 2001, the radio wave transmitter emits radio waves from the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 toward the first start port 2001. One detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011 input to the control board 4100 is divided into a plurality of detection signals, and a plurality of game balls enter the first start port 2001 (referred to as “joint ball”). ) Even if a fraudulent act pretending to be performed is performed, the number of game balls that have entered the first starting port 2001 exceeds the assumed number of unit starting numbers according to the determination in step S846 performed every 15 minutes. When it is, the hall opening clerk abnormality notifying process of step S848 can be used to notify the hall clerk or the like that the cheating is being performed by causing various LEDs provided on the door frame 5 or the game board 4 to emit light. It has become the jar. For this reason, the player is forced to stop the act for fear of such an illegal act, and it is extremely difficult to continue. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the number of illegal game balls acquired by the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011 and the like in the switch input process in step S74 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. By performing two readings in total, that is, two readings that are compared over two times and two readings that are compared over the second to fourth times, avoiding false detection due to chattering or noise. Since the reliability of the detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011 or the like is enhanced, the first start port sensor that is input to the main control board 4100 by radiating radio waves toward the first start port 2001 with a radio wave transmitter. Even if one detection signal from 2011 is divided into a plurality of detection signals, the waveform of this divided detection signal and the actual situation when a game ball is connected to the first start port 2001 When the waveform of the detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011 does not match, the waveform of the divided detection signal is removed as a result of chattering, noise, etc. in this switch input process. It has become. In the switch input process, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011, the corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, as shown in FIG. The start opening prize command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4139 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interruption process. As described above, in order to avoid erroneous detection due to the effects of chattering, noise, and the like, the program incorporated in the switch input process also prevents an illegal act of radiating a radio wave from the radio wave transmitter toward the first start port 2001 Therefore, even if the cheating is performed, the detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011 and the corresponding start port winning command are always stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. It is not necessarily done. In other words, the number of start opening prize commands stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area does not necessarily increase according to the illegal act. However, when one detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011 is divided into a plurality of detection signals due to the fraud, some of the detection signals may pass through the switch input process. is there. In such a case, the detected detection signal is judged as a detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011, and the corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, on the peripheral control board 4139 side, the start opening prize command corresponding to the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 2011 in the start opening prize abnormality notification determination process shown in FIG. Based on the received number, it is determined every 15 minutes whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the first start port 2001 exceeds the assumed value of the unit start number. It is possible to monitor whether or not a game ball is illegally entered, that is, whether or not there is an illegal act.

  By the way, as a fraudulent act, in addition to the above-described one that radiates a radio wave toward the first start port 2001 with a radio wave transmitter, the area RA of the game area 605 shown in FIG. A magnet is applied to the surface of the glass unit 450 in an area where no approach is detected, and the game ball flowing down the game area 605 is received so that the game ball enters the warp passage 2318a shown in FIG. The game balls that flow down one after another are piled on the part and formed into a "grape-like" state with a certain size, and then the magnet is released to flow down along the "grape-like" gathered part. The game ball is guided to the warp passage 2318a shown in FIG. 108 and sent to the upper rolling surface 2334b shown in FIG. 109 via the ball guide member 2319. Magnet Goto such that increase the probability of ball entrance to an starting opening 2001, there are various. For this reason, manufacturers of pachinko machines can respond to known fraudulent activities with mechanisms, electrical circuits, programs, etc., but prevent unknown fraudulent acts that exceed the manufacturer's assumptions. It is difficult to build. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 2001 based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 2011, the start that was originally prepared for notifying mainly by voice. By using a mouth winning command and a program on the main control board 4100 side originally incorporated in the switch input processing in order to avoid erroneous detection due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc., it is called a starting mouth winning abnormality notification determination processing. In the program on the peripheral control board 4139 side, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the first starting port 2001 exceeds the assumed value of the unit starting number every 15 minutes, so that unknown fraud Has become a prevention against. Although an illegal game ball is acquired by a player due to an unknown fraud, as described above, the presence or absence of fraudulent behavior is repeatedly monitored every 15 minutes by a program called start opening prize abnormality notification determination processing on the peripheral control board 4139 side. However, if there is an illegal act, various LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are made to emit light to notify the store clerk of the hall. Therefore, it is necessary to stop the unknown fraud, and the unknown fraud cannot be repeated. Therefore, even if an unknown illegal act is performed, the number of illegal game balls acquired by the player can be suppressed.

  As described above, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in the game panel 600, but a game ball is accidentally caught between the obstacle nails and the obstacle nails, and one after another on the game balls. There are cases where a game ball is formed in a grape shape on the game ball. Depending on the place where such a lump is formed, there may be a route for guiding the game ball to the first starting port 2001. Even if the game is continued in such a state, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the number of game balls that have entered the first start port 2001 exceeds the assumed unit start number, Since various LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are caused to emit light and notify the store clerk or the like of the hall, the player has to stop the act. Therefore, even if a path for guiding the game ball to the first starting port 2001 is formed using the block of game balls in a grape shape, the number of game balls acquired by the player through this path can be suppressed. .

[12-1-10. Starting entry prize abnormality notification process]
Next, the start opening prize abnormality notification process will be described. When the start opening prize abnormality notification process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 determines whether or not the notification timer HTMR has passed 5 minutes as shown in FIG. 207 (step S860). This notification timer HTMR is a timer for measuring the notification time, and is counted in the timer update process included in the scheduler main process in step S732 in the peripheral control unit 16ms steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. ing. That is, the notification timer HTMR is timed every 16 ms, which is the peripheral control unit 16 ms steady process. In the timer update process, when the time measurement start of the notification timer HTMR is set, the time measurement of the notification timer HTMR is started. The notification timer HTMR is initialized when power is restored (when power is turned on, reset, etc.).

  When the notification timer HTMR has not passed 5 minutes in step S860, the light emitting mode (for example, the mode of emitting red light) is set to turn on all the various LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 (step S862). This routine ends.

  On the other hand, when the notification timer HTMR has passed 5 minutes in step S860, the various lights provided in the door frame 5 and the game board 4 that are all lit in step S862 are returned to the light emission mode in the gaming state, and the notification timer HTMR Is initialized by resetting (step S864), and this routine is terminated.

  In step S862, the various LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are all lit, so that the presence of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is fully lit is made more conspicuous than the other pachinko gaming machines installed in the hall. Can be easily noticed by shop assistants. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is fully lit can be found at an early stage after the various LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 start to be fully lit. Tell the hall clerk, etc. that the number of game balls to be played exceeds the assumed value of the number of unit starts (in this embodiment, 10 times / minute), that is, that fraudulent acts are or are likely be able to.

  In the present embodiment, a one-step notification mode is employed in which all the LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are all lit in step S862. If a multi-step notification mode is adopted in which the notification mode is gradually escalated, when the player conducts cheating and moves from the initial stage to the notification mode at a certain stage, the player If the fraudulent behavior is continued and a transition is made from the next stage to a full-scale notification mode, the notification mode becomes a mere “notification alarm” for the player. As described above, when a multi-stage notification mode is adopted, a player is informed that it is difficult for a store clerk or the like to detect fraudulent activity from the initial stage to the notification mode at a certain stage among the multi-level notification modes. It may be reminiscent and is not preferable.

[12-2. Various control processes of the LCD controller]
Next, various processes of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 that receives control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4140a) will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the liquid crystal control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the drawing control process and the liquid crystal control unit command reception interrupt process. FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing an example of the liquid crystal control unit power-on process, FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing an example of the drawing control process, and FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing an example of the liquid crystal control unit command reception interrupt process. FIG. 211 is a timing chart showing transmission and reception confirmation of liquid crystal serial data.

[12-2-1. LCD controller power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 performs a process for turning on the liquid crystal control unit as shown in FIG. When the liquid crystal control unit power-on process is started, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a performs a boot process (step S1000). In this boot process, various programs stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b are copied to a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “liquid crystal control built-in RAM”) built in the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a reads and executes various programs from the liquid crystal control built-in RAM as necessary. In this embodiment, the schedule data is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b without being copied due to the limitation of the capacity of the liquid crystal control built-in RAM. However, if there is room in the liquid crystal control built-in RAM, the schedule data is also copied. Also good.

  Subsequent to step S1000, SIO initial setting processing is performed (step S1002). In this SIO initial setting process, serial input / output built in the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is initialized, and control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 from the peripheral control unit 4140 is displayed as the liquid crystal serial data DSP. -Set permission for command interrupt processing received as SER. As a result, when the serial input / output reception buffer incorporated in the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives the display command, it notifies the CPU core, which is the central processing unit incorporated in the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, that an interrupt has been received.

  Subsequent to step S1002, transfer IC initial setting processing is performed (step S1004). In this transfer IC initial setting process, a transfer IC (not shown) mounted on the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is initialized. This transfer IC transfers the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed and copies it.

  Subsequent to step S1004, sprite data resident area transfer start processing is performed (step S1006). In the sprite data resident area transfer start processing, various setting values such as a transfer source address, a transfer destination address, and the number of transfer bytes are written and set in a register group of the transfer IC, and a sprite data transfer start signal is output to the transfer IC. When this sprite data transfer start signal is input, the transfer IC starts transferring sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the resident area of the character RAM 4150e based on various setting values written in the register group. When the transfer IC performs the sprite data resident area transfer start process, the transfer IC is stored in the character ROM 4150d independently of the control by the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, that is, based on various setting values written in the register group. Transfer of sprite data to the resident area of the character RAM 4150e is started. Specifically, for example, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a sends a transfer source address and a transfer destination address to the register group of the transfer IC in order to notify that the power is being restored first, such as when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. Then, various setting values such as the number of transfer bytes are written and set, and a sprite data transfer start signal is output to the transfer IC. The transfer IC transfers and copies the sprite data with the characters “power is being restored” to the resident area of the character RAM 4150e. As a result, the VDP 4150c extracts the sprite data “power is being restored” (including information to be drawn at a predetermined position of the liquid crystal display device 1400) from the resident area of the character RAM 4150e, and the extracted sprite data is extracted. Drawing data is generated by expanding it into a bitmap on a canvas that is a virtual screen. Thereafter, when this liquid crystal power-on process is started on the liquid crystal display device 1400, characters “power is being restored” are first drawn. While the character “recovering power” is being drawn, sprite data for unexpected drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 such as background sprite data and sprite data such as “big hit” characters. Are continuously transferred to the resident area of the character RAM 4150e. In this embodiment, since the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is extremely large, it takes about 10 from the start of transfer of the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the resident area of the character RAM 4150e until the transfer is completed. It takes seconds (s).

  Subsequent to step S1006, port setting processing is performed (step S1008). In this port setting process, various input / output ports built in the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a are set. Specifically, the input / output direction of various input / output ports is set.

  Subsequent to step S1008, VDP initial setting processing is performed (step S1010). In this VDP initial setting process, the VDP 4150c is initialized. Specifically, of the drawing condition setting data, data related to the environment setting of VDP 4150c is written into the VDP register of VDP 4150c. This drawing condition setting data includes data for setting the size of the canvas, which is a virtual screen, data for cutting out a portion of the canvas into a window shape (rectangular area) and displaying it on the screen, and placing grouped sprites on the layer Data for setting the composite screen, data for setting the size of one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 from the line buffer, data for setting the resolution, and the like. Here, data for setting the size of the canvas, which is a virtual screen, in the VDP register of the VDP 4150c, data for cutting out a part of the canvas into a window shape (rectangular area) and displaying it on the screen Then, data for setting the size of one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and data for setting the resolution are written from the line buffer. The VDP 4150c completes preparation for output of the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG by this VDP initial setting process.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the non-interrupt-side routine process is repeatedly performed (step S1012). In this non-interrupt-side steady process, it is determined whether or not to display a sprite that does not affect the game result displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  Various other types of pachinko gaming machines are installed in the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. For this reason, there is a possibility that an instantaneous stop in which the power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is temporarily stopped may occur depending on the power situation of the hall. If a momentary power failure occurs while the player is playing a game with the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 performs the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit in FIG. 198, and the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 performs the power-on process of the liquid crystal control unit shown in FIG.

  The main control MPU 4100a is a process that waits until the boot process in step S1000 in the liquid crystal control unit power-on process is completed in the wait timer 2 in step S26 in the main control-side power-on process. After the interrupt permission is set in step S46 in the power-on process, the game is progressed in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 186 every 4 ms. The peripheral control MPU 4140a performs a process of initializing itself in a very short time of microsecond (μs) order in the initial setting process of step S700 in the peripheral control unit power-on process, and after setting the interrupt permission, FIG. Various commands from the main control board 4100 can be received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing shown, and the presentation is progressed by the peripheral control unit 2 ms steady processing shown in FIG. 199 every 2 ms. Yes. Control data (display command) can be output to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 by the liquid crystal serial command control process in step S762 in the peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a performs the boot process of step S1000 in the process when the liquid crystal control unit is turned on, and then performs the SIO initial installation process of step S1002. In the SIO initial setting process, as described above, control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 from the peripheral control unit 4140 can be received as the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER. When the transfer IC performs the sprite data resident area transfer start process by the SIO initial installation process in step S1002, followed by the transfer IC initial setting process in step S1003 and the sprite data resident area transfer start process in step S1006, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a Without passing through the control, that is, independently, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is started to be transferred to the resident area of the character RAM 4150e based on the set values written in the various registers.

  As described above, even if a momentary power failure occurs, at the time of power recovery, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a performs the SIO initial setting process in step S1002 in the process following the boot process in step S1000 in the liquid crystal control unit power-on process. Therefore, the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER from the peripheral control unit 4140 can be received without missing. In addition, when the setting value is written to the various register groups of the register group by the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the transfer IC writes the setting values to the various registers independently of the control by the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a based on the setting value. Based on the set value, transfer of sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the character RAM 4150e is started. Therefore, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a performs the port setting process of step S1008 in the power-on process of the liquid crystal control unit without waiting for the completion of the transfer after the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred to the character RAM 4150e. Subsequently, the VDP initial setting process in step S1010 can be performed promptly. Therefore, even if a momentary power failure occurs, the game can be resumed promptly upon power recovery.

[12-2-2. Drawing control processing]
Next, the drawing control process will be described. This drawing control process is performed as an interrupt process when the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG from the VDP 4150c shown in FIG. 173 is stopped every 16 ms, and is repeatedly performed every 16 ms.

  When the drawing control process is started, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 performs multiple interrupt permission setting as shown in FIG. 209 (step S1020). In this multiple interrupt permission setting, various interrupt processes such as an interrupt by the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG from the VDP 4150c shown in FIG. 173 and an interrupt when receiving control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 are enabled. Set. If the settings of these various interrupt processes change from valid to invalid due to the influence of noise, for example, there is a possibility that various interrupt processes cannot be performed, and the game must be interrupted. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the setting for permitting multiple interrupts is made in the interrupt process called the drawing control process, that is, every 16 ms.

  Subsequent to step S1020, noise cancellation determination processing is performed (step S1022). In this noise cancellation determination process, the influence of noise at a terminal to which the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG from the VDP 4150c is input is determined. Specifically, the signal input to the terminal is sampled (referred to as “terminal level”), and whether or not the noise removal time is exceeded is determined.

  Following step S1022, it is determined whether the terminal level is normal (step S1024). This determination is made based on the terminal level in step S1022. Specifically, when the terminal level exceeds the noise elimination time, that is, when the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG input to the terminal is a signal that is not affected by noise, the terminal level is determined to be normal. When the removal time has not been exceeded, that is, when the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG input to the terminal is a signal affected by noise, it is determined as abnormal.

  If the terminal level is abnormal in step S1024, that is, if the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG input to the terminal is a signal affected by noise, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the terminal level is normal in step S1024, that is, when the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG input to the terminal is not affected by noise, port setting processing is performed (step S1026). In this port setting process, the same process as the port setting process in step S1008 in the liquid crystal control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 208 is performed to set various input / output ports built in the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a.

  Subsequent to step S1026, VDP initial setting processing is performed (step S1028). In this VDP initial setting process, the same process as the VDP initial setting process in step S1010 in the liquid crystal control unit power-on process is performed, and data related to the environment setting of the VDP 4150c is stored in the VDP register of the VDP 4150c on the virtual screen. Data for setting the size of a certain canvas CV, data for cutting a part of the canvas into a window shape (rectangular area) and displaying it on the screen, and one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 from the line buffer Write the data to set the size of the minute and the data to set the resolution. That is, each data is overwritten.

  Subsequent to step S1028, command analysis processing is performed (step S1030). In this command analysis process, control data (display command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 shown in FIG. 173 is received in a liquid crystal control unit command reception interrupt process described later, and the received display command is analyzed. Do.

  Subsequent to step S1030, a drawing condition setting data setting process is performed (step S1032). In this drawing condition setting data setting process, schedule data corresponding to the display command analyzed in step S1030 is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b shown in FIG. 173, and the first screen data is extracted from the extracted schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b. Of the extracted first screen data, the drawing condition setting data is output to the VDP register of the VDP 4150c, or when the schedule data is in progress, the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data is 1 The next screen data is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, and the drawing condition setting data among the extracted screen data is output to the VDP register of the VDP 4150c. The drawing condition setting data includes data for setting the size of the canvas CV that is a virtual screen, data for cutting a part of the canvas CV into a window shape (rectangular area) and displaying it on the screen, and grouped sprites as layers. It is composed of data for setting the composition screen by arranging, data for setting the size of one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 from the line buffer, data for setting the resolution, and the like.

  Subsequent to step S1032, a sprite setting data setting process is performed (step S1034). In this sprite setting data setting process, the schedule data corresponding to the display command analyzed in step S1030 is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, the first screen data is extracted from the extracted schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, and the extracted first data Among the screen data, the sprite setting data is output to the sprite register of the VDP4150c, or when the schedule data is in progress, the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data is advanced by one and the next screen data Is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, and the sprite setting data out of the extracted screen data is output to the sprite register of the VDP 4150c. The sprite setting data is composed of data to be displayed on the screen as a sprite by pasting a plurality of characters, data for setting the sprite drawing color, data for setting the drawing position of the sprite, data for grouping a plurality of sprites, and the like. .

  The output to the VDP 4150c is generated by the drawing condition setting data setting process in step S1032 and the sprite setting data setting process in step S1034 to generate drawing data expanded in the bitmap format on the canvas CV which is a virtual screen. Data is drawn in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  Subsequent to step S1034, sprite optimization processing is performed (step S1036), and this routine is terminated. In this sprite optimization process, sprites that are out of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 are deleted from the drawing data developed in the bitmap format on the canvas CV. As a result, unnecessary sprites are eliminated from the VDP 4150c, so that the arithmetic processing capability of the VDP 4150c can be improved.

[12-2-3. LCD controller command reception interrupt processing]
Next, liquid crystal control unit command reception interrupt processing will be described. When the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER from the peripheral control board 4139 starts to be transmitted, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 receives the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER as a trigger, and the serial input / output port built in the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. Then, 1 byte (8 bits) of information is taken into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and this liquid crystal control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. As described above, the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is a base command for transmission created based on the base command constituting the display command, and the status of the base command is assigned as the first byte of the base command for transmission. The base command mode is assigned as the second byte of the base command for transmission, and the sum value is calculated as the third byte of the base command for transmission, regarding the status of the base command and the mode of the base command as numerical values. It is.

  When the liquid crystal control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out as shown in FIG. 210 (step S1100). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER transmitted from the peripheral control board 4139.

  When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1100, that is, within the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER transmitted from the peripheral control board 4139. Then, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial input / output port built in the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is fetched (step S1102), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter RXC (increment, step S1104). The reception counter RXC is a counter that indicates the number of times it has been extracted from the reception buffer. If the status that is the first byte of the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER, that is, the base command for transmission, is extracted from the reception buffer from the peripheral control board 4139, the value is 1. When the mode that is the second byte of the transmission base command is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value that is the third byte of the transmission base command is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 3. The reception counter RXC is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1104, the DSP-ACK signal is set from ON to OFF (step S1106). By setting the DSP-ACK signal from ON to OFF, the peripheral control board 4139 is informed that reception of the status that is the first byte of the base command for transmission has started.

  Subsequent to step S1106, it is determined whether or not the reception counter RXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the transmission base command has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1108). In this determination, the status that is the first byte of the base command for transmission, the mode that is the second byte of the base command for transmission, and the sum value that is the third byte of the base command for transmission are sequentially received from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter RXC is not 3 in step S1108, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the base command for transmission, the mode that is still the second byte of the base command for transmission, and the third byte of the base command for transmission When the sum values are not sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1110), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1110, the mode that is the second byte of the transmission base command or the period during which the sum value that is the third byte of the transmission base command can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter RXC is 3 in step S1108, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the transmission base command, the mode that is the second byte of the transmission base command, and the transmission base command 3 When the sum value which is the byte is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter RXC (step S1112), and the sum value is calculated (step S1114). In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the base command for transmission and the mode that is the second byte of the base command for transmission that have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1102 are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1114, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the transmission base command already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1102, matches the sum value calculated in step S1114 (step S1114). S1116). The sum value that is the third byte of the base command for transmission already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1102 is calculated in step S806 in the liquid crystal serial command control process shown in FIG. 203 as described above. It should match the sum value calculated in S1116. However, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with gaming balls from the pachinko island equipment, and when the gaming balls are rubbed against each other and charged, they generate electrostatic discharge and generate noise. 1 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 4140 side creates a transmission base command based on the base command that constitutes the display command. As described above, in this basic command for transmission, the status of the basic command is allocated as the first byte of the basic command for transmission, and the mode of the basic command is allocated as the second byte of the basic command for transmission. As the third byte, the sum value is calculated by regarding the status of the base command and the mode of the base command as numerical values and calculating the sum. On the other hand, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received transmission base command and the mode assigned as the second byte as numerical values, and calculates the sum (sum value). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the received transmission base command. As a result, it is determined whether or not the transmission base command has been changed to a transmission base command different from the normal due to the influence of noise between the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150.

  In step S1116, if the sum value that is the third byte of the base command for transmission already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1102 matches the sum value calculated in step S1114, the received base command for transmission is determined. The information is stored in the liquid crystal control unit reception ring buffer (step S1118). This “liquid crystal control unit reception ring buffer” is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. The data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when it reaches the end of the buffer, it returns to the beginning. Remember. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a stores in the liquid crystal control unit reception ring buffer in step S1118, the status allocated as the first byte of the received transmission base command and the mode allocated as the second byte are displayed. It is stored in association with each other, and the thumb value assigned as the third byte is discarded.

  Subsequent to step S1118, the DSP-ACK signal is set from OFF to ON (step S1120), and this routine is terminated. By setting this DSP-ACK signal from OFF to ON, the peripheral control indicates that reception of the status that is the first byte of the basic command for transmission, the mode that is the second byte, and the sum value that is the third byte is completed. This is transmitted to the substrate 4139.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1100, that is, it exceeds the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER transmitted from the peripheral control board 4139. If the sum value that is the third byte of the base command for transmission already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1102 and the sum value calculated in step S1114 do not match at step S1116, End the routine. As a result, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a cannot set the DSP-ACK signal from OFF to ON. As described above, in step S816 in the liquid crystal serial command control processing shown in FIG. It is determined that the time has expired, a transmission base command is created again from the same base command, and transmission of the first to third bytes is sequentially started.

  Next, transmission and reception confirmation of liquid crystal serial data will be described using the timing chart of FIG. In this embodiment, as described above, the asynchronous serial is adopted as the transmission method from the peripheral control unit 4140 to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, the bit rate is 19.2 kbps, and the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER format is used. 8-bit communication, LSB first, even parity addition, 1 stop bit.

  When the display command is stored in the peripheral control unit transmission ring buffer provided in the peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 creates a transmission base command based on the base command constituting the display command. Then, the status STTS assigned as the first byte of the created transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit of the peripheral control MPU 4140a (timing T0, the liquid crystal serial command shown in FIG. Step S808 in the control process). By setting the status allocated as the first byte of the base command for transmission in this transmission buffer, the serial input / output port sets the status to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 as the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER shown in FIG. 211 (a). Transmission starts (the transmission content is status STTS shown in FIG. 211 (c)).

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 receives the status assigned as the first byte of the transmission base command transmitted from the peripheral control unit 4140 in the reception buffer of the serial input / output port built in the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. When the capture is completed, the status allocated as the first byte of the transmission base command is captured from the reception buffer, and the DSP-ACK signal shown in FIG. 211 (b) is set from ON to OFF (timing T1, FIG. Step S1106 in the liquid crystal controller command reception interrupt process shown in 210).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4140a outputs the status allocated as the first byte of the base command for transmission to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 bit by bit from the liquid crystal control unit serial I / O port, and the liquid crystal control unit serial I When the transmission buffer of the / O port becomes empty, the mode allocated as the second byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer (timing T2, step S822 in the transmission buffer empty interrupt processing shown in FIG. 204). By setting the mode allocated as the second byte of the base command for transmission in this transmission buffer, the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER shown in FIG. Transmission starts (transmission contents are in the mode MODE shown in FIG. 211 (c)).

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a captures the mode assigned as the second byte of the transmission base command transmitted from the peripheral control unit 4140 in the reception buffer of the serial input / output port. The status allocated as the second byte of the trust group command is fetched. At this time, the DSP-ACK signal shown in FIG. 211 (b) remains OFF.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4140a outputs the mode allocated as the second byte of the transmission base command bit by bit from the liquid crystal control unit serial I / O port to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and the liquid crystal control unit serial I When the transmission buffer of the / O port becomes empty, the sum value allocated as the third byte of the base command for transmission is set in this transmission buffer (timing T3, step S822 in the transmission buffer empty interrupt processing shown in FIG. 204). . By setting the sum value allocated as the third byte of the base command for transmission in this transmission buffer, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 as the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER shown in FIG. 211 (a) bit by bit from the serial input / output port. (The transmission content is the sum value SUM shown in FIG. 211 (c)).

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a captures the sum value allocated as the third byte of the transmission base command transmitted from the peripheral control unit 4140 in the reception buffer of the serial input / output port built in the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, and captures this sum. Is completed, the sum value allocated as the third byte of the transmission base command is fetched from the reception buffer, the status already allocated from the reception buffer as the first byte of the transmission basic command, and the transmission base command The mode allocated as the 2nd byte is considered as a numerical value, and the sum (sum value) is calculated. The calculated sum value and the received reception buffer are allocated as the 3rd byte of the basic command for transmission. It is determined whether or not the sum value matches. If they match, the DSP-ACK signal shown in FIG. 211 (b) is set from OFF to ON (timing T4, step S1120 in the liquid crystal control unit command reception interrupt process shown in FIG. 210).

[13. Direction]
Next, an effect drawn in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 will be described. First, the pre-reading effect will be described, and then the TV effect by the TV frame type decorative body 3277 of the TV-type accessory 3271 will be described. The progress of various effects such as the pre-reading effect and the television effect drawn in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed according to various commands from the main control board 4100 (see FIG. The peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4139 controls based on the control command (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4139 displays the liquid crystal display. Controls drawing of the display area of the device 1400. This drawing is controlled in the drawing control process shown in FIG. FIG. 212 is a look-ahead effect showing an example of one variation drawn in the display area of the liquid crystal display device, FIG. 213 is an effect showing an example of a television effect, and FIG. 214 is an effect showing the continuation of FIG.

[13-1. Pre-reading production]
A prefetch effect rendered in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, a player sitting directly facing the pachinko gaming machine 1 is playing a game ball at the second start opening 2002 shown in FIG. An example of a pre-reading effect when the ball enters the ball will be described. Note that “1 variation” means that the second special symbol display unit 642 shown in FIG. 169 starts and stops the variation display of the special symbol and is rendered in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Also, it is done according to the time when the special symbols are displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 212 (a), when the second special symbol display 642 starts the variation display of the special symbol, the effect of one variation drawn in the display region of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed at the upper left of the display region. Is displayed as a decorative symbol 1400a, a decorative symbol 1400b at the center, and a decorative symbol 1400c at the upper right. The decorative symbols 1400a to 1400c are translucent enough to allow a background image to be visually recognized, the decorative symbol 1400a is from the upper left to the lower left of the display region, the decorative symbol 1400b is from the upper to the lower portion of the display region, and the decorative symbol 1400c is the display region. The display is variably displayed as if the reels are rotating from the upper right to the lower right. When the variation display of the decorative symbols 1400a to 1400c is started, the number of game balls that have not yet been used for the progress of the game (the number of held balls) that has entered the first start port 2001 shown in FIG. When the number is two, the operation reservation images 1400da and 1400db having an elliptical shape are drawn in the special symbol 1 operation reservation ball number drawing area 1400d on the lower left side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and at the second start port 2002, When the number of game balls that have not been used for the progress of the game (the number of reservations) is one, the special symbol 2 on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is drawn. An operation hold image 1400ea having an elliptical shape is drawn in the area 1400e.

  After that, if a game ball enters the second start port 2002 before the display of variation of the decorative symbols 1400a to 1400c stops, the variation ball is still being displayed, so that the game ball that has entered is used for the progress of the game. Since there are two holding balls, the number of holding balls is two, and as shown in FIG. 212 (b), the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number drawing area 1400e on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 has an elliptical shape. The operation hold image 1400eb is drawn on the right side of the operation hold image 1400ea. At this time, the type of prefetching effect in the prefetching effect type determination process based on the jackpot symbol random number in step S178 or the prefetching effect type determination process based on the reach determination random number in step S184 in the storage prefetching process shown in FIG. When the prefetching effect is determined in the prefetching effect determining process in step S188, as shown in FIG. 212 (c), the special symbol 2 action reserved ball drawing area on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is determined. The pre-reading effect is implemented by changing to an operation reservation image 1400eb ′ having a different star shape from the operation reservation image 1400eb drawn on 1400e. At this time, the music and sound effects output from the side speakers 121 and 121 and the lower speaker 391 shown in FIG. 2 are also changed. In this way, in this embodiment, as the reserved ball on which the pre-reading effect is performed is actually used for the progress of the game, as the reserved ball is digested one by one as it is used for the progress of the game, A sense of expectation that a big hit gaming state may occur can be gradually increased for the player.

  In this embodiment, in addition to a plurality of types of pre-reading effects that generate a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a plurality of types of pre-reading effects that do not generate a jackpot gaming state but expect the possibility Has been. In addition, since the “hit range” is followed by the “hit range” in the range of the big hit determination random number, the big hit determination random number is within the “reserve range” + “hit range” For example, as shown in FIG. 212 (c), the pre-reading effect that changes to the operation reservation image 1400eb ′ having a different star shape from the operation reservation image 1400eb drawn in the special symbol 2 operation reservation ball number drawing area 1400e is performed. It is like that. That is, the prefetch effect shown in FIG. 212 (c) is prefetched in the prefetch effect type determination process based on the jackpot symbol random number in step S178 in the storage prefetch process shown in FIG. 191, and then in the prefetch effect determination process in step S188. When the effect is determined, it may be performed, or when the big hit determination random number is within the preliminary range in the type determination process of the prefetch effect based on the reach determination random number in step S184, the prefetch effect determination in step S188 is performed. It is also implemented when a pre-reading effect is determined in the process. In other words, if such a pre-reading effect is implemented and no big hit gaming state occurs, the big hit determination random number is not in the “hit range” but in the “preliminary range” that follows it, so the big hit game It is possible to notify the player that the situation has been lost without causing a condition. Therefore, by implementing such a pre-reading effect, it is possible to make the player feel sorry for the pre-reading effect without being a big hit at a breath.

[13-2. TV production]
FIG. 213 and FIG. 213 show television effects by an image drawn in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the TV frame type decorative body 3277 of the television type accessory 3271 disposed in the lower right front of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Reference will be made to FIG. When a game ball enters the first start port 2001 or the second start port 2002 shown in FIG. 104 and this game ball is used for the progress of the game, as shown in FIG. 213 (a), the liquid crystal display device On the background image drawn on the entire display area 1400, a variable display of the decorative pattern 1400a is started in the upper left of the display area, the decorative pattern 1400b is in the center, and the decorative pattern 1400c is started in the upper right. The decorative symbols 1400a to 1400c are translucent enough to allow a background image to be visually recognized, the decorative symbol 1400a is from the upper left to the lower left of the display region, the decorative symbol 1400b is from the upper to the lower portion of the display region, and the decorative symbol 1400c is the display region. The display is variably displayed as if the reels are rotating from the upper right to the lower right. When the variation display of the decorative symbols 1400a to 1400c is started, the number of game balls that have not yet been used for the progress of the game (the number of held balls) that has entered the first start port 2001 shown in FIG. If there is an operation reservation image having an elliptical shape in the special symbol 1 operation reservation ball number drawing area 1400d on the lower left side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 as described above, the second start opening 2002 is entered. If there is a number of game balls (reserved number) of the game balls that have not been used for the progress of the game, the special game 2 operation reserved ball number drawing area 1400e on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is elliptical. An operation hold image having a shape is drawn.

  When the variable display of the decorative symbols 1400a to 1400c is started, as shown in FIG. 213 (b), the television frame type decorative body 3277 is operated from the standby position (original position) to the effect position (movable limit position). While appearing in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the color LED 3278a mounted on the light emitting substrate 3278 of the TV frame type decorative body 3277 emits light. At this time, the background image drawn on the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is divided into the first area REG0 and the second area REG1 along the boundary line BL. The boundary line BL is arranged along the TV frame type decorative body 3277, and it is difficult for a player who sits directly on the facing side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to visually recognize the boundary line BL.

  The first region REG0 is a region corresponding to the opening 3277a of the TV frame type decorative body 3277, and the background that was drawn before the TV frame type decorative body 3277 appeared in front of the display region of the liquid crystal display device 1400. An image with the same brightness as that of the image is drawn. In the first region REG0, an image in which a music box is placed on the table is drawn as a background image BK0, and a mouse character CH0 is drawn on the background image BK0. The mouse character CH0 is represented so as to make the presence of the mouse character CH0 appear larger by drawing the entire image from the upper side to the lower side of the first region REG0. Thus, the first region REG0 is drawn so that the mouse character CH0 is in a more prominent drawing mode compared to the background image BK0.

  The first region REG0 is a region that is slightly larger than the outer shape of the opening 3277a because the boundary line BL is arranged along the TV frame type decorative body 3277. The image drawn in the first region REG0 is a normal effect in which the decorative symbols 1400a to 1400c are simply displayed in a variably displayed manner on the background image shown in FIG. 213 (a) when this television effect is not executed. The probability that a jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player will occur in advance compared to (an effect in which the probability of occurrence of a jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player is an effect that is set low in advance and a low expectation effect). Among the development effects set high, that is, among the development effects whose expectations are set high in advance, this indicates which type of development effect is executed following the television effect. Here, it is suggested that the development effect called the battle effect is executed following the television effect by drawing the mouse character CH0. In the present embodiment, a plurality of things such as a rocket effect and a sky effect are prepared in addition to the battle effect as the development effect. A rocket is drawn in the first region REG0 as an indication of the rocket effect, and an elevator is drawn in the first region REG0 as an indication of the sky effect.

  The second area REG1 is a display area other than the first area REG0, and is compared with the background image that was drawn before the television frame-type decorative body 3277 appeared in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Thus, an image with extremely low brightness is drawn. Here, a gray image close to black is drawn in the second region REG1.

  Subsequently, the boundary line BL arranged along the TV frame type decorative body 3277 starts to move with an irregular line toward the left side, the upper left side, and the upper side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400. At the same time, the color LED 3278a mounted on the light emitting substrate 3278 of the TV frame type decorative body 3277 is turned off. In other words, the boundary line BL starts to move like an amoeba. As a result of the start of movement of the boundary line BL, an image drawn in the second region REG1 is located in the vicinity of the boundary line BL between the image drawn in the first region REG0 and the image drawn in the second region REG1. The drawing mode is cut by the image drawn in the first region REG0. Thereby, it is possible to perform a drawing mode in which the image drawn in the first area REG0 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is eroded toward the image drawn in the second area REG1. By such a drawing mode, the mouse character CH0 that should exist inside the TV frame type decorative body 3277 is changed from a small world inside the TV frame type decorative body 3277 to a large world outside the TV frame type decorative body 3277. Since it is possible to execute a powerful effect as if it pops out, it is possible to perform an effect with a powerful image expression in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and a novel effect with the TV frame-type decorative body 3277.

  As the boundary line BL moves toward the left side, the upper left side, and the upper side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the area of the first area REG0 increases, while the area of the second area REG1 decreases. In one area REG0, the cat character CH1 is drawn little by little in addition to the mouse character CH0. When the first region REG0 is drawn on the entire display region of the liquid crystal display device 1400, as shown in FIG. 214 (d), the mouse character CH0 and the cat character CH1 have a display mode in which they are stared with strict eyes. Thereafter, the production proceeds to a development production called battle production in which the mouse character CH0 and the cat character CH1 compete.

  In this way, the luminance of the image drawn in the first area REG0 corresponding to the opening 3277a of the TV frame type decorative body 3277 is drawn in the second area REG1 not corresponding to the opening 3277a of the TV frame type decorative body 3277. The image can be set higher than the brightness of the image, so that the player's line of sight can be directed to the image with high brightness, and the image with high brightness erodes toward the image with low brightness Can be expressed with emphasis.

  Further, in a state where the TV frame type decorative body 3277 is made to appear from the outside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 to the front of the display area, that is, the TV frame type decorative body 3277 is moved from the standby position (original position) to the effect position (movable limit). In the state of being operated to the position), the TV frame type decorative body 3277 surrounding the opening 3277a is used to display the TV frame from the image drawn in the first region REG0 of the liquid crystal display device 1400 viewed through the opening 3277a. The distance dimension to the mold decoration 3277 is longer than the actual distance dimension d in which the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the TV frame decoration 3277 are arranged as shown in FIG. Such a feeling of depth can be expressed.

  Further, in a state where the TV frame type decorative body 3277 is appearing from the outside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 to the front of the display area, that is, the TV frame type decorative body 3277 is moved from the standby position (original position) to the effect position (movable limit). In this state, the entire image of the mouse character CH0 is drawn from the upper side to the lower side of the first region REG0, so that the presence of the mouse character CH0 appears to be large. By viewing this mouse character CH0 through the opening 3277a of the TV frame-type decorative body 3277, it is possible to express a drawing mode in which the mouse character CH0 is enlarged.

  Furthermore, since the player can understand which of the plurality of development effects will be executed in the future by visually recognizing the image drawn in the first region REG0, the TV frame type decorative body It can be suggested to the player that the development effect is selected by the operation of the television frame type decorative body 3277 that 3277 appears from the outside of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 to the front of the display area. Further, since the development effect is set higher in advance than the normal production in which the development effect is not executed, the probability of occurrence of the big hit gaming state advantageous to the player is set. An expectation that a big hit gaming state may occur is generated, and it is possible to contribute to further enhancing the effect of the operation of the television frame type decorative body 3277.

  Since the luminance of the image drawn in the first region REG0 can be set higher than the luminance of the image drawn in the second region REG1, the player's line of sight is directed toward the high luminance image. In addition, a drawing mode in which an image with high luminance erodes toward an image with low luminance can be expressed with emphasis.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a general winning port 2101 that can receive a game ball that is launched by the ball striking device 650 and flows down the game area 605 that is partitioned into the game board 4, Receiving entrances such as a first start opening 2001, a second start opening 2002, and a big prize opening 2003 are arranged at predetermined positions in the game area 605.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a magnetic sensor 3345. The magnetic sensor 3345 has a rectangular box shape. When viewed from the front, the magnetic sensor 3345 has a rectangular detection box-like left side surface 3345a having a directivity that is highly sensitive in a direction perpendicular to the left side surface 3345a. In the rectangular box-shaped right side surface 3345b, which is the side surface opposite to the left side surface 3345a, a directivity having high sensitivity in the direction perpendicular to the right side surface 3345b can be detected. The magnetism in the two detection areas can be detected.

  As shown in FIG. 215, the magnetic sensor 3345 has four general winning ports 2101 provided in the side winning port member 2100 disposed in the lower gaming area 605 on the lower left side from the center in the horizontal direction of the gaming panel 600. A center accessory disposed at a substantially center of the game panel 600 (approximately the center of the game area 605) so as to be within the first inspection area having a directivity with high sensitivity in the direction perpendicular to the surface 3345a. 2300, the upper rolling surface 2334b of the rear shelf 2334, the lower rolling surface 2335a of the front shelf 2335, and the attacker unit 2000 arranged in the game area 605 below the center accessory 2300 is perpendicular to the right side surface 3345b of the rectangular box shape. The back side of the gaming panel 600 is positioned so as to be within the second inspection area having high directivity with high sensitivity. It is located at the upper right position of the sphere guide channel 3340 of the back box 3001 shown in 114.

  In the magnetic sensor 3345, a region RA indicated by a two-dot chain line from the lower left side of the center accessory 2300 to the lower side of the side prize opening member 2100 is a first inspection region, and the rear shelf in the center accessory 2300 A region RB indicated by a two-dot chain line extending from the upper side of the upper rolling surface 2334b of 2334 to the lower side of the attacker unit 2000 is a second inspection region.

  In the area RA, the magnetic sensor 3345 detects the magnets approaching the four general winning ports 2101 of the side winning port member 2100, thereby guiding the game balls flowing down the gaming area 605 to the general winning port 2101 with the magnets. It is possible to detect the magnetic goto to be sphered. In the region RB, magnets approaching the upper rolling surface 2334b, the lower rolling surface 2335a, the first starting port 2001, the second starting port 2002, and the big winning port 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 are detected. Accordingly, the game ball that flows down the game area 605 is taken in by the center warp passage forming member 2318, passes through the ball guide member 2319, and rolls on the upper rolling surface 2334b of the rear shelf 2334 or the lower rolling of the front shelf 2335. A game ball that rolls on the surface 2335a is guided to the chance guiding portion 2339a of the movable shelf 2339 by a magnet to enter the chance opening 2334a of the rear shelf 2334, and the game directly above the first start opening 2001 from the chance exit 2311a. It is possible to detect the magnets to be discharged to the area 605, and the game balls flowing down the game area 605 are magnetized. A magnet that is guided to the starting port 2001 to enter the ball can be detected, and the starting port solenoid 2015 is driven to expand the pair of movable pieces 2005 in the left-right direction to play a game to the second starting port 2002. When a ball can be received, the game ball flowing down the game area 605 can be guided to the second starting port 2002 with a magnet to detect a magnetic goto that allows a large amount of game balls to enter, When the solenoid 2016 is driven and the opening / closing member 2006 is rotated so as to incline forward to open the big winning opening 2003, the game ball flowing down the gaming area 605 is guided to the big winning opening 2003 with a magnet. It is possible to detect a magnet that allows a large amount of game balls to enter.

  As described above, in the region RA that is the first detection region of the magnetic sensor 3345, it is possible to detect the magnets approaching the four general winning ports 2101 of the side winning port member 2100, and the second detection of the magnetic sensor 3345. In the region RB, which is the region, the magnets approaching the upper rolling surface 2334b, the lower rolling surface 2335a of the center accessory 2300, the first starting port 2001, the second starting port 2002, and the big winning port 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 are detected. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to detect fraudulent acts caused by magnet goto.

  In addition, one of the wiring that electrically connects the magnetic sensor 3345 and the panel relay terminal plate 3367 and the wiring that electrically connects the panel relay terminal plate 3367 and the main control board 4100 is disconnected, When the magnetic sensor 3345 is disconnected, the magnetic sensor 3345 and the main control board 4100 are not electrically connected. Therefore, in the magnetic sensor input circuit 4100z of the main control board 4100, the voltage applied to the base of the transistor TR0 is The transistor TR0 is turned off by being pulled down to the ground level by the resistor R2 connected to the ground. When the transistor TR0 is OFF, no current flows from the collector of the transistor TR0 to the emitter of the transistor TR0. Therefore, the magnet goto detection signal whose logic is HI is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor R3 is the main control I / O port. It will be output to 4100b. That is, the ON signal from the magnetic sensor 3345 is input to the magnetic sensor input circuit 4100z when the wiring from the magnetic sensor 3345 to the main control board 4100 is not disconnected or disconnected normally. HI which is the same logic as the logic to be performed. In other words, the HI is the same logic as when the magnetism that can receive and guide the game ball flowing down the game area 605 is detected. Therefore, in order that the person who performs the magnet goto does not detect the act, the wiring for electrically connecting the magnetic sensor 3345 and the panel relay terminal plate 3367 and the panel relay terminal plate 3367 and the main control board 4100 are electrically connected. Even if any of the wirings to be disconnected is disconnected or removed, the logic sensor LOW input to the magnetic sensor input circuit 4100z of the main control board 4100 is maintained. Therefore, such an illegal act can be detected reliably.

[14. Another example]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be implemented in various modes as long as it belongs to the technical scope of the present invention.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the magnet approaching the general winning port 2101, the first starting port 2001, the second starting port 2002, the big winning port 2003, and the like is detected by the magnetic sensor 3345, but the gate 2201 and the warp path You may make it arrange | position the magnetic sensor 3345 on the back surface side of the game board 4 so that the magnet approaching receiving ports, such as a warp entrance of 2318a, can be detected. In this way, a pair of movable pieces 2005 are expanded in the left-right direction by receiving a game ball flowing down the game area 605 by applying a magnet to the surface of the glass unit 450 and guiding it through the gate 2201. It is possible to prevent an increase in the probability that a game ball can be received at the second starting port 2002, and the ball is guided to the warp passage 2318a to be sent to the upper rolling surface 2334b via the ball guide member 2319. It is also possible to prevent the probability of entering the first starting port 2001 from being increased.

  In the embodiment described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described as an example. However, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine other than a pachinko gaming machine, such as a slot machine or The present invention can also be applied to a fusion game machine in which a pachinko game machine and a slot machine are fused (one that uses a game ball to play a slot game).

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine (pachinko machine), 2 ... Outer frame, 3 ... Main body frame, 4 ... Game board, 5 ... Door frame, 605 ... Game area, 1400 ... Liquid crystal display device, 2001 ... First start port, 2002 ... second start port, 3000 ... back unit, 3277 ... TV frame type decorative body, 3277a ... opening, 3279 ... drive motor, 3280 ... first gear, 3281 ... second gear, 3345 ... magnetic sensor (magnetic detection means) 3345a ... left side (one detection side), 3345b ... right side (other detection side), 4100 ... main control board, 4139 ... peripheral control board, 4140 ... peripheral control part, 4150 ... liquid crystal control part.

Claims (1)

A pachinko gaming machine in which a plurality of receiving ports that can receive game balls that are launched by a hitting ball launching device and flow down a game area defined by a game board are arranged at predetermined positions in the game area,
A magnet having a rectangular box shape and detecting magnetism in a first detection region having a directivity that is more sensitive in the vertical direction than the horizontal direction with respect to one detection side surface of the rectangular box shape; Magnetic detection means for detecting magnetism in the second detection region having a directivity that is more sensitive in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction with respect to the other detection side opposite to the detection side;
The magnetic detection means is arranged such that a first specific reception port of the plurality of reception ports is located within the first detection region, and the first specific reception port of the plurality of reception ports. The second specific receiving port disposed at a position different from the position where the entrance is disposed is disposed at a predetermined position on the back side of the game board so that the second specific receiving port is located within the second detection region, A pachinko gaming machine that detects a magnet approaching one specific receiving port and a magnet approaching the second specific receiving port.